f Capilano College calendar O n the cover, members of the Capilano College community: i Mahmoud Ahamed, Student \ Adrienne Argent, Day Care Staff Phil Armer, Capilano College Foundation |olene Bordewick, Disability Support Services Ian Cray, Eldercollege Froozan Gul, Student Craig Harris, Student David |ones, Counselling Jeri Krogseth, Advising \ Nicole Lawson, Student Penny LeCouteur, Faculty Phoenix Leung, Student \ David Loo, Capilano College Alumni Advisory Council \ Don Perro, Faculty \ Hilary Smith, Student \. Peggy Shannon, First Nations Student Services Peter Vander Woude, Student Jennifer Watson, Student \ Willie Westcott, Day Care \ Robin Wilson, Capilano Colleg X V H e l e n e Winship, Eldercoll x David Woodward, Student Capilano College 1995-1996 NORTH VANCOUVER CAMPUS and Administrative Offices 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver B.C. V7J 3H5 Telephone (604) 986-1911 TDD (for deaf) 980-9921 FAX (604) 984-4985 SECHELT N O R T H C A M P U S 5627 Inlet Avenue P.O. Box 1609 Sechelt, B.C. VON 3A0 Telephone (604) 885-9310 Toll free from Vancouver: 987-1535 FAX (604) 885-9350 SECHELT S O U T H C A M P U S at House of Hewhiwus SQUAMISH CAMPUS 37827 Second Avenue P.O. Box 1538 Squamish, B.C. VON 3G0 Telephone (604) 892-5322 Toll free from Vancouver: 986-3515 FAX (604) 892-9274 Effective May 1995: 1150 Carson Place Squamish, B.C. VON 3G0 Capilano College is a smoke-free environment. 1 How to Find Us 2 North Vancouver Campus Call 983-7526 for a wheelchair access map. 3 Frequently Called Numbers Admissions 984-4913 Adult Basic Education 984-4971 Adult Special Education 984-1759 Achievement Resource Centre (ARC) 984-4945 Advising Centre Hotline 984-4990 Applied Business Technology 984-4959 Applied Information Technology 984-1727 Art Department 984-4911 Asia Pacific Management Co-op 984-4981 Athletics and Recreation 984-4977 Bookstore 984-4972 Business Administration 984-4960 CANASEAN 984-1706 Capilano College Foundation 984-4983 Capilano Students' Union 984-4969 College Relations 984-4983 Commercial Animation 986-1911, local 2154 Counselling 984-1744 Daycare 984-4950 Deans: Academic 986-1911, local 2058 Career/Vocational 984-4923 Student & Instructional Services 984-4975 Disability Support Services 983-7526 Early Childhood Care & Education 984-4960 Extension Programs & Services 984-4901 Financial Aid 984-4966 First Aid 984-1772 First Nations Student Services 986-1911, local 2137 Humanities 984-4957 International Office 984-4975 International Student Counsellor 986-1911, local 2535 International Student Advisor 986-1911, local 2628 Labour Studies 984-4954 Landscape Horticulture 984-4960 Library 984-4944 Maintenance 984-4963 Media Resources 984-4940 Music Department 984-4951 Nurse 984-4964 Outdoor Recreation 984-4960 Personnel 984-4929 President 984-4925 Public Relations 984-1729 Pure & Applied Sciences 984-4955 Purchasing 984-4904 Registration 984-4913 Sechelt Campus 987-1535 Social Sciences 984-4953 Sportsplex Control Centre 984-1737 Squamish Campus 986-3515 Student Employment 984-4965 Student Records 984-4973 Switchboard/Reception 986-1911 Tourism Management 984-4960 Vice Presidents: Academic 984-1740 Career/Vocational 984-4988 Student & Instructional Services 984-4922 Visual and Performing Arts 984-4911 Protection of Privacy and Access to Information Capilano College gathers and maintains information used for the purposes of admission, registration, alumni and other fundamental activities related to being a member of the Capilano College community and attending a public postsecondary institution in the Province of British Columbia. In signing an application for admission, all applicants are advised that both the information they provide and any other information placed into the student record will be protected and used in compliance with the B.C. Freedom of Information and Privacy Protection Act (1992). 1995-96 Capilano College Calendar Published by: Public Relations Department Design and Layout: Media Production Services Word Processing: Word Processing Centre Cover Design by Lindsay Simmonds 4 Table of Contents GENERAL INFORMATION Getting to Cap, Who to Call How to Find Us 2 North Vancouver Campus 3 Frequently Called Numbers 4 Message from the President 6 Message from the Board 7 About Capilano College 8 Mission and Values 9 Academic Schedule 10 Admission and Readmission 12 Registration 17 Fees 21 General Information & Policies 23 Graduation/Diplomas & Certificates 25 Policies & Procedures 29 Services 34 Advising 34 Achievement Resource Centre .. 34 Athletics & Recreation 35 Bookstore 35 Capilano Review .• 35 Counselling 35 Career Resource Centre 36 Daycare 36 Disability Support Services 36 Distance Education 37 First Nations Programs & Services 37 Food and Beverage Service 37 Health Services and First Aid .... 37 International Office and International Education 38 Library 39 Lost and Found 40 Office of the Registrar 40 Parking 41 Security 42 Sportsplex & Fitness Centre 42 Student Employment Centre 42 Student Newspaper 42 Student Union 43 Student Store 43 Financial Aid and Awards 44 PREPARATORY PROGRAMS Adult Basic Education/Pre-College Level Courses 61 Achievement Resource Centre 62 Adult Basic Education/ Foundations 63 Alternative Career Training 67 English as a Second Language 68 ACADEMIC STUDIES/UNIVERSITY TRANSFER PROGRAMS General Information 73 Anthropology 78 Art Graphic Design & Illustration.... 79 Studio Art 84 Art Institute 89 Textile Arts 90 Crafts Instructor Training 93 Art History 94 Biology 96 Chemistry 99 Chinese 101 Commerce 102 Computing Science 104 Criminology 106 Economics 107 Engineering 108 English 110 Environmental Science 114 French 116 Geography 117 Geology 119 German 120 History 121 Human Kinetics 122 Japanese 124 Jazz Studies 124 Kinesiology 137 Labour Studies 138 Mathematics 143 Music Transfer, Bachelor of 147 Philosophy 152 Physical Education see Human Kinetics Physics 154 Political Studies 156 Psychology 158 Sociology 160 Spanish 161 Thai 162 Theatre 163 Women's Studies 165 CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS General Information Applied Business Technology Office Technology Programs Administrative Assistant Accounting Assistant Office Assistant ESL Business Fundamentals Accounting Support Legal Secretarial Medical Office Assistant Applied Infotec 169 170 170 171 171 172 172 173 175 178 180 Business Administration 185 Diploma Programs 186 Advanced Diploma 187 Bachelor's Degree (B.A.S.) 188 Accelerated Business Admin. Diploma Programs 189 Business Computing Co-op 190 Professional Accounting 191 Retail Marketing Co-op 191 Evening Certificate Programs.. 192 Local Government Admin. Professional Certificate 193 Other Programs 193 Commercial Animation 203 Communications 205 Early Childhood Care & Education 207 Fisheries Science 212 Health and Human Services 213 Resident Care Attendant 213 Personal Assistant working for Persons with Disabilities 215 Home Support Attendant Program 217 Landscape Horticulture 219 Legal Assistant 221 Media Resources 225 Music Therapy, Bachelor of 230 Outdoor Recreation Management 234 Wilderness Leadership 237 Tourism Management 239 POST-GRADUATE PROGRAMS Asia Pacific Management Co-operative Program Environmental Science 245 248 NON-CREDIT PROGRAMS AND COURSES Extension Programs & Services Canadian Job Strategies Career Choices Achievement Resource Centre 251 251 252 253 Governance and Administration.. 257 Index 260 Changes to Curricula, Regulations, and Services Capilano College reserves the right to make such changes in the College Calendar as necessary, including the cancellation or adjustment of programs or courses, and changes in fee structure or other regulations or services, without liability for any resulting loss or damage. Although every effort is made to ensure accuracy at the rime of printing, the statements in the Calendar are not to be regarded as an irrevocable contract between the student and the College. 5 Message from the President Welcome to Capilano College. As a community college, we are committed to our students and the life-long process of learning. Our faculty, staff, and administration are dedicated to providing a high-quality education which will enable our students to succeed, whether it be in the workplace or in further education. The College offers a broad range of programs and courses to meet the needs of the communities we serve. Whether enrolled in Academic, Career/Vocational, Preparatory, or Post-Baccalaureate programs, or attending the College's Extension courses, students have the opportunity to learn from accomplished instructors in a personal, interactive setting. In addition, the College offers a number of services, including the Achievement Resource and Student Employment centres, advising and counselling services, and athletics and recreation programs to enhance and support the learning experience. Over the next year, Capilano College will continue to grow. The new campus in Squamish will officially open in June, and welcome its first classes in September. This facility will allow the College to offer expanded programming to the Sea-to-Sky corridor, including courses delivered through videoconferencing. The new Student Services and Classroom Building on the North Vancouver Campus will be completed in the Spring of 1996. This building will become the hub of student life at Capilano College, offering services such as a new cafeteria, an expanded bookstore, and a performance theatre. Whether you are acquiring new skills for career advancement or change, embarking on a program of academic study, returning to complete an education, or taking courses for general interest, we hope that Capilano College will be yourfirstchoice. Dr. Greg Lee President 6 Message from the Board Since 1968, Capilano College has been a unique and valuable resource to the communities it serves. In addition to the programs and courses offered at our campuses in North Vancouver, Squamish, and Sechelt, the College has been involved in the economic and cultural development of these communities. Through concerts, art exhibits and theatre productions, lectures and seminars, and participation in community affairs, the College has contributed to an enhanced quality of life. As we move toward a global community, the need for more and better education has never been greater. In a rapidly changing world, a strong community college is an important resource to the individual and the community. Capilano College is uniquely poised to meet the emerging needs of students and the community as we strive to meet the challenges of the future. Capilano College has earned a reputation for excellence and innovation in education. Students at the College come from throughout the Lower Mainland, across Canada, and around the world to pursue studies in specialized career and academic programs. We are proud of the fact that graduates of the College have high success rates, both in finding quality employment and in further study. The faculty, staff and administration of the College are committed to the positive growth and development of our students. We look forward to welcoming you to Capilano, and wish you every success in your studies. Robin Wilson Board Chair 7 About Capilano College Since September 1968, when Capilano College first opened its doors to just over 700 students, it has grown steadily to become one of British Columbia's most outstanding Colleges, with approximately 6,000 students. The College directly serves North and West Vancouver, Howe Sound and the Sunshine Coast, with the core of the College located at the Lynnmour campus in North Vancouver and campuses in Sechelt and Squamish. Approximately 40 per cent of student enrolment now comes from outside these regions. Capilano College offers a variety of programs which include: • Academic Studies: Academic transfer courses provide a range of options. After completing the first two years of an Arts or Science degree, students may transfer to a university or pursue a career directly. Capilano College also offers associate degrees in both Arts and Science. The associate degree is an important benchmark of academic achievement which is recognized throughout the province. • Career/Vocational Programs: Certificate and diploma programs give students practical skills and knowledge to prepare them for employment or transfer to other post-secondary institutions. • Preparatory Programs: After upgrading or refreshing their skills, students can gain employment or continue on to Career/Vocational or Academic Studies programs. • Extension Programs and Services: Short courses, seminars, workshops, and lectures are offered on a non-credit basis. In addition, the College presently offers three bachelor degrees in partnership with the Open Learning Agency: Bachelor of Music in Jazz Studies, Bachelor of Music in Music Therapy, and Bachelor of Administrative (Business) Studies. The College also offers two post-baccalaureate programs. The Environmental Science program and the Asia Pacific Management Cooperative program provide unique opportunities for advanced study in specialized fields. Our programs have gained an excellent reputation, which we believe is largely attributable to our highly qualified, dedicated faculty, and our success in attracting many outstanding students. Capilano College is more than a classroom. It plays a key role in the civic and cultural life of the three regions it serves and will continue to be a dynamic source of leadership within its communities. 8 Emphasis on Excellence Capilano College both encourages and rewards student excellence through its awards and recognition programs: • Academic scholarships to outstanding high school graduates enrolling at Capilano • Dean's List for full-time students with a 3.5 grade point average or higher • Merit List for part-time students with a 3.7 grade point average or higher when they have successfully completed a minimum of 30 or 60 term hours at Capilano College • President's Award to the Career and Academic Studies graduates achieving exceptional academic excellence • Science and Music scholarship programs • Scholarships for academic excellence for returning students • Priority registration for high school graduates with a 2.5 grade point average or better who are enrolling in Academic Studies programs • Book Awards Mission and Values The mission of Capilano College is to be a post-secondary institution dedicated to excellence in teaching and learning, and an institution of first choice for students. Our dedication to excellence and commitment to a set of values will prepare students to contribute effectively as responsible citizens in a rapidly changing global community. The College will accomplish this mission by emphasizing scholarship and achievement in a selective range of highquality academic, career and vocational programs. To enhance learning for all students, the College shall offer excellent instruction and support services in an attractive environment. The College will instill students with the motivation and broad-based knowledge, skills and attitudes to enable them to become independent learners and thinkers; to succeed in further studies; and to achieve occupational goals and personal aspirations. This mission statement reflects the following values: Students Accountability The College believes it should be accountable, both fiscally and educationally. It commits itself to allocating resources fairly to ensure that all students receive a sound education suited to their needs; to explaining its policies and achievements to the public; and to a thoughtful and ethical exercise of the power it exerts over its members and its community. Innovation The College encourages rigorous, ongoing analysis and evaluation of its own effectiveness. It supports those wishing to develop instructional methods and curricula to improve the teaching of present programs and to meet emerging needs of students and the community. It supports the use of appropriate technologies to meet these needs. The College accepts the reality of constant change and the need for planning and flexibility in meeting the demands of change. Adopted by the College Board on March 20,1990. Student needs are the first concern of the College. The College strives to provide suitable curricula and support services to sustain students' personal growth and cultural enrichment. It believes that all students, whatever their background, should leave the College with enhanced skills in literacy, numeracy, and critical thinking, and with a positive attitude toward learning. To these ends, it expects and values the commitment of students to the learning process. Teaching and Learning Conditions The College values everyone involved in the teaching and learning process. It regards faculty and staff as its greatest assets in developing excellent programming and services. The College recognizes that faculty, staff and administrators serve as active models of citizenship, scholarship and professionalism. The College also recognizes effective, responsible administration as a necessity for establishing and maintaining good conditions for teaching and learning. Community The College considers itself an important resource in the economic and cultural life of its immediate region and beyond: to the rest of the province, the nation, and internationally. It seeks both to respond to community needs and to offer its expertise and leadership in actively helping its communities to anticipate future needs, problems and opportunities. 9 1995 -1996 Academic Schedule 1995 FALL TERM JULY 15-AUGUST 9 Registration for selected Career/ Vocational programs. AUGUST 7: B.C. Day. College closed. DECEMBER 4,5,6,7,8 (Monday through Friday) and DECEMBER 11,12,13,14,15 (Monday through Friday): Examination Period, 1995 Fall Term. (Grades due at Registrar's Office 72 hours after exam ends.) AUGUST 11-SEPT1: Academic Studies (university transfer) and Business Administration In-person Registration. (This date under review and subject to change). DECEMBER 15: Last day of classes for Career/Vocational courses without final examinations. SEPTEMBER 4: Labour Day. College closed. DECEMBER 18:9:00 a.m. Final deadline for submission of grades to Registrar's Office for examinations conducted on Friday, December 15. SEPTEMBER 5: Classes commence. Note: Career/ Vocational Programs commence on various days. Consult with your program instructor for further information. DECEMBER 19: Permits to Register for 1996 Spring Term mailed. SEPTEMBER 5 -18: Add/Drop period. DECEMBER 20:1995 Fall Term grades mailed. SEPTEMBER 18: Last day to add or drop a course, change sections, change from audit to credit or from credit to audit. Students will be charged full fees for courses not dropped by this date. DECEMBER 22 - 26: Christmas Break. College closed. SEPTEMBER 19-OCTOBER 16: Withdrawal Period. During this period, withdrawals will be noted on the permanent student record as a "W". 1996 SPRING TERM SEPTEMBER 29: Early application deadline for Spring Term. OCTOBER 3: Last day to submit application for program evaluation for Fall Graduation. OCTOBER 9: Thanksgiving Day. College closed. OCTOBER 16: Last day to withdraw from a course and final date for payment of tuition fee balance for Fall Term. DECEMBER 29 through JANUARY 1: New Year's Break. College closed. JANUARY 2,3,4,5 and 8,9: Academic Studies (university transfer) and Business Administration In-person Registration. Faculty advisors present. See 1996 Spring Timetable for further information. (This date under review and subject to change). JANUARY 10: Classes commence. Note: Career/Vocational courses commence on various days from January 2 through January 10. Consult with your program instructor for further information. JANUARY 10 to 23: Add/Drop period. NOVEMBER 2: Fall Graduation, Sportsplex, 7:30 p.m. NOVEMBER 11: Remembrance Day. College closed on November 13 in lieu. NOVEMBER 20 - DECEMBER 1: Early registration for 1996 Spring Term for Career/Vocational Programs, and Art, Music, Asia Pacific, Engineering, Environmental Science, Commerce. (Coordinator signature required.) JANUARY 23: Last day to add or drop a course, change sections, change from credit to audit or change from audit to credit. Students will be invoiced for full fees after this date. JANUARY 24 TO FEBRUARY 20: Withdrawal period. During this period withdrawals will be noted on the permanent student record as a "W". NOVEMBER 29: Fall Student Awards Night Ceremony, Sportsplex, 7:30 p.m. FEBRUARY 1: Last day to submit application for program evaluation for 1996 Spring Graduation. DECEMBER 1: Last day of classes. Note: Some courses/ programs continue on until the last day of the examination period. Consult with your program instructor for further information. FEBRUARY 20: Last day to withdraw from a course and final date for payment of tuition fee balance for 1996 Spring Term. FEBRUARY 22-23: Reading Break. No classes. DECEMBER 8: 1996 Spring Term Timetables available for pick up at the Office of the Registrar, or the Main Office of your local campus. General Information • Academic Schedule 10 MARCH 20: Spring Student Awards Night Ceremony, Sportsplex, 7:30 p.m. MAY 2,3: Registration for 1996 Summer Term. Note: the number of courses offered in Academic Studies during the Summer Term is limited. APRIL 5-8: Easter Break. College Closed APRIL 12: Last day of classes. Note: some courses/ programs continue on until the last day of the examination period, April 26. Consult with your program instructor for further information. MAY 6: First day of Summer Term, 1996. Academic Studies, ESL, Business Administration, and Office Technology courses commence for 1996 Summer term. APRIL 15,16,17,18,19, (Monday through Friday) and APRIL 22,23,24,25,26, (Monday through Friday): Examination Period, 1996 Spring Term. (Grades due at Registrar's Office 72 hours after exam ends). MAY 20: Victoria Day. College closed. MAY 23: Spring Graduation. Sportsplex, 7:30 p.m. JULY 1: Canada Day. College Closed. APRIL 26: Last day of classes for Career/Vocational courses without final examinations. JULY 15-AUGUST15: Registration for selected Career/ Vocational programs. APRIL 29: 9:00 a.m. Final deadline for submission of grades to Registrar's Office for examinations conducted on Friday, April 26. AUGUST 5: B.C. Holiday. College Closed. 1995 September August July M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 October November December S S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 5 S M T W T S M T W T F S M T W T F S 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 26 27 28 29 30 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 S 1996 March January February M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 April May June M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 S S S S M T W T M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 General Information - Academic Schedule 11 Admission and Readmission ADMISSION TO THE COLLEGE A. General Admission Information 1. Application a. The College welcomes applications for admission from Canadian citizens, permanent residents and International applicants. b. All applications for admission to all programs must be submitted directly to: Admissions Office of the Registrar Capilano College 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver, B.C. V 7 J 3H5 Canada c. All new students must apply for and be granted admission to the College. (An admission offer is required before a student may register.) 2. Documents The following supporting documents must be submitted before an application will be accepted: a. An official copy of the appropriate school leaving certificate; e.g. - B.C. Secondary School Transcript of Grades, - General Certificate of Education (G.C.E.), - and other documents of this nature. b. An official transcript of the academic record from all post-secondary institutions attended, whether or not work was completed. c. All documents must be originals. Uncertified photocopies are not acceptable. Replaceable documents submitted in support of an application become the property of the College and will not be returned. Francais-Langue 12 Geography 12 Geology 12 Geometry 12 German 12 Probability & Statistics 12 Spanish 12 Survey Math 12 Western Civilization 12 Writing 12 - Successful completion of the ABE Provincial Diploma. - Successful completion of the G.E.D. Note: For specific admission requirements to the following Academic Studies programs, see the appropriate program in the Academic Studies section of this Calendar: Art Graphic Design and Illustration Studio Art Art Institute Textile Arts Crafts Instructor Training Commerce Engineering Environmental Science Jazz Studies Human Kinetics and Physiology Music Transfer b. Concurrent Admission Students with superior academic records may apply for limited admission to take one or two university transfer courses while still attending secondary school. Applications must be co-signed by an applicant's parent(s) or legal guardian(s). They must also be accompanied by a letter of recommendation from the school Principal or designate, and by an official copy of the academic record. Enquiries should be directed to the Office of the Registrar. c. Discretionary Admission B. Specific Admission Requirements 1. Admission to the Academic Studies Program a. Regular Admission Submit proof of one of: - Successful completion of the B.C. Secondary School (Grade 12) or equivalent with English 12 and three academic Grade 12 courses. These courses are to be selected from: Biology 12 Calculus 12 Chemistry 12 Computer Science 12 Economics 12 English Literature 12 French 12 History 12 Japanese 12 Latin 12 Law 12 Mandarin 12 Mathematics 12 Physics 12 General Information - Admission 12 Applicants who do not meet the regular admission requirements and have not attended secondary school for at least two years may be considered for admission under this category. Applications should be submitted to the Office of the Registrar at least 6 months prior to the semester of expected enrolment, and must include transcripts, other pertinent documents and a letter outlining the reasons as to why discretionary admission to the university transfer program is requested. Requests will be reviewed by an admission committee. Applicants will be notified of the committee's decision by letter. Note: Applicants requesting admission to Music, Graphic Design, Studio Art, Asia Pacific Cooperative Management or a Career or Vocational Program should also refer to the admission requirements listed in the program outline in this calendar. 2. Admission to Career/Vocational Programs a. New applications for Career/Vocational Programs should be sent to Admissions, Office of the Registrar, and will be accepted during the twelve month period immediately preceding the program commencement date. b. Selection of applicants for most programs generally takes place four months prior to the program start date. Thereafter, applicants will be considered only if seats are available in the program. c. Applicants who satisfy the specific criteria for admission to a program will be admitted subject to space availability. For admission requirements to a specific program, refer to the program description in this calendar. d. Secondary school graduation is the normal prerequisite for admission to career programs. However, some applicants enter programs without an official copy of the Secondary School Leaving Certificate because of other qualifications and experience. Some programs have additional requirements and procedures such as interviews, testing, auditions, or portfolios. NOTE: The College reserves the right to limit admissions to those applicants, who in the opinion of the College, possess the requisite capabilities for success. 3. Admission with International Baccalaureate Courses Upon submission of official transcripts, applicants who have completed the International Baccalaureate Diploma will receive credit or waivers for some higher level subjects passed as follows: a. Anthropology - students presenting a mark of 4 will receive credit for ANTH 121 (3). b. Biology - students presenting a mark of 6 will receive credit for BIOL 110 (3) and BIOL 111 (3). c. Chemistry - students presenting a mark of 4 or better will receive credit for CHEM 108 (4.5) and CHEM 109 (4.5). d. Computing Science - students presenting a mark of 4 or better in Computer Science A will receive credit for COMP 102 (3) or a prerequisite waiver for COMP 110. Students presenting a mark of 4 or better on Computer Science AB will receive credit for COMP 110 (4) or a prerequisite waiver for COMP 111. e. Economics - students presenting a mark of 4 or better in Economics will receive credit for Economics unassigned (6). f. English - students presenting a mark of 6 or better for English Language A will receive credit as ENGL 103 (3). Students presenting a mark of 6 or better for English Language B will receive credit for ENGL 100 (3). In addition, the EDT requirement is waived for those with a mark of 6 or better on English Language A or B. g. French - no credit. h. Geography - no credit. i. History - no credit. j. Mathematics - students presenting a mark of 6 or better for Higher Level Mathematics will receive credit for MATH 110 (4.5). Students presenting a mark of 6 or better for Further Mathematics will receive credit for MATH 110 (4.5) and MATH 111 (4.5) (under review). k. Philosophy - no credit. 1. Physics - students presenting a mark of 6 or better will receive credit for PHYS 110 (3) and PHYS 111 (3). m. Psychology - no credit. 4. Admission with Advanced Placement Courses Upon submission of official transcripts, applicants who have passed an Advanced Placement Examination administered by the College Entrance Examination Board, with a mark of 4 or better will receive credit as follows: a. Biology - those completing AP Biology will receive credit for BIOL 110 (3) and BIOL 111 (3). b. Chemistry - those completing AP Chemistry will receive credit for CHEM 108 (4.5) and CHEM 109(4.5). c. Computer Science - those completing Computer Science A will receive credit for COMP 102 (3) or a prerequisite waiver for COMP 110. Those completing Computer Science AB will receive credit for COMP 110 (4) or a prerequisite waiver for COMP 111. d. Economics - those completing AP Economics will receive credit for Economics unassigned (6). e. English - those completing English Language will receive credit for ENGL 100 (3). Those completing English Literature will receive credit for ENGL 103 (3). In addition, the EDT requirement will be waived. f. French - no credit. g. History - no credit. h. Mathematics - those completing Calculus AB will receive credit for MATH 110 (4.5). Those completing Calculus BC will receive credit for MATH 110 (4.5) and MATH 111 (4.5) (under review). i. Philosophy - no credit. j. Physics - those completing Physics B will receive credit for PHYS 110 (3) and PHYS 111 (3). Those completing Physics C (Mechanics) will receive credit for PHYS 114 3). Those completing Physics C (Electricity) will receive creditfor PHYS 115 (3). k. Psychology - no credit. General Information - Admission 13 NOTE: Transfer credit granted for International Baccalaureate and Advanced Placement courses will apply to certificates or diplomas at Capilano College. Students should be aware that other colleges and universities may not accept these courses for transfer credit 5. Admission for International Applicants a. International students are eligible for admission if they have completed the equivalent of Secondary School graduation (Grade 12) in B.C. Examples of Equivalence United Kingdom and Commonwealth Passes in five GCE subjects, two of which must be at the Advanced Level. Standing equivalent to this in the University of Hong Kong Advanced Level Examination will be recognized. Germany and Austria Reifezeugnis, or Arbitur. • The number of years of secondary school or postsecondary education (e.g. college or university) and if English was the language of instruction; • A secondary school or post-secondary degree, the grades received and the level of English required. If the College then decides you may need additional instruction in English you will be asked to take an English examination suitable to the program area in which you wish to enrol. c. Students who wish to enrol in any English course must submit the results of the Language Proficiency Index Test (LPI), or must take the Capilano College English Diagnostic Test (EDT) prior to registration. EDT schedules will be printed in the timetable. 2. Specific Requirements a. Academic, Career/Vocational Students • Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) score: 560 • or English Language Assessment (ELA) Score: 145. France b. Adult Basic Education (ABE) Students Baccalaureate (2ieme partie) (Series A-E). Assessment by the ABE Department Japan c. English as a Second Language (ESL) Students Grade 12 Diploma from Koto Gakko. 1. Canadian Citizens and Permanent Residents: China Following assessment at the College, department faculty will help you select the appropriate ESL courses. You should also submit your TOEFL or ELA score to assist with placement. Senior Middle School Diploma Korea High School Grade 12 Diploma 2. International Students: Taiwan High School Grade 12 Diploma b. Applicants with Grade 12 equivalent may be considered for admission, based on the discretionary admission policy. Applicants should include a letter of intent, outlining their educational and work experience since leaving high school. c. Document requirements apply. See section on General Admission Information - "Documents". Submit your TOEFL or ELA score to assist with placement in the appropriate ESL, academic, career or vocational program. If you attend ESL, you will also be tested upon arrival to ensure proper program level placement. C. English Language Requirements 1. General a. All students must have a level of English sufficient to write assignments, understand class lectures, and take part in class discussions. b. If English is not your first language or you have received your education in another language, the College will evaluate your English skills, giving consideration to the following: • How long you have lived in an English speaking country; 3. Special Some applicants may not meet all specified requirements, but may be offered admission to a special program comprised of up to three ESL courses plus one or two academic/career courses. For more information contact Counselling, Advising, or the Admissions Office. NOTE: Important addresses TOEFL (Test of English as a Foreign Language) Educational Testing Service CN 6151, Princeton, New Jersey 08541-6151, USA ELA (English Language Assessment Test) Vancouver Community College King Edward Campus 1155 East Broadway Avenue Vancouver, B.C. V5T 4N3 General Information - Admission 14 TOEFL and E L A applications are also available at the Advising Office, North Vancouver Campus. D. When to Apply for Admission Generally, applications for admission to the College may be submitted at any time. However, early application deadlines have been established for specific programs and terms. Acceptance of applications after the deadlines may not be possible. 1. Academic Studies Program or Courses Term Fall Spring Summer Early Application Deadline Date Acceptance Mailed March 31 Sept. 30 March 31 July 15 Dec. 15 as processed 2. Career/Vocational Programs and Courses Most Career/Vocational Programs have earlier application deadlines than those listed above. Refer to the specific program in this calendar for details. Generally, applications for admission to the next Fall term should be received before March 1. 3. International Applicants a. Academic and English as a Second Language Programs Applications for admission to academic and ESL programs must be received at least two months prior to commencement of the term. Applications received after that time cannot be guaranteed consideration in time for admission to that term. b. Career/Vocational Programs Applications for admission must be received four months prior to term commencement to be considered in time for admission to that program. E. How to Apply for Admission 1. Obtain an application for admission from (a) College Reception area or the Office of the Registrar at the North Vancouver Campus, or from the main office at the Sechelt or Squamish Campus, or (b) by writing to the Office of the Registar. 2. Complete the application for admission form and include with your application an official copy of your secondary school transcript, official transcripts from all post-secondary institutions attended and the $20 nonrefundable application fee ($100 for International applicants). Submit to the Office of the Registrar, 2055 Purcell Way, North Vancouver, B.C., V7J 3H5 in person or by mail. 3. Applicants who wish to enter full-time programs of study or need assistance are advised to arrange an appointment with an Advisor. • North Vancouver Campus Advising Centre, 984-4990 • Sechelt Regional Centre Counsellor, 885-9310, Toll Free from North Vancouver, 987-1535 • Squamish Regional Centre, Counsellor, 892-5322, Toll Free from North Vancouver, 986-3515 F. How to Apply For Transfer Credit From Other Institutions to Capilano College There is agreement among all public B.C. Colleges to accept each other's credit upon transfer, if applicable to a program at the admitting college and if there is suitable equivalency. Capilano College reserves the right to review individual course credit. 1. Transfer credit may be granted to registered students for formal work completed at another post-secondary institution. The minimum achievement or grade considered for transfer is a grade of "D" or equivalent. Students should realize that while we may give credit for a course with a "D" grade, we reserve the option not to accept that course and grade as a prerequisite for another Capilano College course. (NOTE: A "C-" grade is required for credit towards the Associate Degrees in Arts or Science. 2. Students seeking transfer credit or prerequisite credit for a course must complete the "Request for Transfer Credit" form, attach official transcripts, or note that they will be sent from another institution, and submit to Admissions, Office of the Registrar. For courses completed at out-of-Province institutions, detailed course descriptions must also be submitted. 3. A l l approved transfer credit is noted on the permanent student record. While the credit awarded does not affect the Grade Point Average, the credit will be included in the total number of credits completed and may be used to complete certificate or diploma requirements if applicable. The credit assigned at Capilano is applicable only to this College. Other institutions evaluate all post-secondary work completed and will assign their own credit evaluation. 4. Limit of Credits a. For diplomas and certificates, fifty percent of the credit required must be completed while in attendance at Capilano College. Commencing September 1995, the final 50% of the credit required must be completed while in attendance at Capilano College, (under review and subject to change.) General Information - Admission 15 b. For students who lack one or two courses for graduation, and are no longer residents of the College region, credit may be granted for an additional one or two courses. This arrangement must be made in consultation with the Office of the Registrar in advance of enrolment at another institution. c. For the Associate Degrees, at least 30 of the 60 semester credits must be completed at Capilano College within 5 years preceding the awarding of the degree. G. How to Apply for Readmission Applicants who have previously attended Capilano College and fall into any of the three categories listed below, must reapply using the application for readmission form available at the Office of the Registrar. 1. Absence from the College for one or more terms Applicants will be asked to state educational and other relevant activities since the last term of attendance, and to submit official transcripts from any post-secondary educational institutions attended during the absence. 2. Voluntary withdrawal from the first term of attendance New students who withdraw before completing any course work are required to apply for readmission if they wish to register in a subsequent term. 3. Completion of academic goal Students who have officially completed a credential (certificate or diploma) in any term must apply for readmission if they wish to enrol in additional courses at the College in a subsequent term. H. Notification of Admission All applicants who are admitted to a College program will receive a letter of acceptance and either a "Permit to Register" or a notification of when and how to register. Applicants who are not admitted to the College will receive a letter of notification and an explanation for this decision. General Information - Admission 16 Registration A. General Information Academic and Business Administration Programs Registration appointments are assigned by a priority sequence and are determined each term using a system that couples the Grade Point Average (GPA) with the student number (student numbers are assigned by date of received application). Students with a 3.0 GPA would therefore receive an earlier registration appointment than applicants with a lesser GPA. BECAUSE OF THE LARGE NUMBER OF STUDENTS ENROLLING, THE COLLEGE CANNOT GUARANTEE REGISTRATION IN SPECIFIC PROGRAMS OR COURSES ALTHOUGH YOU MAY HAVE BEEN GRANTED ADMISSION. REGISTRATION IS ALSO DEPENDENT UPON MEETING THE PREREQUISITES OF INDIVIDUAL PROGRAMS OR COURSES. B. Right to Register A student who has not maintained satisfactory standing in a program in any term may be denied permission to register in that program in a subsequent term. Individual programs may require a GPA higher than that stated in the Probation Policy to continue enrolment. C. How to Register 1. Academic and Business Administration Programs and Courses a. Obtain a registration form andtimetablefrom the Office of the Registrar, Lynnmour Campus, or the Squamish or Sechelt Regional Centre offices. A timetable lists when courses are offered, room numbers and instructor names. Timetables are available approximately one month prior to each registration period. • Office of the Registrar (984-4913) • Squamish Learning Centre (892-5322,986-3515) • Sechelt Learning Centre (885-9310,987-1535) • Humanities Division (984-4957) • Advising Centre (984-4990) b. Select the courses and sections in which you wish to enrol. Select one or two alternate courses in the event selected courses are full. The DATE and TIME for you to register will be printed on your "Permit to Register". You will complete your registration form at the time of registration, after checking the course tally to determine which sections have space available. All registration will take place "in-person" with payment of full fees or a non-refundable deposit of $16/credit hour required at that time. c. Students are urged to read the B.C. Transfer Guide, available in the Advising Centre and Counselling offices for a fee of $1.00. Transfer information is accurate at the time of printing. d. The EDT (or the LPI) is required before registration in any English course at the college, unless the student has achieved one of the following which allows exemption: A in English 12, or A in Literature 12, or A in BENG 42, or B- or better in an English transfer course from another college or university a degree from an English-speaking university, or a pass on UBC's ECT (English Competency Test) Note: Successful completion of ESL 099 does not qualify a student to directly enter a regular English 010 or English 100. 2. Career/Vocational Programs and Courses All Career/Vocational applicants will receive a letter of admittance or non-acceptance from either the Office of the Registrar or the specific program. Included with the letter of admittance will be atimetable,registration form, and registration instructions. a. Admitted Full-Time Students You will receive the letter of admittance, registration form signed by the Coordinator, and a "block" of required courses for that term and program. You must return the forms and a cheque for the indicated tuition and fees to the Office of the Registrar, in-person or by mail during the following dates: Fall Term: July 15 - Aug. 09,1995 Spring Term: Nov. 20 - Dec. 1,1995 Some full-time programs (e.g. Music, Art) conduct interviews and issue letters of acceptance for Fall Term in April and May. For those students, the program coordinator will issue the letter of admittance, signed registration forms, and a deadline for payment of full tuition or a non-refundable deposit. The deposit will reserve your place in the program. b. Admitted Part-time Students Part-time students in Career/Vocational programs will receive a letter of admittance, and registration forms signed by the coordinator with the registration process specified. In some instances, students will be instructed to submit approved and signed registration forms and fees to the Office of the Registrar on a specific day. 3. Howe Sound and Sunshine Coast Courses a. Obtain a registration form andtimetablefrom any Capilano College Campus Office. General Information - Registration 17 b. Complete and return the registration form, with payment attached, to the centre you plan to attend. (You must apply for admission prior to registration if you intend to enrol in courses at Sechelt or Squamish Campus.) must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar. A copy of the course change form listing the complete withdrawal will be forwarded to the career or vocational department by the Office of the Registrar. 4. Courses on More than One Campus A transaction fee will not be charged before classes commence. a. Obtain a registration form and timetable from the Office of the Registrar on the North Vancouver Campus or from the Squamish or Sechelt Campus. b. Complete and return the registration form, with payment attached, to the North Vancouver Campus. Be sure to indicate the section in which you wish to enrol or you may register for Sechelt or Squamish courses at these campuses respectively. You must still register for North Vancouver courses at North Vancouver Campus. 5. Extension Courses and Activities For registration, refer to the Extension Programs and Services Section of this Calendar and to the seasonal brochures distributed throughout the community, by direct mail, or announced in newspaper advertisements. For more information, telephone Extension Programs and Services at 984-4901. D. Wait Lists 1. Course Wait Lists: Students who register, but are unable to enrol in a particular course because it is fully subscribed, are automatically included on a chronological wait list. Wait listed students must attend the first class of that course to have their names remain on the wait list or to enrol should a space become available. 2. Program Wait Lists: Wait lists are maintained by career and vocational programs, in the event space becomes available. Students will be notified directly by phone or letter. E. Add, Drop, Withdrawal and Refund Policy and Procedures 1. BEFORE CLASSES COMMENCE a. Course Change Procedure 1. Students may drop or add courses or change sections following their registration appointment and until the first day of classes. A course change form must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar. 2. Faculty signatures are not required before classes commence. 3. Drops will not be printed on the official transcript, but will be maintained in the permanent student record for accounting and statistical purposes. b. Complete Withdrawal Procedure For complete withdrawal before classes commence, a course change form listing all the courses to be dropped General Information - Registration 18 c. Fee for Service: d. Charges and Refunds. 1. If a course is dropped and another course is added at the same time and on the same course change form, the deposit will be applied to the course added, provided the number of credits remains the same. 2. If the number of credits falls below the original number of credits of enrolment, the difference of the deposit fee for the course dropped will be retained and the minimum deposit of $16 per credit hour ($90 per credit, International Fees) will not be refunded . 3. If a course add increases the number of credit hours, the student will be responsible for the minimum payment of the deposit at $16 per credit ($90 per credit, International Fees) at the time of the addition. 4. The minimum payment of the $16 per credit deposit is non-refundable. However, if the deposit is paid before June 30 and/or November 30 for Fall and Spring Terms respectively, students may have the deposit refunded by withdrawing from the College on or before June 30 or November 30. Those who pay this deposit after June 30 or November 30 are not eligible for any refund of deposit. 2. ADD/DROP PERIOD Add/drop period: 1st through the 10th instructional day of each term. a. Add/Drop Procedure: 1. Students wishing to add or drop a course(s), change from credit to audit, or change from audit to credit, must complete a course change form, and take the form to the instructor for approval and signature. 2. With the instructor's signature appearing on the course change form, students must then submit the form to the Office of the Registrar. Forms will be accepted until 6:30 p.m. on the 10th instructional day of the term. 3. Instructors may indicate a 48 hour deadline for submission of the course change form, in order to allow other students to gain entry to the class during this period. 4. Course drops will not be noted on the student transcript during this period, however a record for drops will be maintained on the permanent student record for accounting and statistical purposes. 5. If a course change is requested by the instructor or student to a lower or less difficult level of instruction in a subject, the course change form must bear the signatures of the instructor of each course. - The course change form listing the request for complete withdrawal must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar no later than the end of the 30th instructional day (end of the 6th week) of term. 6. If a complete withdrawal is requested, the request will be granted with the signature of the instructor of each course. - A withdrawal ("W") will be noted on the official transcript and the permanent student record. NOTE: Failure to attend classes does not constitute a course drop. Students who do not formally drop a course(s) will be assessed tuition fees, refunds will not be made, and a grade of Fail (F) will be noted on the permanent student record. Requests for late adds or late drops will not be granted simply because the student was unaware of, or neglected to comply with, the College policies and procedures. b. Fee for Service: $10 will be charged for each course change form submitted. c. Refund Policy: 1. If a course is dropped and another course is added at the same time and on the same form, the deposit previously paid for the course dropped will be applied to the course added, provided the number of credits of enrolment remains the same. 2. If the number of credits falls below the original (or highest) number of credits of enrolment, and a change lowering the number of credits is requested, the deposit of $16 per credit hour will be retained for the credits dropped and will not be refunded. 3. If course adds or changes result in an increase in the number of credit hours, the student is responsible for payment of the additional charges (either in full, or by minimum deposit per credit) at the time of the addition or change. 3. WITHDRAWAL PERIOD Withdrawal period: 11th through the 30th instructional day of each term (3rd week through the end of the 6th week). a. Withdrawal Procedure: 1. During this period, with the signature of the appropriate instructor(s) on the course change form, students may withdraw from a course(s). 2. The course change form must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar no later than 6:30 pm. of the 30th instructional day (6th week) of each term. 3. A withdrawal ("W") will be noted on the permanent student record. 4. Complete Withdrawal: If a complete withdrawal is requested, the request will be granted if the course change form bears the signature of each faculty member instructing each course of withdrawal. b. Fee for Service: A $10 transaction fee will be charged for each change form submitted. c. Refund Procedure 1. Once the withdrawal period begins, refunds are no longer made for course or complete withdrawals. 2. Students who withdraw from courses or completely withdraw during this period are responsible for the full payment of the tuition and any other fees incurred. 4. AFTER THE WITHDRAWAL PERIOD After the 30th instructional day (or after the end of the 6th week) of the term, and until the end of the term, course withdrawals or complete withdrawals are not permitted except for the reasons listed below: i. the student record is incorrect as the result of an error by the College; ii. the student transfers to a lower level of the same course by instructor request. In this instance, only the final course of enrolment will show on the official transcript. A record of the change will also be maintained on the permanent student record; iii. the student must withdraw for circumstances beyond his/her control. Official documentation is required to substantiate all claims of such circumstances. This official documentation will take the form of a typed letter from the physician, an official copy of an accident report, or official documentation of a family emergency, death certificate, and so forth. a. Procedure: 1. Students who wish to apply for special status under iii. above must submit a letter, to the Registrar, explaining the problem and including official documentation. If, in the opinion of the Registrar, the request does not fall under iii above, or the documentation is insufficient to support the request, the request will be denied. If the request is granted, the Registrar will inform the student's instructors of the WE status. 2. The permanent student record will be annotated as withdrawal for extenuating circumstances ("WE"). 3. Withdrawal with extenuating circumstances will not be granted for lack of academic performance on the part of the student. General Information - Registration 19 b. Fee for Service: A $10 transaction fee will be assessed if a "WE" is granted. c. Refund Policy: Refunds will not be made for WE withdrawal. 5. AFTER THE E L E V E N T H WEEK OF CLASSES a. If the student believes an exceptional circumstance exists which prevents him or her from completing the course during the regular time frame, the student may petition the course instructor for an incomplete ("I") grade. b. An incomplete ("I") grade may be given where, in the judgement of the instructor, the student should have reasonable expectation of passing the course, but has not completed the required work. c. An incomplete is assigned only when the instructor and student have arranged for the work to be completed by a specified date which is noted on the grade sheet class list. If the student does not complete the work by the specified date, the instructor will automatically assign a predetermined grade reflecting the work not completed. d. If the student completes the work by the specified time, the instructor will assign the final grade. e. If this incomplete procedure cannot be applied in the opinion of the instructor, the instructor is directed to contact the Registrar directly for resolution of the issue. F. Course Overload 1. Registration in more than 5 academic courses or more than the full requirements specified for a career program constitutes a course overload. 2. Students may choose to register for a course overload (up to a total of 21 credits) as long as they have discussed their need or wish for an overload with a counsellor and the course change form bears the counsellor's signature. Science students, however, are automatically allowed to register for more than 16 credits, as long as the total credits do not exceed 21 credits and does not arise from registration in more than five courses. 3. Students may not register for a course overload until after the Registration period. G. Course Challenge Registered students may request a course challenge whereby an examination for achievement may be awarded for a very specific and limited selection of courses at the institution. Certain courses may not be challenged. Students interested in this procedure should contact a counsellor for further information. General Information -Registration 20 The regular tuition fee must be paid for a challenged course. A course challenged successfully will be recorded on the permanent student record. NOTE: Credit for courses challenged successfully will apply to certificates or diplomas at Capilano College. Students should be aware that other colleges and universities may not grant credit or transfer credit for credit received by course challenge. H. Student Responsibility I. It is the responsibility of the student to ensure that • registration is accurate and complete; • tuition fees are paid at the appropriate time; • all library materials are returned and any fines and debts owing are paid. Failure to meet these responsibilities may result in all or any of the following: • credit will not be granted for work completed; • grades will not be issued; • transcripts will not be issued; • registration in subsequent semesters will be denied. 2. Change of Name and Address It is the responsibility of the student to inform the Office of the Registrar of any changes in name, address or phone number. Official documents must be provided to support a change of name request. I. Student Number - Identification Card Upon the first acceptance to the College, students are assigned a permanent student number, which is attached to the permanent student record, statement of grades, and the Student Identification Card. Student Identification Cards are issued by the Office of the Registrar during the first two weeks of classes. The card is required to use the Library and services, to sign-out audio visual materials, and to vote in Student Society elections. J . Medical Insurance Students are not covered by Workers' Compensation while attending Capilano College. Students are responsible for acquiring their own Medical Services Plan (MSP) and accident insurance coverage. Fees Fees listed below are 1994/1995 rates and are subject to change or increase without notice. Fee rates will be announced approximately one month before the Fall Term begins and will be published in the Fall Term Timetable brochure. All fees assessed are due at the time of the registration, the transaction or the request, and must be paid to the Cashier in the Office of the Registrar. A. Payment 1. Payment may be made by cash, cheque or money order. VISA or MasterCard are not accepted. 2. Cheques and money orders, made payable to Capilano College, must be submitted with the completed registration form. Post-dated cheques are not accepted. 3. Payment of fees includes payment of tuition, the term enrolment fee, the Student Society membership, the recreational facility levy and the Capilano Courier newspaper fee. 4. Full payment is preferred at the time of registration. However, a minimum non-refundable tuition deposit of $16 per credit hour will be accepted at registration, plus all other student related fees. An invoice will be mailed to the student by the 3rd week of the term, which gives the status of the account. Final payment of outstanding fees must be made by 6:30 p.m. on the 30th day of instruction for the term. Late payments are subject to a late payment penalty of $3 per course to a maximum of $25. In addition, grades, transcripts, and other official documents will not be released until tuition and other outstanding fees have been paid. 5. If fees are to be paid by an agency, other than Government Scholarship, the student must present a letter to this effect to the Cashiers at Registration. 6. Registration forms submitted without payment will not be processed. 7. Outstanding debts (overdue materials, library fines, outstanding tuition) must be paid before a student is allowed to register. 8. A charge of $16 will be levied for each cheque returned by the bank for non-sufficient funds (NSF). NOTE: For students with previous NSF cheques, the College reserves the right to require a money order, certified cheque or cash. 9. Course Verification - Immediately following the end of the third week of classes all students will be mailed a Tuition Fee and Course Verification notice. While the College strives for accuracy in every transaction, STUDENTS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR CHECKING THE ACCURACY OF THE COURSES AND FEES LISTED ON THE VERIFICATION. If registration errors are found, students must draw the errors to the attention of the Office of the Registrar, via submission of a course change form before the final withdrawal date. Failure to correct errors may result in a Fail (F) grade on the permanent student record, with credit not granted for work completed. If financial errors are found, you must draw these errors to the attention of the staff of the Cashier's Office. B. Fees Under review and subject to change without notice. 1 . Application or Term Enrolment Fee: $20. (nonrefundable) Application for Re-Admission Fee: $25 (non-refundable, one term absence or more) (under review and subject to change) Application Fee for International Students: $100 (nonrefundable, first term only) (includes foreign document evaluation) 2. Tuition: Academic Studies, Career/Vocational, ABE (credit or audit status): $39.50 per credit hour, no maximum. Private Music Instruction (PMI): $40 per credit hour, no maximum. Art Institute: $630 maximum per term. International Students: $220 per credit hour. BA Music, Music Therapy and Jazz Studies: $41 per credit hour to a maximum of $1,140 per term. Note: Lab fees may also be charged for Music, Jazz Studies, Environmental Science, Art and Theatre. Other lab fees may be added as required. Senior Citizens (60 yrs. or older): Full fees required for cost-recovery courses, Art Institute, and PMI. Free tuition except where otherwise noted. Note: For Senior Citizens the Students' Union and Recreational Facility Levy fees are not assessed. Identification is required at thetimeof registration (Pharmacare card, Courtesy Card for Senior Citizens, etc.) 3. Recreational Facility Levy: $7 per term (for all students enrolled in one credit hour or more) 4. Students' Union Fee: $2.75 per credit hour, $41.25 maximum per term (optional for Howe Sound/Sunshine Coast courses). 5. Capilano Courier Newspaper Fee: $.50 per credit hour, $7.50 maximum per term. 6. Other Fees: Course Change Fee, per transaction: Diploma /Certificate Replacement: $10 $20 General Information - Fees 21 Document Evaluation Fee: Grade Appeal Fee: (per appeal) Late Payment Penalty: (15 credit hours) or $3 per course Late Registration Fee: Library Card Replacement Fee: Program Evaluation Fee: Student I.D. Card Replacement: T2202A Tax Form Replacement Fee: Transcript, official or student copy: $25* $39.50 $25 $45 $5 $20** $5 $10 $5 (each) *This non-refundable fee is assessed to evaluate educational documents/transcripts of domestic applicants whose academic records originate outside the Province British Columbia. The document evaluation is required for those requesting admission, transfer credit or advance standing. The fee is waived if the documents originate from a secondary school located in Canada or if the applicant is participating in an exchange program between Capilano College and another institution. "Students in their final term of enrolment must submit an application for program evaluation fee at registration. C. Refunds 1. $16 per credit hour ($90 per credit hour for International Students) is non-refundable. 2. Up to the end of the 10th instructional day of the term: Students who drop a course or completely withdraw from all courses within the first ten days of a term will be refunded $23.50 per credit hour if full payment has been made. For International Students, $130 per credit hour will be refunded. The application or term enrolment fee is non-refundable for all students. 3. After the 10th and until the end of the 30th instructional day, students who withdraw from a course or completely withdraw from all courses after the 10th and until the end of term are responsible for all fees and will not receive a refund. ALSO REFER TO THE ADD, DROP, WITHDRAWAL & REFUND POLICY IN THE REGISTRATION SECTION. D. Extension Programs and Services Fees/ Policies 1. Fees Tuition fees charged for courses/programs offered through the Extension Programs are cost-recovery. Fees are payable at the time of registration. 2. Refunds • Refunds will be given in full for courses/programs/ workshops cancelled by the College • Application for withdrawal/refund will not be accepted after the second session of a course. For General Information - Fees 22 workshops of short duration (up to 3 consecutive days) withdrawal applications will be accepted up to the day before the workshop commences. • Refunds are subject to a 20% administration charge. • Refund on discounted and package fees will be subject to the 20% administration charge against the full course fee. • Refunds will not be given, under any circumstances after the end of a course, program, or workshop. • Any change from the foregoing policy will be clearly stated in the course or workshop description. For further information, telephone 984-4901. General Information and Policies A. Attendance 1. Students are expected to attend all classes in which they are registered, as evaluation of progress in any course is cumulative and based on class assignments, participation and examinations. 2. If illness, injury or death in the family prevents a student from completing an assignment or examination, they must notify the instructor immediately. If completing the assignment or examination is feasible and acceptable within the program, students must submit reasons and/or documentation to the satisfaction of the instructor(s), within 7 days of the due date of the assignment or examination. 3. Visitors may attend class sessions for a limited period of time provided the instructor gives permission in advance. This privilege does not extend to science and language labs or to courses requiring the use of machinery or materials. Visitors are not registered, cannot sit examinations, do not receive credit and cannot attend more than three weeks during the term. B. Instructional Year The instructional year is comprised of 3 terms: 1. Fall: September through December 2. Spring: January through April 3. Summer: May or June through July. Some courses may end in August. NOTE: A very limited number of courses are offered during the Summer Term. C. Enrolment Status 1. Full Time and Part Time Enrolment Status: a. Statistical Purposes: Full Time = 12 credit hours or more Part Time =11 credit hours or less calculated in the GPA, does not have credit attached, may not be used toward completion of a diploma, certificate, associate degree, or degree. Students are permitted to register for audit status in a particular course only after the last day of in-person registration, on a space available basis, with the instructor's signature. Students may change their registration in a course from credit to audit or audit to credit on or before the last day of the two week add/drop period with the instructor's approval and signature. 4. Second Year Standing: Second year standing is based on the number of credit hours completed within a program; - Academic Studies (University Transfer): successful completion of 24 credit hours in that program; - Career: successful completion of 50 percent of the total credits required for a 2 year diploma in a specified program, or 30 credit hours. D. Credit Hour and Course Credits A credit hour is an assigned unit of value that normally represents one hour per week of classroom work per term. Most courses are three credit hours, and normally require three or four classroom or lecture hours per week and may, in addition, require additional hours of study in labs, seminars, tutorials, conversation labs, or practicums. E. Course Information For academic offerings, course descriptions are listed alphabetically in the "Academic Studies/University Transfer Section" of this Calendar. Students are urged to become familiar with the special information required to properly select courses. Art, Graphic Design and Illustration, Studio Art, Textile Arts, Jazz Studies and Music courses appear under their respective program headings in this same section. b. Financial Aid Purposes: Full Time = 9 credit hours or more required for student loans and bursaries. 12 audit hours required for scholarships Course Description Code: to therighthand side of each course description is a series of code letters and numbers, for example, Biology 212-Invertebrate Biology. 2. Credit Status: A credit enrolment indicates the student has officially registered in and paid for courses. In addition, the student attends all classes, seminars, labs and submits required assignments and sits examinations. Biology 212 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Department Name. Year Level Course Number Number of credits Number of lecture hours per week Number of lab hours per week Number of other hours per week (eg. seminar, conversation, practicum) • Term normally offered 3. Audit Status: An audit enrolment indicates the student has registered in and will attend a course without writing examinations or submitting work, papers, lab reports, etc. Full fees are required for audit enrolment. Attendance at lectures, labs and seminars is required. However, for those students who do not meet the attendance requirement, their permanent student record and transcript will be annotated with the comment AUDIT DENIED. Audit status in a particular course is not General Information and Policies 23 F. Equivalence, Exemption, Substitution, Transfer Credit All requests for exemption, substitution, equivalence or transfer credit must be submitted to the Registrar's Office on the request form. A decision will be made by the Registrar and on the recommendation of an appropriate program coordinator ii applicable. The credit or action will be noted and approved by the Office of the Registrar. Students will be notified in writing by the Registrar of the final decision. EQUIVALENCE: An equivalence indicates two courses within the institution deemed to be practically equal in content and credits, although they may be offered in two different program areas under different course numbers. EXEMPTION: An exemption indicates a student is not required to complete a particular course(s) in a program because of successful completion of a combination of post-secondary courses which, overall, constitute equal content. Although an exemption for particular courses may be given for courses taken outside Capilano College, the student is still obligated to complete the total number of credits required for the program. (NOTE: If the courses were taken at Capilano College a substitution would be given instead.) SUBSTITUTION: A substitution indicates a Capilano course used in lieu of another Capilano course to complete a program requirements. Credit hours must be equal. 2. For some career/vocational programs, classes will continue as regularly scheduled throughout the examination period. In addition, a special examination schedule may be set. Detailed information is available from instructors or program coordinators. 3. The examination schedule will be posted by the end of the 8th week of instruction. H. Student Records/Confidentiality I. All official permanent student records are kept in the Office of the Registrar and are considered confidential. The information on file for a student is always available to that individual. Information will not be given to any agency or person other than the student, unless the student has given their permission in writing, or for institutional research projects approved by the College. 2. Students are cautioned that student loan applications and other similar applications have such consent written in the document. 3. Official transcripts/grade statements: • Grade statements are mailed or distributed from the Office of the Registrar; • Official transcripts are issued by the Office of the Registrar only at the request of the student, and are mailed directly to the institution or agency; • Unofficial transcripts are issued by the Office of the Registrar at the request of the student and are mailed directly to the student. TRANSFER CREDIT: Transfer credit is credit given for work successfully completed at another institution. The transfer credits reduce the total number of credits re- I. Protection of Privacy and Access to quired to complete a certificate, diploma, or associate Capilano College gathers and maintains information used for the purposes of admission, registration, alumni and other fundamental activities related to being a member of the Capilano College community and attending a public post-secondary institution in the Province of British Columbia. In signing an application for admission, all applicants are advised that both the information they provide and any other information placed into the student record will be protected and used in compliance with the B.C. Freedom of Information and Privacy Protection Act (1992). degree. Approved transfer credit is noted on the Permanent Student Record as type one, two or three credit, as per the B.C. Transfer Guide. While grades are noted, they are not included in the calculation of the GPA. Type One Credit:Course to course transfer [example: BIOL108 (4.5)] Type Two Credit:Course to subject area, but unassigned [example: BIOL unassigned (3)] Type Three Credit: Course to unassigned [example: Unassigned or G.E. (3)] G. Examination Period 1. The final few days of each instructional term is designated as an examination period (see Schedule for dates). If a final examination is to be given, it will take place during the examination period and will be up to 3 hours in duration. Faculty will be available during the examination period to meet with students to review assignments, final letter grades, or engage in other instruction-related activities. General Information and Policies 24 Information Graduation/Diplomas & Certificates A. Graduation Students who believe they will complete their program of study by the end of their current semester of enrolment must submit a "Request for Program Evaluation" form to the Office of the Registrar, together with the $20 program evaluation fee at Registration, or no later than the following deadline: Fall Graduation in November: September 15 Spring Graduation in May: February 15 You are strongly encouraged to submit this application and fee at Registration. Graduation ceremonies are held in the Spring and Fall terms. Diplomas and Certificates are issued only at these two ceremonies. Students completing before the ceremonies will have their permanent student records and transcripts annotated as Program Requisites Complete. The date that the diploma or certificate is awarded will then be placed on the permanent student record and transcript at the date of the appropriate graduation. All diploma and certificate graduates are invited to attend. Instructions and invitations are mailed to your permanent address approximately 3 weeks before the ceremony. B . Diplomas and Certificates Awarded All degrees, diplomas, certificates, and citations are awarded and produced by the Office of the Registrar, and bear both the signature of the Registrar and the Official Seal of the College. 1. Academic Program Diplomas Capilano College offers a variety of diplomas upon completion of two years of study at the university transfer level. Diplomas require 60 credit hours or more to complete. • Associate of Arts Degree • Associate of Science Degree • Diploma in Academic Studies • Diploma in General Studies • Diploma in Graphic Design and Illustration • Diploma in Music • Diploma in Studio Art 2. Post-Baccalaureate Diplomas Students with previous degrees may complete postbaccalaureate diplomas in the following programs: • Asia Pacific Management • Environmental Science 3. Career Program Diplomas The following diplomas are offered: • Diploma in Applied Information Technology • Diploma in the Art Institute • Diploma in Business Administration • Diploma in Business Computing Co-operative Education • Diploma in Business Administration - Accelerated General Management - Accelerated Computer Systems Management - Accelerated Accounting Management - Accelerated Marketing Management • Diploma in Graphic Design and Illustration • Diploma in Jazz Studies • Diploma in the Legal Assistant Program • Diploma in Media Resources • Diploma in Music Therapy • Diploma in Outdoor Recreation Management • Diploma in Textile Arts • Diploma in Tourism Management 4. Career Program Certificates Certificates require either 3.0 or 1.5 credit hours, depending on the program. The following certificates are offered: • Certificate in the Art Institute Program • Certificate in Business Administration • Certificate in Business Administration - Advanced Option in General Management, Accounting, Finance or Marketing • Certificate in Business Communications • Certificate in Business Computing • Certificate in Crafts Instructor • Certificate in Early Childhood Education • Certificate in Early Childhood Education: - Post Basic Infants and Toddlers - Post Basic Special Needs • Certificate in Graphic Design - Foundation Program • Certificate in Landscape Horticulture • Certificate in Retail Marketing Co-op • Certificate in Wilderness Leadership - Backpacking Option - Canoeing Option - Nordic Skiing Option 5. Vocational Program Certificates The following certificates are offered: • Certificate in Accelerated Office Technology - Office Clerk Option - Financial Option - Secretarial Option • Certificate in Fish Science • Certificate in Landscape Horticulture • Certificate in the Legal Assistant Program • Certificate in the Legal Secretarial Program • Certificate in the Medical Office Assistant Program • Certificate in Office Technology - Administrative Assistant Option - Financial Option - General Office Assistant - Secretarial Option • Certificate in the Personal Care Attendant for the Disabled Program General Intormation - Graduation 25 • Certificate in the Resident Care Attendant Program Note: Additional certificates and diplomas may be added to this list as new programs are developed. 6. Degrees Capilano College offers courses leading to completion of a 4-year degree in cooperation with Open University in the following: • Administrative Studies • Jazz Studies • Music Therapy 7. Adult Basic Education • Provincial Level Diploma • Advanced Level Certificate 8. Certificates of completion are also offered for particular courses in Labour Studies and other contract courses in cooperation with Ministry and Business requests. Contact your coordinator for further information. Citations may also be given for courses of study requiring fewer than 15 credit hours. C. Requirements for Graduation Note: A previously awarded Academic Studies Diploma may be exchanged for an Associate Degree in Arts or Sciences as appropriate, provided that the degree meets all the requirements for the Associate degree. This includes the five-year requirement which is applied to the date of exchanging a diploma for an Associate Degree. 1. Associate of Arts Degree To be eligible for the Associate of Arts, a student must have: a. completed 60 semester credits of courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level or higher at the University of British Columbia, Simon Fraser University, or the University of Victoria; b. completed at least 30 of these 60 semester credits within five years preceding the awarding of the Associate Degree; c. completed at least 30 of these 60 semester credits at Capilano College within 5 years preceding the awarding of the degree, of which at least 12 credits are in courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher; d. completed at least 6 semester credits in courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level in English; e. completed at least 18 credits in Arts courses (other than English) that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level; at least 6 of these credits must be in the Humanities, and at least 6 of these credits must be in the Social Sciences, and no more that 6 credits shall be in any one subject area; General Information - Graduation 26 f. completed at least 18 semester credits in Arts courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher, these credits must be in at least two different subject areas; g. completed at least 9 semester credits in Science courses, including at least 3 credits in Mathematics or Computing Science or Statistics (i.e. any statistics course that transfers to a university as a 100-level or higher Science course) and at least 3 credits in a Laboratory Science course (i.e. any course in the Sciences list worth 3 credits or more and with a lab of at least 2 hours, but excluding any course in Applied Science or Computing Science); h. completed at least 9 semester credits in courses that have assigned or unassigned transfer credit at the 100level or higher; credits may be for university transfer courses in subjects listed on the following page or for university transfer courses in other subjects (e.g. Commerce, Physical Education, Business Administration, Communications, Media Resources); i. achieved a grade of at least C- in each course counting towards the 60-credit requirement, and a cumulative Grade Point Average of at least 2.0 over all of the courses counting towards the requirement. Note: History courses will be considered as Humanities courses for the purpose of the Associate Degree. General Course Requirements for Associate of Arts Courses/Programs # of Credits Conditions Total 100 Level English 6 6 Arts Courses 100 Level Humanities Social Sciences Social Sciences or Humanities - excludes English - only 6 credits max. in one subject area Arts Courses 18 18 18 100 Level or Higher Science Courses Mathematics or Comp. Science or Statistics 3 Laboratory Science 3 Science Course 3 Electives* 9 200 Level or Higher - credits must be in at least 2 subject areas - requires min. 2-hr. lab and excludes any course in Applied or Computing Science 100 Level or Higher 60 2. Associate of Science Degree Note: A previously awarded Academic Studies Diploma may be exchanged for an Associate Degree in Arts or Sciences as appropriate, provided that the degree meets all the requirements for the Associate Degree. This includes the five-year requirement which is applied to the date of exchanging a diploma for an Associate Degree. To be eligible for the Associate of Science, a student must have: General Course Requirements for an Associate in Science Courses/Programs English # of Credits Total 6 Conditions 100 Level Calculus 6 - from Mathematics 108,109,110, 111, 230 or 231 Science 18 a. completed 60 semester credits of courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level or higher at the University of British Columbia, Simon Fraser University, or the University of Victoria; 100 Level - only 6 credit max. in one subject area Science 18 b. completed at least 30 of these 60 semester credits within five years preceding the awarding of the Associate Degree. 200 Level or Higher - must be in at least 2 subject areas Arts Elective 6 100 Level or Higher - excluding English and courses that have transfer credit in both Arts and Science d. completed at least 6 semester credits in courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level in English; Electives* 6 100 Level or Higher e. completed a least 6 semester credits from the following Capilano Calculus courses: Mathematics 108,109,110, 111, 230, or 231; *May be Arts or Science courses or other subjects, e.g. Commerce, Business Administration, Physical Education with university transfer credits. f. completed at least 18 credits in Science courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level; no more than 6 credits shall be in one subject area; Classification of Subjects for Associate Degrees c. completed at least 30 of these 60 semester credits at Capilano College within 5 years preceding the awarding of the degree, of which at least 12 credits are in courses which have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher; g. completed at least 18 credits in Science courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher; these credits must be in at least two subject areas; h. completed at least 6 semester credits in Arts courses at the 100-level or higher, excluding English and excluding any course that has university transfer credit in both Arts and Science (e.g. Mathematics); i. completed at least 6 semester credits in courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level or higher; these credits may be for university transfer courses in subjects listed on the following page or for university transfer courses in other subjects (e.g. Commerce, Physical Education, Business Administration, Communications, Media Resources); j. achieved a grade of at least C- in each course counting towards the 60-credit requirements, and a cumulative Grade Point Average of a least 2.0 over all the courses counting towards the requirement. 60 Only those Capilano College courses with university transfer credit at the University of British Columbia, Simon Fraser University, or the University of Victoria, will count towards the Associate Degree. For the purpose of the above requirements, Capilano College courses are categorized as follows: ARTS Humanities: Art Art History Chinese English French German History Japanese Music Philosophy Spanish Thai Theatre Women's Studies (100,104,106,130) Social Sciences: Anthropology Criminology Economics Geography (Human) (100,101,102,106,108,200,201,205) Political Studies Psychology General Information - Graduation 27 Sociology Women's Studies (100,110,122,140,220) SCIENCES Applied Science Biology Chemistry Computing Science Geography (Physical) (112,114, 214, 221) Geology Human Kinetics and Philosophy Mathematics Physics NOTE: Refer to the specific program outline in this Calendar for career requirements. 5. Diploma in General Studies To be eligible for a Diploma in General Studies, a student must have: a. completed 60 credits, fifty percent of which must be completed at Capilano College; b. achieved a cumulative grade point average of 2.00 or higher. 6. Certificate in Career or Vocational Programs To be eligible for a certificate, a student must have: Note: Some courses in the subjects listed above may not carry transfer credit and/or satisfy major requirements at a particular university. Please consult the transfer guide, university calendars, or the Advising Department. a. completed requirements as listed in the program outline (in this Calendar); 3. Diploma in Academic Studies Note: The percentage of courses which must be completed at Capilano is under review and subject to changes as of September, 1995. To be eligible for a Diploma in Academic Studies, a student must have: a. completed 60 credits, of which at least 30 must be completed at Capilano College; b. achieved a cumulative grade point average of 2.0 or better; c. Successfully completed at least 45 credits from the following subject areas, including at least 6 credits from English (100-level or higher), at least 6 credits from subjects in List A; and at least 15 credits selected from 200-level courses; d. All courses must be university transferable courses. A B Applied Science Anthropology Japanese Biology Art Music Chemistry Art History Philosophy Computing Chinese Political Studies Science Commerce Psychology Geography Criminology Sociology (Physical) Economics Spanish Geology English Thai Mathematics French Theatre Kinesiology Geography Women's Studies Physical Education (Human) Physics German History 4. Diploma in Career Programs To be eligible for a career program diploma, a student must have: a. completed program requirements, fifty percent of which must be completed at Capilano College; b. achieved a cumulative grade point average of 2.00 or better. General Information - Graduation 28 b. achieved a cumulative grade point average of 2.00 or higher. Policies and Procedures A. Grading system The College employs a letter grade system. Letter Grade Point Value Classification and may not be used toward completion of a d i p l o m a , certificate, associate degree or degree. W i t h d r a w a l - Extenuating Circumstances W i t h d r a w a l from a course after the end of the w i t h d r a w a l period, for circumstances beyond the control of the student. C R or N C G r a d e A+ A A- 4.33 B+ B B- 3.33 C+ C C- 2.33 D 1.00 M i n i m a l Pass F 0 Fail 4.00 Excellent 3.67 3.00 Good 2.67 Satisfactory 1.67 I Grade Non-Grade Designation - AUD* ADN* - F Grade A l l Fail or " F " grades recorded on the student's transcript are assigned a value of zero i n the calculation of a student's term and cumulative G P A . 2.00 CIP* CR* NC* I* W* WE* The grades " C R " or " N C " are assigned to courses i n w h i c h a level of mastery is required for successful completion but is not included i n the G P A calculation. Course i n Progress Credit Granted N o C r e d i t Granted Incomplete Withdrawn Withdrawal Extenuating Circumstances Audit A u d i t Denied * not calculated i n Grade Point Average A n "I" or incomplete grade m a y be given at the end of a term, where i n the judgment of the instructor, the student should have reasonable expectation of passing the course, but has not completed the required work. A n incomplete is assigned only w h e n the instructor and student have arranged for the w o r k to be completed b y a specified date, w h i c h is noted on the grade sheet class list. If the student does not complete the w o r k by the specified date, the instructor w i l l automatically assign a predetermined grade reflecting the w o r k not completed. If the student completes the work by the specified time, the instructor w i l l assign the final grade. N O T E : Transfer students are cautioned that other postsecondary institutions may include " \ " grades i n the G P A calculation for admission. B. Grade Changes G r a d e P o i n t Average ( G P A ) Time limits have been established with respect to grade changes. G r a d e performance is expressed i n terms of a Grade Point Average ( G P A ) . G P A s are reported on each permanent student record. A term G P A is the s u m of the grade point hours, d i v i d e d by number of credit hours for one term only. The cumulative G P A recorded is the s u m of the grade point hours, d i v i d e d by the number of credit hours for all terms of enrolment. 1. N o time limit for grade changes due to calculation error. 2. O n e year time limit for grade changes resulting from completion of work to remove an I grade (may be extended i n extenuating circumstances). 3. O n e year time limit for grade changes made for other reasons. The m i n i m u m grade point average for graduation is 2.00. Audit A n audit indicates the student has registered i n and attended a course without w r i t i n g examinations or submitting work, papers, lab reports, etc. Attendance at lectures, labs and seminars is required. A n A u d i t status is not calculated i n the G P A , does not have credit attached, Students are advised to contact the instructor(s) i m m e d i ately if a grade has been recorded incorrectly. Errors and omissions w i l l be corrected as soon as identified without cost to the student and without appeal. C. Grade Appeals Students must take immediate action for a grade appeal. Students must contact a counsellor no later than 2 weeks after receipt of grades or Change of Grade Notification. General Information - Policies 29 The counsellor will discuss the grade and appeal procedure and attempt to arrange a meeting with the instructor, and will provide the student with a "Final Grade Appeal" form. If students wish to pursue the appeal, they must do so within fourteen calendar days of the date on which the counsellor's report is mailed. Failure to meet this timeline will be grounds for dismissal of the appeal. To continue the appeal, students complete the "Final Grade Appeal" form and submit it to the Secretary of the Appeals Committee with a fee of $36 for each course to be appealed. Appeals are considered by an Appeals Committee chaired by one of the College Deans. The Committee consists of representatives from faculty, students, and a counsellor. During the appeal process all term grades, including the final examination mark, are taken into consideration. In all cases the students are informed in writing of the Committee's decision. Should the mark be changed, the fee is refunded. Only those appeals that follow the above process will be considered. D. Repeated Courses Policy 1. A course may be repeated for the purpose of improving a grade, but no more than once. The grade for each attempt will be recorded with the higher grade used in the computation of the cumulative GPA. 2. No course may be taken more than twice if the student has received two failures, or two NA's* or made two withdrawals or any combination of failure and withdrawal. Subsequently, a student will not be allowed to enrol in a third attempt unless all of the following have been satisfied: a. a term GPA of 2.5 or better is achieved; b. the signature of either an educational advisor, or counsellor is entered on the registration form; c. the signature of the faculty coordinator responsible for that subject is entered on the registration form. 3. Students are cautioned that other institutions may include grades for all attempts and repeats of courses in the GPA calculation used for admission. 4. The Repeated Courses Policy also applies to courses deemed to be equivalent, have a similar curriculum, and the same subject material; for example, Biology 108 and Biology 110. *NA grades were awarded prior to September, 1994 only. E. Repeated Semesters Policy Students who enrol but withdraw from all courses in two consecutive semesters will be ineligible to re-register for General Information - Policies 30 one semester, Fall or Spring. Students who receive grades of Fail, WD, or a combination of these grades in all courses of enrolment in two consecutive semesters shall be ineligible to re-register for one semester, Fall or Spring. If following a third semester of enrolment, students receive grades of Fail, WD, or a combination of these grades in all courses of enrolment, will not be allowed to enrol for two semesters, Fall and Spring. Students who must withdraw from all courses in two consecutive semesters due to medical reasons, or due to circumstances beyond their control, may appeal to the Registrar for a permit to re-enrol. F. Academic Performance 1. Academic Difficulties a. Students who are experiencing difficulties in their course work during a term may be referred by an instructor to a counsellor. The student is encouraged to consult with the instructor and counsellor to reach a satisfactory plan which will remedy these difficulties. 2. Standing Required for Continuance All students at Capilano College are expected to maintain acceptable standards of scholarship. Specifically, they are expected to maintain a minimum 1.80 CGPA (cumulative grade point average). A student who does not maintain this minimum CGPA will be considered to be performing unsatisfactorily in his/her studies. The following procedures will apply for evaluating the student performance in accordance with policy governing continuance, withdrawal and readmission. a. Academic performance will be evaluated on courses for which Capilano College grades have been assigned. ("Assigned grade" will include grades A+ through D, F, but will exclude W, CR and AUD). b. Following admission, no formal assessment will take place until the student has completed a minimum of nine credit hours of assigned grades. c. Students who were admitted to the College with an admission average below 1.80, and who have attempted 9 credit hours at a previous post-secondary institution, will be admitted on academic probation. 3. Academic Probation a. Students who have received assigned grades for at least 9 Capilano College credit hours with a GPA of less than 1.80 based on the 4 point scale, will be placed on academic probation. Students will be notified in writing of their status and may be advised to book an appointment with an Advisor or Counsellor prior to re-registering. b. Students permitted to register will be limited to enrolling in 9 credit hours. Following completion of the 9 credit hours, the student records will be reassessed. c. If, at the end of the probation period: • the term GPA on assigned grades during the probation period and the cumulative GPA are 1.80 or higher, the students will be returned to good academic standing; • the term GPA on assigned grades during the probation period is 1.80 or higher, but the cumulative GPA is less than 1.80, the student will continue on academic probation; • the term GPA on assigned grades during the probation period is less than 1.80 students will be required to withdraw from the College for at least one term (fall or spring). 4. Required to Withdraw Students who have been required to withdraw (RTW), may not apply for readmission for one full term. We strongly advise students to contact an advisor or a counsellor before submitting an application for readmission. a. Readmission to original program of registration: Students who have been required to withdraw must make application for readmission. Permission for readmission will be granted by the Registrar in consultation with the appropriate Career/Vocational program coordinator, Dean, and an Advisor or Counsellor, if necessary. If admitted, the 9 credit hour enrolment limit will apply, as consistent with the probation policy. b. Application to a new program: Those who submit an application for admission to a new program must meet program requisites. Permission for admission to a new program will be granted by the Registrar in consultation with the appropriate Career/ Vocational program Coordinator or Dean, and if necessary, an Advisor or Counsellor. If admitted, the 9 credit hour enrolment limit will apply, as consistent with the probation policy. admission to a new program conditional to receipt of final grades.) If admitted, the 9 credit hour enrolment limit will apply, as will all other conditions of the Academic Probation policy. G. Disruptive Students Policy The College recognizes that most students make considerable sacrifices to be able to attend classes. To enhance their opportunities for success, the College expects all students to help, not hinder, their fellow students, staff, and instructors in achieving their common goals. One of the most important of those goals is to develop the skill of critical thinking through the free expression and exploration of a wide range of ideas. This may involve challenges to students' and faculty's strongly held beliefs and values. As long as such challenges are clearly directed at ideas, and are not merely personal attacks on those who hold them, the College accepts and encourages them as part of the learning process. However, some kinds of expression and behaviour are clearly not intended to further the learning process; they may become disruptive to all concerned and may hinder the College's basic purpose: to foster both learning and a constructive, positive attitude toward learning. Therefore, the College will not accept disruptive behaviour in classrooms or elsewhere on its property. 1. Disruptive Behaviour Disruptive behaviour is defined as: • Speech or action that seriously distracts others from the task at hand; • Speech or action that is clearly not part of a learning process that creates an atmosphere of hostility, intimidation, ridicule, or anxiety among other students, staff or instructors; c. Grade Point Average required: • Action that impedes the delivery of College services; Required to withdraw students granted readmission in the original program of registration or a new program must achieve a grade point average of 2.00 or better on those credits attempted. Students who do not achieve this level will be required to withdraw from the College for one full year and may only be readmitted by application to, and with the approval of the Admissions Appeal Committee. • Action that abuses College property and services by using them for unauthorized purposes; 5. Request for Transfer to Another Program While on Probation 2. Threatening and Dangerous Behaviour Students who have been placed on probation and wish to transfer to another program must submit an application for readmission, indicating they wish to change programs. Applicants must meet all requisites to the new program. (Current enrolment in courses will make any • Excessive and unreasonable demand for attention or special treatment from faculty or staff, to the detriment of other students; or • Hindrance of other's work by failure to complete one's own work. All members of the College community are expected to show respect for the College and its students and employees. Behaviour that isj;hreatening or dangerous to others is unacceptable and will be dealt with quickly and firmly. The College will protect its students and employees against such conduct. General Information - Policies 31 Threatening or dangerous behaviour is: • Subjecting or threatening to subject any student or College employee to physical or mental harm, injury,indignity, harassment, or written or spoken abuse; • Physical intimidation of any student or College employee; • Damage or threat to, or the unauthorized removal of, College property or the property of students or College employees; • Action that deliberately endangers students or College employees. incompatible with education and scholarship. Accordingly, cheating offences will normally result in a grade of zero on the examination, test, or assignment and, at the instructor's discretion, may result in a grade of F in the course. After consulting the instructor(s) involved, the College may impose further penalties for cheating, up to and including expulsion from the College. Cheating or plagiarism penalties affecting a final grade may be appealed through the College's Appeals Procedure. Students are responsible for ensuring that they understand and follow the principles and practices of proper documentation and scholarship. If in doubt about these matters, students should consult their instructor, the Achievement Resource Centre, the Writing Centre, or the Library where explanatory documents are available. 3. Procedure Complaints about any person's disruptive, threatening, or dangerous behaviour shall go to a Counsellor or to the appropriate Coordinator. The person receiving the complaint shall investigate, consult a Counsellor or Coordinator as appropriate, and, if warranted, immediately convey the complaint to the appropriate Dean. The Dean will take appropriate action, which may include (but is not limited to) a formal warning, placement on probation, long-term suspension, or expulsion from the College. If the Dean has reason to believe that a student's continued presence in the College constitutes a continuing disruption, threat, or danger to others, the Dean shall immediately suspend the student pending further investigation and/or disciplinary action. A student has therightto appeal the Dean's decision to suspend or to impose other disciplinary action. Such appeal must be made in writing to the Vice-President, Student and Instructional Services within two weeks of the Dean notifying the student of the disciplinary action. The appeal shall be heard by two Vice-Presidents, who will receive submissions by any other person that the Vice-Presidents judge to have information bearing upon the case. H. Misuse of Computer System Policy The misuse of a computer system (such as unauthorized access to other computer accounts or unauthorized use of system software) is not only unfair to other students but can result, at the instructor's discretion, in suspension of the offender's computer access in a course, which may result in an "F" grade. Repeated offences may result in a permanent revoking of all computer privileges. I. Cheating and Plagiarism Policy Within an educational institution, any form of cheating including plagiarism - is an extremely serious offence. Plagiarism is the presentation of another person's or source's words or ideas as if they were one's own. Plagiarism and all other forms of cheating are dishonest and are General Information - Policies 32 J . Copyright Policy A copy of the College Policy and Procedures regarding Canadian copyright law is available in the Library and in all departments. This policy applies to all College departments, employees and students. K. Sexual Harassment Policy The College is committed to providing a working and learning environment that is free from sexual harassment. To that end, the College has adopted a formal policy and procedures to handle complaints and, if appropriate, to impose discipline where sexual harassment occurs. The College believes that those who allege that they are victims of sexual harassment must receive the necessary support and protection to encourage complaints to be brought forward. The College believes that anyone against whom a complaint has been made should be given full opportunity to respond to those allegations, and that the principles of natural justice should prevail. The Capilano College Policy defines sexual harassment as comment or conduct of a sexual nature, including sexual advances, requests for sexual favours, suggestive comments or gestures, or physical contact when any one of the following occurs: 1. the conduct or comment has the effect of creating an intimidating, hostile or offensive environment, and may include the expression of sexist attitudes, language and behaviour; 2. the conduct or comment exploits the fiduciary relationship between students and employees of the College; 3. the conduct or comment is accompanied by a reward, or the express or implied promise of a reward, for compliance; 4. the conduct or comment is accompanied by reprisals, or an express or implied threat of reprisal, for refusal to comply; 5. the conduct or comment is accompanied by the actual denial of opportunity, or the express or implied threat of the denial of opportunity, for failure to comply. Copies of the College's "Sexual Harassment Policy and Procedures" are available from the Office of the Sexual Harassment Policy Advisor or from Counselling. The Sexual Harassment Policy Advisor is available to receive complaints of sexual harassment, to provide advice and information to the parties to such complaints, and to investigate complaints as necessary. ods, evaluation system, and due dates and late penalties for major assignments. 6. Reasonable access to information on program and graduation requirements, academic regulations, and university admission. 7. be notified of class cancellations as soon as possible and to expect that classes will start and end on time. 8. be informed of your performance on occasions spaced throughout the semester. 9. have your instructor keep designated office hours. L. Limit of Responsibility Policy The College accepts no responsibility for the cancellation or discontinuance of any course or program or class of instruction that may be necessary as a result of an Act of God, fire, labour problems, lack of funding, or any other cause. The College accepts no responsibility for any injury, loss or expense sustained, arising out of or in any way connected with a student's participation in any course or program. M. Statement of Rights and Responsibilities Capilano College recognizes a set of student rights and holds students responsible for their understanding and conduct in view of college policies, rules and regulations. Student Rights You are entitled to have yourrightsrespected by fellow students, faculty, staff, administrators and other persons associated with the college. In addition to your rights guaranteed under the Canadian Charter of Rights, you have the right to: 1. a healthy and safe learning environment free from harassment and discrimination. 2. the confidentiality of information regarding all student records and grades unless you consent in writing to its disclosure. You also have arightto ethical behaviour from college personnel who have access to your student records. 3. seek redress through appropriate college committees for any potential infringement of your rights, according to the procedures in effect at the College. 4. access to documents contained in your student records, and to add pertinent comments or documents as appropriate. 5. be informed in advance of the basic content and general procedures of a course and to be sure that the course will not change substantially after registration. You also have therightto receive at the beginning of a course a written outline and to receive written notification of changes in the course outline. The course outline normally will include course objectives, teaching meth- 10. review any of your examinations and major course assignments up to the beginning of the following semester. 11. retain intellectual property concerning your assignments, essay, theses, and other written work. Student Responsibilities It is your responsibility to acquaint yourself with course outlines, content, evaluations and methodology. You are also responsible for conducting yourself in a reasonable manner and in accordance with college policies as set out in the college calendar. You are responsible for: 1. enquiring into the availability of your instructors (time and place). 2. communicating with instructor and/or counsellors in order to solve any of the problems that you may encounter. 3. attending classes and being punctual. 4. submitting your assignments in the required format to your instructors within the deadline; or, if you cannot do so, for making other arrangements with the agreement of the concerned instructor. 5. being familiar with the information contained in the course outlines and for seeking from your instructors clarification of any areas of concern. 6. undertaking to complete course requirements as described in the course outline and to observe deadlines and schedules contained therein. 7. discussing any dissatisfactions with the instructor concerned before attempting further redress through appropriate college channels. 8. respecting therightsof students, faculty, staff, administrators and other persons associated with the college. 9. respecting other people's health and their right to security and dignity. 10. adhering to college policies regarding improper student conduct including: a) cheating and plagiarism; b) improper behaviour; c) sexual harassment. (See statements of these policies.) General Information - Policies 33 Services ADVISING AND EDUCATIONAL PLANNING Personnel Jean BERRY, B.A. (Wisconsin), Advisor Elin BRNJAC, Educational Planning Assistant Marni BUSH, Educational Planning Assistant Jeri KROGSETH, B.A. (UBC) B.C. Teacher's Cert., Advisor David O'LEARY, B.A.(ed.) (Memorial), Dip. Adult Ed. (Alta.) M.Ed. (UBC), Advisor & Dept. Supervisor Advisors visit secondary schools in the College region and throughout the Dower Mainland each Fall and Spring to speak to student groups about opportunities at Capilano College. High school students planning to enter the College may take advantage of admission interviews at their school by contacting their school counsellor for appropriate dates. Prospective and current students may contact the Advising Centre for information on all College programs and courses and for assistance with educational planning and program selection. At present, the Achievement Resource Centre offers the following services: a. Credit courses which provide opportunities for students to learn and adopt methods that lead to success in college. b. Scheduled workshops on study skills to help students succeed at college. See Preparatory Programs section. c. Personal assistance for students who are doing well but want to improve further. d. Assistance in using computer resources available in the Centre. Resources available are: 1) Hardware - Macintosh, IBM-compatible Computers, 1 typewriter. 2) Software - word processing, spelling, vocabulary and keyboarding skills. 3) Self-paced learning programs on cassette, video, and computer diskette to improve study and learning skills. 4) Group and individualized instruction for study skills development. The ARC also provides written study tips. Appointments may be made at the advising desk in AR Building or by calling the Advising Hot Line at 984-4990. Drop-in advising, application and pre-registration workshops are also available. For more information, call 984-4945 or drop by the Achievement Resource Centre, LB Building. ACHIEVEMENT RESOURCE CENTRE The Mathematics Learning Centre (MLC), located in J107, provides services for all students at the College. During scheduled hours, students may obtain individual assistance with math problems from the lab supervisor or instructor on duty. The MLC has two study areas (one for silent, individual study and the other for quiet, group Faculty John BROOKS, B.A. (SFU) Ruth D'HOLLANDER, B.C. Teaching Cert., B.Ed. (McGill), M.Ed. (McGill), C.A.S. (Harvard) Bev HILL, B.Ed. (UBC) Wendy LYNN, B.Sc. (Carleton), M.Sc. (Waterloo) Susan MURRAY, B.Ed. (T.E.S.L.) (Concordia) M.A. (Applied Linguistics) (Concordia) Alison PARRY, B.A. (York University) Peggy SHANNON M.Ed. (UBC), First Nations Advisor Jan SHIELL, M.Ed. (UBC) Support Staff Erica BRANT, Learning Assistant Lynne HAMILTON, Divisional Assistant The Mathematics Learning Centre study), a video room, and a library of math reference texts. The MLC video room is equipped with six video stations where students may view video tapes on topics in calculus, precalculus, algebra and statistics. Achievement Resource Centre - Squamish and Sechelt ARC programs and services are also offered in these locations. Contact the local College receptionist for more information: in Squamish 986-3515 (toll free from North Vancouver) or 892-5322 (local); in Sechelt 987-1535 (toll free) or 885-9310 (local). Achievement Resource Centre - North Vancouver Writing Centre Students wanting to increase their learning efficiency are invited to use the services and facilities of the Achievement Resource Centre (ARC), in LB Building. Students who have specific learning difficulties are encouraged to talk over their concerns with ARC Faculty. All students registered at the College may visit the Writing Centre (FR406) for advice on written assignments or help with writing problems. The Centre is not a proofreading service, but aims to help students develop their writing ability. General Information - Services 34 The Centre also offers resources for writing: quiet space, a collection of reference books, handout sheets and exercises, and computers with word processing, outlining, and editing programs. The Writing Centre is located in FR406, inside the Humanities Division. It is staffed by faculty members from the English, ESL, and ABE Departments. Open hours are posted. ATHLETICS AND RECREATION BOOKSTORE The Bookstore, located in R building at the northwest corner of the campus, offers required and recommended texts, stationery and sundry items. When classes are in session, the Bookstore is usually open Monday through Thursday 8:30 a.m. to 8:30 p.m. and Fridays 8:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. The Bookstore accepts VISA, MASTERCARD and INTERAC. For information regarding used books, please contact the Capilano Students' Union. Administration Joseph IACOBELLIS, B.P.E., M.P.E. (UBC), Manager THE CAPILANO REVIEW Faculty The Capilano Review is a tri-annual magazine of the arts, publishing poetry, fiction, fine art and drama from all over Canada and the world. Since its beginnings in 1972 in the Capilano College Humanities Division, the magazine has been recognized four times for excellence by the National Magazine awards and been cited by the Canadian Studies Association. Its distribution spans nine countries. The Capilano Review is published by The Capilano Press Society; it receives support funding from The Canada Council, The B.C. Cultural Fund, Capilano College, and The B.C. Gaming Commission. Subscriptions are $25 for one year (three issues). Write to: The Capilano Review c/o Capilano College. Telephone: (604) 984-1712. Fax: (604) 983-7520. Milton WILLIAMS, B.P.E. (UBC), Programmer Support Staff Wade KEELER, Senior Attendant Geoff KERSHAW, Evening Attendant Matt MORRIS, Evening Attendant Wendy WEBERG, Program Assistant Athletics Capilano is a full member of the British Columbia Colleges Athletic Association, which is the governing body for all intercollegiate athletics in the Province. Provincial championships are determined annually with winners advancing to national finals. This affords our College's highly skilled student athletes an opportunity to meet with and compete against the best College athletes in Canada. Intercollegiately, Capilano Blues teams compete in soccer, basketball, volleyball and badminton, both for women and men. Each year, our many exceptional athletes, working with the experienced Blues coaching staff and managers, have combined to produce both provincial and national championship teams. Capilano College is proud of the accomplishments of its student athletes and of its growing reputation for athletic excellence. COUNSELLING Faculty Daniel FRANKEL, B.A. (Concordia), M.Ed. (McGill) David JONES, B.A., M.A. (Dalhousie) Yvonne McCOLL, B.A. (Simmons), M.Ed. (Harvard) Ethelyn McINNES-RANKIN, B.A. (University of Winnipeg), M.A. (UBC) Susan MITCHELL, B.S.Ed. (N. Illinois), M.A. (UVic) Sukhi SOHI, M.A. (UBC) Support Staff Receptionists: John DOWLER and Norma McALLISTER Campus Recreation An expanding intramural program, utilizing the College's Sportsplex facility and the Weight Training Centre, together with recreation and fitness programs, are available during both Fall and Spring terms. Some examples of the scheduled activities available are: co-ed volleyball, basketball, indoor soccer, badminton, aerobics, karate, weight training and many more. The Sportsplex is located in the south east corner of the south campus parking lot across from AR Building. For complete athletic, campus recreation program information, contact the staff at the Sportsplex, 984-1737. General Information The counsellors at Capilano College are professionals trained to provide a variety of counselling services designed to promote and support students' academic success, identification and achievement of appropriate career goals, and personal growth. At present, the Counselling Department offers the following services to Capilano College Students: Educational Counselling is available to help students plan their college education and choose courses and programs suited to their interests, aptitudes and career goals. General Information - Services 35 Students are advised to consult with a counsellor when experiencing academic difficulties. Students must see a counsellor before registering for an overload or when considering filing a formal grade appeal. Counsellors often act as advocates for students. Career Counselling offers help to students who are having trouble deciding on a career, who perhaps feel unsure, confused, or lacking motivation. Counselling and testing can help students make realistic career plans based on their interests, skills and abilities. Personal Counselling is available to help students who are experiencing personal difficulties. Counsellors can help students to clarify issues, find effective ways of dealing with their problems and overcome obstacles to academic success. Workshops designed to help students succeed are offered throughout the term in such areas as career exploration, goal-setting, motivation, procrastination, stress management, communication and assertion training. also contains calendars from Canadian and foreign universities and colleges (in print and on microfiche), and free informational brochures on campus and community resources. Copies of past and current course outlines for Capilano College are available for reference in choosing courses and instructors. Also, some career and program information is on video tape, which can be viewed in the Centre. For assistance, contact the receptionist, in the "M" Building. The Career Resource Centre is open from 8:30 - 5:00 p.m., Monday through Thursday, and from 8:30 - 4:30 p.m. on Fridays. DAYCARE The Capilano College Day Care Centre is located in "DA" Building and is open from 7:30 a.m. - 5:30 p.m., Monday through Friday. The centre is staffed by fully—qualified, caring early childhood educators who engage the children in creative learning activities. Outreach Programs are offered to students on academic probation to help them identify obstacles and plan strategies for success. Full-time day care is available to students with children. Applications for day care are available from the day care centre, and should be submitted at least six months prior to the beginning of term. Credit Courses that are a full term in length are taught by the counsellors on strategies for student success. DISABILITY SUPPORT SERVICES The Counselling Department is located in the "M" Building on the North Campus. Appointments to see a counsellor may be made through the receptionist in "M" Building, or by calling 984-1744. Appointment times are available Monday through Friday, from 9 a.m. to 4 p.m. Drop-In counselling is also available to accommodate students in crisis or emergency situations, or for short consultations. All counselling is confidential. Those living in the Pemberton - Howe Sound Region requiring the assistance of a counsellor should contact the Squamish Regional Centre. Appointments may be arranged by calling 892-5322. Sunshine Coast Region residents should call the Sechelt Regional Centre, 885-9310. Career decision-making workshops and individual career counselling and testing are available for a fee to prospective students and community members through the College's Extension Department. Please call Extension Programs and Services for information and registration. CAREER RESOURCE CENTRE The College assists students considering career options by providing information and reference materials on a wide variety of occupations. The Career Resource Centre is located in "M" Building, and houses a collection of selfhelp books, vocational literature, information on occupational outlooks and labour market trends. The Centre General Information - Services 36 Faculty Jolene BORDEWICK, B.Sc. (Ed) (Idaho), M.Ed. (UBC), P.D.P. (SFU), A.R.W. Coordinator Lucas FOSS, B.A. (Carleton), M.A. Counselling Psychology, Adler School of Professional Psychology, R.C.C., A.R.W. Disability Support Services Advisor The Department of Disability Support Services is the identified point of entry for any student with a disability who requires classroom accommodation or technical equipment arrangements. Contact must be made at least four months in advance of course or program startup to ensure services. Following an intake interview and appropriate documentation, faculty will arrange: - transition and educational support services - college orientation and access information - registration assistance - entry and exit planning - instructor notification for classroom accommodation - exam invigilation - individualized support services - technical equipment needs - taped texts - interpreting services - notetakers and scribes - disabled parking passes The offices are located in the Arbutus Building in rooms 101b, 101c and 102. Faculty are available by appointment Monday to Friday, 8:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. August to June. Call 983-7526 for more information. DISTANCE EDUCATION FOOD AND BEVERAGE SERVICE Open Learning Agency Open College and Open University The main cafeteria, located in the Maple Building, offers full hot meal service during the Fall and Spring terms from approximately 8:00 a.m. through 8:30 p.m. daily except Fridays when it closes at 3:00 p.m. (The grill closes at 1:30 p.m.). For special events, catering services are available. Contact the Food Services Director, North Campus Cafeteria, Local 2970. The Open College and Open University, two components of the Open Learning Agency, offer a wide variety of credit and non-credit courses through open learning methods. Courses and programs can lead to one of several college diplomas or certificates or to a university degree. For information on course offerings and transfer credit, visit or write to the Open Learning Agency's Student Services office at 4355 Mathissi Place, Burnaby, B.C. V5G 4S8, or call (604) 431-3000. Knowledge Network The third component of the Open Learning Agency, the Knowledge Network also offers a wide range of credit and non-credit courses. For further information, call 6602000 (toll-free 1-800-663-1678). Open Learning In British Columbia In addition to the courses offered by the Open Learning Agency, there are many more open learning courses offered by British Columbia's colleges and universities. The Open Learning Agency can advise which courses are available, but specific enquiries should be directed to the sponsoring institution. FIRST NATIONS PROGRAMS AND SERVICES Faculty Peggy SHANNON, M.Ed. (UBC), First Nations Advisor The First Nations Student Advisor provides direct services to native students in a variety of ways: assistance with course selection and registration; information concerning College resources; advisor for special programs; liaison with Native Band education officers and college instructors; consultation regarding personal and educational matters. The Advisor also acts as resource to the student-based Native Issues Committee. Special programs and services for First Nations students and prospective students are also offered at the College's two Regional Centres. Presently located in the Achievement Resource Centre at the North Vancouver campus, the Advisor also coordinates advice provided to the College from its First Nations Advisory Committee, an external advisory group which meets quarterly. The smaller cafeteria, located in the Library Building, offers limited hot foods and snack items from approximately 8 a.m. through 8:30 p.m. Monday through Thursday; Friday 8 a.m. through 3:00 p.m. (The grill closes at 1:30 p.m.) A kiosk located in the Fir Building provides a selection of pastries, salads, sandwiches and coffee. The kiosk is open from 8:00 a.m. through 2:00 p.m. Monday to Friday when classes are in session. Vending service offering limited food, beverage and confectionery items is available in Maple and Fir Buildings, Library and Sportsplex.. Limited dining space (seating and circulation) does not allow for the use of either cafeteria for special functions during the period the food service is in operation, unless the function is designated by the College's administration. HEALTH SERVICES AND FIRST AID Personnel Dr. Bill MACKIE, M.D. (UBC), CCFP Donna SAVAGE, R.N., B.Sc.N. (UBC), OCC. First Aid Brenda JARVIS, R.N., ICC First Aid Located in the M building on the North Campus, the Health Services and First Aid Department is concerned with maintaining the good general health of all individuals on campus, and with providing a safe and healthy atmosphere in which to work and study. Emphasis is directed toward prevention of disease and injury and attainment of a healthy lifestyle. The following services are offered: 1. Health Counselling - offered on nutrition, weight control, immunization, birth control and other health related matters. 2. Physical Health Care - such as vision check, hearing tests, blood pressure check, pregnancy tests. 3. Diagnosis and Treatment of Illness—appointments with College physician may be made in person at M103, or by phoning 984-4964. 4. Pamphlets and articles on various topics are available in the reception area of Health Services. 5. Referrals to outside agencies or individuals can be made through Health Services. 6. Regular meetings of the Health and Safety Committee are held. Concerns or suggestions regarding hazards General Information - Services 37 or potential hazards can be submitted in writing via the student representatives. 7. First Aid - for emergency call local 2772 or 984-1772. First Aid Coverage Provided Monday - Friday 8:00 a.m. - 2:00 a.m. Weekends: 4:00 p..m. - 2:00 a.m. Daytime: as required - call 2772 or 984-1772 INTERNATIONAL OFFICE AND INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION Personnel Madeleine ADEOBA, Dean's Secretary Bob BAGSHAW, Co-op Coordinator, APMCP Jean BERRY, International Student Advisor Marjorie CROFT, International Administrative Assistant Louise KROHN, Director, Extension & Contract Services Scott MACLEOD, Program Coordinator, APMCP Ethelyn McINNES-RANKIN, International Student Advisor Edwin WONG, CANASEAN Manager Telephone: (604)984-4975 Fax: (604)984-1705 Office: AR 209, South Campus The International Office has responsibility for international education, programs and initiatives at Capilano, operating within the Division of Student and Instructional Services, assisted by the International Education Advisory Committee, a campus-wide representative committee which meets to provide direction to and co-ordination of Capilano projects. 1. International Student Information The College welcomes Applications for Admission from well-qualified students who normally reside in countries outside Canada. In 1994, there were approximately 180 international students studying regular courses at Capilano. They are enrolled in university transfer programs in the Academic Studies Division, specialized courses in the Career/Vocational Division and English as a Second Language. Normally, to be considered for admission, applicants should possess the equivalent of Secondary School graduation (Grade 12) in the Province of British Columbia. Students wishing assessment of their academic credentials should contact the Office of the Registrar. In certain programs, enrolment limitations are in effect both for international students and for Canadian citizens and residents. Entry to these programs is competitive and is based on academic standing and other published criteria. In accord with provincial government policy, international students are subject to higher tuition fees than Canadian students. General Information • Services 38 The International Student Advisors on campus give assistance to International Students both prior to and after their admission to the College and will provide specific assistance to applicants with student visa requirements, location of home stay accommodation, social and special programs, educational counselling and orientation. The Advisors are located in the Advising and Counselling Departments on campus. All other student services at the Lynnmour campus are also available to international students. An International Club is active on campus and provides opportunities for Canadian and international students to interact in social, recreational and learning activities. Interested students should note closing dates for applications for Fall, Spring, and Summer terms in an earlier section of this Calendar. All applications for admission should be directed to the Office of the Registrar and should be accompanied by a $100.00 (Can.) application fee. (See Admission and Readmission section for detailed application information.) 2. International Programs In the 1995-1996 academic year, the following programs will be offered: A. Asia Pacific Management Co-op Program This program, unique in Canada, enrolled its first class in 1987 and was an immediate success. Over 200 students have completed work terms in Asia. A two-year graduate diploma program in Asia Pacific studies and business, it is open to students who normally have completed an undergraduate degree from a recognized university or those who are sponsored by their employer. Combining an examination of culture, history, language, business, politics, and economics of Pacific Rim regions over the course of a full time, nine-month intensive period at the College, and followed by a co-operative work experience of twelve months, usually overseas, graduates become immediately involved in working with industry in development and trade-related business. See PostGraduate Programs section for details. B. CANASEAN CANASEAN is another unique program at this College, specifically designed to meet the needs of business men and women in Canada and from countries forming part of the Association of South East Asian Nations (ASEAN) plus China and Vietnam. Begun in the mid-1980s as a short seminar/workshop series, it now has become a four-month program. In the Fall term, ASEAN managers take part in intensive training on campus and with local enterprises on business and culture, plus a period of job observation understanding how Canadian businesses work and how business can be developed between Canada and Asia. This project is wholly funded by ministries of the federal and provincial governments. Interested applicants should contact the Manager. C. Other Programs From time to time, the College offers specific programs designed to meet the needs of particular groups, industries, governments or agencies. In 1993, these included programs in international tourism management, English Language culture, the Chinese Summer School and small business entrepreneurship. These are normally arranged through the International Office or the Contract Services Department. 3. Other International Courses A number of individual programs offered in the Academic and Career Divisions have specific courses providing international content. Some of them are optional, while others are an integral part of the curriculum leading to a college degree diploma or certificate. Examples of these will be found in the relevant sections of this Calendar in Business Management, Biology, Geography, History, Political Studies and Sociology. The Languages Department currently schedules first-year university level courses in French, German, and Spanish as well as first year level in Japanese, Mandarin, Chinese and Thai. English as a Second Language courses provide foreign and new immigrant students a variety of intermediate and advanced courses to help improve competency in English for work, daily life, and post-secondary study. English language training is also offered in the summer; these home-stay programs are designed for groups only. 4. International Exchanges The College has been active for a number of years in promoting exchanges with colleges, universities and other agencies outside Canada. Students from Capilano and Japanese institutions have exchanged as have faculty from Rajamangala Institute of Technology, Thailand, and Open University of Ho Chi Minh City in Vietnam. Capilano College and Aichi Gakusen College of Toyota City, Japan established a special relationship in 1983 which provides for the annual exchange of students between the two colleges. Up to three Capilano female students study and work at Aichi Gakusen from late September until mid-winter. Each student is provided with a scholarship of Y750,000 (approx. Cdn. $7,500), a Vancouver-Tokyo-Nagoya round trip ticket and free tuition in a special program of studies specifically tailored to the individual student. The total value of the scholarship is approximately Cdn. $20,000 for each student. Formal agreements have been signed with other postsecondary educational institutions in China, Malaysia, Thailand, Japan and other countries of the Pacific Rim which will continue to enhance opportunities for exchange. A special exchange agreement with Kushiro Public University in Japan provides for faculty exchange annually. As a member of a number of international education training associations in Canada and the United States, the College is able to provide a variety of opportunities for students and faculty to study, travel, or work overseas. 5. International Projects and Initiatives With a particular focus on Pacific Rim endeavour, Capilano College has been and continues to be involved in development and training activities in Malaysia, the Philippines, Thailand, Japan, Indonesia, Vietnam and the People's Republic of China. Current examples include curriculum development at a university in Vietnam, small business management training for Indonesian managers, and a business linkage project in Thailand. For further information on any of these international activities or other international education opportunities, contact the Head of the International Office as indicated. LIBRARY Administration Frieda WIEBE, B.A. (U of S), M.L.S., M.B.A. (UBC), College Librarian Faculty Debra FLEWELLING, B.A., M.L.S. (UBC) Karin HALL, B.A. M.L.S. (UBC) David LAMBERT, B.A. (U of A), M.L.S. (UBC) Annette LOREK, B.A., M.L.S. (McGill) George MODENESI, B.A., M.L.S. (UBC) Sidney MYERS, B.A. (UBC), M.L.S. (Western) Maureen WITNEY, B.A. (Trent), M.L.S. (U of T) Support Staff John BOYLAN, Technical Services Kathleen COSGROVE, Audio-Visual Services Sharon FEYER, Audio-Visual Services Heike FAERBER, Audio-Visual Services Karen KLAVER, Circulation Services Dianella KNIGHT, Media Production Services James KWOK, Circulation Services Anne MOYE, Secretary Carol NOONAN, Technical Services General Information • Services 39 Nola O'BRIEN, Technical Services Gail OWEN, Circulation Services Diane PARKER, Technical Services Edna SAKATA, Media Production Services Karyn SCHMID, Circulation Services Judy STEAR, Circulation Services Karen WAUGH, Technical Services Hours Monday - Thursday 8:00 a.m. -10:30 p.m. Friday 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Saturday - Sunday 1:00 p.m. - 5:00 p.m. Collections Students have access to a book collection of 100,000 volumes, and a periodical and newspaper collection of 950 titles, as well as collections of videos, compact disks, cd-rom and online databases, maps, government documents, annual reports and pamphlets. The INNOPAC online catalogue provides access to books, videos and other library materials. A variety of online, cd-rom, and print indexes provide access to the periodicals and newspaper collections. Reference Services Audio-Visual Services A variety of audio-visual software and equipment is available for use in the library or may be booked for classroom presentations. Films, videos, records, cassette tapes, and CD's are listed in the library's catalogue. Projectors, video players, cassette recorders, CD players and record players are available for individual use at library study carrells or for small group use in the library's preview room. Media Production Services Assistance in the design, preparation, and production of audio-visual materials is provided. Selected equipment, including computers, is available for self-help use. Overheads, laserprints, colour laser copies, laminating, and other products and services are available at the cost of materials. Ask at Media Production Services. Sechelt & Squamish A small collection of reference and information materials is housed at each regional campus. Access to the entire college library collection is provided by a catalogue of holdings. A library orientation and basic research methods class is provided by the Regional liaison librarian at the beginning of each term. Inter-campus loans and telephone reference services are also provided. Students receive a library orientation and basic research methods class during the first year English, Psychology, and Communications courses. Other courses often include a class in the use of library materials specific to the subject area. Individual research assistance, CI>ROM and other electronic search services are also available. Ask at the reference desk. Students may inquire about lost or found items in the Student Union office, located in the Maple Building. Circulation Services OFFICE OF THE REGISTRAR Students are required to present current Capilano College I.D. to borrow library materials. I.D. cards must be renewed each term. Loan periods are: Books: two weeks (no telephone renewals) Reference books: in-library use only Periodicals: in-library use only Newspapers: in-library use only Reserve materials: varies from 3 hours to 1 week Films & Videos: 1 to 2 days Audio tapes: 1 week (except reserve cassettes) Records & CD's: in-library use only Administration Note: Fines are charged on all overdue library materials. Hourly and daily charges vary depending on whether the item is on reserve, recalled, or on regular loan. Please note the due date on each item borrowed and return materials on time. Failure to return materials and pay all fines at the end of each term will result in debt listing (transcripts are withheld and further registration is prohibited). General Information - Services 40 LOST AND FOUND Dianna L. LARSEN, B.A. (SFU), M.A. (Gonzaga); Registrar Barbara ROBERTSON, B.Ed. (UBC); Associate Registrar Support Staff Jeanne CLASSEN; Secretary Doreen COTTRELL, Office Manager, Records and Registration Lee EDERER; Registration/Admission Assistant I Lynda GOCH: Registration/Admissions Assistant I Cheryl HELM, BA (UBC); Registration/Admissions Officer Bev HUGHES; Registration/Admissions Assistant II Colleen LIPTAJ; Registration/Admissions Assistant I Jan MERRICK; Registration/ Admissions Assistant I Carol PASKARUK; Registration/Admissions Assistant I Hazel SOON; Registration/Admissions Officer Sharon WITT; Registration/Admissions Assistant I The Office of the Registrar, located in the Arbutus Building, Lynnmour Campus, is responsible for the maintenance of all permanent student records, including admission and registration procedures for all prospective and continuing students, and for the administration of College policies pertinent to those areas. A l l student records are processed and discharged through this office, including applications for admission, offers of admittance, assessment of transcripts for Canadian and International applicants, grade entry, student identification cards, registration in courses, waitlists, course additions, withdrawals, transfer credit, change in name, address or telephone, issuance of transcripts, and replacement of documents. The Office of the Registrar also coordinates all graduation and student awards ceremonies, verification of program completion, Deans' and Merit lists, semester timetables, examination timetables, and course articulation with provincial universities. Housed with the Office of the Registrar is the Cashier's Department of Financial Services, which is responsible for the collection of tuition and other fees, invoicing, and verification of payments to the College. Questions should be directed as follows: Admissions/Student Records: 984-4913 Cashier: 986-1911, ext.2012 Graduation Status: 986-1911, ext. 2014 Transcripts: 986-1911, ext. 2084 Regular Hours Mon/Tue/Wed: 9:00 am to 6:30 pm Thur: 10:30 am to 6:30 pm Fri: 9:00 am to 4:00 pm Summer Hours Mon/Tue/Wed/Fri: 9:00 am to 4:00 pm Thur: 10:00 am to 4:00 pm Cashiers' Office Donna BURTON Vera CONROY Rosemary M E E C H , Cashier Supervisor A. W O N G The Cashiers' Office is responsible for the receipt and collection of fees, the issuing of invoices, and making refunds. Telephone: 986-1911, local 2012. PARKING Pay Parking PAY PARKING covers all parking spaces at the North Vancouver Campus, including all those on roadways and will be in effect 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, all year. The administration and operation of pay parking at Capilano College is the responsibility of Imperial Parking Limited. A L L permit sales, equipment and the administration of all violation notices, fines and towing is handled by Imperial Parking Limited. Permit fees: $15.00 per month or $50.00 per term (4 calendar months) or $90.00 for 12 months (September 1 August 31). Towing The following parking regulations, which have been designed to meet the Fire Marshal's instructions, are in effect: a. No parking in Fire Lanes/Zone. b. Vehicles parked in spaces reserved for Persons with Disabilities must display a valid Provincial Permit (wheelchair symbol) and a valid paid parking permit/ ticket. Parking Permits for Persons with Disabilities may be applied for at Health Services or Disability Support Services. c. Speed and parking signs must be observed and compliance is required. Vehicles parked in violation of posted signs or in Fire Lanes are subject to immediate tow to an off-campus location at the owner/driver's risk and expense. Car Pool Registered car pools of three or more individuals arriving and unloading at the same time, in one vehicle, in the designated parking area, will be provided with free parking in the Car Pool Area. Information regarding registering for car pooling may be obtained from the Purchasing Department located in Arbutus Building Room 018 (ground floor) or by calling 984-4904. Persons wishing to form a car pool group may use the "EASY RIDER" computer car pool matching program (located in the Library at the main entrance). Office Hours: Regular Hours Mon/Tue/Wed Thurs Fri 9:00 am to 6:30 pm 10:30 am to 6:30 pm 9:00 am to 4:00 pm Summer Hours Mon/Tue/Wed/Fri 9:00 am to 4:00 pm Thurs 10:00 am to 4:00 pm General Information - Services 41 SECURITY Capilano College is concerned with the safety and security of students, faculty, staff and visitors on campus. Security at the North Vancouver campus is provided by uniformed officers on foot patrol and in clearly identified patrol vehicles. These officers are available to escort any member of the College community. Advanced notice is appreciated, but not required. Campus security may be reached at 984-1763. A security awareness orientation is provided to every class at the beginning of each term. Faculty, particularly those teaching evening classes, promote and actively encourage the buddy system. Students are advised to walk with a friend, or, if possible, travel in groups to parked cars or to other locations, or get a ride to their vehicle if they are parked some distance away from others. SPORTSPLEX AND FITNESS CENTRE The Sportsplex, one of the finest multipurpose facilities in the province, houses the intramural programs, athletics gymnasium-based programs, extension courses in sports and recreation and a general activity drop-in program for those choosing a less structured schedule. Each of these programs offer a variety of activities which will satisfy the recreational needs of the student body. Facilities include a 14,500 sq. ft. gymnasium with seating capacity for 1,700 suitable for basketball, volleyball, badminton, indoor soccer, wrestling, martial arts and many other activities; a 2,000 sq. ft. aerobics gym, weight and fitness centre, dressing rooms and sauna. A wide range of services including towel service, locker rentals, first aid, laundry service and equipment loans are available. Current hours of operation during the term (September to April) are: Monday to Friday: 8:30 a.m. to 11:00 p.m. and Saturday/Sunday: 10:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. For detailed information about specific programs offered in the Sportsplex each year, contact the staff at 984-1737. STUDENT EMPLOYMENT CENTRE Personnel David SHARROCK, Student Employment Advisor Lynne SOMERVILLE, Student Employment Advisor The Student Employment Centre's overall objective is to help students secure suitable employment specific to their individual needs. Our key thrust is to equip students with the knowledge and skills required to successfully manage their individual job searches. General Information - Services 42 To meet this challenge the Student Employment Centre offers a variety of services to all Capilano College students and alumni, year-round. Services include: - assistance with the development of meaningful and realistic goals - critiquing and recommending suggestions on how to prepare effective and professional resumes and covering letters - advice on developing a contact network of potential employers - guidance with the preparation and presentation of interview strategies - information and assessment of job offers - provision of encouragement and support through all phases of the job search process In addition to providing students with employment readiness guidance, the Student Employment Centre develops and maintains working relationships with employers to encourage employment opportunities. Throughout the year, hundreds of seasonal, part time, contract and career-oriented jobs are displayed on a centralized Job Posting Board for interested candidates to review. The Centre offers drop-in service, individual appointments and in-class group presentations. All students wishing to use the services offered are encouraged to visit the Centre early in their academic term. For further information visit the Centre, located in the M building, or call 984-4965 Monday through Friday. STUDENT NEWSPAPER The student newspaper at Capilano College is the Capilano Courier, published every other week. The Courier is run by an independent staff of student volunteers, autonomous from the student society and College administration. It is a full member of Canadian University Press, a co-operative news and support resource organization of more than sixty campus papers from across Canada. Since the Courier is written, organized, and laid out on campus, there is always a need for help. Students are encouraged to take part in news and feature writing, reporting, editing, layout, photography, artwork, desktop publishing, graphic design, and advertising. The newspaper is not a "class project" and therefore offers the chance for all students to participate in the democratically-run collective staff. The Courier welcomes input from the entire College community. Classified ads (which are free to students, staff, and faculty), letters to the collective, and other contributions can be submitted to their offices. STUDENTS' UNION Students who register for credit courses at the Lynnmour campus of Capilano College pay Students' Union fees, thus becoming a member of the Students' Union. Part of this fee is membership within the Canadian Federation of Students, Canada's national representative student organization. The Students' Union is a registered nonprofit society, incorporated under the Societies Act of British Columbia, co-ordinated by an elected board of student directors. The Students' Union is the recognized medium of communication with: the board and administration of Capilano College; the Capilano College Faculty Association; Office & Technical Employees' Union, local 378; the general public; and other associated students' unions. Main goals of the Students' Union are: 1. To organize students on a democratic, co-operative basis in order to provide a framework within which students can communicate, exchange information, and share experience, skills, and ideas for advancing students' interests. 2. To facilitate co-operation among students in organizing events which supplement the learning experience, provide for human needs, and develop a sense of community in British Columbia, Canada, and the world. 3. To bring students to discuss and co-operatively achieve necessary educational, administrative and legislative change in order to achieve the goal of a post-secondary system which is nationally planned, high quality, and accessible to all. The Students' Union has opened a second office on the south campus. This office is located in the Library Building between the Library and Cafeteria. This office is open in the evening to accommodate members taking evening classes. For further information call 984-4969 or fax, 984-4995. STUDENT STORE — CAP CORNER The student store is located in the Library building between the library and the south cafeteria adjacent to the bank machine and public telephones. It is operated by the Retail Marketing students. Its hours of operation are Monday to Thursday from 10:15 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. Cost centre transfer purchases can be made by contacting Charlene Hill in the Retail Marketing Co-op Program. This small store serves as a teaching aid allowing students to put into practical use the skills they learn while in the classroom. The store sells Capilano College sweatwear, school supplies, common pharmaceutical items, gifts, candy, snacks and cold drinks. Special sweatwear orders for clubs, organizations, and various athletic teams can be arranged. Through general meetings of the entire student body and a structure of committees open to all students, the direction of the Students' Union is decided and its goals met. Students' Union affairs run from educational forums to social events to student workstudy jobs. Daily operations are handled by the full-time staff collective and the executive committee of elected students. Elections for executive committee positions occur on campus each semester and all students may participate in running, campaigning and voting. In addition, the Students' Union maintains a number of services to aid students day-to-day. Inexpensive photocopies, a free phone, a used textbook consignment sale, laser printing, document binding, resume printing, a housing registry, international student identity cards, inexpensive stationery items, and a student saver consumer discount program, are some of the services offered. The Students' Union General Office is located in the Maple Building next to the Students' Lounge and North Cafeteria. Office hours are Monday to Friday, 9:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. General Information - Services 43 Financial Aid and Awards FINANCIAL AID AND AWARDS Personnel Doug CAMERON, Financial Aid Advisor Zulekha PIRANI, Financial Aid Assistant Valerie KENDRICK, Clerk Dates to Remember June 30 Bursary application deadline for summer term. October 6 General Bursary and Scholarship Application deadline for Fall Term. January 31 Bursary and scholarship application deadline for Spring Term. Refer to the 95/96 Awards and Financial Aid Guide for the dates of the Fall and Spring Awards Ceremonies. GENERAL INFORMATION The Financial Aid Office The Financial Aid Office is located in Room AR117, Arbutus Building, South Campus, and, in general, is open 8:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. Monday to Friday. Check posted hours for notice of closures during the term or call (604) 984-4966 for information or recorded message. Beginning in May, workshops are held to provide information regarding financial aid and to assist students with the completion of their B.C. Student Assistance Program (BCSAP) applications. Students must register for the workshops with the Financial Aid Clerk by phone or in person during regular office hours. Students are expected to have read the BCSAP Guide and attempted to complete the application form prior to attending the workshops. In addition to providing applications and information regarding BCSAP, bursaries, scholarships and loans, the office distributes brochures regarding financial aid and money management and, periodically during the term, provides workshops on effective money management. Financial Aid Advisors are available by appointment to provide financial counselling, prepare appeals and provide guidance to BCSAP applicants who wish to initiate a reassessment of their award. The B.C. Student Assistance Program (The following information is subject to change.) The B.C. Student Assistance Program is the major source of student financial assistance and is a combination of Federal Canada Student Loan (CSL) and B.C. Provincial Government Grant and/or Loan (BCSL). B.C. grant General Information - Financial Aid and Awards 44 eligibility is based on the first sixty-eight weeks of postsecondary education. To maintain grant eligibility in the second year of study, students must demonstrate successful completion in the first year. The amount of aid awarded is based on a standard means test. The maximum student aid available for a standard 34 week (two term) school year in 94/95 is $7,990 for students without dependents and $12,240 for students with dependents. Of these funds, in both cases, the first portion (up to 60% or $5,610 whichever is lower) will be Canada Student Loan funds. (At the time of printing this calendar, 95/96 allowances were unavailable) CSL and BCSL require no payment and are interest-free while the applicant is a full-time student (provided the bank has been properly notified of full-time status). Interest begins to accrue on the CSL in the month following full-time study. After term end or from the date of withdrawal students have six months within which to begin repayment of both loans. If at any time during the six month grace period or subsequent repayment period the student again enrolls in full-time study, the student must file a Schedule II (for CSL) and a Certificate II (for BCSL) with the bank to return their outstanding loans to interest-free and non-payment status. Interest charged on the CSL during a six-month grace period will be forgiven for students who enroll in full-time study prior to the end of the six months. PLEASE NOTE: Any changes to the B.C. Student Assistance Program for the 95/96 year will be announced after this calendar goes to print. Please refer to the 95/96 Application package and the Brochure "Awards and Financial Aid - A Student Guide" for updated information. Eligible applicants are Canadian citizens or landed immigrants who qualify as B.C. residents according to Ministry policy (outlined in the BCSAP guide). Applications are available by the beginning of May from any post-secondary institution but the completed application must be returned to Capilano College to be checked and forwarded to Victoria. Students whose award is less than the amount required to complete the educational term are advised to enquire at the financial aid office regarding appeals and reassessments. An appointment with a Financial Aid Advisor may be necessary. Students who have applied for student loans should note that N / A grades and audit courses do not carry credit and are treated as course withdrawals. N / A grades reduce total credit load, may cancel eligibility for future student loans and require early repayment of existing loans. Capilano College Student Loan Advance Policy The Financial Services Office may advance funds to students who are awaiting delivery of their student loan documents. To qualify for an advance the following conditions must be met: * students must have applied for BCSAP prior to the second week of classes * loan assessment must have been completed and results relayed to the College before an advance will be considered * advances will be produced the business day following the request * to receive an advance from the college, students must have paid the deposit amount toward tuition * first advances will be based on the need for books and supplies only (not rent money) and will not exceed $300 * additional advances will not be considered until the last week of September Requests for advances must be made in person to the Financial Services Office, Arbutus Building, Rm A119, between the hours of 12:30pm to 4:00pm, Monday to Friday during the educational term. Bursaries For Full-Time Students A bursary is non-repayable money granted on the basis of financial need. Bursaries administered by the Financial Aid Office are listed in this brochure under Bursaries. To be eligible to receive a bursary, students must maintain a Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.5, be enrolled in full-time study according to BCSAP criteria, and demonstrate financial need by completing the bursary application form available from the Financial Aid Office. First priority is given to students who have applied for student loans. One application per term is sufficient to be considered for all bursaries listed in this section. Applications are available at the beginning of each term; the deadlines are October 6th; January 31; and June 30. Additional bursaries and application information are listed under External Awards. through the Financial Aid Office for a fee waiver. Fee waivers are assessed on an individual basis and approval is not guaranteed. For application contact the Financial Aid Office after the beginning of classes. Bursaries For Part-Time Students A limited number of bursaries may be available to students enrolled in part-time study in the Fall and Spring Terms. Bursary applications which specify part-time enrollment are available through enquiry from the Financial Aid Office at the beginning of each term. The deadlines are October 13 and January 31. Emergency Aid Limited emergency bursary assistance is available to students who have had a portion of their educational funds depleted as a result of emergency costs which they are able to document. Students requiring emergency assistance must make an appointment with a Financial Aid Advisor. There is no guarantee that the students' needs will be met by bursary funds or that funds will be available for that purpose. Work-Study Program The Work-Study Program, a part of the British Columbia Student Assistance Program, is designed to provide oncampus work experience for students requiring financial assistance while attending college. A limited number of part-time on-campus jobs, averaging five to ten hours per week, may be available. The program is open only to fulltime students who satisfy B.C. residency criteria according to the terms of the B.C.Student Assistance Program. For answers to questions regarding eligibility, contact the Financial Aid Office. Applications are available in the Student Society Office, Maple Building. Adult Basic Education Student Assistance Program Scholarships are awards based on high scholastic achievement and are listed in several areas of this brochure. Some awards require application, some are conferred automatically based on the highest GPA of students in the course. Students registered in ABE and ESL programs may be eligible for Adult Basic Education Student Assistance Program grants (ABESAP) to meet education costs. Approval is based on demonstrated financial need and, for subsequent terms, on satisfactory progress during the previous funded term. Funds are available on a firstcome, first-served, basis. Applications are available from the Financial Aid Office or ABE Department. Deadline: Open. Capilano College Board Single Parent Fee B.C. Part-Time Student Assistance Program Waivers The Ministry of Advanced Education, Training and Technology offers limited non-repayable assistance for students in part-time study who are unable to increase their credit load to full-time status. This money is Scholarships Single parents who have studied at least one previous term at Capilano College and who have applied for student loans for the current term of study may apply General Information - Financial Aid and Awards 45 targeted to single parents and mature students. For application contact the Financial Aid Office. B.C. Loan Remission Program Students who receive loans in excess of $17,000 (94/95 ceiling) through BCSAP during the period of their first degree may qualify for Loan Remission (forgiveness of some of their student debt). For subsequent degrees the ceiling increases. The degree must be completed in a timely fashion and students must satisfy personal responsibility (as defined by BCSAP) during each loan application period in order to qualify. For detailed information contact the Ministry of Advanced Education, Training and Technology. Telephone 660-2610 from the Lower Mainland, or 1-800-561-1818 from anywhere in B.C. Federal Payment Relief Plan The Government of Canada will defer payment on fulltime and part-time Canada Student Loans on behalf of debtors who are experiencing financial hardships due to inability to find employment or to temporary disability. Students submit application for three month deferrals to the bank which holds their student loan. Additional information is available from the Student Assistance Directorate. Applications are available at the Financial A i d Office; please refer to the application for "Interest Relief." Contact for B.C. Student Assistance Program Student Services Branch Ministry of Skills, Training and Labour 2nd Floor, 1106 Cook Street Victoria, B.C V8V 3Z9 Tel: Lower Mainland: 660-2610 Outside Lower Mainland: 1-800-561-1818 Contact for Canada Student Loans Program Student Assistance Directorate Department of the Secretary of State P.O. Box 2090, Station D Ottawa, Ontario KIP 6C6 Tel: (819)994-1844 Capilano College Foundation The Capilano College Foundation was formed in 1970 to build community support for Capilano College. As a volunteer community organization established under the Societies Act, the Foundation raises and administers funds to assist students and enhance the development of a well-balanced learning environment. Working together with Capilano College's Resource Development Office, the Foundation seeks to expand its Scholarship and Bursary Program to recognize and support deserving students who need assistance to reach their educational goals. For information, or to make a tax deductible General Information - Financial Aid and Awards 46 contribution, please contact: Randi Duke, Executive Director, College Relations, Capilano College, 2055 Purcell Way, North Vancouver, B.C. V7J 3H5. Phone 9841709, Fax: 984-4985 CAPILANO COLLEGE ENTRANCE AWARDS Canada Scholarships Canada Scholarships worth $2500 each and renewable for up to four years ($10,000) are provided by the federal government to outstanding full-time students who are pursuing undergraduate degrees in science or engineering. The Registrar in consultation with the Science Faculty will nominate scholars in the fall from all applications received. Applications are available through the high school and must be submitted to the Registrar's Office, Capilano College, by mid-June. Capilano College Board Entrance Scholarships These scholarships will be awarded on the basis of academic merit. One scholarship in the form of a tuition fee waiver for two consecutive academic terms in a program of study of the student's choice will be made available through each of the high schools in the College region. Capilano College English Scholarship Tuition waivers and book prizes are available to the winners of an essay contest which is open to all Grade 12 students who will be graduating in the current year and who plan to register in Academic Studies at Capilano College in the Fall. Deadline: April 15. Contact the English Department for more information. Science Faculty and Staff Scholarships The Pure and Applied Sciences Division at Capilano College offers up to two $500 scholarships each fall. Eligible students are those who: - are taking a full grade 12 course load - expect to graduate with high marks - enrol in a full time Pure and Applied Sciences Program at Capilano College in the coming Fall Semester Applications are available from the Pure and Applied Sciences Division. Deadline: May 12 Science Textbook Publishers' Awards The Pure and Applied Sciences Division, in cooperation with textbook publishers, awards several first-year science textbooks to students with high grade point averages entering a science program at the College in the fall. Applications are available from the Science Division office (Room 471,4th Floor, Fir Building) at Capilano College and during registration at the Sciences Division Information Desk. Deadline: last day of registration for the Fall Term. Science Tuition Scholarships All students graduating this Spring from secondary schools and achieving a grade point average of at least 3.5 in a specified set of four grade 12 courses, and who register in at least 16.5 credits of study, including at least two of several specified science courses, in the Fall Term at Capilano College will receive a tuition scholarship covering course fees for the Fall term. Awards are made directly at registration rime. Contact Pure and Applied Sciences for details. SCHOLASTIC AWARDS Deans' List Special recognition will be accorded full-time students with a term and cumulative grade point average of 3.5 or higher at the end of a term. For the purposes of the Deans' List, a student with 15 or more credits in a term, or taking a full course load as outlined in the calendar for their program, shall be considered full-time. This achievement shall be recorded on the Permanent Student Record for each term in which these requirements are met. Merit List Special recognition will be accorded part-time students with a cumulative grade point average of 3.7 or higher upon completion of 30 or 60 credits. For the purposes of the Merit List, a student registered in fewer than 15 credits in a term shall be considered part-time. This achievement shall be recorded on the Permanent Student Record. The Governor-General's Collegiate Bronze Medal This award is presented to a Diploma graduate from a program of two-years' duration who has achieved the highest cumulative grade point average, and who has attained this grade point average on a minimum of 15 credit hours per term, or full program load as outlined in the Calendar, during attendance at Capilano College. The Lt. Governor's Silver Medal Awarded for academic excellence and contribution to the College and community to a graduate in a Vocational or Career program of less than two years' duration. BURSARIES (Administered by the Financial Aid Office - The following information is subject to change.) The bursaries identified in this section are administered by the Financial Aid Office. Unless otherwise directed, apply using the general bursary application available from the Financial Aid Office. Only one application is necessary to be considered for all awards described in this section. Students applying for bursaries administered through the Financial Aid Office are expected to have first applied for student loans. Applications are available at the beginning of each term. Deadlines: Fall Term: October 6; Spring Term: January 31; Summer Term: June 30 B.C. Tel Awards Two awards of $625 will be provided in the Spring term to students completing first year who intend to continue a second year at Capilano College. The awards are based on high scholastic performance and financial need. Applicants must submit a general bursary application form to the Financial Aid Office by January 31. Beaver Foods Bursary Beaver Foods, the caterers for Capilano College food service, has established a permanent endowment in the Capilano College Foundation. Income from the funds will go to assist students who have financial need and satisfactory academic achievement. Birks Family Foundation Bursaries The Birks Family Foundation offers bursaries to full-time students in financial need who are engaged in any academic program leading to a diploma, and who demonstrate that they are deserving of financial assistance. The amounts available and the number of awards may vary from year to year. Canadian Federation of University Women (North Vancouver Chapter) The recipient of the $250 bursary is to be a female student who is enrolled in second, third or fourth year of math, science or a professional school, who is a resident of North Vancouver and/or a graduate of a North Vancouver Secondary School (School District #44). Canadian Federation of University Women West Vancouver The West Vancouver chapter of the Canadian Federation of University Women has established an endowment in General Information - Financial Aid and A wards 47 the Capilano College Foundation. Income from the fund will be awarded annually in the form of a bursary to a mature woman student in financial need who has achieved a satisfactory academic performance in academic studies. Capilano College Faculty Association Two bursaries of $500 will be awarded in the Spring Term. Financial need is the main criterion. An additional $500 donation will go toward the establishment of an endowment fund. Credit Union Foundation of B.C. Bursaries The Credit Union Foundation of B.C. Bursaries totalling $800 annually are awarded by the Credit Union Foundation of B.C. on behalf of credit union members in British Columbia and in memory of the credit union pioneers. These bursaries are offered to a student or students who might otherwise have difficulty completing their studies by reason of financial hardship. Recipients are to be Canadians residing in British Columbia and in attendance at Capilano College. Educational Enhancement Fund Capilano College Student Trust Contributions from College employees and community members have created an endowment to provide scholarships and bursaries for deserving students. The funds are managed by the Capilano College Foundation and income from the endowment is awarded annually to students who qualify. Capilano Students' Union Emergency Bursaries The Capilano Students' Union donates to a Student Emergency Bursary Fund. The purpose of the fund is to assist students facing a financial crisis due to an essential but unexpected emergency expense. To be considered students must make an appointment with a Financial Aid Advisor. This fund, established by Capilano College with a matching grant from the Vancouver Foundation, provides for bursaries of varying amounts to students in need who have demonstrated satisfactory scholastic standing. Elizabeth Lees Memorial Bursary A memorial bursary fund has been established in recognition of Elizabeth Lees, a former history student at Capilano College. In recognition of her commitment to academic studies, her concern for working people and her interest in women, her friends have established the Elizabeth Lees Memorial Bursary. George Raven Wood Fund The Capilano Suspension Bridge has established an endowment the interest from which will provide for one or more bursaries for full-time students in the third or fourth term of the Tourism Management Program. Students must have a GPA of 2.33 or better, demonstrate financial need and potential within the tourism industry. A bequest from the estate of George Raven Wood has established a permanent fund in the Capilano College Foundation. Income from the endowment provides for a large number of bursaries which will be awarded in both Fail and Spring terms. A minimum GPA of 2.3 (C+) is required. A limited number of first-term students may be considered in exceptional cases but must provide letters of recommendation from three instructors. Bursaries are available to part-time and full-time students. CKNW Orphans' Fund Award Getaway Publications Bursary The CKNW Orphans' Fund has established a generous endowment fund to assist students with dependent children obtain their education. Applicants must have good academic standing and demonstrate financial need. Getaway Publications Ltd. offers an annual bursary to a student in the Tourism Management Co-op Diploma Program who has financial need. Selection will be made by the Financial Aid Office in consultation with faculty in the Program. Capilano Suspension Bridge Bursary Chan Foundation of Canada Bursary The Chan Foundation of Canada has established an endowment with the Capilano College Foundation. The purpose of this fund is to use the interest earned annually to provide one or more bursaries for students enrolled in the Tourism Management Program. To qualify a student must be enrolled full-time in the third or fourth term of the program, have at least a 2.33 GPA, be recommended for potential in the tourism industry and demonstrate financial need on the general bursary application. General Information - Financial Aid and Awards 48 I.O.D.E. Lions Gate Chapter Bursary - $500 Founded in 1900 in Canada, the IODE is a national women's organization with over 600 chapters in every province and both territories. The Lions Gate chapter has established a bursary for Music Therapy students who combine scholastic excellence and financial need. Jean Paterson Memorial Bursary Mary Neil Memorial Bursary The Canadian Daughter League - Assembly 12 North Vancouver has established an endowment in Memory of Jean Paterson with the Capilano College Foundation. Income from the fund will be awarded annually in the Fall Term in the form of bursaries to female students in the Music Transfer Program who have satisfactory academic achievement and financial need. This $500 award is presented by the Canadian Federation of University Women - West Vancouver in memory of Mary Neil, a former president and active member. She was a much loved and respected member of the club and had a life-long interest in education. The bursary is presented each year to a mature woman student studying full-time or part-time who has satisfactory academic standing, demonstrated financial need and who is registered in the academic program. John Percy Williamson Memorial Fund The family of John Percy Williamson has endowed an award with the Capilano College Foundation to assist students with good scholastic achievement who require financial assistance to complete their studies. The award is given in the spring term. John "Stein" Kramer Memorial Bursary This memorial bursary fund has been established in remembrance of John "Stein" Kramer. Stein was an Outdoor Recreation student in the graduating class of 1985 who was killed in a helicopter crash in June 1987. The bursary will be awarded to an Outdoor Recreation Management student registered in the second year of the program. Selection will be based on financial need, academic achievement, and demonstrated leadership capabilities. Kathleen Collins Foundation Bursary The Delta Kappa Gamma Society International is an honour society of women educators whose goals are to assist women in all areas of education. The society offers a bursary to a female student with financial need. Kathleen Herauf Memorial Bursary The Kathleen Herauf Memorial Bursary was established in honour of Kathleen who was a student in the Legal Assistant Program. This $300 award is granted on the basis of scholastic excellence and financial need to a student in the Legal Assistant Program in the Spring Term. Margaret Campbell Bursary A bursary is made possible by the North Shore Business and Professional Women's Club in recognition of Alderman Margaret Campbell's outstanding contribution to the North Vancouver Community and as past president of the Canadian Federation of Business and Professional Women's Club. The bursary is open to women students enrolled at Capilano College in at least three courses. Mike De Hullu Memorial Fund This bursary is established in memory of Mike de Hullu, a former student of the Capilano Wilderness Leadership program, who died in 1988. Income from the endowment fund will be used annually to assist students who demonstrate leadership in outdoor recreation pursuits and initiative in problem solving for current environmental issues. Priority will be given to students enrolled in Outdoor Recreation Management or the Environmental Sciences Diploma Program whose interests relate to BC waterways and forests. To be eligible, students must have completed at least one full term in their program. Music Therapy Association of BC Bursary The Music Therapy Association of BC has established a permanent endowment fund. The interest from this fund will provide one or more bursaries for Music Therapy students with high need and satisfactory academic performance who are enrolled in the fourth year of the program. Nan McLean Goodwin Bursary An endowment has been established in memory of Nan McLean Goodwin. Interest from this fund will be used to provide bursaries for classical musicians enrolled in the Bachelor of Music Transfer Program. NOREX Small Business Bursary The North Shore Executives' Association has established an annual bursary with the Capilano College Foundation to be known as the NOREX Small Business Bursary. Their purpose is to provide Fall awards for students enrolled at Capilano College who qualify by being enrolled full time in the third or fourth term of the Business Administration or Office Administration programs. Students are selected on the basis of satisfactory performance and financial need. General Information • Financial Aid and Awards 49 North Shore (Vancouver) Beta Sigma Phi Bursary An endowment established by Beta Sigma Phi - North Shore (Vancouver) will provide one or more bursaries in the Spring Term to female students enrolled in full-time study who can demonstrate satisfactory academic progress and financial need. Preference will be given to a Beta Sigma Phi relative. North Shore Business and Professional Women's Club Bursary An endowment has been established by the North Shore Business and Professional Women's Club. Income from the fund will be awarded as bursaries to women students enrolled at Capilano College in at least three courses. North Vancouver Babe Ruth Baseball Bursary An endowment fund has been created to provide the North Vancouver Babe Ruth Baseball Bursary. Interest generated by the endowment will be given to a student at Capilano College enrolled in full-time study, a resident of the North Shore who demonstrates satisfactory academic performance and has financial need. Operation Link Bursary Fund These bursaries are awarded to Business Administration students. Funds for Operation Link are provided by voluntary contributions of employers participating in Business Administration's work practicum program. Brossard, a former student at Capilano, had an outstanding talent in the Long Term Care Aide field. The bursary is provided by her family and friends in memory of her. Royal Canadian Legion Branch 60 (West Vancouver) Bursary A $500 bursary will be applied against tuition in the Spring term for a single parent living on the North Shore, preference given to a West Vancouver resident. Stephen Leskard Bursary Fund In 1985 Stephen Leskard retired after a long and distinguished teaching career at Capilano College. A founding member of the College's Art department, his efforts and professional work contributed greatly to the development of all three Art programs. Bursaries from this fund will be allocated to students in the Graphic Design & Illustration and Foundations of Graphic Design & Illustration programs. Candidates will be judged on artistic abilities and financial need. Tourism Management Bursary Donations from the Lonsdale Quay Hotel, TSI Telequip Equipment and Tourism Management Alumni have created an endowment to provide bursaries for students enrolled in the Tourism Management program. Vancouver Municipal and Regional Employees' Union Bursary The Office and Technical Employees' Union, Local 378, provides two bursaries of $300 to be awarded on the basis of financial need to full-time students in the Spring term. The Vancouver Municipal and Regional Employees' Union provides a bursary based on financial need for dependents of VMREU members. Students MUST state on the general bursary application for the Spring term that they want to be considered for the VMREU bursary and provide their parents' names. Pirani Family Tourism Bursary Wellington Award The Capilano Motor Inn has established an endowment to provide bursary funding to deserving students in the 3rd or 4th term of the Tourism Management Program. An endowment has been established to provide bursaries for students enrolled in the third semester of the Infotec Program. Real Estate Foundation Bursaries Women Mean Business - North Shore The Real Estate Foundation has established an endowment fund in the Capilano College Foundation. Income from the fund will be awarded annually in the form of scholarships and bursaries to students studying in realestate-related courses in the business and legal programs. A $500 bursary is made available in the Fall term to a mature woman returning to school, and is a resident of the North Shore (who intends to study business). Rosalind Brossard Memorial Bursary The Women's Programs Ministry of the Provincial Government has established a $500 bursary to assist female students enrolled in either a full or part-time degree, diploma, or certificate program of not less than O.T.E.U. Bursary This bursary is provided to assist a student with financial need in the Resident Care Attendant Program. Rosalind General Information - Financial Aid and Awards 50 Women's Equality Bursary one year. Students must demonstrate financial need and academic achievement. The bursary will be awarded in the spring session. SCHOLARSHIPS (General Scholarships or those administered by the Financial Aid Office - The following information is subject to change) The Aichi Gakusen Scholarships In early fall each year, the Dean's Office, Student and Instructional Services, posts notice across campus of an information meeting regarding the Aichi Gakusen Scholarships. Women students interested in spending six months in Japan as an exchange student are invited to attend. Information regarding the scholarship and application procedures are covered at the meeting. For further information, contact the Deans' Office, Student and Instructional Services, 2nd floor, A Building. British Pacific Properties Scholarship British Pacific Properties Limited has established a permanent endowment with Capilano College to fund the British Pacific Properties Scholarship. The interest generated from this endowment will go to a full-time student with a minimum GPA of 3.5 enrolled in any career/vocational or academic course of study. Preference will be given to a North Shore resident who demonstrates financial need. Students apply through the Financial Aid Office using the general bursary application. Deadlines are October 15 and January 31. Capilano College Foundation Scholarships Four $600 scholarships will be awarded annually to the highest achieving full-time students (determined by Grade Point Average) in the Academic and Career programs. Selection is automatic. Scholarships are limited to students returning for their second year and are intended to help defray tuition fee and book costs. Capilano College Student Trust Contributions from College employees and community members have created an endowment to provide scholarships and bursaries for deserving students. The funds are managed by the Capilano College Foundation and income from the endowment is awarded annually to students who qualify. Students must have completed at least 12 credits at Capilano College prior to submitting the application and must have achieved a Grade Point Average of at least 3.5. Applications for scholarships are available from the Financial Aid or Registrars Office and must be returned to the Registrar by September 30 for the Fall term, and by January 31 for the Spring term. Capilano Suspension Bridge Scholarship A $600 Scholarship will be awarded annually in the third term of the Tourism Management Co-op Program to the student achieving the highest G.P.A. in the first term. The student must be attending the program full-time in order to be eligible. North Shore Women's Centre Award This award was established by the founding members of the North Shore Women's Centre (established 1974). The award is given in memory of Betty Cave and other founding members who contributed much to improving women's lives through their work with the North Shore Women's Centre. The award is to assist mature female students enrolled in any field of post-secondary study, on either a full-time or part-time basis. Preference is given to applicants who can demonstrate interest in and awareness of women's issues. Applicants are expected to have a standing of 2.33. Applications are available from the Financial Aid Office. Completed applications must be returned to the Financial Aid Office by October 6 (Fall Term) and January 31 (Spring Term). Paul Gallagher Scholarship for Excellence Dr. Paul Gallagher, former Principal of Capilano College, was noted for his scholastic achievement, qualities of leadership, enthusiastic approach to work and leisure and warmth and compassion towards others. In his honour the College Board has established the Paul Gallagher Scholarship for Excellence. A maximum of one Paul Gallagher Scholarship for Excellence may be awarded for each academic year to a student maintaining a minimum 3.5 GPA. Applicants must be Canadian citizens or landed immigrants and must have completed at least 15 credit hours of course work at Capilano College prior to taking up the scholarship. This scholarship offers a tuition fee waiver and $250 per term, to be spent on books and other educational expenses for the next academic year. The scholarship recipient, a continuing Capilano College student, can hold the scholarship for a maximum of two instructional terms. For the scholarship to be extended a second term, the scholar must maintain an excellent standard of work and conduct. Application forms are available from the Financial Aid Office and must be submitted to the Chair of the Scholarship and Bursary Committee, c/o the Registrar's Office, no later than February 15. Real Estate Foundation Scholarships The Real Estate Foundation has established an endowment fund in the Capilano College Foundation. Income from the fund will be awarded annually in the form of General Information - Financial Aid and Awards 51 scholarships and bursaries to students studying in realestate-related courses in the business and legal programs. Rita Watson Johnson Memorial Award This award was established in honour of Rita Watson Johnson, who worked in the Women's Access Centre at Capilano College. She was working towards a master's degree in Counselling at UBC. Rita began post-secondary studies in her middle years after raising four children, and the memorial award was established to assist mature women students enrolled in either part-time or full-time studies in any field of post-secondary study. Preference will be given to mature women who have an interest in academic studies and who have demonstrated interest in and awareness of women's issues. Applicants may be (or plan to be) part-time or full-time students. Student applicants will hopefully have at least a 'B' average and demonstrate an active interest in returning to school and/ or paid employment. Contact the Financial Aid Office for application. Deadline: Fall Term, October 6; Spring Term, January 31. DEPARTMENT AWARDS (Specific application required - The following information is subject to change) Athlete Assistance Program Awards This is a government-assisted program which provides awards of $400 - $500 to recognize additional costs incurred by select student athletes participating in intercollegiate athletics only. Contact the Athletics Department for information and applications. Athletic Scholarships for Soccer Athletes Scholarships are awarded based on leadership, character, and demonstrated exceptional athletic ability. In addition, preference is given to students who attend Capilano for their second year of studies. Contact to Joseph Iacobellis, Department of Fitness & Athletics. and community affairs or demonstrate a variety of outside interests; must have better than average written and verbal communication skills; must have a GPA of at least 3.0; and must be in the latter portion of the program. Contact Business Administration for application procedures and deadline information. Certified Management Accountants Society of British Columbia Scholarship The CMA Society provides an award of $500 towards remission of CMA program fees. This award is available to the graduating student attaining the highest mark in Cost and Management Accounting. Contact the Coordinator, Business Administration before April 15th. Constance MacGregor Memorial Scholarship The Capilano College Foundation has established this scholarship in recognition of the generous support received from the Estate of the late Donald Anderson MacGregor. The purpose of the scholarship is to recognize the increasing importance of the study of Canadian affairs in post-secondary institutions. To be eligible a student must have achieved a 3.0 GPA in the study of Social Science, particularly in relation to Canadian affairs. Applications are available from the Social Sciences Division early in the Spring term and the award will be given at the Spring Awards Ceremony. English Department Bursaries The English Department offers bursaries of $500 each, five in the Fall term and five in the Spring term to students who apply and meet the following criteria: the student must be in financial need; must have completed at least one term at Capilano College with a cumulative GPA of at least 2.75; and must have completed at least two academic courses, including at least one English course (B- or higher). Applications are available from the English Etepartment. Fall term deadline: October 15; Spring term deadline: January 31. English Department English 100 Awards for Bachelor of Music Audition Scholarships Research Essays Two Awards of $200 will be offered to students who indicate excellent performance potential. Contact the Coordinator of the Music Transfer Program for information. Tuition waivers for one English course will be given to twelve English 100 students in the Fall term and six English 100 students in the Spring term. Students who have written outstanding research essays are nominated by their instructors: students may not apply themselves. Canadian Information Processing Society Scholarship Program English Department English 010 Awards The Vancouver Section of the Canadian Information Processing Society offers a $300 scholarship to students at Capilano College who are enrolled in an information systems program. The student must be active in student Tuition waivers for an English 100 course will be given to no more than two outstanding students in both Fall and Spring term in English 010. Students are nominated by their instructors: students may not apply themselves. General Information - Financial Aid and Awards 52 English Department English 200 Awards Tuition waivers for an English 201 course will be given to no more than three outstanding students in English 200 in the Fall term. Students are nominated by their instructors: students may not apply themselves. English Department Canadian Literature Award A tuition waiver for an English 203 course will be given to no more than one outstanding students in English 202 in the Fall term. This student will be nominated by the instructor: students may not apply themselves. English Department Essay Contest Awards Tuition waivers ranging from one course to one academic year are available to winners of an essay contest. Students must be planning to register in their second year of academic studies including at least one second English course. Contact the English department for more information. Eteadline: May 12,1996. George North Memorial Fund The George North Memorial Fund was established by friends and family members in memory of this outstanding member of the Trade Union movement. The award is available to assist with registration costs for union members or their family members who wish to attend courses in the Labour Studies Program. Union members are first expected to seek sponsorship from their union if they are eligible, before seeking a Bursary. The deadlines for applications for Spring courses is January 31 and for Fall courses is October 6. Application forms are available from the Labour Studies Program coordinator at Capilano College. Institute of Chartered Accountants of British Columbia A $300 scholarship is available to a full-time student at Capilano College who is completing the first year of the University Transfer program, and is proceeding to second year or to a university in the commerce option. The student must have a good record in the accounting classes completed, maintain a second class standing overall, be in financial need, and be interested in becoming a Chartered Accountant. Apply to Commerce Convenor in Social Sciences Department. for the scholarship, a student must: • be currently enrolled in a full first year science program (minimum 24 credits) • anticipate a minimum G.P.A. of 3.25 for the current academic year • enrol in a full time Engineering or second year Computing Science program at Capilano College in the coming fall semester. The selection of a suitable candidate will be made primarily on the basis of academic performance, but other factors may also be considered. Application forms are available from the Pure and Applied Sciences Division office. The deadline for submission of complete applications is April 30th, winner will be notified by May 15th. Jim Duvall Memorial Bursary The family of Jim Duvall and the Adult Basic Education Department have established a permanent endowment to provide bursaries for students in the ABE program at the College. Inquiries should be directed to the ABE coordinator. Landscape Horticulture Award An endowment has been created, the interest from which will fund the Landscape Horticulture Award. The award is offered to students in the Landscape Horticulture Program and is based on scholastics, program participation and financial need. Apply to the Coordinator of Landscape Horticulture in December. Submit application before January 15. Lucille Fisher Memorial Scholarship The Lucille Fisher Memorial Scholarship, established by the West Vancouver Memorial Library and West Vancouver Municipal Employees Association, is awarded annually to an outstanding student enrolled in a credit course in creative writing or commercial writing (such as English 190 or Communications 190, etc.) in the Fall term. A second award is made when matching funds are available from the English Department. Instructors may nominate students for the award, and outstanding students may also apply on their own, by submitting their best writing (normally not more than ten pages) to the Coordinator, Communications Department, by January 31. The award is granted as early as possible in the Spring term of the same academic year. Jack Edson Scholarship In honour of Physics, Math and Computing Science teacher Jack Edson, an endowment has been established to assist Capilano College students completing a second year at the College. The interest income from the endowment will be used to provide a scholarship. To be eligible Link Bursary These bursaries are awarded to Business Administration students. Funds for the Link Bursary are provided by voluntary contributions of employers participating in General Information - Financial Aid and Awards 53 Business Administrations' work practicum program. For additional information contact Business Administration. Maureen Piekaar Memorial Award This award was established in memory of Maureen Piekaar, a teacher in the Medical Office Assistant Program. To be considered, students must have satisfactory standing of 70% or better in the first term of the MOA program, possess the qualities of leadership and citizenship, contribute to the classroom experience and demonstrate financial need. Apply using the general bursary application available from the Financial Aid Office, A117. Deadline January 31. North Vancouver Women's Liberal Commission Award A tuition fee waiver scholarship is available to any student in any program who has enrolled in at least one Women's Studies course. Candidates must have financial need. Candidates must submit a 500 word essay on "How Equality can be Achieved". The scholarship will normally be available for one term, but can be renewed provided the applicant's academic standing is satisfactory. Applications are available at the Women's Studies Department, the Financial Aid Department, and the North Shore Women's Liberal Commission. The deadlines are August 15 and December 15. Second Year Science Scholarship The Pure and Applied Sciences Division at Capilano College offers up to two $500 Scholarships each year. Eligible Students are those who: • are taking a full first year science program • anticipate a minimum cumulative G.P.A. of 3.25 • enrol in a full time Second Year Science Program at Capilano College in the coming Fall Semester. Applications are available from the Pure And Applied Sciences Division. Deadlines: April 30th. Shirley Eastcott Memorial Scholarship The Shirley Eastcott Memorial Scholarship has been established in recognition of Shirley's interest and encouragement of printmaking in Canada. The interest earned annually will provide one or more scholarships for students to attend the Art Institute's printmaking program at Capilano College. The criteria required for a student to qualify include: acceptance into the Art Institute's Printmaking Program; demonstrated excellence in his or her field; and need for financial assistance. Apply to Coordinator of the Art Institute. DEPARTMENT AWARDS (Automatic Selection - The following information is subject to change) Pacific Refrigerated Foods Association Award Adult Basic Education Association of B.C. The Pacific Refrigerated Foods Association has established an annual award with the Capilano College Foundation to be known as the Pacific Refrigerated Foods Association Award. Achievement Award The purpose of the Award is to acknowledge an outstanding student in the Commerce Program at Capilano College. The criteria required for a student to qualify are: enrolment in the second year of the Commerce Program; successful completion of the Program with intent to transfer into the Commerce Faculty at the University of British Columbia; the studenf s above average GPA as well as demonstrated leadership skills and strong personal attributes; and financial need. Real Estate Foundation Scholarship for Environmental Science Students enrolled in the Environmental Science program, who have achieved a 3.5 GPA or better, are eligible to apply for scholarships established by an endowment from the Real Estate Foundation. Apply on the General Application for Scholarships available from the Registrar or Financial Aid Office. The deadlines are September 30 and January 31. General Information - Financial Aid and Awards 54 A $100 Achievement Award is made available to a student in the Basic Adult Education Program. The successful candidate will be chosen by a consensus of the Adult Basic Education faculty. Asia Pacific Program Scholar Award $500 per year will be awarded to the student in the Asia Pacific Management Cooperative Program who achieves the highest academic standing at the end of year one of the program, is considered an outstanding student by the Faculty, and who has accepted a work placement for the second year of the program. Athletic Scholarship Tuition Waivers Up to, but not exceeding, ten tuition fee waivers in both Fall and Spring semesters will be made available annually to those high performance athletes attending Capilano College who satisfy the following criteria: 1. Practice with and play on a team which represents either the Province of B.C. or Canada in either national or international competition. 2. Play in national or international competition during the summer immediately preceding the Fall semester in which they enroll at Capilano College. 3. Play for the Capilano College Rep team (Blues) in the same sport in which they participated nationally or internationally in the summer. 4. Are not Nationally carded athletes (i.e. recipients of Federal funds from Sports Canada). 5. Meet the entrance requirements of the program for which the application is made. criteria includes community involvement and a commitment to the protection of the environment. Campney and Murphy Legal Secretarial Scholarship This scholarship will be awarded to a second year Legal Secretarial student showing high scholastic achievement and career potential. To qualify for a tuition fee waiver in the Spring semester, the student must achieve a 2.5 GPA and a minimum of nine credits in the Fall term. Faculty will select recipient. Capilano College Tuition Fee Waivers For Second Year Students Bachelor of Music Transfer Program ScholarshipAn Award of $200 will be offered to a student with a high GPA and performance potential in the 2nd year of the Music Transfer Program. A limited number of scholarships will be awarded to outstanding full-time students who have completed one year of a program at Capilano College. The scholarships will be in the form of fee waivers. Candidates will be automatically selected by Grade Point Average. Blair Griffiths Scholarship The Greater Vancouver Media Association offers the Blair Griffiths Scholarship in the Spring Term to the top student completing the first year of the Media Resources Program. Bob Irvine Award The ABE faculty shall identify deserving student(s) to receive the Bob Irvine Award. The award will be based on the following criteria: must be or have been a student in the ABE program; must be thirty years of age or older; must still be in attendance at Capilano College; must have shown significant progress towards completion and must have spent sufficient time in a program to determine worthiness for the award. B.C. and Yukon Community Newspapers Associations Scholarships are awarded annually, as available, to journalism and graphic arts students who are nominated by the Coordinator of their program. B.C. Council of Garden Clubs' Trust Fund Scholarship A scholarship of $450 will be presented to a student in Landscape Horticulture Program. The recipient must be a Canadian student who has shown a demonstrated interest and ability in the field of horticulture. B.C. Hydro Scholarship BC Hydro has established an endowment with the Capilano College Foundation to generate an annual award for second year Business Administration students. In addition to a grade point average of 3.33, selection Classical Music Scholarship For students in the second year of the Music Transfer Program who, in the opinion of faculty, best exhibit a high potential for a career in vocal music combined with high academic achievement. Data Processing Management Association Scholarship An annual scholarship of $100 is available to a student who demonstrates high scholastic standing within the program, has better than average communication skills, and who exemplifies good team practices. Davis and Company Legal Secretarial Scholarships A $300 scholarship will be awarded to an outstanding student entering the second term of the Legal Secretarial Program. English 100 Awards for Research Essays Tuition waivers for one English course will be given to 1012 winners of the English 100 research essay awards. Students who have written outstanding research essays are nominated by their instructors. Students must have completed English 100 in the Fall term and plan to take an English literature course in the Spring term. The tuition waiver is for the English course in the Spring term. Gerry Turner Award Gerry Turner worked for the College for many years. She was Secretary to the principal, and also worked in the Deans' offices, the Bursar's office, Purchasing, Community Education, Placement, and Accounting. Wherever General Information - Financial Aid and Awards 55 she was, Gerry gave her best, and her aim was always to promote excellence and to improve the image of the College in the community. This award is maintained by Gerry's friends at Capilano College who continue to remember her good humour, gentle demeanour and even disposition. The Gerry Turner Award is granted on the basis of scholastic excellence and financial need to a student in the Office Technology Program in the Spring Term. Graphic Design Scholarship Through a donation from Dianna L. Larsen, Registrar, a $500 scholarship has been established for students entering the second year of the Graphic Design Program at Capilano College. The scholarship will be given in the Fall based on: high academic standing; completion of 24 credit hours or more in the Graphic Design Program; enrolment in the Fall Term as a full-time student; significant achievement in the Graphic Design Program. The recipient is chosen by the faculty of the Graphic Design Program; an application is not required. Greater Vancouver Weavers, and Spinners' Ladner Downs Endowment Fund This fund will provide for two scholarships of $350, one in each year of the Legal Assistant Program. The awards will be made on the recommendation of the faculty to the first ranking student in each year. Michael Carr Memorial Award This award is given annually by the Adult Basic Education faculty to a student who has demonstrated hard work and dedication to improve grades. The successful candidate should emulate the characteristics of former student Michael Carr; hardworking, energetic, and involved. Nicholas J . Collins Scholarship There will be two scholarships awarded to ESL students at Capilano College, one for a female student, one for a male student. Students must have clearly defined career goals and must demonstrate high academic achievement in conjunction with other contributions such as sports, volunteer work or organizational work. The winners will be chosen by committee. Guild Scholarship An annual scholarship of $200 will be awarded to a student in the Textile Arts Program who demonstrates excellence in weaving and shows an interest in pursuing this art form. The recipient of the award will be selected by the Textile Arts Coordinator at the end of the student's first or second year. Harold Kirchner Scholarship Two graduating scholarships will be presented annually. One scholarship of $100 will go to the top scholastic Career Program graduate, and one scholarship of $100 will go to the top scholastic Vocational Program graduate. International Student Scholarship Assistance for an international student who is a high academic achiever and who requires financial assistance in order to be able to continue his/her educational pursuits at Capilano College. Jean Paterson Memorial Bursary The Canadian Daughters' League - Assembly 12 North Vancouver has established an endowment in Memory of Jean Paterson with the Capilano College Foundation. Income from the fund will be awarded annually in the Fall Term in the form of bursaries to female students in the Music Transfer Program who have satisfactory academic achievement and financial need. General Information - Financial Aid and Awards 56 North Vancouver Community Arts Council Scholarship Endowment The North Vancouver Community Arts Council provides scholarships for tuition fees for one term for each of up to two outstanding students per academic year. Eligible candidates must have studied at Capilano College in the two preceding terms. Full-time students in the following programs are eligible: Graphic Design & Communication Clay & Textile Arts Fine Arts Bachelor of Music Commercial Music Creative Writing Rucanor Athletic Scholarship Rucanor Canada has established a permanent endowment, the interest from which will fund an annual scholarship to be given in the Fall term to students involved in athletics. Students must have demonstrated outstanding performance in a sport and be returning for second year with a minimum 3.5 GPA in at least 24 credits. T. Buck Suzuki Memorial Book Award The family of T. Buck Suzuki has endowed a permanent award for full-time science students. The interest income from the endowment will be used to provide one book award annually to an outstanding student in the science program. Textile Arts Award An annual scholarship of $200 will be awarded to a student, or students in the Textile Arts Program who demonstrate excellence in the textile arts and show an interest in pursuing this art form. The recipient of the award will be selected by the Textile Arts Faculty at the end of the student's first or second year. Tierney and White Scholarship Tierney and White have established an endowment with the Capilano College Foundation. Income from the fund will be awarded annually in the form of a scholarship to an eligible student in the Financial Option in Business Administration. The student must have completed one term at Capilano College with a minimum GPA of 3.5 and require financial assistance. Vancouver Stock Exchange Scholarship The $425 Vancouver Stock Exchange Scholarship will be awarded to an outstanding student of Finance, Business Administration or Computing Science at Capilano College. He or she will be enrolled full-time in one of these programs and will have completed at least two terms of study in the program with a minimum GPA of 3.5. A W A R D S F O R S T U D E N T S WITH DISABILITIES (Contact the Special Needs Coordinator for additional information) extraordinary costs of goods and/or services related to a disability which would normally be a barrier to education. Funding is not available for books or tuition costs. Applications and further information may be obtained from the Financial Aid Office or Adult Special Education Coordinator, or from the Student Services Branch, Ministry of Advanced Education, Training and Technology, 2nd Floor, 1106 Cook Street, Victoria, B.C. V8V 3Z9. Elsie Boone/North Shore Lions Clubs Scholarship An endowment fund, bequest from the estate of Elsie Boone, a retired teacher, will provide entrance-level scholarships for young students with physical disabilities. Applicants should be twenty-three years of age or younger, demonstrate satisfactory progress from past studies and show good potential. Contact the Special Needs Coordinator for application process. Deadlines: September 30; January 31. Honourable Thomas A. Dohm Bursary Thanks to a generous donation from Thomas A. Etohm, Q.C. LLD, an endowment has been created, the interest from which will provide bursaries for students with disabilities. Students apply using the general bursary application available from the Financial Aid Office. State the nature of disability and any special costs resulting from the disability in the comments section of the form. Return forms to the Financial Aid Office. Deadlines: October 6; January 31 Paul Jones Memorial Bursary Friends and family of Paul Jones have created a permanent memorial to this former Capilano College employee who worked hard during his short life to overcome his physical disability and assist others with special needs. This memorial fund now generates awards for Capilano College students who have additional costs resulting from their disabilities. Applications are available in the Financial Aid office. Assistance Program for Students with Disabilities The Province of British Columbia recognizes the educational needs of students with disabilities through the Assistance Program for Students with Disabilities. The Assistance Program may provide financial assistance of up to $10,000 ($12,000 for students requiring attendant care) for access to public post-secondary education. The level of assistance awarded recognizes a student/s General Information - Financial Aid and A wards 57 58 to 2 o E o CO M B CD Preparatory Programs This section contains information on: Chemistry 030 • Adult Basic Education Prerequisite: none • Pre-College Level Course • Achievement Resource Centre Credit Courses • Alternative Career Training Program This course is designed for those students who have had no previous chemistry and wish to go on in science. English 010 • English as a Second Language Prerequisite: EDT Placement (see English) ADULT BASIC EDUCATI0N/PRE-C0LLEGE LEVEL COURSES Many students who enter Capilano College require precollege level courses to meet entry level requirements for a particular college program, or to upgrade their academic skills from basic literacy to the Provincial Level (grade twelve equivalent standing Diploma). Students who have been out of school for a number of years and want to resume their education often find that the Adult Basic Education program best meets their needs. Most courses in the program are self-paced. Students attend classes in which they work up to five hours a day in the classroom with college instructors. In addition, some courses require independent study outside of class. The level of courses in the Adult Basic Education program ranges from Basic Literacy to Provincial (grade twelve) level. Many of the upper-level courses, taken alone or as part of a larger program of studies, will meet entry requirements for Academic Studies and Career/Vocational Programs. The pre-college level courses which are offered by a number of Academic departments at the College are designed to upgrade students who lack course prerequisites for Academic Studies and Career/Vocational programs. Many of these courses are taught in two hour classes that meet twice a week for an academic term (16 weeks). In addition, considerable independent study is required outside of the formal instruction period. There are also (like Adult Basic Education) some flexible selfstudy courses available in Math. Either the Adult Basic Education Program or the preparatory courses offered in the Academic Studies departments may satisfy your upgrading needs. Students should contact the Coordinator of Adult Basic Education for more information on that program, the Advising Centre or Counselling for information on other preparatory courses. PRE-COLLEGE LEVEL COURSES For students who do not have some of the course prerequisites for Academic Studies or Career programs, the College offers upgrading and flexible self-study courses. For complete course descriptions, refer to specific sections of Academic Studies. An intensive course in basic language skills to enable students to proceed without difficulty to an academic college program. Curriculum will evolve from the assessed needs of the students. Math 009/010 Prerequisite: none These courses are offered in the Math Learning Centre on a self-paced format. Students are placed in the courses based on diagnostic tests. This group of courses covers arithmetic and introductory algebra. Math 099 Prerequisite: Math 11 with a "P" or permission (signature) of Mathematics instructor This course begins with a review of introductory algebra and continues with the development of intermediate algebra with emphasis on functions. It is meant primarily for students who require a Math 11 equivalent and who anticipate taking precalculus (Math 105 or 107). Math 103 Prerequisite: Math Placement Test (MPT) or completion within the past year of Math 12 with at least a "P" grade; or Math 010 or BMTH 045 with at least a "C" grade; or Math 099 with at least a "C-" grade. A brief review of introductory algebra, plus intermediate algebra and precalculus, with a focus on functions, mathematical models, graphs, trigonometry, logarithms, and exponential functions. (Students will be brought to the same level as those completing Math 105 by the end of the term). Primarily for students who anticipate taking a calculus course or who require a Math 12 equivalent course. No duplicate credit for Math 103/105/107 This course may be completed by guided self-study format using video instruction. Math 105 Prerequisite: Math Placement Test (MPT) or completion within the past year of Math 12 with at least a "C" grade; or Math 010 or BMTH 045 with at least a "B" grade; or Math 099 with at least a "B-" grade. Preparatory Programs • Pre-College Level Courses "IT A review of algebra and a discussion of functions, graphs mathematical models, trigonometry, logarithms and exponential functions. Primarily for students who anticipate taking calculus courses who require a Math 12 equivalent course. ARC 105 (3) Strategies for Student Success No duplicate credit for Math 103/105/107 This course includes: memory techniques, time management, test taking and note taking. The reading component addresses problems college students have with textbook comprehension, vocabulary, critical reading and retaining information from texts. Math 107 Prerequisite: Math Placement Test (MPT) or completion within the past year of Math 12 with at least a "C" grade; or Math 010 or BMTH 045 with at least a "C" grade; or Math 099 with at least a "C-" grade. A precalculus course designed for business/commerce students. The mathematical models/applications in this course will be mainly business/finance oriented. Linear and quadratic equations and inequalities, absolute value, systems of linear equations, functions and graphs, inverse functions, mathematical modelling, exponential and logarithm functions, circular and trigonometric functions, right-triangle trigonometry, arithmetic and geometric progressions, compound interest and annuities, summation notation, binomial theorem. No duplicate credit for Math 103/105/107. ACHIEVEMENT RESOURCE CENTRE CREDIT COURSES Contact: 984-4945 The Achievement Resource Centre offers three 3.0 credit courses. ARC 100 (3) Strategies for Student Success (3,0,0,0) (F,S) Learn and adopt attitudes and methods that promote success in college. ARC faculty co-teach this course with counselling faculty. This course includes: memory techniques, time management, reading a textbook with improved retention, test taking tips, note taking strategies, using college resources, communication skills, stress management, goal setting, and career exploration. ARC 110 (3) Reading Dynamics (3,0,0,0) A 3 credit course in which participants learn and practice flexible reading skills. Strategies for developing reading comprehension are also included. Preparatory Programs - Achievement Resource Centre 62 (3,0,0,0) Learn and adopt methods and attitudes that promote success in college. This course covers both study skills and reading strategies. Adult Basic Education ADULT BASIC EDUCATION/FOUNDATIONS General Information Contact: North Vancouver Campus: 984-4971, Room P209 Sechelt Campus: 885-9310 (Toll Free: 987-1535) Squamish Campus: 892-5322 (Toll Free: 986-3515) The Adult Basic Education/Foundations (ABE) Program enables you to upgrade your knowledge of English, Mathematics, Biology, Chemistry, Earth Sciences, Physics, History, Social Studies and Computers. You may select from one to five subjects, depending upon your educational and occupational goals. You can pursue any of the following goals: - preparation for employment - personal desire to upgrade or refresh mastery of a subject - secondary school qualifications demanded by employers - vocational training (including apprenticeships) - career training - technical training - academic studies (including college and university programs) Please note: Offerings and procedures at Sechelt Campus and Squamish Campus are slightly different. Contact the local ABE coordinator. Instructional Faculty D.J. ATHAIDE, B.Sc., (Hons.) (McGill), M.Sc. (UBC), B.C. Teacher's Cert. C. BUSSANI, BASc., (Hons.), MASc. (UBC) M.C. CAIRNS, B.Sc. (Math) (Calgary), Alta. Teach. Cert. M. DEKKER, B.Sc. (Hons.) (U. of A.), ING. (Amsterdam) Dip. Computer Management (Cap. Coll.) B. DRURY, B.Sc. (Brock) J. FIELD, B.Sc. (UVic), Ph.D. (University of Queensland) V. GIESBRECHT, B.A. (Western Washington U), M.Ed. (UBC), B.C. Teacher's Cert. J. HIND, B.A. (1st Class Hons.) (SFU), M.A. (UBC) P. HODGSON, B.A. (Hons), B.Ed. (Queen's) M.Ed. (UBC) D. KIRKBY, B.Ed. (Winnipeg) C. B. MACLEAN, B.Ed. (SFU), M.Ed. (UBC) G. NEWMAN, B.A. (Hons.), Post-graduate Certificate of Education (Leeds University), B.C. Teacher's Cert. J. PASS, B.A. (UBC), B.C. Teacher's Cert. P. PI, B.Sc. (McGill), M.Sc. (U. of Man.), B.C. Teacher's Certificate M. RAWSTHORNE, M.Ed. (UBC), R.D.N. J. ROSE, B.A. (Western), B.C. Teacher's Cert., M.Ed. (UBC) G.B. RUDOLPH, B.Sc. (UBC), B.C. Teacher's Cert., M.Ed. (UBC) J. SOUTHERST, B.A., B.Ed. (UBC), B.C. Teacher's Cert. J.B. TALLON, B.A., (Hons.XCarleton), B.Ed. (U. of T.) A.G. THOMLINSON, B.A., M.Sc. (UBC), B.C. Teacher's Cert. R. W E D E L , B.A. (SFU), B.C. Teacher's Cert. D. E. YOUNG, B.A. (SFU), S.R.N. (London), S.C.M. (Scotland), Dip. T.N. (London), M.F.A. (UBC) The program operates year-round, offering instruction in two-hour classes. Both self-paced and term-paced classes are offered. Placement in courses is based on preregistration assessment of academic background. Many students benefit by enrolling in A.B.E. courses while registered in academic or career/vocational programs at the College. Students who need more than four months to complete a course may re-register if they are attending and progress is satisfactory. Students who finish a course before the end of the term may immediately register for the next higher course in the given subject. High enrolment may necessitate limiting students to a maximum of 3 classes in a subject area. Class times are as follows: Morning classes 8:30 a.m. and 10:30 a.m. Afternoon classes 1:30 p.m. (except Tuesdays, Wednesdays and Thursdays when classes start at 2:30 p.m.) Evening classes 7:00 p.m. Courses Fundamental Intermediate Advanced Provincial Level BENG BSCI BMTH BCHM BESC BPHY BBIO BSOC BCMP 021* 021 021* 031* 032* 031* 040 or 041* 040 041 or 045 i 041 041 041 041 or 042 041 041 042* 021 031* 031 Choose 2 046 042 042 Choose 3 042 042 BHST042 042 * Required for Certificate or Diploma Advanced math is a prerequisite for Provincial Level For further details please arrange an assessment/interview by phoning 984-4971. Preparatory Programs • Adult Basic Education/Foundations 63 BENG 040 Admission Requirements Students should be at least 18 years old and have been out of the public school system for a minimum of one year. Exceptions will only be made with departmental approval. Students should apply at least three months prior to anticipated date of entry. Registration Students are interviewed before registration in order to determine the course(s) or program which best meets their educational goals. Regular attendance and satisfactory progress are conditions for re-registration in ABE courses. Students may be directed to other programs if their attendance and performance in ABE does not match their stated educational goals. ABE Certificates & Diploma The ABE/Foundations Programs offers courses at four levels as outlined in the table: The Provincial Diploma, issued by the Ministry of Skills, Training and Labour, provides an alternate route for adults to achieve a grade twelve standing to post- secondary institutions in B.C. Intermediate & Advanced Certificates are issued by Capilano College and provide prerequisites for career and vocational programs throughout the province. (F,S SU) Prerequisite: BENG 031 A short-report writing course with a vocational/technical emphasis in its subject matter and approaches to writing. Students develop the summarizing, note-taking, and outlining skills necessary to organize information from a variety of sources into well-written reports. BENG 041 (F.S.SU) Prerequisite: BENG 031 An advanced course in short-report writing. Students develop the summarizing, note-taking, and outlining skills necessary to organize information from a variety of sources into well-written reports. BENG 041 has a technical/academic emphasis in its subject matter and approaches to writing and includes introductory work in literary analysis and evaluation for students proceeding to BENG 042. BENG 042 (F,S,SU) Prerequisite: 70% in BENG 041 A Provincial level course in essay writing. Students study and write a variety of essays to prepare for written work at the university-transfer level or equivalent in diploma programs. BENG 042 has an academic/literary emphasis in its subject matter and approaches to writing. Fundamental level instruction provides basic reading & writing skills and number skills. Social Studies BSOC 031 ABE Certificates also satisfy most employers' requirements. Certain high school courses may qualify as transfer credit toward ABE certificates and the Provincial Diploma. An introduction to the fundamental principles of Economics, Canadian history, government legal system and the development of analytical a n d interpretive skills. The program also offers instruction for students preparing for the General Education Development (Grade 12 Equivalency) tests. Advanced and Provincial level A.B.E. courses may also be used for transfer credit towards a B.C. Adult Senior Secondary School Graduation Certificate. Course Descriptions English BENG 021 BSOC 041 A study of major historical, geographic, economic, political and sociological events in Canada and globally. Students will learn basic skills of social analysis that will enhance their ability to participate in the economic, political and social concerns that are part of their daily lives. This is an ABE Advanced level course. (F,S,SU) BHST 042 (S) A survey of 20th Century History including major issues in present day Geopolitics. This is an ABE Provincial level course. An Intermediate course in writing. Most ABE students enter the English program at this level. Students write a series of paragraphs and two longer compositions. Preparatory Programs - Adult Basic Education/Foundations 64 (F) (F,S) An introductory Fundamental course in reading and in writing of sentences and short paragraphs. BENG 031 This is an ABE Intermediate level course. Computer Studies BCMP 021 (F,S) An introduction to the microcomputer at the fundamental level. File, directory and disk management is discussed at the introductory DOS level together with disk organization and formatting. An introduction to word-processing is included. BCMP 031 (F,S) Basic microcomputer concepts and functions. An introduction to MSDOS; disk and file management. Introduction to commonly used business software such as wordprocessing, spreadsheets and database applications. BCMP 041 (F,S) A self-paced continuation of BCMP 021 with further practice in DOS, Disk and File management, word and communications processing, spreadsheets and database applications, using integrated software. enrol in Capilano College's Business Management program. It is the equivalent of Business Math 11. BMTH 045 Advanced Math - Algebra & Trigonometry (F,S,SU) Prerequisite: BMTH 031 or equivalent with at least a "B-" Review of real numbers, powers, laws of exponents; polynomials and rational expressions, factoring, quadratic equations, maxima and minima; functions and relations; quadratic functions; transformations of relations; plane geometry, theorems and proofs; circle geometry, theorems and proofs; trigonometry, right and oblique triangles, functions of angles in standard position. An ABE Advanced Certificate course, BMTH 045 is designed to prepare students for a precalculus course. It is the equivalent of Math 11 or Math 099. BMTH 046 (F,S,SU) Provincial Math - Algebra and Trigonometry Prerequisite: BMTH 045 or equivalent with at least a "B-" BCMP 042 (F,S) A self-paced continuation of BCMP 041. This Provincial Level course will help the student develop problemsolving skills through the completion of projects in computer programming. Students will analyze a problem, devise algorithms to solve the problem, use this process to write a computer implementation of the solution, and then test the solution. Topics in graphics programming and applications will be stressed. Solving linear, absolute value, quadratic, and rational inequalities; analyzing, manipulating and graphing functions, approximating the roots of polynomial; graphing rational functions; exponential and logarithmic functions; trigonometric functions, analytic trigonometry; series and sequences; complex numbers; conic sections. An ABE Provincial Certificate course, BMTH 046 is a precalculus course for students intending to enrol in a first year program in sciences or mathematics. It is the equivalent of Math 12 or Math 105. Mathematics BMTH 021 Fundamental Mathematics Sciences BSCI 021 ABE Fundamental General Science Prerequisite: BCMP 041 with a "C+" minimum standing (F,S,SU) Whole numbers, fractions, decimals, ratio and proportion, percent, powers and roots, averages and graphs. This course is designed to prepare students for an Intermediate course in mathematics. BMTH 031 Intermediate Mathematics (F,S,SU) Introductory algebra and elementary plane and solid geometry. This course is designed to prepare students for an Advanced course in mathematics. BMTH 041 Advanced Math - Business (F,S,SU) Prerequisite: BMTH 031 with at least a "C" Business mathematics; statistics; formulas used in business and industry; simple and compound interest; discounts, investments. An ABE Advanced Certificate course, BMTH 041 can be used by students wishing to (F,S,SU) An introduction to the basic scientific concepts and language of general science. BSCI 032 ABE Intermediate General Science (F,S,SU) Basic scientific principles in biology, chemistry and physics needed to progress to higher level science courses. BBIO 041 ABE Advanced Biology (F,S,SU) Prerequisite: BSCI 032 or Science 10 and English 11 or equivalent or BENG 031 as co-requisite. Topics include cell structure and function, cell division, evolution, microbe and plant structure and diversity, behavioural ecology, biosphere, ecosystems, human population concerns. Laboratory exercises are included. Prepares students for many career/vocational programs. Preparatory Programs - Adult Basic Education/Foundations 65 BBIO 042 ABE Provincial Biology (F,S,SU) Prerequisites: SCI 032 or Science 10 and English 11 or equivalent or BENG 031 as a co-requisite Topics include cell structure and function, cell division, cell metabolism, photosynthesis, human biology, including reproduction genetics, digestion, circulation, immunity, respiration, excretion, nervous system, hormones. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college level post-secondary programs for which Biology 12 is a prerequisite. BCHM 041 ABE Advanced Chemistry (F,S,SU) BPHY 041 ABE Advanced Physics (F,S,SU) Prerequisites: BMTH 031 or Mathematics 10, and BSCI 032 or Science 10 Corequisite: BMTH 045 Introduces motion, forces, vectors, gravitation, momentum, work, power, energy, electricity, series and parallel circuits, electric fields, rotational motion, light, magnetism, waves, heat. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college courses and many career/ vocational programs. BPHY 042 ABE Provincial Physics (F,S,SU) Prerequisites: BMTH 031 or Math 10, and BSCI 032 or Science 10 Prerequisites: BPHY 041 or Physics 11 Corequisite: BMTH 045 or Math 11 Introduction to atomic theory, periodicity, bonding, naming compounds, mole concept, chemical reactions, gases, solutions. Optional topics include organic chemistry, nuclear chemistry. Includes laboratory exercises. Prepares students for college science courses and many career/vocational programs. Topics include kinematics, dynamics, vectors, work and energy, circular motion, momentum, rotational motion, equilibrium, electrostatics, circuits and instruments, electromagnetic induction, waves, sound, electromagnetic waves, optics. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college physics and technology programs for which Physics 12 is a prerequisite. BCHM 042 ABE Provincial Chemistry (F,S,SU) Prerequisites: BCHM 041 or Chemistry 11 Corequisite: BMTH 045 or Math 11 Topics include shapes of molecules, thermochemistry, rates of reactions, chemical equilibrium, solubility, acids and bases, oxidation-reduction, electrochemistry. Optional topics include nuclear chemistry, organic chemistry. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college chemistry and technology programs for which Chemistry 12 is a prerequisite. BESC 041 (F,S) ABE Advanced Earth and Environmental Sciences Prerequisites: BSCI 032 or Science 10 An introduction to the earth sciences, with environmental applications and a British Columbia emphasis. Areas of study include earth materials, notably minerals, rocks and mining; water, including sources, processes and contamination, and natural earth hazards, such as earthquakes and volcanoes, landslides and flooding. Laboratory investigations and field trips are involved. Prepares students for further courses in physical and social sciences. Preparatory Programs - Adult Basic Education/Foundations 66 Alternative Career Training ALTERNATIVE CAREER TRAINING Foundations Program Contact Person: Terry Byrnes, Coordinator, Room M102, Phone 984-1711. Instructional Faculty Terry BYRNES, M.A. (UVic) R. DAMON Jann GIBBS, R.P.N., R.S.W. Priscilla STANBURY, B.A. (UBC) Laverne THOMPSON, M.Ed. (Lesley College) General Information The Alternative Career Training Foundations Program is an employment exploration program with a unique focus and approach. The program is based on a developmental perspective and is committed to working with adults with special learning needs. Students are educated to accept the responsibilities of independent living as young adults, as well as the demands of competitive entry-level employment, and will be able to address any social or emotional issues which could act as barriers to employment. The ACT Program combines in-class instruction with practical work experience, emphasizing the development or maintenance of skills which may be used in employment situations. Students meet with faculty to discuss an individual course plan that best fits their needs. Personal goals will be set and monitored throughout the year. Student Profile Students who will find the ACT Program beneficial are learning or developmentally delayed. In addition, they may present any or all of the following characteristics: a) difficulty grasping academic information (for example, mathematical problem solving, reading print, writing) b) persons with a disability. Students who will obtain the most benefit from the ACT Program are those who have reached a moderate level of independence (i.e. they are responsible for self-care; they travel independently locally; they have had some work or volunteer experience; they can articulate several areas of interest or a willingness to try various work sites). Admission Requirements The ACT Foundations Program is in session for eight months (two terms), and classes are offered for eight weeks, with community work/volunteer practicums offered for an additional eight weeks per term. Entry is by referral and interview. Students may combine their inclass work with self-selected volunteer or employment training sites based upon aptitude, attitude, ability and interest. Each candidate is interviewed by the Program faculty and a maximum of 14 students will be admitted. Some students may elect to take the Program part-time and students may be accepted for a second year by faculty permission. Appointments for interviews take place between January 15 and April 15, with interviews and letters to the successful candidates sent by May 30. Course Descriptions ACTP 001 (3) Job Search Techniques This course offers the student an opportunity to explore methods and techniques which will enhance the job search. It focuses on appropriate behaviours in the marketplace and also includes opportunities for growth in the areas of self-awareness and independence as they relate to making lifestyle decisions. Computer-assisted learning will be offered to complement this course. ACTP 002 (3) Practical Field Experiences Students are provided with the opportunity to explore a variety of field placements which are college-supervised. Included are six practicum periods for a total ten weeks of field work. ACTP 003 (3) Communications & Math for Everyday Living This course has been designed with two components: consumer mathematics and communications. It provides opportunities to maintain and develop specific skill areas, with integration of these skills into employment situations being the desired goal. Electives Students will have the opportunity to participate in a variety of options designed to expand their interests and experiences. These options include field trips, mobility training, counselling, fitness centre activities, computer training and literacy upgrading. In consultation with faculty, students will choose options which complement their individual program plans. Training options include First Aid, WHMIS, Workers Compensation Regulations, plus orientation to fast food, lube and oil and local ecological training. Preparatory Programs - Alternative Career Training 67 English as a Second Language ENGLISH AS A SECOND LANGUAGE returned. Other documents will be returned, upon request. Contact: ESL Department, Office P209, Phone 984-4971, FAX 984-1718 If any document is in a name different to that under which application is made, proof of change of name (marriage certificate, court order, etc.) is required. Instructional Faculty J. ACOSTA, BA. (Calif.), E.S.L. Cert. (San Francisco State) N. COLLINS, B.A. (London), M.A. Advanced Professional Teaching Cert. (UBC) M. FRY, B.Ed., M.Ed. (UBC), B.C. Professional Teaching Cert. L. TAMORI, B.A., M.A. (UT), T.E.S.L. Cert. (George Brown College) E. WITKOWSKI, M.A. (Jaqiellonian), B.C. Professional Teaching Cert. L. ZHANG, B.A., M.A., (Nanjing), M.Ed. (U. of Alta.), BC/Alberta Professional Teaching Cert. English as a Second Language (ESL) courses offer international and permanent resident students a variety of Intermediate and Advanced courses to help them improve their competency in English for work, daily life, and post-secondary study. Courses cover reading, writing, and speaking. ESL courses are offered part-time day and evening. Application Fee International Students: A non-refundable fee of $100 (Canadian funds) must accompany your application for admission. Canadian Citizens or Landed Immigrants: A nonrefundable fee of $20 is payable with your application. Address all applications to: Admissions, Office of the Registrar Capilano College 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver, B.C. Telephone (604) 984-4913 Fax (604) 984-4985 Admission Once all documents and records have been received, we will consider your application. If you are accepted, the College will send you an official Letter of Acceptance by mail. Admission Procedures/Requirements Application English Language Requirements Application for Admission forms are available from the Office of the Registrar upon request. Applications and supporting official transcripts and documents should be submitted to the Office of the Registrar by the following dates: Fall Term (Sept. to Dec.): March 31 (Early Deadline) Spring Term (Jan. to Apr.): Sept. 30 (Early Deadline) Summer Term (May to Aug.): Jan. 30 (Early Deadline) International Students For the English as a Second Language Program (ESL), the College requires one of the following: a. Test of English as a Foreign Language Score (TOEFL), or b. English Language Assessment Score (ELA) Applications will be accepted after the early deadlines, provided space is available and, for International students, time remains to apply for the Student Authorization Visa. Canadian Citizens and Landed Immigrants Documents and Official Transcripts Official records (grade reports, transcripts, etc.) of all secondary, post-secondary or equivalent education must be submitted with the application, whether or not the course of study has been completed. These records should indicate the individual courses studied and the marks or grades received. If your records are in a language other than English, please provide certified English translations and the original documents. Replaceable documents submitted in support of your application become the property of the College and will not be Preparatory Programs - English as a Second Language 68 Note: The TOEFL or ELA score will be used to assist with placement in the appropriate ESL level of study. Once students are accepted, they will be contacted by the ESL department to come in and write the ESL placement test. Students who wish to enrol in ESL as well as other courses in Academic Studies, Career, Vocational, or Adult Basic Education courses should refer to General Information - Admission section of calendar, under C. English Language Requirements see "3. Special." Course Descriptions *ESL 031 (3) Conversation (4,0,0) (F,S,SU) This course helps students improve their listening and speaking skills at the Lower Intermediate level. Students who receive credit can register in ESL 041. *ESL 033 (3) Previously ESL 010 Introduction to Canadian Culture (4,0,0) (F,S,SU) This course introduces students to Canadian culture so they will have a wider base of experience living in Canada and taking college courses. By exploring topics in Canadian culture, they will increase their understanding of Canadian society. *ESL 034 (1.5) Pronunciation and Listening (2,0,0) (F.S.SU) This course helps students improve their stress, intonation and pronunciation. *ESL035 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F,S,SU) Educational Studies for ESL Learners *ESL 038 (3) Previously ESL 033 Reading and Vocabulary (4,0,0) (F,S,SU This course prepares students with the vocabulary and reading skills required for ESL 048. *ESL039 (3) Previously ESL 032 Grammar and Writing (4,0,0) (F,S,SU) This course prepares students with the grammar and writing skills required for higher-level courses such as ESL 049. ESL 041 (3) Intermediate Conversation (6,0,0) (F,S) The aim of this course is to improve each student's listening and speaking skills at the Intermediate Level. The course offers practice in speaking and listening skills. Students who receive credit can register in ESL 061. * ESL 043 (3) Western Studies for ESL Students (4,0,0) (F,S,SU) This course introduces intermediate ESL students to western culture and cultural values, so they will have a wider base for living and studying in Canada. ESL 048 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,) Previously ESL 092 Intermediate Reading and Vocabulary ESL 049 (3) Previously ESL 091 Intermediate Grammar and Writing (4,0,0) (F,S) This course helps students develop the grammar and writing skills required for college-level studies. Stress is on English sentence structure, grammar, and short writing assignments. ESL 061 (3) Previously ESL 051 Oral Skills - Advanced Conversation (3,0,0)(F,S) This course helps students improve their listening comprehension and speaking skills. Students work on developing confidence in speaking, taking part in classroom discussions, building vocabulary and improving pronunciation. ESL 068 (3) Previously ESL 093 Advanced Vocabulary and Reading (3,0,0) (F,S) This is an Advanced level course which helps students improve their vocabulary and reading skills. Stress is placed on reading comprehension, developing vocabulary, reading efficiently, using context clues and critical thinking. ESL 069 (3) Previously ESL 098 Advanced Writing (4,0,0) (F,S) The emphasis in this course is on composing at the paragraph level. Students who complete this course with a B+ or better may register for ESL 099. ESL 088 (3) Previously ESL 094 (4,0,0) (F,S) College Preparatory Reading and Vocabulary This is a College Preparatory level course in reading and vocabulary. ESL 099 (3) College Preparatory Writing (4,0,0) (F,S) Students will practice writing essays in clear, standard English. This course emphasizes the formal writing skills required for academic study. * These courses are offered on a cost-recoverable basis, and will be subject to sufficient enrolment. This course is designed to improve students' reading comprehension and vocabulary at the Intermediate level. Course topics include comprehension of main idea and details, vocabulary development, word families and context clues. Preparatory Programs - English as a Second Language 69 70 Academic Studies/University Transfer Academic Studies/University Transfer Associate in Arts and Science Degree Academic transfer courses at Capilano College provide students with a variety of options. Students can select a full program of study equivalent to the first two years of university (see note on Course Selection and Advising), and can enroll on a full-time or part-time basis. Courses in Academic Studies are of interest both to students who plan to transfer to a university and to students who do not intend to continue to upper-level studies. Capilano College offers Associate Degrees in Arts and in Science for two years of university-level study in accordance with the requirements set out on page 20 of the Calendar. For those students who need extra help in basic skills, the Academic Studies Division offers some preparatory courses and some academic support services (see notes on the Writing Centre, the Achievement Resource Centre and the Math Learning Centre). Students interested in special fields of study such as Canadian Studies, Environmental Science, Women's Studies, or Labour Studies can select from innovative programs in these areas (as offered from year to year). Academic instruction at Capilano College is both disciplinary and inter-disciplinary and is of a high intellectual calibre. The College carefully reviews the content and the delivery methods of its academic courses to ensure that those courses are current and that they continue to meet university standards. Students in academic transfer courses should expect to work at least two to three hours outside of class for every hour of class time. The College offers a basic library collection and full media and reference services to complement the courses of study. The Academic Studies Division offers a range of courses in various disciplines which are grouped in four divisions as follows: Humanities Division (984-4957): Art History, Chinese, English, French, German, Japanese, Philosophy, Spanish, Thai Social Sciences Division (984-4953): Anthropology, Commerce, Criminology, Economics, Geography, History, Political Studies, Psychology, Sociology, Women's Studies Pure and Applied Sciences Division (984-4955): Biology, Chemistry, Computing Science, Engineering, Environmental Science, Geology, Kinesiology and Human Kinetics, Mathematics, Physics Visual and Performing Arts Division (984-4911): Textile Arts, Graphic Design & Illustration, Studio Art, Bachelor of Music Transfer, Jazz Studies, Theatre Diploma in Academic Studies Students who have completed the requirements of any four term College program may receive a Diploma in Academic Studies, provided they have fulfilled the following conditions as outlined under the Graduation/ Diplomas and Certificates section of the Calendar. Transfer To and From Other Institutions The Academic Studies Division maintains transferability of its courses with other post-secondary institutions. The College's representatives meet regularly with those of other institutions to ensure that Capilano's program of first and second year courses are fully transferable as university courses. There is agreement among all public B.C. colleges to accept each other's credits upon transfer, if applicable to a program given in the admitting college, and given suitable equivalency. Capilano College reserves the right to review individual course credit. Transfer credits are granted to students on admission for acceptable work done at other institutions; the transfer credits reduce the total number of credits which are required at Capilano College for a certificate, diploma, or Associate Degree. Students wishing transfer credit should present suitable documentation to the Registrar's office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. All approved transfer credits are noted on the student's Permanent Student Record. Full information on transfer of specific courses is available from an Advisor, Counsellor, and in the pertinent instructional division. Transfer information accurate to the time of printing is to be found in the B.C. Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide. Students are urged to read this guide when establishing their programs of study. Academic Course Descriptions Full descriptions of all academic courses can be found in the alphabetical listings following. Students are urged to read the general discipline information included in each section carefully. It is the student's responsibility to be familiar with the special information needed to select academic courses. Course Description Code: On the right hand side of each course description there is a series of code letters and numbers, for example: Academic - General Information 73 Biology 105 (3) Environmental Biology (4,3,0) (S) Each course is designated by the department name and course number (e.g. Biology 105). The number in parentheses following the course designation - i.e. (3) in the above example - indicates the number of credits for the course. The second set in parentheses includes the lecture, lab and other hours for the course. For Biology 105, for example, there will be 4 lecture hours, 3 lab hours, and no other hours per week. In some courses the department may convert the fourth lecture hour to another scheduled instructional activity. Where this occurs, students will be advised by the course instructor and in the course outline given out at the beginning of the term. The third set of parentheses indicates the term in which the class is usually offered. Example: F - Fall, S -Spring, SU - Summer. Biology 105 is offered in the Spring term. Please check the Timetable to confirm the term offered as this may change after the Calendar is printed. The course title (Environmental Biology) is indicated on the line below the department name and course number. The nominal length of a term is 16 weeks. Please see the Academic Schedule for the first and last days of classes and for the dates of the examination period. Course Selection and Advising Advisors or counsellors assist students in selecting the best program of studies. The final responsibility for course selection, however, rests with the student. All academic students are advised to see an Advisor or a Counsellor to plan their courses of study. Students should consult the University Transfer Guide in this Calendar. English Entrance Requirements Students who wish to enroll in English courses must, BEFORE REGISTERING IN ANY ENGLISH COURSE, write either the Language Proficiency Index (administered by EMRG) or the English Diagnostic Test (EDT) given by the English Department of Capilano College. Students with any one of the following are exempt from this requirement: 1. A final grade of "A" in English 12 or English Literature 12, or 2. A final grade of 4 or better in an Advanced placement course in English Composition or English Literature, or 3. a final grade of 6 or better in the International Baccalaureate course in English A or English B. Academic - General Information 74 English Diagnostic Test (EDT) EDTs are given prior to and during the registration week at Capilano College. These tests are administered by the English Department and may be used for admission to English courses offered at Capilano College only. Preregistration is required at the Office of the Registrar and a fee of $20 is charged. Schedules of English Diagnostic Tests will be available in: Registrar's Office - 984-4913 Squamish Learning Centre - 892-5322 (986-3515) Sechelt Learning Centre - 885-9310 (987-1535) Humanities Division - 984-4957 Advising Centre - 984-4990 A schedule is also printed on the first section of the timetable. Students wishing to write the EDT should pay in advance at the Office of the Registrar. (Please check office hours.) Achievement Resource Centre Students wanting to increase their learning efficiency are invited to use the services and facilities of the Achievement Resource Centre (ARC) in the Library Building, (see non-credit programs and courses section for workshop information.) Writing Centre (FR406) All students registered at the College may visit the Writing Centre for advice on written assignments or help with writing problems. The Centre is not a proofreading service, but aims to help students develop their writing ability. The Centre also offers resources for writing: quiet space, a collection of reference books, handout sheets and exercises, and computers with word processing, outlining and editing programs. The Writing Centre is located in FR406, inside the Humanities Division. It is staffed by faculty members from the English, ESL, and ABE Departments. Open hours are posted. Math Entrance Requirements Only those students with high grades in prerequisite courses completed within the previous year will be allowed to directly enrol in a Precalculus (Math 103,105, 107) or Calculus I (Math 108,110) course without writing a placement test. All other students wishing to enrol in one of these courses must write a placement test prior to registration. Please refer to the Mathematics section of the calendar for the direct entry and placement test requirements for each of these courses. Math Placement Test (MPT) MPTs are offered on a regular scheduled basis throughout the year with frequent sittings available during the preregistration period. These tests are administered by the Math Department and are used for admission to Precalculus and Calculus I courses offered at Capilano College. Pre-registration is required at the Office of' the Registrar and a $10 fee is charged. Schedules of the MPT are available in: Registrar's Office - 984-4913 Squamish Learning Centre - 892-5322 (986-3515) Sechelt Learning Centre - 885-9310 (987-1535) Pure and Applied Sciences Division - 984-4955 Advising Centre - 984-4990 A Schedule is also printed on the first section of the timetable. Math Learning Centre (J107) This Math Learning Centre (MLC), located in J107, provides services for all students at the College. During scheduled hours, students may obtain individual assistance with math problems from the lab supervisor or instructor on duty. The MLC has two study areas (one for silent, individual study and the other for quiet, group study), a video room and a library of math reference texts. The MLC video room is equipped with six video stations where students may view math video tapes on topics in calculus, precalculus, algebra and statistics. Self-Study Courses In keeping with the College's policy for the development of alternative instructional modes, it is possible for the student to pursue studies in first year chemistry and mathematics on a self-study term format. Math 103 (Intermediate Algebra and Precalculus) and Math 110 (Calculus I) are offered on a video-based format. Refresher courses in math through the grade 11 level are also available in a self-paced format. These packaged courses, prepared for home study with the aid of cassette tapes, manuals, slides, video tapes and film loops, are designed to offer students who are unable to maintain regular attendance at the Lynnmour Campus or a satellite centre the opportunity to pursue college courses. They are also available to students who are attending any Capilano College campus, providing these students with a viable alternative to the usual lecture/ tutorial instructional format. (Students should note, however, that attendance on campus for chemistry labs is necessary.) Registration Priority In some courses with high demand, registration priority will be given to students who have not attempted the course previously at Capilano College. Any student who has attempted the course within the last year may not be allowed to register without the instructor's permission. Registration procedures for Art and Music programs are detailed in the calendar section for the particular program. Lab/Course Relationship Many courses require that students complete a lab and/or tutorial. Students should ensure that they are aware of lab/tutorial requirements and the timetable for these components. Students should note that it is necessary to pass both labs and lectures. The cost of the labs are included in the tuition fee, except for lab manuals and some field trip costs. Special Programs Women's Studies Program A Women's Studies Program, consisting of a variety of transfer credit, college credit and credit-free courses, has been developed at Capilano College. In addition to the Women's Studies College credit and transfer credit courses, there are career and academic courses in other disciplines of special interest to women. Writing Across the Curriculum Sections In the Fall Semester, a small number of English 100 (Composition) sections are paired with a section of another course. Students planning to take English 100 (Composition) should consider enrolling in one of these Writing Across the Curriculum sections as identified in the course timetable. Instruction in the two courses will be coordinated, with the writing assignments in the English course growing out of the content of the other course. Students will receive the full 3 credits for both courses, and will benefit from having two of their subjects connected with each other. Please consult the English Department for information on the paired sections for Fall 1995. Canadian Studies Specialty Students who wish to concentrate their studies on Canadian content courses can choose courses from the list below. All courses (except some Labour Studies courses) hold full transfer credit and transfer into the Canadian Studies ProgTam at SFU. To qualify for a Canadian Studies Specialty, complete a College diploma with at least 24 credits from the following list. Choose these credits from courses in at least three different departments. Of the 24 credits you choose, at least six must be numbered 200 or above. For a Canadian Studies Specialty to be applied to a General Studies Diploma, an English or Communications course is required. Academic - General Information 75 Fall Anthropology 204 Anthropology 206 Biology 204 English 202 French 270 Geography 106,108 History 110,205, 111 Labour Studies 100,110, 111, 115,117,119,142,170,181, 182,210 Political Studies 104 Sociology 200 Spring Anthropology 208 Biology 105, 205 English 203 French 271 Geography 108 Geology 111 History 110, 111, 208 Labour Studies 101,110, 111, 116,131,140,181 Political Studies 104 Sociology 201 Course descriptions appear under the appropriate discipline. APPLY TO THE REGISTRAR to have the Specialty added to your Diploma at the time of graduation. Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations Program The Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations Program is a two-term, multidisciplinary program. It studies ethnic relations developed in the context of the multicultural and polyethnic nature of Canadian society. It also explores the cross-cultural interaction among Native people, the founding English and French Canadian people, and the different immigrant groups that constitute the Canadian "mosaic." These all help to shape the national character and the culture of this country. The program also examines the international aspect of cross-cultural communication, which is of special meaning to Canada because immigrant communities here can maintain healthy contacts with their countries of origin. The Program includes the various disciplines involved in ethnic studies: history, geography, anthropology, sociology, political studies and urban studies, religious studies, communications, language and literature. There are no special criteria for student selection, although students must formally register for the two-term Ethnic and CrossCultural Relations Certificate, which will be awarded upon completion of the program. To complete the program, a student needs to earn 30 credits. Specialized courses in ethnic relations and two English courses are required; the rest can be chosen from Academic - General Information 76 a variety of electives. All the program's courses (except Labour Studies) have transfer credit to the provincial universities where the student can work towards a degree in Ethnic Studies. Simon Fraser University also has recently developed a Graduate Program in this field. Capilano College Extension Programs and Services may offer additional courses during the evenings for people already working in job-related fields. First Term REQUIRED: English 100—Composition (or other English course if approved). Anthropology 204—Ethnic Relations ELECTIVES: Language: French, German, Spanish, Japanese, Chinese or Thai. Anthropology 200—Intermediate Social Anthropology or Psychology 200—Social Psychology or Geography 100—Human Geography. Geography 106: B.C.: A Regional Analysis or Sociology 200—Canadian Society or History 111—Canada since Confederation or Political Studies 104—Canadian Government. Second Term REQUIRED: English 103—Contemporary Literature Anthropology 205—Immigration, Multiculturalism and Ethnic Conflicts. ELECTIVES: Second term of the language course taken in first term. Anthropology 206—Native Peoples of B.C. Anthropology 208—Native Peoples of North America or Geography 205—Pacific Rim LSP 119 & 131—Civil Rights and Race and Ethnic Relations at the Workplace Geography 201—Urban Studies or Sociology 211—Sociology of the Third World or Geography 108—Canada: A Topical Geography or History 205—B.C. Sociology 201—B.C. Society or Political Studies 202—Government and Politics of B.C. PURE AND APPLIED SCIENCES: General Information The following options are available from a wide range of pure and applied sciences. A. UNIVERSITY TRANSFER COURSES 1. Non-Science Students Students planning to continue studies at a university are advised to consider the following courses to fulfil their science requirement. It should be noted that transfer credit for a number of these courses is limited to nonscience students. Students should refer to individual discipline areas in this calendar. Biology 104,105,113 Chemistry 104,105 Computing Science 080,102 Geology 110, 111 Geography 112,114 Math 101,102,103,105,107,108,109 B. POST BACCALAUREATE DIPLOMA PROGRAM 1. Environmental Science Program Capilano College offers a one year Post Baccalaureate Diploma program in environmental science for students who have already completed a degree in science and who are interested in further practical studies in environmental fields. For additional information, consult the "Environmental Science Post Baccalaureate Diploma Program" section. Please check the prerequisites given in the individual course descriptions. Note: Biology 104 and Chemistry 030 or Chemistry 104 fulfil biology and chemistry entrance requirements for the Nursing Program at BCIT. Completion of Biology 104 and Biology 113 permits students (upon entering Basic Health Sciences at BCIT) to receive credit for BHSC 105. 2. Science Students Capilano College Pure and Applied Sciences Division offers a first and second year university transfer program in biology, chemistry, computing science, mathematics and physics, and first year university transfer programs in engineering, geology, kinesiology and human kinetics. In addition, the Pure and Applied Sciences Division offers science transfer requirements in the following: preMedicine, pre-Dentistry, Oceanography, Forestry, Agriculture, Pharmacy, Home Economics, Rehabilitation Medicine, and Dental Hygiene. 3. Engineering Program Capilano College offers a complete first year university transfer program in engineering. Bachelor degree completion generally requires three additional years of study at UBC, SFU, or UVic. For additional information, consult the "Engineering Program" section. 4. Kinesiology Program Capilano College offers a complete first year university transfer program in kinesiology designed for students planning on transferring to the Kinesiology Program at SFU for their second year. For additional information, consult the "Kinesiology Program" section. 5. Human Kinetics Capilano College offers a complete first year university transfer program in human kinetics for students planning on transferring to the UBC School of Human Kinetics for their second year. For additional information, consult the "Human Kinetics Program" section. Academic - General Information 77 Anthropology Instructional Faculty B. BERDICHEWSKY, B.A. (U. of Chile), Ph.D. (Madrid) K. LIND, B.A., M.A. (UBC) R. MUCKLE, B.A., M.A. (SFU) Anthropology 200 (3) Intermediate Social Anthropology General Information Anthropology is the study of humankind, offering views on the human condition from evolutionary and comparative perspectives. By developing an understanding and appreciation of cultural and biological diversity, courses in anthropology should be beneficial to all students. Students who have career aspirations as anthropologists may find work in teaching, research, or museum studies. They may also work as consultants to governments, corporations, and native groups. Major branches of anthropology include Social Anthropology, Archaeology, and Physical Anthropology. Students intending to major or minor in anthropology or archaeology should take Anthropology 121 and one or both of Anthropology 123 and 124. Students interested in a Canadian Studies specialty should consider Anthropology 204,206, and 208. The Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations Program requires Anthropology 204 and 205. University Transfer Credit All Anthropology courses at Capilano transfer to SFU, UBC and UVic. Course Descriptions Anthropology 121 (3) Introduction to Social Anthropology (4,0,0) (F,S) A survey of social anthropology to include the study of communication, economic systems, kinship and family patterns, social control, political organization, religion, and the arts. Also includes understanding the methods and effects of culture change. Examples of different cultural practices will be drawn from societies throughout the world. Anthropology 123 (3) Introduction to Archaeology (4,0,0) (S) An introduction to the theoretical foundations and methods of Archaeology, including the techniques used to discover, reconstruct, and interpret the past. Examples will be drawn from archaeological research around the world. Anthropology 124 Human Origins (3) (4,0,0) (F) An introduction to the theoretical foundations and evidence for human origins as presented by Archaeology Academic - Anthropology 78 and Physical Anthropology. The biological and cultural evolution of humankind as indicated through a study of evolutionary theory, primate behaviour, skeletal remains, and archaeological discoveries. (4,0,0) (F) A study of the social structure and organization of various cultures of the world. Emphasis on the dynamics of culture, the cross-cultural approach, the theoretical issues in Anthropology. Focus for 1995/1996: Applied Anthropology. Anthropology 202 (3) Introduction to Cultural Ecology (4,0,0) (F or S) The study of the interaction of people, culture and environments, emphasizing human adaptive strategies. Focus of the course will vary each semester, exploring such topics as subsistence patterns, health, and the environmental effects of modernization. Anthropology 204 Ethnic Relations (3) (4,0,0) (F) A study of the relations between ethnic groups and an examination of how ethnic groups come to be defined, how they are maintained, stereotyping, and how these processes interrelate with other social variables such as economics, education, violence and the family. The focus will usually be Canada. Students will be engaged in some primary research. Anthropology 205 Multiculturalism (3) (4,0,0) (S) A study of multiculturalism, particularly in Canada. Contemporary issues, government policies, immigration and cultural identity, and ethnic conflicts. Anthropology 206 (3) Native Peoples of British Columbia (4,0,0) (F) A study of the cultural history, diversity, and complexity of the Native Peoples of British Columbia. The archaeological past, traditional lifeways, and current issues are examined. Anthropology 208 (3) Native Peoples of North America (4,0,0) (S) A survey of the cultural history and social organization of native peoples of the North American continent including Canada, the United States and Mexico. An examination of traditional lifestyles including family, political, religious and ecological patterns; and current issues. Art: Graphic Design & Illustration Program Anthropology 241 (6) Archaeology Field School (6,0,0) (Su) A course in archaeological methods, techniques and theories dealing with excavation, recovery, analysis and interpretation of archaeological material. This is a practical field course, participants acquiring such skills as mapping, surveying, photography, computer applications, preparation of reports and interpretation. This course usually will be in cooperation with other colleges as a joint endeavour. May not be offered in 1995/1996. Anthropology 249 (3) (4,0,0) (Su) Comparative Cultures: A Field Study in Anthropology An interdisciplinary course to consider in depth a particular geographic area and its people. Comparative institutions, cultural ecology, contemporary issues, methods of observation and study. Students and instructor study in the field. May not be offered in 1995/1996. Women's Studies 122 (3) Women in Anthropology (4,0,0) The anthropological perspective applied to women in different cultures of the world; their role in economic, political, religious, kinship and expressive systems. Exploration of the work of women anthropologists and the effect of theory on understanding women. What is women's experience in cultures of the world? Please see Women's Studies for further information. The programs are a department within the Visual and Performing Arts Division. For other Art programs, see also Studio Art Program and Textile Arts Program. Instructional Faculty P. DEGGAN, Dip. (Worthing Col., England) J. EDGE, Alberta College of Art F. FORSTER, Alberta College of Art K. HOLLAND, Dip. (Johannesburg School of Art) M. LLEWELLYN, B.A. (Manchester) J. LONG, B.P.A. Art Center (Los Angeles) D. MACLAGAN, A.O.C.A., I.D.C., F.C.A. R.MARTIN, BA. (U. of Washington) F. MOLNAR, Dip. (Pennsylvania) D. NEAVE, B.A. HONS. (Manchester), M.A. (UVic) J. NEWTON-MASON, Dip. (Worthing Col., England) D. TAIT, Emily Carr, Dip. V.S.A. (ECCAD) D. YASINSKI A. ZIMMERMAN, B.P.A., Art Center (Los Angeles) For further information contact the Graphic Design & Illustration Program at 984-4911. Please note: The Graphic Design & Illustration Program office is closed from June 16 to August 16. Current program information will be available on voice mail at 984-4911. General Description GRAPHIC DESIGN & ILLUSTRATION FOUNDATION PROGRAM ONE YEAR CERTIFICATE Open to full-time students only. This is a one year program designed to provide a foundation in design, drawing, figure studies, illustration, painting, mediums and techniques, design principles and the history of art and design. The Program stresses developing the creative thought processes and skills necessary for admission to the Graphic Design & Illustration Program. This program provides the direction to prepare the student for further studies in many professional design and illustration fields. GRAPHIC DESIGN & ILLUSTRATION PROGRAM TWO YEAR DIPLOMA Open to full-time students only. This is a two year program for those wishing to enter into the graphic design profession as a graphic designer, advertising art director, or illustrator. Students learn by doing and are trained in graphic design, visual imagery, media choice, typography, advertising layout, and conceptual thinking. Academic - Anthropology/Art: Graphic Design & Illustration 79 They are guided by instructors who are practising professionals, and guests from the profession who are brought in to evaluate student projects; thus the program relates to the current demands of the profession. Real and simulated assignments are taken from initial concept to finished art, much like those they would encounter in a professional setting. Part-Time Evening Courses For students interested in upgrading drawing and design skills to assist in admission to one of our full-time programs, please see the current College timetable. Admission and Registration Procedures Both the certificate and diploma programs require a high level of maturity and integrity. Students with life experience following high school are usually more knowledgeable and mature in their choice of direction and better prepared; however, highly motivated high school graduates can succeed here, and we encourage those students to apply. Applicants to the program must supply the following documentation to the college by March 31,1995. (No late applications accepted.) • Completed Capilano College Application for Admission • Secondary and Post-secondary Transcripts • Certificate of English Language Assessment Test (ELAT) or Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL), if applicable Note: All applications for admission must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar. Official transcripts and other documents should be attached. Portfolio submission dates are May 1, 2,3 and 4,1995. No portfolio will be reviewed if proper documentation has not been received at the College by March 31,1995. (No late portfolio submissions accepted.) Portfolios are reviewed by an Admissions Committee on the basis of drawing, design, colour, creativity, media variety and presentation. Applicants whose portfolios meet the standards of the Program are called for interviews and testing on May 16,17 and 18. Final decisions on the make-up of the new class are made by May 26. Portfolio Requirements There is no formula for an acceptable portfolio. In general, you should submit your best and most recent work. There should be a minimum of 10 and a maximum Academic - Art: Graphic Design & Illustration 80 of 15 original samples produced, drawn, designed, or photographed by the applicant representing their current abilities. Imaginative and experimental design and drawings in any medium and representing your personal interests and abilities are welcome additions to the portfolio. Samples must be flat, not rolled; they should not be framed or glassed. We will not accept portfolios larger than 20" x 26" (50 cm x 66 cm). Photographs or slides of larger work or 3D projects may be sent; however, they do not replace the required minimum of 10 samples of original work. The applicant's name and address must be on the outside of the portfolio in large letters. Mark the back of each portfolio piece with your name. Please be sure to include the completed "Program Information Sheet". If a portfolio is to be returned, send either stamps or cheque to cover the cost of return postage. Do not send any portfolios by bus system as they are not delivered to Capilano College. Parcel Post insured or Air Parcel Post insured is usually the best way to have portfolios sent and returned. Capilano College cannot accept responsibility for loss or damage to an applicant's work. Program Content Graphic Design and Illustration Foundation Program Credits Major Program Requirements 30 General Education Requirements 12 42 FIRSTTERM GRPH 152 Life Drawing I 3 GRPH 156 Principles of Visual Cmns I 3 GRPH 158 Design I 3 GRPH 154 General Drawing I 3 GRPH 155 Mediums & Techniques I 3 AHIS 104 Intro to Visual Literacy I 3 CMNS 120 Effective Writing & Speech 3 21 SECOND TERM GRPH 157 Principles of Visual Cmns II GRPH 159 Mediums & Techniques II GRPH 164 General Drawing II GRPH 178 Design II GRPH 184 Life Drawing II AHIS 105 Intro to Visual Literacy II CMNS 153 Communications & the Arts 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 21 Students who wish to substitute English courses for Communications 120 may do so with the Communications Program coordinator's approval. Graphic Design and Illustration Program Credits Major Program Requirements 66 and drawing assignments. Emphasis will be on improving student skills and upgrading portfolios for art program submissions. FIRST TERM GRPH 162 Typography I GRPH 170 Studio Production I GRPH 177 Graphic Design I GRPH 180 Drawing for Illustration I GRPH 192 Applied Design I GRPH 195 Painting for Illustration I Graphic Design 152 Life Drawing I SECOND TERM GRPH 175 Photo, for Graphic Design GRPH 179 Graphic Design II GRPH 181 Drawing for Illustration II GRPH 193 Applied Design II GRPH 196 Painting for Illustration II GRPH 197 Typography II THIRD TERM GRPH 251 Illustration Media I GRPH 252 Applied Design III GRPH 277 3-D Graphic Design I GRPH 278 Studio Production II GRPH 295 Advertising Illustration I FOURTH TERM GRPH 253 Applied Design IV GRPH 269 Illustration Media II GRPH 279 Graphic Design HI GRPH 289 Studio Production III GRPH 298 Advertising Illustration II 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 3 3 3 3 3 15 3 3 3 3 3 15 Course Descriptions For Art History and Communications course descriptions see the appropriate department sections in this Calendar. Graphic Design 056 (3) Graphic Design Portfolio I (4,0,0)(F) (4,0,0) (F) Drawing from observation of the human figure; exercises in developing visual perception, memory and basic drawing skills. Study of the proportions of the human body. Line characteristics in pencil, pen, conte, and charcoal techniques. Contour, cross-contour, gesture and volume drawings from draped and undraped models. Graphic Design 154 General Drawing I (3) (4,0,0) (F) An introduction to representational drawing, mediums and techniques. Drawing as an expression of observation and perception of visual aspects of environment and visual thinking. Study of graphic means of representing objects, structure, planes, volumes, space, and surface characteristics. Learning to perceive, isolate and select visual elements for descriptive rendering in pencil and charcoal. Graphic Design 155 (3) Mediums and Techniques I (4,3,0) (F) An introduction to basic painting and illustration techniques. Field location drawing and wash studies using watercolour, pencil, coloured pencil, ink and combinations of the above. Developing location studies into more controlled, finished classroom works. Graphic Design 156 (3) Principles of Visual Communications I (4,0,0) (F) An overview and introduction of the basic design process, graphic design principles and fundamental visual communications techniques as utilized by graphic designers, art directors and illustrators. Graphic Design 157 (3) Principles of Visual Communications II (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 156 with at least a "C" grade. This course provides a structured, disciplined design foundation and limited drawing techniques utilizing a variety of mediums. Emphasis will be on improving student skills and upgrading portfolios for art program submissions. Graphic Design 057 (3) Graphic Design Portfolio II (3) (4,0,0) (S) A continuation of Graphic Design 056 with the major emphasis on controlled application of colour in design The basic principles of advertising as applied by a graphic designer, art director or illustrator. Includes a study of contemporary graphic designers and illustrators and how they use visual styles to complete assignments. Graphic Design 158 Design I (3) (4,2,0) (F) An introduction to the concepts and principles of visual arts with analytical and creative study of basic elements and pictorial organization. Processes and nature of visual communications, form, elements and their characteristics Academic - Art: Graphic Design & Illustration 81 are investigated with reference to Fine Art, Crafts and Applied Arts. Emphasis on two-dimensional composition and graphic media, collage and assemblage. Graphic Design 159 (3) Mediums and Techniques II (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 155 with at least a "C" grade. A continuation of Graphic Design 155 with further drawing analysis techniques. Consideration and use of various mediums as they relate to specific subjects from location studies and classroom development of same. Graphic Design 177 Graphic Design I (3) (4,3,0) (F) An introduction to design elements (shape, line, value, texture, colour) to demonstrate the versatility and application of each. Exercises to develop a sound grasp of design principles and to encourage experiment and discovery as well as how these elements work in combination. Media includes pencil, paint, collage materials and mixed media. Graphic Design 178 Design II (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 158 with at least a "C" grade. Graphic Design 162 Typography I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Historical origins of the alphabet, numerals and letter forms. Proportion and spacing. Lettering indication in pencil, brush, chalks and felt markers. Comprehensive lettering indication and reproduction art to improve craftsmanship and drawing skills. Graphic Design 164 General Drawing II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 154 with at least a "C" grade. Exploration of drawing mediums and techniques with emphasis on expressive and interpretive approaches. Developing themes and drawings aimed at illustration, for both reproduction and individual expression. Stylization, distortion and caricaturization are explored in relation to the study of line, mass, value and contrast. Various pen and ink drawing techniques are explored. Emphasis on student's initiative in researching, investigating and exploring drawing theories, schools and techniques. Graphic Design 170 Studio Production I (3) (4,3,0) (F) An introduction to computer and traditional production techniques encountered in graphic design studios. Students will learn basic production and be instructed in the preparation of finished artwork, copyfitting, type specifying and an introduction to computers. Graphic Design 175 (3) Photography for Graphic Design (4,2,0) (S) Basic photography with emphasis on fundamental camera and darkroom procedures. Instruction in 35mm camera operations as they assist in graphic design, advertising and illustration. Academic - Art: Graphic Design & Illustration 82 Further study of basic 2-D design principles and basic concepts, components and principles of three-dimensional materials and techniques. Functional and aesthetic aspects of contemporary and traditional 3-D art, design and form. Graphic Design 179 Graphic Design II (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 177 with at least a "C" grade. Further study of design principles, pictorial organization and the characteristics of visual form. Combining design elements of the previous semester with the new elements of typography and photography. Media will include a wide variety of materials. An experimental, inventive approach will be stressed. Graphic Design 180 (3) Drawing for Illustration I (4,0,0) (F) The purpose is to develop the students' awareness and capacity to perceive objects correctly and the skills necessary to draw with quality and creativity. Introduces the students to skills that must be developed if they are to visually communicate consciously and effectively. Basic drawing and wash media will be used. Graphic Design 181 (3) Drawing for Illustration II (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 180 with at least a "C" grade. The students play an advanced role in the choices of reference materials, mediums and techniques used. The skillful and imaginative use of illustrative methods is stressed using lighting, negative shapes, depth, abstractions for emphasis, perspective and correct perception. Uses of drawing and wash mediums will be expanded. As well, the student will be expected to become familiar with current uses of illustration. Graphic Design 184 Life Drawing II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 152 with at least a "C" grade. Further study of drawing from direct observation of the human figure. Exercises in perceiving and interpreting plane, mass, rhythm and form as they relate to perceptual elements of drawing media. Investigation of more complex drawing techniques and materials; drawing from memory and imaginative reflection of visual experience. Graphic Design 192 Applied Design I (3) (4,3,0) (F) An introduction to visual communication and the role of professional advertising, art directors and graphic designers. Design principles and layout techniques, with emphasis on concept and comprehensive finish using basic marker rendering skills. Graphic Design 193 Applied Design II (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 177 and Graphic Design 192 with at least a "C" grade. A continuation of Graphic Design 192 relating to presentation of ideas at a professional level representing real advertising agency and client situations. Making rough layouts and finished comprehensives of ideas that are evaluated against established client criteria . Graphic Design 195 (3) Painting for Illustration I (4,0,0) (F) advertising and graphic design using Macintosh computers will be investigated. Graphic Design 251 Illustration Media I (3) (4,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 181 & Graphic Design 1% with at least a "C" grade. To continue with the student who has achieved a competent degree of drawing skills to explore the mediums necessary for illustration. The course develops through stages from pencil, pen and ink, ink and wash, watercolours and eel vinyl. The use of the illustrator's tools and processes such as repellents, air brush, mixed media, etc., are reviewed. Graphic Design 252 Applied Design III (3) (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 179 & Graphic Design 193 with at least a "C" grade. The application of design and rendering skills to the development of solutions to print advertising. Explores companies, products, services, corporate identification and their relationship to print advertising layouts and tight comps prepared for class critiques. Comprehensives are developed with the Macintosh computer as well as traditional approaches. Graphic Design 253 Applied Design IV (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 252 with at least a "C" grade. This course offers expanded skills in perception, visualization and continued practice in control of various painting media. It gives the student the opportunity to develop similar styles to the old masters as well as experiment with his/her own drawing and painting. The interrelationship of illustration, photography and graphic design into advertising, packaging and point of purchase with extensive consultation on student portfolios and the needs of advertising agencies and graphic design studios. Graphic Design 196 (3) Painting for Illustration II Graphic Design 269 (3) Illustration Media II (4,0,0) (S) (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 195 with at least a "C" grade. Prerequisite: Graphic Design 251 with at least a "C" grade. The student's personal style of drawing and painting is pursued to a much finer degree. Structured tutorials in the use of various mediums and student/instructor criticisms of work-in-progress are emphasized. Experimentation in both style and medium is encouraged. Further developing finished illustrations for advertising, books, magazines, etc. An expansion of the uses of mediums to include mixed media while concept is stressed as an emphasis on self-expression and relevant professional solutions. Graphic Design 197 Typography II Graphic Design 277 3D Graphic Design I (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 162 with at least a "C" grade. This course expands upon the major role typography has on advertising layouts and graphic design. Construction of various styles of letter forms in pencil, felt marker and brush will be studied. Basic application of typography in (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 181 & Graphic Design 179 with at least a "C" grade. This course gives an introduction into the procedures involved in the design of small retail environments such as boutiques and service shops in shopping centres and Academic - Art: Graphic Design & Illustration 83 Art: Studio Art malls. Point of purchase design is introduced and model-building techniques are studied as well as the use of colour in merchandising and display. Graphic Design 278 (3) Studio Production II (4,3,0) (F) Instructional Faculty Prerequisite: Graphic Design 170 with at least a " C " grade. To familiarize the student with both computer and traditional techniques and procedures as used in a graphic design studio. The development of skills and disciplines necessary for a variety of reproduction methods including the use of Macintosh computers with emphasis placed on applications in graphics. Graphic Design 279 Graphic Design III (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 179 with at least a "C" grade. Assignments demonstrate to the student visual concept and economy of thought in advanced graphic forms, with emphasis on typography as a medium and message of design. Advanced application of the grid to facilitate the integration of both typography and visuals, underscored by sound use of conceptual thinking. Graphic Design 289 (3) Studio Production III (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 278 with at least a "C" grade. Print production including digital pre-press, photomechanical and printing procedures. Includes 4 colour process, binding, job estimating, paper specifications, and production control. Includes the use of Macintosh computers for graphic design and production with an emphasis on print and advertising applications. Graphic Design 295 (3) Advertising Illustration I (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 181 and Graphic Design 196 with at least a "C" grade. A comprehensive study of contemporary advertising illustration styles, techniques and materials with projects developed from original concept to final presentation. Emphasis on working with an art director with attention to specifications, deadlines and professionalism. Graphic Design 298 (3) Advertising Illustration II (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Graphic Design 295 with at least a "C" grade. Further exploration of advertising illustration techniques with the emphasis on actual studio and advertising agency working methods. A bridge between the educational experience and working in the field. Academic • Art: Graphic Design & Illustration/Studio Art 84 Studio Art is a department within the Visual and Performing Arts Division. For other Art programs see also Graphic Design and Illustration Program and Textile Arts Program. M. BOWCOTT, A.O.C.A. (Ontario) M.A. (R.C.A. London) N. BOYD, B.A. (Waterloo) B. COGSWELL, N.D.D. (Hammersmith) (R.C.A.) W. EASTCOTT, Sr. Cert. (V.S.A.) (R.C.A.) J. JUNGIC, B.A., M.A. (UBC) S. KWAN (E.C.C.A.D.) D. MCLAREN, Cert. (Sheridan College), B.H.Sc. (Guelph) F. MOLNAR, Dip. (Pennsylvania) D. NEAVE, B.A. Hons. (Manchester), M.A. (U.Vic) G. RAMMELL, (E.C.C.A.D.) For further information contact the Art Department at 984-4911. Please note: The Art Department is closed from June 16 to August 16,1995. Current program information will be available on voice mail at 984-4911. TWO YEAR DIPLOMA IN STUDIO ART General Description Studio Art offers a program of studies leading to a two year diploma. Studio Art also offers individual credit courses of study in Ceramics and Art Institute advanced studies. The Program The Studio Art Program at Capilano College provides a thorough, high quality foundation in the fundamentals of art. It enables students to make informed decisions regarding future career choices and enables them to prepare high quality portfolios to aid them in gaining acceptance to the advanced art and design programs of their choice. Graduates of the Studio Art Program usually complete their education at university, art school or in a college design program. The Studio Art Program provides studio experiences in 2D Studies, 3D Studies, Drawing, and Design, and courses in Visual Literacy, Art History, and English. Through exposure to a broad range of concepts, materials, techniques, and processes, students are assisted in developing personal interests, directions, and creative maturity. The emphasis of the program is on preparing students to function effectively within the context of current thought and practice within the fine arts, while preparing them for further studies in art and designrelated fields. Part-time Ceramic Courses Although not yet incorporated into the full-time program, Studio Art offers credit courses in the Ceramic Arts from our well equipped pottery studios. These courses carry some university transferability and are suitable for students interested in part-time studies or in learning basic and advanced pottery processes. The Art Institute The Art Institute, specializing in Sculpture and Printmaking, is a one year post-graduate certificate program unique in the college system. Comparable to artist-in-residence programs, the Institute offers advanced studies to artists with several years experience in sculpture or printmaking, or to recent college, university or art school graduates. Career Opportunities There are many careers related to the visual arts as the following list indicates. However, as they generally require specialized training, it is recommended that an education in these specific careers should follow a high quality broad Art foundation such as that offered by Studio Art. Some careers related to the visual arts: FINE ARTS: sculptor, painter, printmaker APPLIED ARTS: silversmith, jeweller, stained glass designer, mural designer GALLERIES: curator, art historian, restorer INDUSTRY: industrial, furniture, ceramic or carpet designer SCIENCE: scientific, botanical or medical illustrator ADVERTISING: art director, layout artist, window decorator CRAFTS: potter, weaver, glass or leather worker MUSEUMS: curator, archaeological illustrator, diorama or field expedition artist CINEMATOGRAPHY: make-up artist, set designer, animator, special effects model maker, wardrobe designer FASHION: illustrator, footwear designer, fashion editor, fabric designer EDUCATION: teacher, consultant INTERIOR DESIGN: interior or furniture designer, lighting consultant, antique restorer. Visual and Performing Arts office (984-4911) before May 2 to arrange for an interview between May 3 and May 12, 1995. Admission Requirements Prospective full-time students are normally admitted on the basis of an interview and portfolio presentation. The nature and scope of work presented is for the candidate to decide, but it should provide as accurate a picture of his or her past and current artistic activities as possible. Sketchbooks, research material and preliminary studies should be included wherever possible, in addition to completed work. Slides, photographs or any other supporting evidence may form part of the portfolio. Where appropriate and with the coordinator's permission, the portfolio requirement may be waived. Those wishing to enter courses for which they do not have the prerequisites should be prepared to present a portfolio so that faculty may assess the applicant's level of competence. Applicants to the program must supply the following documentation to the college by April 28,1995. • Completed Capilano College Application for Admission • Secondary and Post-secondary Transcripts • Certificate of English Language Assessment Test (ELAT) or Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL), if applicable • Studio Art Questionnaire Note: Applications for Admission must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar together with official transcripts and other pertinent documents. Special Fees and Expenses Although the Studio Art Department can supply some of the materials required for the courses, the student can expect a financial outlay for some basic supplies, as indicated in the course outlines. University Transfer All Studio Art courses carry some University transferability. Students should refer to the B. C. Transfer Guide. Program Content Admission & Registration Procedures Due to the very high demand for Studio Art courses, students are accepted into all courses by an interview and portfolio review procedure. Students entering the Diploma program and students who wish to take Ceramics courses should contact the Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements Credits 66 _J> 72 FIRST TERM Credits SART 150 Drawing I 3 SART 182 2-D Studies - Printmaking I 3 Academic - Art: Studio Art 85 SART 183 SART 185 SART 189 AHIS 104 2-D Studies - Printmaking II Design Concepts I Design Concepts II Intro, to Visual Literacy SECOND TERM SART 151 Drawing II 3-D Studies • Sculpture I SART 167 2-D Studies - Painting I SART 171 2-D Studies • Painting II SART 172 3-D Studies - Sculpture II SART 174 Intro, to Visual Literacy II AHIS 105 THIRD TERM 2-D Studies - Painting HI SART 250 2-D Studies - Painting IV SART 255 3-D Studies - Sculpture III SART 257 Drawing HI SART 262 Modern Art (19th Century) AHIS 210 Composition ENG 100 FOURTH TERM Drawing IV SART 263 3-D Studies - Sculpture IV SART 265 2-D Studies - Printmaking III SART 282 2-D Studies - Printmaking IV SART 283 Modern Art (20th Century) AHIS 211 ENG 103 or English Literature 104 or 105 or 106 TOTAL 3 3 3 _3_ 18 3 3 3 3 3 _3 18 (3) (4,0,0) (S) 21 Prerequisite: Studio Art 163 THIRD TERM 3 3 Course Descriptions For Art History and English course descriptions see the appropriate department sections in this Calendar. 86 Studio Art 151 Drawing II An introduction to the use of clay as an expressive medium. Hand construction and wheel forming will be presented as well as glazing, firing and clay body technology. Design, history and conceptual theory will be reviewed as it relates to the ceramic object. 3 Academic - Art: Studio Art An investigation of the conceptual, technical and perceptual aspects of the drawing process through a wide variety of methods, materials and stimuli. Experiences in current approaches and concerns, including representational, interpretive and experimental drawings in assorted media. Emphasis will be on developing the student's confidence, knowledge, graphic sensitivity and control of media. Specifics to this course will be: study of graphic elements (line, tone etc.), media investigation, perspective, structural analysis (of natural form), life study. 3 3 3 3 3 _3 18 SECOND TERM Ceramic Art II SART 165 FOURTH TERM SART 274 Functional Clay II (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Studio Art 150 3 Functional Clay I (3) 3 3 3 3 3 _3 18 Part-time Ceramics Courses FIRST TERM Ceramic Art I SART 163 SART 273 Studio Art 150 Drawing I A continuation of Studio Art 150, with the inclusion of the following specifics: composition and design exploration, colour, collage, and with an emphasis placed on balance between control and expression. Studio Art 163 Ceramic Art I Studio Art 165 Ceramic Art II (3) (3) (4,3,0) (F) (4,3,0) (S) A continuation of Studio Art 163 with greater emphasis on personal development. Casting, mouldmaking, glaze preparation and application and firing technology will be reviewed. Students will be encouraged to explore the use of non-firable materials in conjunction with clay. Contemporary issues on art will create the focus for personal exploration. Studio Art 167 (3) Three-Dimensional Studies: Sculpture I (4,3,0) (S) An introduction to 3-dimensional work as a means of expression, communication and discovery. Some basic sculptural techniques and materials will be explored; these will include: wood assemblage, clay modelling, mouldmaking and casting. Sculptural content and subject matter will be considered in the context of the student's own work. An examination of historical sculpture developments will be a feature of the class; however, the emphasis will be upon developing an understanding of contemporary sculptural concerns. Studio Art 171 (3) Two-Dimensional Studies: Painting I (4,1.5,0) (S) Through a combination of assigned studio work, personal research projects and an introduction to recent and current trends in the Visual Arts, students will gain an understanding of how both abstract and concrete concerns may be expressed in terms of imagery and through a variety of methods and materials. Acrylics will be the preferred medium but students will be encouraged to investigate the characteristics and possibilities of other media according to their individual needs. Guest speakers, field trips and slide-lectures will be a feature of the course and both individual and group critiques will be conducted at regular intervals. Studio Art 172 (3) Two-Dimensional Studies: Painting II (4,1.5,0) (S) Prerequisite: Studio Art 171 A continuation of Studio Art 171 with added emphasis on developing personal areas of interest and research in addition to designated painting problems which will require students to express their ideas in multiple or mixed-media techniques of a more ambitious nature. There will be opportunities for students to relate their painting activities to other areas of study within the program and to become more responsible for determining their own priorities and goals. There will be further exposure to contemporary philosophies and activities in the Visual Arts. Studio Art 174 (3) Three-Dimensional Studies: Sculpture II (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Studio Art 167 A continuation of Studio Art 167, but with the inclusion of the following materials and techniques: wood construction and jointing, steel welding, and plaster modelling. Studio Art 132 (3) (4,1.5,0) (F) Two-Dimensional Studies: Printmaking I A foundation course for those with little or no experience. An introduction to the basic techniques of hardground, softground, drypoint and acquatint. Discussions regarding the image-making potential of printmaking and the creative processes in general will be ongoing. Particular emphasis will be given to the relationship between printmaking and painting with the student producing a number of pieces demonstrating technical competency and creative potential. Most work will be executed in black and white. Studio Art 183 (3) (4,1.5,0) (F) Two-Dimensional Studies: Printmaking II Prerequisite: Studio Art 182 A continuation of Studio Art 182 with emphasis on printing procedures both in black and white and colour. The student will also be introduced to mono and relief printing methods (including lino/wood blocks and etched plates) and editioning procedures. Discussion of historical and contemporary approaches to image-making will be ongoing. Studio Art 185 Design Concepts I (3) (4,0,0) (F) An introduction to the basic elements of both two and three-dimensional design and their use according to formal and expressive needs. Using a variety of materials and processes, students will translate ideas into tangible form through the manipulation of colour, tone, shape, line, texture, volume, rhythm, proportion, etc. Sources of imagery and methods of extending the form-vocabulary will be investigated and standards of craftsmanship developed. Studio Art 189 Design Concepts II (3) (4,0,0) (F) A parallel course to Studio Art 185 with an emphasis on colour theory and 3D form. Studio Art 250 (3) Two-Dimensional Studies: Painting III (4,1.5,0) (F) Prerequisite: Studio Art 172 In addition to assigned painting problems, students will be required to define their own areas of research and visual articulation as they embark on a thematically linked series of works. As much freedom as possible will be given with regard to subject matter, content, materials, methods, scale, etc. and students will be encouraged to redefine the painting process in terms of their own needs and priorities. Emphasis will be placed on relating work in this course to other areas of the Program, especially with respect to Printmaking and to current trends in the Visual Arts. Studio Art 255 (3) Two-Dimensional Studies: Painting IV (4,1.5,0) (F) Prerequisite: Studio Art 250 A continuation of Studio Art 250 but with an increased need for students to define their own areas of interest and to extend their thinking in an innovative, self-challenging fashion. As in Studio Art 250, guest speakers, field trips, slide lectures etc. will be a feature of the course. There will be a continuing stress on relating work in this course Academic - Art: Studio Art 87 to contemporary activities in the Visual Arts and to other areas of the Program. Experiments with images, methods and materials will be encouraged, with a view to the development of personal modes of expression. (4,3,0) (F) Studio Art 257 (3) Three Dimensional Studies: Sculpture III Studio Art 274 Functional Clay II (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Studio Art 273 Increased emphasis on craftsmanship and design. Exploration of dinnerware mainly made on the wheel. Development of original glazes and manipulation of glaze characteristics. Prerequisite: Studio Art 174 A resumption of the investigation of ideas, materiality and form, to broaden the participant's visual, tactile and conceptual abilities. Traditional and current sculptural ideologies and techniques will be examined in the context of 20th century developments. Studio Art 262 Drawing III (F) (3,0) (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Studio Art 151 Continued study of drawing as a means of discovery, expression and communication. Conceptual, perceptual and technical aspects of drawing will be examined. Specifics to this course will include advanced graphic elements, unconventional media, objective/subjective research. Studio Art 263 Drawing IV (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Studio Art 262 Further study of drawing with an emphasis on the development of personal modes of expression. The work of the three previous courses will be reviewed, with the addition of perceptual exploration and portfolio presentation. (4,3,0) (S) Studio Art 265 (3) Three-Dimensional Studies: Sculpture IV Prerequisite: Studio Art 257 A further study of historical and current sculptural ideologies. Assignments require individual strategies to respond to social/environmental and interactive issues. Participation in group debates and critiques will foster constructive dialogue and criticism. Studio Art 273 Functional Clay I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: Studio Art 165 Further exploration of pottery techniques, particularly wheelwork and glaze materials; study of contemporary styles and creative ceramics. Academic - Art: Studio Art 88 Studio Art 282 (3) (4,1.5,0) (S) Two-Dimensional Studies: Printmaking III (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Studio Art 183 A comprehensive study of intaglio and relief printing methods, this course is primarily designed for the advanced printmaking student. Other areas that come under consideration will include collographs, uninked embossing and the practical application of colour theory. Discussion of current directions in printmaking and their relationship to painting and sculpture will be ongoing. (4,1.5,0) (S) Studio Art 283 (3) Two-Dimensional Studies: Printmaking IV Prerequisite: Studio Art 282 Designed for the advanced printmaking student, the main concern will be combined colour printing techniques based upon the individual's need. A folio of work will be produced to document this research. Technical aspects that surface will include photographic possibilities and dimensional prints. THE ART INSTITUTE The Art Institute, specializing in Sculpture and Printmaking, is a one year post-graduate certificate program unique in the college system. Comparable to artist-in-residence programs, the Institute offers advanced studies to artists with several years experience in sculpture or printmaking, or to recent college, university or art school graduates. Members of the Institute have access to well-equipped studios and specialized equipment, plus auxiliary facilities such as a darkroom, computer lab and media centre. Supplies and materials are available at cost. Lectures, seminars and tutorials feature guest artists and faculty who are professionals in their fields. With the permission of the instructor, and at no additional cost, members may also pursue individual research beyond the one-year certificate. During the academic year (September to April) submissions should be addressed to: The Art Institute Capilano College 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver, B.C. V7J 3H5 Tel. 984-4911 During the months of June to August, submissions should be made directly to: R. W. Eastcott or George Rammell 2607 Rogate 2786 Yale Street Coquitlam, B.C. Vancouver, B.C. V3K5S3 V5K1C3 Fees A major component of the Institute experience is the interchange among the participants, which may include critiques, encouragement of work in progress, or exposure to new materials. Along with providing the artist with studio space, the Institute offers the expertise of special speakers and workshop experiences. The atmosphere is stimulating and supportive of the individual's aesthetic development. Although the normal shop supplies are provided, members of the Institute can anticipate charges for materials directly involved with the production of work. Admission Requirements Art 300 (12) (4,0,0)(F) Art Institute Sculpture and Printmaking The Institute is a graduate Fine Arts Program. Students with a B.F.A. or equivalent (art school graduation, etc.,) are given preference during registration. Exceptional students with previous fine arts training and/or work experience will be accepted at the discretion of the instructors. Note that it is not absolutely necessary to be specifically proficient in the chosen area of study. Parallel experience would be considered, i.e. painting to printmaking. Enquiries and applications are accepted at any time throughout the year, although the normal registration periods are May and December for the first and second terms, respectively. Phone 984-4911 by May 2 for an interview between May 3 -12,1995. The 1994/95 tuition fees for the Art Institute were $630.00 per term. There are two terms per year. Art Institute: Advanced Options Courses Designed to meet the needs of students with several years of experience in sculpture or printmaking or who have left college, art school or university and may no longer have access to specialized equipment and facilities, the Art Institute will emphasize access to well-equipped studios as well as lectures, seminars and tutorials with instructors and invited professional artists. The format will be one day of classtimeand four or more days of studiotime.The studios will be available during the evenings and weekends. Art 301(12) (4,0,0) (S) Art Institute II - Sculpture and Printmaking A continuation of Art 300. Submissions 1. Biography - to include pertinent travel and other life experiences. 2. Portfolio - original works where possible; however, slides, photographs or other printed material will be acceptable. Where appropriate, and with the coordinators permission, the portfolio requirement may be waived. 3. Proposal - an outline of the anticipated directions of work. This should be as specific as possible. Academic - Art: Art Institute 89 Art: Textile Arts The Textile Arts Program is a department within the Visual and Performing Arts Division. For other Art Programs see also Graphic Design and Illustration Program and Studio Art Program. Instructional Faculty P. DEGGAN, Dip. (Worthing Co. England) K. HOLLAND, Dip. (Johannesburg School of Art) A. MALLINSON, (Westdean College, Sussex, England) L. RICHMOND, Teach. Cert. (London, GB) M.Art Ed. (W. Wash. State) R. SCHEUING, B.F.A. (Nova Scotia College of Art & Design) A. SEDKY, B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Ain Shams University, Cairo, Egypt) P. SINGER, B.A. (Sir George Williams), M.A. (Concordia) For further information contact the Art Department at 984-4911. Please note: The Art Department is closed from June 16 to August 16,1995. Current program information will be available on voice mail at 984-4911. General Description The Textile Arts Program offers a full-time two-year program leading to a Diploma. It also offers a specialized one-year Certificate Program in Craft Instructor Training for Community and Institutional Needs. The Program Students learn about contemporary and historical Textiles through personal explorations of a wide range of processes and the study of traditional and contemporary work through written sources, gallery and studio visits, and slides. Guest lectures by artists and other professionals working in Textiles and related areas will add distinctive voices to the program. In the first year the core content of Weaving and Textile Surface Design is complemented by courses in Drawing, Design. Visual Literacy and Communications. During the second year Textile History, Design and Drawing courses complement advanced courses in Weaving and Surface Design. An elective, to be chosen in consultation with the Coordinator from general Art courses, will allow students to develop understandings in various other specific areas which will inform their practice. A critical and analytical approach to their own work will enable graduates to be proficient in a range of practical, experimental, or theoretical professional activities. Academic - Art: Textile Arts 90 Career Opportunities Graduates may choose to work independently as artists or crafts people, exhibiting their work, doing commissions for individuals or corporations, working in the fashion industry or in interior design. Other career options exist in textile conservation, and in combination with academic studies such as Anthropology or Art History. Textile dyers are needed by theatre, film and dance companies. Graduates may also choose to take the Craft Instructor Training Program Course, which will train them to teach in various institutions. Graduates of the Textile Arts Program may wish to continue their studies at degree granting institutions, focusing in areas of their choosing. The Crafts form an important aspect of the cultural life in any community and many ways exist to apply the skills learned and build a professional career. The Craft Instructor Training for Institutional and Community Needs Program teaches students who are already experienced in their chosen crafts or arts discipline. The focus is on instructional skills, human relations, and adaptation techniques for people with special needs. A two week practicum offers practical experience. This program has been developed with advice from professionals who work for various institutions or centres that teach Arts and Crafts and has had a high success rate for placing graduates in jobs. Admission Requirements Prospective students are admitted on the basis of an interview and a portfolio which contains a representative sample of the student's previous work. The portfolio can include a mixture of actual works in any textile or arts media and preparatory drawings as well as photographs or slides of actual work. With the Coordinator's permission, the portfolio requirements may be waived. Advanced Registration for Fall 1995 for all students: Contact the Art Department by April 28,1995 to arrange an interview in the second or third week of May. Applicants to the program must supply the following documentation to the College by April 28,1995. • Completed Capilano College Application for Admission • Secondary and Post-secondary Transcripts • Certificate of English Language Assessment Test (ELAT) or Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL), if applicable • Textile Arts or Craft Instructor Training Questionnaire Note: Applications for Admission must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar, together with official transcripts and the pertinent documents. Some additional interviews may be scheduled in the third week of August, space permitting. Evening interviews are available. Transfer Credits Courses marked with an asterisk (i.e. AHIS 105*) carry transferability to UBC, SFU, UVic and other academic degree-granting institutions. Other courses can be transferred to programs which include Textile Arts in their curriculum. Students should understand that advanced standing in any institution is usually based on interview and portfolio submission, as well as credits. See the B.C. Transfer Guide for transfers in British Columbia, and contact the Art Department for more specific information. TXTL 178 AHIS 231* FOURTH TERM TXTL 268 Weaving IV TXTL 285 Textile Surface Design IV TXTL 153 Introductory Drawing II AHIS 232* Aspects of Textiles Elective Some materials needed for the courses are supplied and are covered by a supply fee. In addition, students should expect an outlay for midterm, final projects, basic supplies and textbooks. Program Content Textile Arts Diploma Program Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements Electives FIRST TERM TXTL 158 TXTL 160 TXTL 168 AHIS 104* CMNS 120 or ENGL 100 Credits 36 18 _J> 60 Design I Textile Surface Design I Weaving I Intro, to Visual Literacy I Effective Writing & Speech 3 3 3 3 Composition _3 15 SECOND TERM TXTL 154 Introductory Drawing I TXTL 161 Textile Surface Design II TXTL 169 Weaving II AHIS 105* Intro, to Visual Literacy II CMNS 153 Communications & the Arts 3 3 3 3 _3 15 THIRD TERM TXTL 267 Weaving III TXTL 284 Textile Surface Design III 3 3 3 3 _3 15 3 3 3 3 _3 15 Course Descriptions For Art History and Communications course descriptions, see the appropriate department sections in this Calendar. Textile Arts 153 (3) Introductory Drawing II Prerequisite: Special Fees and Expenses Design II History of Textiles Elective (4,0,0) (S) Textile Arts 154 This is a further exploration of drawing media and techniques with an emphasis on a more individual and interpretive approach. Students will learn how to develop themes for drawing aimed at illustration and reproduction. Studies include drawing styles and modes of graphic expression, interpretive stylization and distortion; drawing with pen and ink, washes, ink and brush, felt markers and mixed media. The course will also cover the concepts of mass, light and dark, plan, depth and space, and their graphic representation through various drawing techniques. Textile Arts 154 (3) Introductory Drawing I (4,0,0) (S) This course offers students drawing skills that will be useful in their practice. Concentration will be given to the study of primary drawing media and basic techniques, including pencil, pen and ink, brush and ink, marking pens, conte and pastel. It includes the study of perspective drawing from direct observation and representational rendering techniques of objects, structures, surfaces and textures. Students will learn how to visualize in graphic terms, to symbolize and to stylize in terms of line and line characteristics, and to develop power of observation and graphic sensibility. Textile Arts 158 Design I (3) (4,0,0) (F) Basic design elements and principles of colour theory will be studied. Sources of inspiration and imagery will be explored using a variety of materials and processes. Two dimensional repeat design will be studied for application to surface decoration and compositional elements will be investigated and adapted for textiles. Main project will be presented in textiles. Academic - Art: Textile Arts 91 Textile Arts 160 (3) Textile Surface Design I (4,3,0) (F) Textile Arts 178 Design II (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Textile Arts 158 This is an introduction to traditional methods of printing on fabric using found objects, blocks and stamps with pigment and dyes. Wax resists and bleach discharge effects will be explored. Bound and tied resists will also be used with natural and fibre-reactive dyes. Design possibilities will be studied for each medium and traditional dye techniques from many cultures will be examined. This study of design principles and concepts focuses on the use of themes and problem solving techniques and explores sources of imagery and inspiration. It also involves more advanced colour studies. Different design media with their adaptation to textiles will be used. Textile Arts 161 (3) Textile Surface Design II Prerequisite: Textile Arts 169 (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Textile Arts 160 This is an introduction to printing fabric with stencils using pigments, fibre-reactive and natural dyes. Katazome techniques withricepaste resists will be demonstrated. Applique and stitching techniques will be used for surface decoration and design possibilities for each medium will be explored. Printed fabrics from different cultures and time periods will be studied. Textile Arts 168 Weaving I (3) (3) (4,3,0) (S) This introduction to loom weaving includes warping the loom and drafting basic weaves on four harnesses. It will include samples and finished pieces, with an emphasis on colour relationships, textures, and use of different fibres. Controlled dye techniques will be introduced and historical and contemporary weaving from different cultures will be studied. Academic - Art: Textile Arts 92 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Students will expand their knowledge of basic weaves through drafting, designing samples and completing finished projects using loom-controlled weaves and some computer assisted designing. Hand-manipulated structures, ikat and painted warps will also be explored. The first part of the course emphasizes structure and patterns; the second part looks at graphic imagery and weaving. Both technical skills and personal expression will be developed, and traditional and contemporary textiles will be discussed in class and through research. (4,3,0) (F) This course is divided into two parts. One segment deals with basic fibre properties and construction techniques such as felting, yam construction, dying and various offloom weaving techniques. Twining and coiling for basketry will be studied and historical as well as contemporary objects from various cultures will be discussed. Tapestry is the subject of the second half of the course. A sampler is woven to learn the basic vocabulary of traditional techniques. Analysis of techniques used by medieval and contemporary artists helps students to explore the application of the basic techniques. Studies in tapestry include the discussion of the great mural tapestries of medieval Europe and the rebirth of tapestry during the 20th century. One finished piece is woven. Textile Arts 169 Weaving II Textile Arts 267 Weaving III Textile Arts 268 Weaving IV (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Textile Arts 267 This is a further exploration of techniques and ideas in weaving and/or combinations with other methods of textile constructions. Students will develop necessary techniques for individually designed projects, involving sampling, research and final projects. Topics can include rug-weaving, computer assisted designing for pattern weaving, advanced multi-harness weaving, supplementary warp/weft and others. Critical feed-back will be encouraged in class and individually. Textile Arts 284 (3) Textile Surface Design III (4,0,0) (F) This study of screen printing techniques using paper, wax, lacquer and direct emulsion stencils involves a variety of methods for producing a repeat design with different registration possibilities. There will be an option for using photographic stencils for projects. Light sensitive dyes will be used for direct effects on fabric and hand-painting with different dyes and pigments will be combined with screening techniques. Textile Arts 285 (3) Textile Surface Design IV (4,3,0) (S) CRAFTS INSTRUCTOR TRAINING FOR COMMUNITY AND INSTITUTIONAL NEEDS Prerequisite: Textile Arts 284 Direct hand-painting techniques will be introduced and different dyestuffs and pigments for natural and synthetic fabrics will be used. Relief and 3D fibre construction methods will be used with fabric embellishment techniques and direct dyeing techniques to create fibre structure. Basic paper-making techniques will be studied, exploring the possibilities of paper collage, cast paper, use of different pulps, colouring and making pulp from plants. This Certificate Program trains students with good backgrounds in Arts & Crafts to teach in various situations, such as recreation and community programs, schools or institutions with Art and Craft courses. Students need to present a portfolio of their work to enter the course. Some students who have related experiences but who do not have a portfolio may be admitted under condition that they prepare a portfolio and/or take applied arts or crafts courses before graduating. For admission please see general information for Textile Arts Program. Note: Applications for Admission must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar together with official transcripts and other pertinent documents. Instructional Faculty T. ADLER, B. A. (Toronto), M.S.W. (UBC) H. AVERY, M.FA. (UBC), B.FA. (Victoria), Ph.D. (UBC) L. HANSEN, Dipl., (Capilano) L. WOOLF, D.T.A.T.I. (Toronto), B.Arch. (Toronto) FALL TERM Textile Arts 187 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Crafts Instructor Training for Community and Institutional Needs I SPRING TERM Textile Arts 287 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Crafts Instructor Training for Community and Institutional Needs II Course Descriptions Textile Arts 187 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Crafts Instructor Training for Community and Institutional Needs I Students will learn adaptation techniques and instructional skills to teach people with various levels of physical and psychological abilities. Students will also be introduced to issues of aging and human relations processes that relate to teaching situations. Textile Arts 287 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Crafts Instructor Training for Community and Institutional Needs II Prerequisite: Art 187 More adaptation and instructional skills will be taught, as well as human relations skills. Students will also learn to Academic - Art: Textile Arts/Crafts Instructor Training ~93 Art History design, administer and maintain a craft program, and gain the ability to implement innovative curriculum and acquire the ability to teach in a variety of situations. Students will be required to complete a two-week practicum in a hospital, senior citizen centre, school, or community centre as well as a portfolio of their work. Instructional Faculty J. JUNGIC B.A., M.A. (UBC) D. N E A V E , B.A. (Manchester), M.A. (U.Vic.) P. SINGER, B.A. (George Williams), M.F.A. (Concordia) General Information T H E TEXTILE ARTS PROGRAM M A Y OFFER SELECTED EVENING COURSES AS FUNDING BECOMES AVAILABLE. PLEASE C O N T A C T T H E ART DEPARTMENT IN M A Y FOR FURTHER INFORMATION A T 984-4911 OR C O N T A C T EXTENSIONS PROGRAMS FOR NON-CREDIT EVENING COURSES. Art history courses are designed to enrich and broaden the student's knowledge of culture past and present, stimulate visual awareness and provide analytical tools with which to decode visual images. A major in art history can lead to careers in: architecture, interior design, commercial art, art gallery curatorial work, museum work, art dealing, teaching, art restoration, arts administration, art criticism, etc. University Transfer Credit A l l Art History courses offered at Capilano College are transferable to UBC, SFU, and U.Vic. Please check the B.C. Transfer Guide for further information. Course Descriptions Art History 100 The History of Art I (3) (4,0,0,) (F) This course studies the history of art beginning with the pyramids and tombs of Egypt and concluding with the Gothic Cathedrals and Italian fresco paintings of the High Middle Ages in Europe. A n understanding and appreciation of art are the aims of the course and through lectures and class discussion students will develop an 'eye' for seeing, and appropriate terms to describe the works shown. Our involvement with the art of the past clearly reveals how changing styles in architecture, painting, and sculpture are influenced by the historical context and the political, social, and religious thought of each period. Art History 101 The History of Art II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Beginning with the art of the Italian Renaissance, this course studies the history of painting, sculpture, and architecture to the present day. Individual artists including Leonardo, Michelangelo, Rembrandt, Goya, Van Gogh and Picasso are studied in addition to the larger period styles. Because works of art so perfectly reflect their age, the economic, social, and religious ideas of each period will be closely considered. Art History 104 (3) Introduction to Visual Literacy I (4,0,0) (F) This course is designed to encourage students to become visually literate and confident in the analysis/interpretation of all aspects of the visual arts. Confrontation with a Academic • Art: Crafts Instructor Training/Art History 94 w i d e range of ideas, images and media w i l l stimulate discussion and provide a deeper understanding of the creative process. The purposes of art w i l l be discussed and the relationships between art and society explored. The interdisciplinary nature of art w i l l be examined as well as the achievements of C a n a d i a n artists. Art History 105 (3) Introduction to Visual Literacy II (4,0,0) (S) A continuation of A r t H i s t o r y 104. The material w i l l include the art of the past as w e l l as the current art scene. Topics such as magic and ritual i n art, the landscape and the nude i n art, the artist as observer, art and advertising, w o m e n and art, aspects of photography and recent trends w i l l be explored. C a n a d i a n content w i l l be stressed. A s in A r t History 104 the emphasis w i l l be on developing visual literacy. Art History 106 (3) Introduction to Non-Western Art I (4,0,0) (F) This course introduces the student to aspects of PreC o l u m b i a n art, Northwest Coast Indian art and African art. T h e art, architecture and performing arts of indigenous peoples w i l l be examined i n the context of cultural, religious and social issues. Students w i l l learn about civilizations that flourished i n M e x i c o prior to the Spanish Conquest. A section on the art of the Northwest Coast Indian w i l l illuminate the achievements of local indigenous cultures and their inherent relationship w i t h the environment. In the component o n African art, students w i l l study the early history of African art and later artistic developments i n a variety of regions ranging from Senegal to Zaire. Art History 107 (3) Introduction to Non-Western Art II (4,0,0) (S) A continuation of A r t H i s t o r y 106. This course focuses o n aspects of Indian, Chinese and Japanese art. The w o r k s of art w i l l be examined i n the light of cultural, religious, social and political issues to emphasize the close connections between art and society. Students w i l l gain insight into the evolution of important periods, styles and artistic traditions i n Far Eastern Art. Art History 109 (3) Women, Art and Art History (4,0,0) This course w i l l present a broad historical survey of women's involvement i n Western A r t . It w i l l focus on the w o m a n artist i n society and consider the social, cultural and economic background of each period i n order to understand the conditions under w h i c h w o m e n artists have w o r k e d from A n t i q u i t y to the 20th century. The course w i l l also investigate the "image of w o m a n " i n the tradition of art history. Students taking this course cannot receive duplicate credit for Women's Studies 130. Art History 210 (3) History of Modern Art (19th Century) (4,0,0) (F) This course studies the mainstreams of modern art beginning w i t h the painttngs of Jacques Louis D a v i d produced d u r i n g the French Revolution and concluding w i t h the art of Cezanne. Emphasis is given to i n d i v i d u a l artists, and w o r k s b y Goya, Delacroix, Monet, V a n G o g h , G a u g u i n and others are studied i n depth. Aesthetic revolutions and counter-revolutions are explored i n conjunction w i t h the social and political upheavals of the 19th century. Art History 211 (3) History of Modern Art (20th Century) (4,0,0) (S) This history of 20th century art begins w i t h the w o r k of Picasso and Matisse and studies the impact of revolutionary movements of art such as Futurism, Constructivism, Dada, and Surrealism. America's post war contribution: Abstract Expressionism, Pop, M i n i m a l i s m , Conceptual and Earth A r t is studied as w e l l as new directions i n the art of the '80s. The a i m of this course is to demystify modern art by studying the u n d e r l y i n g concepts and theories, w h i c h w i l l reveal h o w closely art expresses the ethos of contemporary life. Art History 220 (3) Early Renaissance Art in Italy (4,0,0) (F) This course traces the origins of the Early Renaissance i n Italy, beginning w i t h the art of Giotto and focusing attention o n the creators of the n e w style, the architects, sculptors and painters of Horence, A r e z z o , M a n t u a and Venice. The intellectual, religious and political climate of the fifteenth century, linked to the expression i n this new art, w i l l also be considered, as w i l l be the emerging importance of private patronage. Art History 221 (3) (4,0,0) (S) High Renaissance and Mannerist Art in Italy This course studies the art of the H i g h Renaissance and the emerging v i e w of the artist as sovereign genius. The w o r k of Leonardo, Michelangelo and Raphael is examined i n depth. Focus is then g i v e n to the artists of the Mannerist School, whose highly subjective and artificial style dominates the latter part of the sixteenth century. The contributions of the Venetians as w e l l as the architecture of Palladio w i l l also be considered. Art History 231 (3) History of Textile Art (4,0,0) (F) This course studies the history of textiles i n Europe, the Near East and A s i a . T h r o u g h illustrated lectures w e w i l l Academic - Art History 95 Biology examine the tapestries of Medieval and Renaissance Europe, discuss the importance of guilds, and the contribution of artists such as Botticelli and Raphael. Coptic and Persian textiles, Turkish carpets, and the great silk tradition of China are also examined with constant reference to changing technologies and materials. The course concludes with a study of modern textiles in the industrialized age. Art History 232 (3) Aspects of Textile Art (4,0,0) (S) This course first explores the textile traditions of the indigenous peoples of Africa, and the Americas. Navaho and Pueblo weaving, Aztec and Peruvian fabrics as well as the North West Coast traditions of the Salish and Chilkat are looked at as examples of artistic expression and cross cultural interactions. Our attention then focuses on current aspects and issues relating to textile art. We will look at 20th Century tapestries and Fibre Art, discuss the relationship historically between gender and textiles, and conclude with contemporary trends and practices. Instructional Faculty C. BEREZOWSKY, B.Sc. (Hons.), M.Sc. (Sask.), Ph.D. (Guelph) R.G. CAMFIELD, B.Sc. (Hons.) (Monash), Ph.D. (UBC) M . DE JONG-WESTMAN, B.Sc., M.Sc. (UBC) M. FITZ-EARLE, B.Sc. (Nottingham), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Toronto), Coordinator of Biology S. GROVES, A.B. (Radcliffe), Ph.D. (UBC) N.A. RICKER, B.A. (Calif.), M.Sc., Ph.D. (UBC) V . M . TROUP, B.Sc. (Hons.) (McMaster), M.Sc. (UBC) L.K. WADE, B.Sc, M.Sc. (UBC), Ph.D. (Austral. Nat. U) Laboratory Supervisors and Technicians M . DE JONG-WESTMAN, B.Sc., M.Sc. (UBC), Laboratory Supervisor M . HAYES, B.Sc. (SFU), Laboratory Supervisor A. REK, Dip. Tech. (Warsaw), Laboratory Technician J. RICHARDSON, B.Sc. (U.Vic), M.Sc. (UBC), Laboratory Supervisor C. SANDERSON, B.Sc. (Hons) (Durham), Laboratory Supervisor N. SEGSWORTH, B.Sc. (Hons.) (Michigan), R.T. (C.S.L.T.), Laboratory Supervisor J. THOMPSON, Laboratory Technician B. WILLIAMSON, Dip. Tech. (BCIT), Laboratory Technician General Information Capilano College Biology Department offers courses to meet a variety of educational needs. The Biology 104/105 and 104/113 sequences meet the laboratory science requirements for Arts students as well as general interest biology courses. Students who intend to enter the following professions should enroll in Biology 108 or 110/111: Agriculture, Dentistry, Dental Hygiene, Forestry, Home Economics, Medicine, Pharmacy, Rehabilitation Medicine. Those planning a major in biology or other life science, such as Botany, Cell Biology, Ecology, Genetics, Marine Biology, Microbiology, Physiology, Oceanography, Zoology, should also enrol in Biology 108 or 110/111. Students lacking a "B" in Biology 12 (or BBIO 042) and/or Chemistry 11 should enrol in Biology 108 rather than Biology 110. A complete selection of second year courses is available which meet the credit transfer requirements of SFU, UBC and UVic. Some of these courses may be included in the requirements for pre-professional programs, and for specific life science programs. Students should consult the Biology Department for details of course requirements for various programs. Academic - Art History/Biology 96 All biology courses except Biology 200, Biology 201 and Biology 206 require weekly laboratory periods and/or field trips. Some courses also have extended field trips. Students' contributions to the cost of laboratories are included in the course tuition fee. Lab manuals for those courses requiring them must be purchased. Students are expected to defray in part the costs associated with field trips. of modern society on the environment is assessed. The focus is global; however, issues of particular importance to Canadians will be stressed. Major topics include: ecological concepts, conservation and endangered species, air pollution and global warming, water resources and water pollution. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit and, together with Biology 104, as a prerequisite for Biology 204 and 206. University Transfer Credit Biology 108 (4.5) Basic Introductory Biology All biology courses transfer to SFU, UBC, and UVic For more details consult the B.C. Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide available at the Advising Centre or College reception. Biological Sciences FIRST YEAR Biology 108 or 110/111 Chemistry 110/111 or 108/109 Physics 110/111 or 108/111 or 114/115 Math 110/111 English (six credits) This course is designed for the student who has not received a minimum of "B" standing in Biology 12 (or BBIO 042) or who has not taken Chemistry 11 (or BCHM 041). Upon successful completion of Biology 108, students are qualified to take Biology 111 in the Spring semester. The course topics are the same as for Biology 110. Biology 110 (3) Introductory Biology I SECOND YEAR (6,3,0) (F) (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: Biology 12 (or BBIO 042) with a minimum of "B" standing and Chemistry 11 (or BCHM 041), or with the permission of the instructor. A complete selection of second year courses which are transferable to all three B.C. universities is available. Consult the Biology Department for the specific requirements to transfer into third year at the university of your choice. The standard introductory biology course for students who plan to take further courses in science. Major topics will include the origin of life, cell structure and function, cell division and introductory genetics. Course Descriptions Biology 111 (3) Introductory Biology II Biology 104 Human Biology I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: None This is the first term of a course designed primarily as a laboratory science elective for non-science students not planning to take further courses in biology. The basic concepts of human biology and the position of man as an organism are examined. Major topics include: the evolution of man, the structure and function of human cells and tissues, cell division, human genetics, human reproduction, development, digestion, and nutrition. Biology 104 fulfils the entrance biology requirement for the Nursing program at BCIT. Biology 105 (3) Environmental Biology (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: None This course, designed primarily as a laboratory science elective for non-science students, examines a wide range of environmental issues from a biological perspective. Basic principles of ecology are developed and the impact (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110. A continuation of Biology 110 which further develops the discussion of basic biological concepts including biological systems, evolution and ecology. Biology 113 Human Biology II (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Biology 104 or permission of the instructor. A continuation of the study of human biology commenced in Biology 104. The course focuses on the anatomy and physiology of the following organ systems: cardiovascular, respiratory, musculoskeletal, nervous, and urinary. Special emphasis will be given to health and fitness as well as discussion of disease and treatment. The laboratory sessions will provide complementary practical study of the systems, and introduce techniques used to make physiological evaluations (e.g. heart rate, EKG, blood pressure, urine analysis). Completion of Biology 104 and Biology 113 permits students (upon entering Basic Health Sciences at BCIT) to receive credit for BHSC 105. Academic - Biology 97 Note: N o t a l l second year courses are offered each year. Biology 200 Genetics I (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110 and 111, and Chemistry 108 or 110 and 111. A n introduction to the principles and mechanisms of heredity. Emphasis w i l l be placed on an analytical approach to transmission genetics, genetics of humans, introductory molecular genetics, quantitative genetics and population genetics. There is no laboratory for this course. Biology 201 Genetics II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Biology 200. Biology 214 and concurrent registration i n (if not already completed) Biology 215 are recommended. A continuation of the principles and mechanisms of heredity, with emphasis o n the genetics of microorganisms, molecular genetics, genetic engineering and developmental genetics. There is no laboratory for this course. Biology 204 Ecology I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110 and 111, or Biology 104 and 105. A n introduction to the principles of ecology w i t h emphasis o n ecosystem and c o m m u n i t y dynamics and structure; ecosystem concepts, components, interrelationships, energy flow and nutrient cycling. Introduction to vegetation analysis i n the B.C. context. Both plants and animals w i l l be considered but plants w i l l be emphasized. Weekly field trips examine local biogeoclimatic zone structure and composition, while a southern B.C. field trip introduces several inland biogeoclimatic zones. This course serves as a C a n a d i a n Studies credit. Biology 205 Ecology II (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Biology 204. A continuation of ecological principles, with the introduction and application of quantitative concepts. The emphasis w i l l be o n animal ecology including population dynamics, animal behaviour, competition, predator-prey relationships, and other aspects of interactions of plant and animal populations. Weekly field trips and a three day field trip to the Pacific R i m National Park area w i l l be included i n the course. This course serves as a C a n a d i a n Studies credit. Academic - Biology 98 Biology 206 (3) Ecology of the Western Pacific (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110 and 111, or Biology 104 and 105, or Geography 112 and 114, or by permission of the Biology Coordinator. This course examines the complex ecology and biogeography of the lands bordering the western Pacific Ocean. Basic principles of biogeography and ecology w i l l be presented w i t h reference to the regions concerned. Selected environmental issues and biogeographic characteristics w i l l be discussed for the following regions: the A s i a n M a i n l a n d , w i t h emphasis o n Japan and C h i n a ; the M a l a y Peninsula and Indonesia; and Australasia, focusing o n Australia, Papua N e w G u i n e a and N e w Zealand. There is no lab for this course. Biology 210 (3) Morphology of Vascular Plants (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110 and 111. A comparative study of the vascular plant groups, the pteridophytes, gymnosperms and angiosperms w i t h emphasis o n the evolution, morphology, ecology and function of each of the groups. Discussions of problems i n plant morphology. Biology 212 (3) Invertebrate Zoology (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110 and 111. A comparative survey of the major phyla and classes of invertebrates w i t h emphasis u p o n phylogeny, adaptive biology and ecology of each group. The course is designed around the major unifying concept of evolution. Problems of contemporary interest i n the field of invertebrate zoology. The laboratory complements the lecture components and the course includes a three-day field trip to the Bamfield Marine Station. Biology 213 Vertebrate Zoology (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110 and 111. A comparative survey of the major classes of vertebrates, emphasizing evolutionary trends especially i n development and morphology of organ systems. A d a p t i v e features i n vertebrates are considered. The laboratory complements the lecture component w i t h representative vertebrates being examined. The lab component includes several half day field trips. Chemistry Biology 214 Cell Biology (3) (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110 and 111 and concurrent registration in Chemistry 200, if not already completed. Corequisite: Transfer to UBC requires Chemistry 200/201. A n integrated study of the structure and function of cells and their components. Ultrastructure of cell organelles as determined by electron microscopy will be related to the molecular functions of cells. Emphasis will also be placed on the techniques used to study cells, the evolutionary origin of cells and their components, and on comparisons between specialized cell structure and function. The laboratory exercises will use modern methods of microscopy and separation techniques in a detailed study of cell structures and their functions. Biology 215 Biochemistry (3) (4,3,0) (S) Instructional Faculty S. A L B O N , B.Sc., M.Sc. (UBC) M.E. EVANS, B.Sc. (South Wales), Ph.D. (London, UK) A. B. GILCHRIST, Ph.D. (SFU) P C . LE COUTEUR, B.Sc., M.Sc. (Auckland), Ph.D. (Calif.), Chair, Pure and Applied Sciences Division C. STONE, B.Sc. (Strathclyde), Ph.D. (UBC) K.G. TYERS, B.Sc. (Hons), M.Sc. (Western Ontario), Ph. D. (SFU), Coordinator of Chemistry, Geology and Physics Laboratory Supervisors and Technicians B. ADDISON-JONES, B.Sc. (Hons) (Manitoba), Laboratory Supervisor K.B. H A C K , B.Sc. (UBC), Laboratory Supervisor B.J. MOIR, Dip. Tech. (BCIT), Laboratory Technician G. RASTAR, B.Sc., M.Sc. (UBC), Laboratory Supervisor I. SMITH, H.N.C. (Aberdeen), Laboratory Supervisor Prerequisite: Biology 214 and concurrent registration in Chemistry 201, if not already completed. General Information A n examination of the fundamental principles and basic facts of biochemistry starting with protein structure and enzyme functions. Cell energetics, biosyntheses and mechanisms which control cell metabolism will also be considered. The laboratory will involve detailed experimental analyses, using the current techniques of biochemistry, of the molecular functions of cells and tissues. All chemistry courses include weekly three-hour laboratory periods unless otherwise stated. The cost of the labs is included in the course tuition fee except for lab manuals. Students are required to have (and wear) safety glasses in all laboratory periods. Biology 220 Microbiology I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110 and 111; Chemistry 110 and 111. Corequisite: Transfer to UBC requires Chemistry 200/201. A comprehensive treatment of introductory microbiology. The origin, basic structure, growth and metabolism of micro-organisms will be discussed. The lab provides practical experience in standard microbial techniques. Biology 221 Microbiology II (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: Biology 220 A continuation of Biology 220, emphasizing genetics, immunological aspects, and ecology of micro-organisms. The role of micro-organisms in agriculture, various industries, health and sanitation is considered. Chemistry 030 and Chemistry 104 fulfil the entrance chemistry requirement for the Nursing program at BCIT. University Transfer Credit AH chemistry courses, except 030, carry transfer credit to SFU, UBC and UVic. For details consult the B.C. Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide available at the Advising Centre or College reception. Chemistry FIRST YEAR Chemistry 110/111 or 108/109 Physics 114/115 or 110/111 or 108/111 Math 110/111 English (six credits) Elective (six credits) SECOND YEAR Chemistry 200/201 and 204/205 Transfer to UBC or SFU (consult a faculty member) Physics 200/201 and 210/211 or 218/222 and 210/211 Math 200 and 230, and 235 depending upon university (consult a faculty member) Elective Science Elective from math or physics Students planning to pursue a major or honours course in chemistry should consult a faculty member as requirements differ with different universities. Academic - Biology/Chemistry 99 Chemistry 109 Course Descriptions Chemistry 030 (3) (6,3,0) (S) Basic Chemistry II (4,2,0) (S) An Introduction to Chemistry Prerequisite: (4.5) N o n e (No university transfer credit) This course is designed for those students w h o have had no previous chemistry, and w h o w i s h to go on in sciences. Two h o u r labs are given. A t o m s , molecules, the mole, chemical formulas, ionic and covalent bonding. Balancing equations, simple stoichiometry problems, solutions, acids, bases and salts, e q u i l i b r i u m , gas laws. Prerequisite: Chemistry 108. M a t h 110 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. Students w i t h Chemistry 110 permitted to enrol i n Chemistry 109 only w i t h Chemistry Department's permission. This course covers the material of Chemistry 111, and, i n addition, provides the background necessary for a student w h o has not taken Chemistry 12. Chemistry 110 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Principles and Methods of Chemistry I Chemistry 104 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Fundamentals of Chemistry I Prerequisite: Corequisite: Prerequisite: None, but some chemistry and mathematics recommended. Students w i t h B C H M 042 should see D r . K e n Tyers, Chemistry Coordinator, for appropriate placement. A course specifically designed for the non-science students w h o need first-year chemistry requirements for nursing, home economics and h u m a n kinetics, etc. A study of chemical principles, stoichiometry, the chemical bond; atomic structure; chemical periodicity; introductory thermochemistry; gases. A course for students w h o plan careers i n science. A study of stoichiometry; the gaseous state; solids; liquids; solutions; atomic structure; the periodic system; chemical Chemistry 105 Chemistry 111 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Chemistry 12. M a t h 103 or 105 or 110. b o n d i n g ; thermochemistry. Chemistry 110/111 maybe completed by guided self-study format; however, this option is not available in 1995/96. (3) (4,3,0) (S) Fundamentals of Chemistry II Principles and Methods of Chemistry II Prerequisite: Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 110. M a t h 110 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. Chemistry 104. A study of liquids, solids, and changes of state; oxidationreduction, electrochemistry, representative inorganic chemistry; equilibrium; acids, bases and salts; organic chemistry. Thermodynamics, kinetics, equilibrium, acids, bases and salts; redox equations, electrochemistry; organic chemistry. Chemistry 110/111 may be completed by guided self-study format; however, this option is not available in 1995/1996. NOTE: Chemistry 108,109,110, and 111 students: students who lack mathematics prerequisite or corequisites should see a chemistry instructor prior to registration to discuss possible prerequisite waivers. Chemistry 108 (4.5) (6,3,0) (F) Basic Chemistry I Prerequisite: Corequisite: Chemistry 11 or Chemistry 030. M a t h 103 or 105 or 110. Students w i t h B C H M 041 or 042 should see D r . K e n Tyers, Chemistry Coordinator, for appropriate placement. Students w i t h Chemistry 12 are not permitted to enrol i n Chemistry 108 except w i t h Chemistry Department's permission. This course covers the material of Chemistry 110, and, i n addition, provides the background necessary for a student w h o has not taken Chemistry 12. Academic - Chemistry 100 Chemistry 200 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Organic Chemistry I Prerequisite: Chemistry 105,109 or 111. A n y student w h o has attempted the course previously w i l l not be allowed to register without the instructor's permission. A study of nomenclature, structure, and spectroscopy of organic molecules; alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, organometallic compounds, alcohols, ethers, alkyl halides; mechanisms and stereochemistry. Chemistry 201 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Organic Chemistry II Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 200 Aromatic chemistry, aldehydes, ketones, acids and their derivatives, carbanions; amines; nitro, azo, diazo and related compounds; heterocyclics; carbohydrates, protein chemistry; polymers; natural products. Chemistry 204 Physical Chemistry (3) (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 109 or 111, or Chemistry 105 w i t h a " B " standing, M a t h 111. This course is an introduction to chemical thermodynamics and its application to gas behaviour, chemical and phase equilibria, colligative properties and electrochemistry. The laboratory w i l l introduce the student to physical and analytical techniques. Chemistry 205 (3) Physical Inorganic Chemistry (4,3,0) (S) Instructional Faculty B. N G . , B . A . (Intl. Christian U., Japan), M . A . (London), Teach. Cert. G r a d . Master (Hong Kong) Y . Q U , B . A . (Shandong Teachers' U . ) M . A . (Beijing Foreign Studies U.) Students w i t h a competence i n the language beyond the level of the course i n w h i c h they are registered w i l l be required to w i t h d r a w . Students w h o are not sure of their language level should contact an instructor. Course Descriptions Prerequisite: Chemistry 109 or 111, or Chemistry 105 w i t h a " B " standing. Chinese 100 A n introduction to the properties, bonding, structure and reactivity of coordination complexes of the first r o w transition elements. Chemical kinetics and current spectroscopic methods w i l l also be covered. The laboratory component emphasizes the synthesis of inorganic compounds and the use of modern analytical instruments. Introduction to M a n d a r i n Chinese using the P i n y i n system of pronunciation i n M a i n l a n d C h i n a . For complete beginners (spoken and written) i n Chinese. This course starts w i t h basic phonetics, tones, and pronunciation to prepare students to speak the language. G r a m m a r a n d the w r i t i n g of about 150 Chinese characters are taught. Chinese 101 (3) (3) (4,2,1) (F) (4,2,1) (S) Prerequisite: Chinese 100 or permission from instructor. Chinese 101 takes students w h o have learned basic M a n d a r i n phonetics and about 150 Chinese characters. This course stresses conversational skills and listening comprehension using situational dialogues. M o r e grammatical structures and Chinese characters are taught. Students w i l l also learn how to use a Chinese dictionary as a tool for further study. Chinese 150 (3) (4,2,0) (F) Spoken Mandarin: For Speakers of Other Chinese Dialects This is a Mandarin conversational course for speakers of other Chinese dialects. Students should have a good command of Chinese characters and grammar. T h i s course is designed for students to gain fluency i n spoken M a n d a r i n Chinese, particularly i n the areas of aural comprehension and oral fluency. Chinese 151 (3) (4,2,0,) (S) Spoken Mandarin: For Speakers of Other Chinese Dialects Prerequisite: Chinese 150 or the equivalent or permission from instructor. This conversational course continues w i t h the d e v e l o p ment of aural comprehension and oral fluency i n M a n d a rin for speakers of other Chinese dialects. Contrasts between M a n d a r i n and other dialects w i l l be made. Perfection of M a n d a r i n pronunciation "Pinyin" w i l l be stressed. Academic - Chemistry/Chinese 101 Commerce Chinese 200 (3) (4,2,1) (F) Prerequisite: Chinese 101 or permission of instructor. This course is for students w h o k n o w the basics of M a n d a r i n phonetics and grammar and approximately 600 Chinese characters, or those w h o have completed Chinese 100 and 101. M o r e Chinese characters are taught and the course focuses on reading and w r i t i n g of simple Chinese texts. Students are introduced to Chinese literature. Chinese 201 (3) (4,2,1) (S) Instructional Faculty M . N I A , B . A . (Hons) (Tehran), M . A . (York) J.E. S A Y R E , B.S., B . A . (Denver), M . A . (Boston) K . V . T O W S O N , B.Sc., M.Sc. (SFU) J. W A T E R S , B . A . (Hons.) M . A . (SFU), Ph.D. (SFU) J. W I L S O N , B . C o m m . (UBC), C A . The College offers a two year transfer package to U B C consisting of Year I and Year II as follows: Prerequisite: Chinese 200 or permission of instructor. Year I Continues the work of Chinese 200. Students d o not need to a p p l y to the C o m m e r c e Department to enter the first year. S i m p l y apply to the College through the Registrar's Office and ensure that the following courses are taken: a) Economics 111 and 112; b) English 100 followed by O N E of English 103,104,105, 106; c) The Mathematics requirement is: • If Algebra 12 was successfully completed w i t h a 'C+' grade or better, take M a t h 108 followed b y M a t h 109 (Note: 110 and 111 can be substituted for 108/109, but this combination is more oriented towards science than business). • If Algebra 12 was successfully completed w i t h a grade of T or ' C take M a t h 107 followed b y M a t h 108. Students may N O T count the M a t h 107 course as part of the required 30 credits needed i n Year I and U B C may not grant credit for M a t h 107. d) Four electives: any four university transfer courses; e) Commerce students should N O T take M a t h 101 or 102 and should also note that credit w i l l be granted for only one computer language - i.e. C o m p 080 or C o m p 102 but not both. Year II U p o n completion of Year I, students must then A P P L Y for admission to the Commerce Program itself b y completing a "Commerce Program A p p l i c a t i o n " w h i c h can be obtained from the Social Sciences D i v i s i o n . There are only 35 seats available i n Year II and preference w i l l be given to students w i t h the best Year I records w h o want to take the entire Year II Program. Applications to the Commerce Program should be made immediately i n late spring once the Year I courses are complete and grades received. Students w h o wait until late summer may find that all spaces have been filled. In the Fall T e r m students admitted to Year II w i l l take: Commerce 290,292,293, Economics 211 and one university transfer elective. Academic - Chinese/Commerce 102 A Fall term Grade Point Average ( G P A ) of 2.67 w i t h no grade below C - must be achieved to continue into the Spring term, w h e n the following courses w i l l be taken: Commerce 291, 294, 297,392 and one university transfer elective. Admission Applications for admission must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar, together w i t h official transcripts and other pertinent documents. Transfer to UBC The current policy of U B C is to automatically admit into Year III all students w h o complete C a p i l a n o College's Year II program (in one year) w i t h a G P A i n Year II of 3.0 or higher. Transfer to SFU or UVic Some courses i n the U B C transfer package do not transfer to S F U or U V i c . Students wishing to transfer to either of these institutions are, therefore, strongly urged to see a Counsellor or A d v i s o r before a p p l y i n g for admission to Year II. Commerce 294 (4) Managerial Accounting (6,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: C - or better i n Commerce 293 Introduction to the development and use of accounting, information for management planning and control and the development of cost information for financial reports. Commerce 297 (3) Capital Markets and Institutions (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to the economic environment i n w h i c h businesses operate i n c l u d i n g the role of the Bank of Canada. Analysis of domestic and international money markets and institutions and the basic capital asset valuation models. Commerce 392 Labour Relations (3) (4,0,0) (S) A n introduction to union-management relations which includes the study of trade u n i o n history and structure, the collective bargaining process and labour legislation. Course Descriptions Commerce 290 (3) Quantitative Methods for Business. (4,0,0)(F) A study of standard quantitative methods used i n business and industry, including decision theory and basic probability. The study of computer software packages is included. Commerce 291 (4) Applications of Statistics in Business (6,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: C - or better in Commerce 290 The methods and applications of statistics i n business; continuous random variables; sampling; estimation of parameters; hypotheses testing and regression analysis. Commerce 292 (4) Principles of Organizational Behaviour (6,0,0) (S) Behaviour i n organizations as it affects people or individuals, their relationships w i t h others, their performance i n groups and their effectiveness at work. Commerce 293 (3) Financial Accounting (4,0,0) (F) A n introduction to the construction and interpretation of financial statements and reports including the balance sheet, income statement, statement of retained earnings and the statement of change in financial position. Academic - Commerce 103 Computing Science Instructional Faculty A . B E N N E T T - B R O W N , B . A . (SFU) J.D. B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c . (UBC), Ph.D. (Waterloo), Coordinator of C o m p u t i n g Science R. B R E W S T E R , B.Sc, M.Sc. (UVic), Ph.D. (SFU) P. C A R T E R , B.Sc. (Hons) (Sheffield), M . S c , Ph.D. (UBC) Y . C O A D Y , B.Sc. (Gonzaga), M.Sc. (SFU) E. K U T T N E R , B.Sc, M . S c (UBC) C . W A T K I S S , B.Sc. (Carleton), M . S c , Ph.D. (Toronto), General Information The C o m p u t i n g Science Department offers computing science courses at the first and second-year university level. Students enrolled i n these courses have excellent access to the College's c o m p u t i n g facilities. Students planning to major i n c o m p u t i n g science and science students fulfilling computing science elective requirements normally take C o m p u t i n g Science 110/111 i n their first year. Other students w i s h i n g a n introduction to computers and programming normally take C o m p u t i n g Science 101 or C o m p u t i n g Science 102. University Transfer Credit ** C M P T 275 (Software Engineering) and P H I L 214 (Elementary Formal Logic) at S F U is a required course not offered at C a p i l a n o College. *** C S C 230 (Computer Architecture) and C S C 275 (File Structures) at U V i c are required courses not offered at Capilano College. Prerequisites The C o m p u t i n g Science Department requires at least a " C - " grade i n a prerequisite before a l l o w i n g a student to proceed w i t h a subsequent course. Students should note that w h i l e a " C - " is the m i n i m u m required to proceed, a better grade is recommended to ensure the best chance of success i n the subsequent course and a satisfactory G P A for transfer to a university. Students w i l l not be a l l o w e d to retake a prerequisite once they have completed a subsequent course w i t h a " C - " grade or better. Course Descriptions Computing Science 101 (3) Computers and their Applications (3,0,1) (FS) Prerequisite: N o n e M o s t computing science courses transfer to S F U , U B C and U V I C . For more details consult the B.C. Transfer G u i d e or C a p i l a n o College Transfer G u i d e available at the A d v i s i n g Centre or College reception, or call the C o m p u t ing Science Department. Computing Science FIRST Y E A R C o m p u t i n g Science 110/111 C o m p u t i n g Science 133 (UBC) M a t h 110/111 Physics 108/111 or 110/111 or 114/115 (UBC) Chemistry 108/109 or 110/111 (UBC) English (6 credits) ( U B C , U . V i c ) English (3 credits) or P h i l o s o p h y 110 (SFU) Electives (9 credits) (SFU) Electives (12 credits) (U.Vic) SECOND YEAR C o m p u t i n g Science 222/223 C o m p u t i n g Science 212 (SFU, U . V i c ) M a t h 200 M a t h 205 ( U B C , SFU) M a t h 230 (UBC) M a t h 235 (U.Vic) A r t Electives (6 credits) (UBC) Electives (9 credits*) (UBC) Electives (12 credits**) (SFU) Electives (15 credits***) (U.Vic) * C P S C 218 (Computer Organization) at U B C is a required course not offered at Capilano College. Academic - Computing Science 104 A n introduction to the basic concepts of computer hardware and software; applications of computers i n business, academic and personal life; social and ethical implications of their use. Students w i l l gain experience w i t h a microcomputer operating system and w i t h various software packages including w o r d processors, spreadsheets and database managers. The course also includes an introduction to computer programming. This is a n ideal first course for students w i t h little or no computer experience and serves as a good science option for students i n A r t s or planning to go into Commerce. S F U does not give credit for this course if it is taken after any other computing science course. May not receive science credit for science students. Computing Science 102 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Introduction to Structured Programming Prerequisite: A "C+" grade or better i n M a t h 12, otherwise M a t h 105 or equivalent must be taken concurrently. Students without a solid foundation i n modular algorithm design i n C S 12 are recommended to take C o m p 102 before attempting C o m p 110. A n introduction to computer p r o g r a m m i n g using a structured language; principles of problem solving and algorithm design, basic techniques for representing and manipulating problem data. The student w i l l learn h o w to design, develop and document well-structured programs. N o p r o g r a m m i n g experience is necessary, but previous exposure to microcomputers is helpful. Computing Science 131 (1) (1.3,0,0) (S) Introduction to C++ and Object Oriented Programming This course may be taken by non-science students w a n t i n g a more rigorous introduction to p r o g r a m m i n g than is p r o v i d e d by C O M P 101, or science students w h o lack C S 12 background. Prerequisite: A "C-" grade or better i n C o m p 110 or permission of the instructor. Computing Science 110 (4) Fundamentals of Programming (4,0,1.3) (F,S) Prerequisite: A "C-" grade or better i n C o m p 102 or permission of the instructor. M a t h 110 is a corequisite. A disciplined approach to modular program design. The course emphasizes the design of data structures and the development of algorithms, w i t h applications to areas of theoretical computing science. Compilation and execution processes and associated data structures are studied. Topics include data abstraction and abstract data types, d y n a m i c data structures, strings, stacks and lists, recursion, searching and sorting methods. This course is designed for science students w i t h a solid foundation i n modular algorithm design using a highlevel language such as Pascal, w h o w i s h to continue w i t h computing science as a core or elective i n first year. Together w i t h C O M P 111, it forms the prerequisite for the second year c o m p u t i n g science program. Computing Science 111 (3) Fundamentals of Computing (4,2,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: A " C - " grade or better i n both C o m p 110 and M a t h 110. A theoretical and practical introduction to concepts of c o m p u t i n g and machine organization. O n the theoretical side, the course deals w i t h the issues of computability and solvability of problems, and introduces the T u r i n g machine as a model of an abstract computer. Practical experience w i t h p r o g r a m m i n g i n a low-level language exposes the student to the fundamentals of number representation, memory organization and addressing, implementation of h i g h level language instructions, the operations of assemblers, linkers and loaders, interrupt processing, and interfacing w i t h the operating system. Computing Science 130 Introduction to APL (1) (1.3,0,0) (S)* Prerequisite: A " C - " grade or better i n C o m p 110 or permission of the instructor. A n introduction to A P L ( A Programming Language) both as mathematical notation and as a computer programm i n g language. A P L primitives and their use, arrays of data and their manipulation, modular design of vector solutions to problems, practical experience i n w r i t i n g and using A P L programs. A n introduction to the C++ p r o g r a m m i n g language for students w i t h experience i n a procedural language, such as Pascal. Topics include: program structure, data types, operators, control structures; arrays and pointers, structures and unions; C++ classes, objects, methods, and overloading. Computing Science 132 Introduction to Prolog (1) (1.3,0,0) (F)* Prerequisite: A " C - " grade or better i n C o m p 110 or permission of the instructor. A n introduction to the logic p r o g r a m m i n g language Prolog and to the basic concepts of logic programming. Topics include: using propositional and predicate logic to represent facts; relating the Prolog language to predicate logic; developing Prolog databases using predicates, lists, and recursion. •(Not offered i n 1995/96) Computing Science 133 (1) Scheme and Computer Programming (1,1,0) (S) Prerequisite: A " C - " grade or better i n C o m p 110 or permission of the instructor. A n introduction to the p r o g r a m m i n g language Scheme. Scheme is an ideal language for illustrating and clarifying fundamental computer p r o g r a m m i n g concepts. It is a small language and easy to learn quickly, yet supports powerful facilities or abstraction and generalization. This course uses Scheme to investigate concepts such as data abstraction, procedural abstraction, recursion, functional programming and object-oriented programming. Computing Science 212 (3) Introduction to Digital Hardware (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: A "C-" grade or better i n C o m p 111. A n introduction to the design and analysis of digital computer circuitry. H a r d w a r e storage of numeric and logic values. Introduction to arithmetic/logic digital circuitry and integrated circuits. Design and analysis of combinational and sequential logic circuits i n c l u d i n g adders, comparators, decoders, multiplexors and counters. Finite state machines and state equations. M S I and LSI components: registers, counters, R A M . *(Not offered i n 1995/96) Academic - Computing Science 105 Criminology Computing Science 222 Data Structures (4) (5.3,0,0) (F) Instructional Faculty C. H A T H A W A Y , B . A . (S.U.N.Y.) M . A . (Wash U.), M o . ) Prerequisite: A " C - " grade or better i n C o m p 111. Recommended Prerequisite: C o m p 131. A study of frequently used data structures and algorithms for manipulating them. This course emphasizes abstract data types and object-oriented programming. Topics studied include lists, stacks, queues, trees, sets, tables and graphs, static and dynamic implementations of these data types, recursion, analysis of the algorithms, searching and sorting. General Information C r i m i n o l o g y is the study of all aspects of crime from an interdisciplinary and integrative approach. The goal of C r i m i n o l o g y is to reveal the complexities of criminal behaviour and society's reaction to crime. C r i m i n o l o g y also offers both theoretical and practical knowledge of the Canadian criminal justice system. C r i m i n o l o g y 101 transfers to S F U , U B C , and U . V i c . Computing Science 223 (3) Discrete Mathematics with Applications (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: A " C - " grade or better i n both C o m p 111 and M a t h 111. A n introduction to the foundation of discrete mathematics and illustrations of its practical applications. Theoretical topics include logic and proof techniques, set theory, relations and functions, combinatorics and counting principles, graphs and trees. These topics are important in computing science and many other disciplines: applications include graph colouring, correctness and efficiency of computer algorithms (including recursive algorithms), digital circuits and formal languages. Academic - Computing Science/Criminology 106 Criminology 101 (3) Introduction to Criminology (4,0,0) (F.S) This course is intended to introduce students to the analysis of the relationship between crime and society. The core concept is that "crime" is embedded i n social structure and process and therefore must be understood in relation to rather than apart from " n o r m a l " social activity. A variety of classical and contemporary perspectives on the definition, causes and consequences of crime w i l l be explored and student analysis of contemporary issues i n v o l v i n g crime i n C a n a d i a n society w i l l be encouraged. Economics Instructional Faculty N . A M O N , B . A . , (Hons.) (Kent), M . A . (SFU) M . L E O N A R D , B.A., M . A . (SFU) K . W . M O A K , B . A . (UVic), M . P . A . (UVic.) A . J . M O R R I S , B.A., (Hons.) (Manchester), M . A . (SFU) A.C.I.S. ( U K ) M . N I A , B . A . (Hons) (Tehran), M . A . (York) J.E. S A Y R E , B.S., B . A . (Denver), M . A . (Boston) M . Y A S E R I , B . A . (Hons) (Thames), M . A . (Saskatchewan) General Information Economics is the social science concerned w i t h the allocation of scarce resources and the production, distribution and consumption of goods and services. Economics 100 is an introductory course w h i c h raises and explores the kinds of issues that economists deal with. It therefore serves both as a survey course for those students planning to major i n other areas of the social sciences and an introduction to the discipline for those w h o are undecided about their future plans. Economics 250 and 252 are designed both for students majoring i n Economics and for other second year social science students w h o need economic history courses to complement their studies i n e.g. Political Studies. Students w h o plan to major i n Economics must complete Economics 111 and 112 before proceeding to second year courses at the College or the universities. Students w h o plan to major i n economics at S F U are also advised to complete their second year Economics requirements from Economics 250, 252, 290 or 291. Students w h o plan to enter the Commerce Program must take Economics 111 and 112 in their first year. Economics 111 (3) Principles of Microeconomic Theory (4,0,0) (F,S) A study of the theoretical constructs of consumer behaviour and the operation of business firms i n the market economy under conditions of perfect competition, oligopoly, m o n o p o l y and monopolistic competition. Included is the analysis of the firm's equilibrium condition and the determinants of income distribution. (Students cannot receive credit for both Economics 111 and 201.) Economics 112 (3) Principles of Macroeconomic Theory (4,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: Economics 111 The formal Keynesian theory of income determination and contemporary critiques are considered. Included is the study of the possible causes and solutions to unemployment and inflation and the importance of the international economy. Government fiscal and monetary policies are examined i n detail. (Students cannot receive credit for both Economics 112 and 200.) Economics 211 (3) Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Economics 111 and 112, M a t h 108 or 110. Consumer behaviour, production, exchange, equilibrium of the firm under different market structures, factor markets, and economic welfare. N o t transferable to S F U . Economics 212 (3) Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Economics 111 and 112, M a t h 108 or 110 University Transfer Credit Unless otherwise indicated after the course description, all Economics courses transfer to the universities. Economics 250 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Economic History of the Pre-lndustrial Era Course Descriptions Economics 100 (3) Introduction to Economics Income and employment theory, monetary theory, the open economy, economic fluctuations and growth. N o t transferable to S F U . (4,0,0) (F,S) A course w h i c h traces the development of conflicting views of the nature of the capitalist economic system. It focuses on the historical development of capitalist society and the divergent interpretations of the operation of capitalism as found i n the writings of such economists as A d a m Smith, D a v i d Ricardo, K a r l M a r x , J . M . Keynes and M i l t o n Friedman. It deals w i t h contemporary issues and such basic concepts as s u p p l y and demand. Prerequisite: Economics 111 and 112, or permission of the instructor A broad sweep of economic history from the O l d Stone A g e to the Industrial Revolution. The economics of the prehistoric era, the River Civilizations, Classical A n t i q u i t y and Europe i n the M i d d l e Ages are studied, while emphasis is placed o n the transition from feudalism i n Europe to early forms of capitalism. (Students cannot receive credit for both Economics 250 and 120.) Academic - Economics 107 Engineering Economics 252 (3) Economic History of the Industrial Era (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Economics 111 and 112, or permission of the instructor A study of the Industrial Revolution and subsequent economic growth in the context of several countries, including Canada. Contrast is made between the paths of development of today's industrial economies a n d those nations n o w attempting to industrialize. (Students cannot receive credit for both Economics 252 and 121.) Economics 290 Public Policy I (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Economics 111 and 112 A n examination of current government microeconomic policies, including resource management, utility regulation and pricing, international trade, income distribution, taxation, education and health care. Economics 291 Public Policy II (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Economics 111 and 112 A n examination of current government macroeconomic policies, i n c l u d i n g fiscal and monetary policies, debt management policies, international finance and exchange rate management, federal provincial relations, etc. Instructional Faculty J.D. B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c . ( U B C ) , P h . D . (Waterloo), Coordinator of Computer Science and Engineering R. H A U S C H I L D T , B.Sc (Hons.) (Queen's), M . S c ( U B C ) General Information Capilano College offers a full first year university program i n engineering. Bachelor degree completion generally requires three additional years of study at U B C , S F U or U V i c . Transfer to UBC The Capilano College first year engineering program is modelled after that of U B C . Students w h o complete first year engineering are eligible to be considered for admission to second year engineering at U B C p r o v i d e d they have obtained an overall grade point average of at least 2.5. The Faculty of A p p l i e d Science at U B C offers programs leading to the Bachelor of A p p l i e d Science (B.A.Sc) degree i n the following areas of engineering: Bio-Resource, C h e m i c a l , C i v i l , Electrical, Geological, Mechanical, Metals and Materials, M i n i n g and M i n e r a l Process, and Engineering Physics. Students w i l l normally complete the B . A . S c degree w i t h three additional years of study at U B C , except for Engineering Physics, which requires four additional years. Transfer to SFU The School of Engineering Science at S F U offers four-year programs leading to a Bachelor of A p p l i e d Science (B.A.Sc.) degree i n Electronics Engineering, C o m p u t e r Engineering, Engineering Physics, Biomedical and A u t o m a t i o n Engineering. Students w h o complete first year engineering at Capilano College w i t h a grade point average of at least 3.0 may be eligible for admission to second year engineering. E l i g i ble students must contact SFU's School of Engineering Science to arrange for a summer course i n Basic Electronics Engineering to allow for direct entry into semester three of the Engineering Science c o m m o n core. Transfer to UVic The Faculty of Engineering at U V i c offers programs leading to the Bachelor of Engineering (B.Eng.) degree i n Electrical, Mechanical and C o m p u t e r Engineering. The B.Eng. degree consists of eight academic and six w o r k terms. Students w h o complete first year engineering at C a p i l a n o College w i t h a grade point average of at least 2.5 may be eligible for admission to second year at U V i c . Academic - Economics/Engineering 108 Admission General In addition to satisfying the general admission requirements for the College (see " A d m i s s i o n " section i n this Calendar), students must apply for admission to the engineering program itself by submitting an "Engineering Program A p p l i c a t i o n " , available from the Office of the Registrar. This form together w i t h official transcripts and other pertinent documents should be received by the Office of the Registrar before the end of M a r c h . Enrolment w i l l be limited to 35 students, and student selection w i l l be made on the basis of their academic record. Students w h o a p p l y to the engineering program after M a r c h risk having their applications denied due to lack of available spaces. Admission from Secondary School Students entering the engineering program directly from secondary school must satisfy the general admission requirements of the College (see " A d m i s s i o n " section i n this Calendar) and have B.C. Grade 12 graduation (or equivalent) w i t h at least a " B " i n M a t h 12 and at least a " B " average i n C h e m i s t r y 12, Physics 12 and M a t h 12. Note that students m a y be required to achieve a certain level i n a diagnostic test before enrolling in some courses in the Engineering program (e.g. E N G L 100, M A T H 110). Please see specific requirements listed i n the i n d i v i d u a l departments section of this calendar. Due to competition for available spaces, students should be aware that meeting the m i n i m u m criteria is no guarantee of acceptance into the program. Admission from First Year Science Students may a p p l y for admission into engineering after successful completion of first year science. Exemptions w i l l be given from some first year engineering courses if the student achieved a grade of at least " B " i n the equivalent science course. In that case, the student w o u l d then typically take a m i x of first year engineering and second year science courses. Curriculum First Year Core (for direct entry from secondary school) FIRST T E R M ApSc ApSc Chem Comp Engl Math Phys SECOND TERM ApSc Chem Math Math Phys Phys Elective 120 150 110 110 or C o m p 102 100 110 114 121 111 111 152 115 116 Transfer to UBC After successful completion of the above c u r r i c u l u m w i t h a G P A of at least 2.5 the student is eligible for direct admission into second year engineering. Transfer to SFU Students should take C o m p 110 i n the Fall term. Phys 116 should be replaced b y C o m p 111. Engl 100 may be replaced by an elective. A p S c 150 should be replaced by a complementary studies elective. Students should consult the S F U calendar for recommended electives. Transfer to UVic Students should take C o m p 110 i n the Fall term. Phys 116 should be replaced b y C o m p 111. First Year for Students Transferring from First Year Science Grade Requirements N o r m a l l y , students require a G P A of at least 2.5 i n the first term of the engineering program to remain i n the program for the second term. U p o n completion of the first year, students require a G P A of at least 2.5 to be eligible for admission into second year engineering at U B C and U V i c , and a G P A of at least 3.0 for S F U . Since admission to engineering programs is very competitive, students should realize that the above m i n i m u m G P A values do not guarantee a d m i s s i o n , and that specific engineering options may require values well i n excess of the m i n i m u m . Students w h o have completed first year science successfully may be exempted from certain engineering courses if they have achieved a grade of " B " or better i n the equivalent science courses. A typical course load may be: First Year Science Transfer Curriculum FIRSTTERM ApSc 120 ApSc 150 Math 200 Math 230 Electives (6 credits) Academic - Engineering 109 English SECOND TERM ApSc 121 Math 205 Math 231 Math 235 P h y s 116 Elective Instructional Faculty Notes: 1. The above science transfer c u r r i c u l u m assumes that the student has obtained m a x i m u m exemption for equivalent science courses. Other course mixes are possible. M a x i m u m exemption consists of the following courses: C h e m 110/111; M a t h 110/111; Phys 114/115; C o m p 102/ 110/111. 2. The "Electives" w i l l usually be "complementary studies" (i.e. non-science) electives. Course Descriptions APSC 120 (0) Introduction to Engineering (1,0,0) (F) This course uses guest speakers, video taped material and field trips to provide students w i t h an orientation to a career as a professional engineer. Attendance at scheduled activities is the only course requirement. Final "grades" are reported as C R (Credit Granted) o r N C (No Credit Granted). T. A C T O N , B . A . (Victoria), M . A . , Ph.D. (Calgary) J. C L I F F O R D , B . A . , M . A . (UBC) P.L. C O N N E L L , B . A . , M . A . , Ph.D. (UBC) R. C O U P E , B . A . (Tasmania), Ph.D. (UBC) P.L. C O U P E Y , B . A . (McGill), M . A . (UBC) M . L . F A H L M A N REID, B . A . (UBC), M . A . (Toronto) G . N . FORST, B . A . , Ph.D. (UBC) S.R. G I L B E R T , B . A . (UVic), M . A . (UBC) W . G O E D E , B . A . (Wisconsin), M . A . (Edinburgh), P h . D . (California) G . H I N D M A R C H , B . A . , M . A . (UBC) C . H U R D L E , B . A . , M . A . (UVic) D . H . J A N T Z E N , B . A . (UBC), M . A . (York) C. M C C A N D L E S S , B . A . (SFU), M . A . (UBC) D . M U N T E A N U , M . A . (Bucharest), M . A . ( U B C ) R. N I C K O L I C H U K , B . A . (Carleton), M . A . (UBC) J. P E N B E R T H Y , B . A . ( U n i v . of Natal, South Africa), M . A . , Ph.D. (UBC) M . Q U A R T E R M A I N , B . A . , L.L.B., M . A . (UBC) W . G . S C H E R M B R U C K E R , B . A . (Capetown), P.Grad.Cert. in E d . (London), M . A . , Ph.D. (UBC) R . G . S H E R R I N , B . F . A . , M . F . A . (UBC) G . S T A N L E Y , B . A . , M . A . , (San Francisco State U.) S. T H E S E N , B . A . , M . A . (SFU) A . W E S T C O T T , B . A . (Alberta), M . A . (Queens), P h . D . (Toronto) General Information APSC 121 (1) Society and the Engineer (1,0,0) (S) This course deals w i t h the social context w i t h i n w h i c h engineering is practised. Topics w i l l include the history of engineering, engineering ethics, professionalism, gender issues, employment equity, environmental issues, multi-culturalism. APSC 150 (3) Engineering Graphics (1,4,0) (F) A n introduction to engineering graphics emphasizing the development of spatial visualization and graphical communication skills; technical sketching and engineering d r a w i n g using projection and sectioning techniques; principles, practices and conventions of engineering graphics; descriptive geometry and graphical solution methods to engineering problems; use of microcomputer based graphics tools. Other courses are described i n the appropriate section i n this Calendar (e.g., Mathematics, C o m p u t i n g Science, etc.). Academic - Engineering/English 110 University Transfer Credit Unless otherwise indicated after the course description, all English courses transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . For details consult the B.C. Transfer G u i d e . For first-year English transfer credit to the Universities, students must take two courses of: a) English 100,103,104,105, o r 106. For second-year English transfer credit to the universities, English majors should take English 200-201; all other second year students can take any two second-year level English courses. English Diagnostic Test Those students w h o w i s h to enrol i n English courses i n the A c a d e m i c D i v i s i o n must submit the results of the Language Proficiency Index Test or the College's English Diagnostic Test (EDT). Students w i t h any one of the following are exempt from this requirement: 1. a final grade of " A " or better i n English 12 or English Literature 12, or 2. a final grade of 4 or better i n an A d v a n c e d Placement course i n English C o m p o s i t i o n or English Literature, or 3. a final grade of 6 or better i n the International Baccalaureate course i n English A or English B. English 103 (3) Studies in Contemporary Literature E D T s are scheduled monthly throughout the year. D u r i n g registration periods, EDTs are scheduled almost daily. The times for these sittings are published i n the Fall and Spring timetables. Students w i s h i n g to write the E D T must pay the exam fee i n advance at the Office of the Registrar and b r i n g receipts to the appropriate test sitting. If y o u need further information, please contact the Humanities D i v i s i o n (984-4957). A study of selected and representative 20th century literature from the major genres. W o r k s studied w i l l be chosen for their intrinsic literary merit and may, i n certain sections, also reflect a particular theme of significance i n the contemporary w o r l d . (When material is selected for theme, the issue under consideration w i l l be announced d u r i n g the registration period). The chief a i m of the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation of literature, is to encourage original responses i n well-developed oral and written criticism. English as a Second Language See listing i n the Preparatory Programs section. (4,0,0) (F,S) W h i l e English 100 is not a prerequisite, competence i n essay writing and research is expected. Writing Centre A l l students registered at the College may come to the W r i t i n g Centre for advice on w o r k i n progress or help w i t h w r i t i n g problems. The Centre is not a proofreading service, but aims to help students develop their writing ability. The Centre also offers resources for writing: quiet space, a collection of reference books, handout sheets and exercises, and computers with w o r d processing, outlining, and editing programs. The W r i t i n g Centre is located i n FR4U6, outside the Humanities D i v i s i o n . It is staffed by faculty members from the English, ESL, Communications and A B E Departments. O p e n hours are posted. Course Descriptions English 010 (3) Language Skills (4,0,0) (F,S) A n intensive course i n basic language skills to enable the student to proceed without difficulty through an academic college program. C u r r i c u l u m w i l l evolve from the assessed needs of the students. This course is not transferable to the universities. English 100 Composition (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) A course i n the fundamentals of good writing, g i v i n g students intensive practice i n writing for a variety of purposes, w i t h emphasis o n the essay form. Progressively increasing emphasis is given to effective organization and development of material. Research techniques and documentation are taught. Problems i n mechanics of w r i t i n g are dealt w i t h individually, i n group discussion and by revision of essays. English 104 Fiction (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) A study of selected 20th century short stories and novels of intrinsic literary merit. The chief a i m of the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation of literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression i n well-developed oral and written criticism. W h i l e English 100 is not a prerequisite, competence i n essay writing and research is expected. English 105 Poetry (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) A study of selected major and significant m i n o r 20th century poets whose poetry is of intrinsic literary merit. The chief a i m of the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation of literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression i n well-developed oral and written criticism. W h i l e English 100 is not a prerequisite, competence i n essay w r i t i n g and research is expected. English 106 Drama (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) A study of selected and representative plays primarily of the 20th century. The chief a i m of the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation of literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression i n well-developed oral and written criticism. W h i l e English 100 is not a prerequisite, competence i n essay writing and research is expected. English 190 (3) Creative Writing (4,0,0) (F,S) A n intensive w o r k s h o p course designed to help students develop expressive skill and craftsmanship i n poetry, fiction, and drama. Students must have good Academic - English 111 compositional skills and are required to write extensively i n their chosen genre (approximately ten hours per week). They w i l l also develop an awareness, through written practice, of at least one of the other genres. Students are required to submit their w r i t i n g regularly for group discussion. Students w i l l be encouraged to develop their w o r k to the point where it w o u l d become acceptable for publication. English 191 (3) Creative Writing (4,0,0) (S) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. A study of texts i n all major genres by representative authors, from the medieval period to the m i d d l e 17th century. This course w i l l provide the student w i t h a broad historical and critical frame of reference, and the opportunity to study selected major works i n detail. English 201 (3) English Literature Since 1660 (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A course similar to English 200, but covering the later period since 1660. English 202 (3) Canadian Literature Pre-WWII (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A course designed to familiarize the student w i t h major representative authors from the colonial beginnings of Canada to W W II. This course w i l l investigate various themes and styles w h i c h evolved through early literature and w h i c h are reflected i n contemporary C a n a d i a n literature. English 203 (3) Canadian Literature Post-WWII (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. The continuation of English 202, becoming more intensive in the investigation of i n d i v i d u a l , major, m o d e r n authors of poetry, novels and plays i n Canada since W W II. This course w i l l study the emergence of significant contemporary themes and styles. Academic - English 112 (4,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A course w h i c h explores the w o r k s of major representative authors from the late 19th century to the present day. Students w i l l closely examine selected texts as literary achievements and set them w i t h i n the history of A m e r i can literature and the framework of A m e r i c a n culture. English 208 (3) Studies in Fiction (The Novel) A continuation of English 190. English 200 (3) English Literature to 1660 English 205 (3) Modern American Literature (4,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A study of the novel from various perspectives w h i c h consider the evolution and diversity of the novel as a literary form. Texts and critical approaches may vary from section to section. The aims of the course are to give the student an awareness of the cultural context i n w h i c h the novel came into being and became popular, and to study selected texts closely. English 209 (3) Studies in Poetry (4,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. A study of i n d i v i d u a l poets or schools of poetry selected by the instructor and d r a w n from any era between Chaucer's time and the present. Prosody, poetic forms, and critical approaches w i l l be studied, as w e l l as the historical and cultural contexts of the poems and of poetic movements. The aims of the course are to increase the student's knowledge of the craft of poetry and to study selected texts closely. English 210 (3) Studies in Drama (4,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: A n y combination of t w o first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A study of dramatic literature from various perspectives: the examination of dramatic types from various periods w i t h reference to the history and development of dramatic forms, of sub-genres of drama, of techniques i n dramatic literature and performance, and of the relationship of literary text to performance. Major plays from various periods and national theatres w i l l be considered. The a i m of the course is to increase the student's k n o w l edge of drama as an art form w h i c h has evolved out of literary and cultural history and out of performance. English 211 (3) (4,0,0)(F,S) English 291 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Studies in Short Fiction Creative Writing - Fiction Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. Prerequisites: English 190 and 191 or instructor's approval. A study of the development of the short story and novella form, through an exploration of the cultural and literary history i n w h i c h the genre developed and through a detailed analysis of representative texts. Texts and critical approaches may vary from section to section, although examples from both the 19th and 20th centuries w i l l be studied. The a i m of the course is to give the student an understanding of the development of the genre i n context and of writers of major significance to the genre. English 212 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Readings in World Literature to 1780 Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A course to acquaint students w i t h a variety of major or influential works of literature i n translation from the classical Greek era to the end of the 18th century, and to provide the student w i t h a broad historical and critical frame of reference. Texts are considered both for their o w n literary merits and i n historical context. English 213 (3) A n intensive workshop i n the w r i t i n g of fiction. The course w i l l concentrate o n furthering the student's knowledge of the state of current fiction and give students the opportunity to develop an awareness of voice, rhythm, dialogue, diction, character, and point-of-view. Students w i l l be expected to read a variety of works of contemporary fiction and to discuss various techniques. They w i l l have the opportunity of trying out these techniques i n both short and extended forms of fiction. See Women's Studies section for the following course descriptions. Women's Studies 104 (3) Contemporary English-Canadian Women Writers Women's Studies 106 (3) Contemporary American Women Writers Women's Studies 107 (3) Contemporary European Women Writers (In Translation) (4,0,0) (F) Readings in World Literature Since 1780 Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A course similar to English 212, but covering the period from 1780 to 1920, w i t h emphasis o n the 19th century. English 290 (3) (4.0,0) (F.S) Creative Writing - Poetry Prerequisites: English 190 and 191 or instructor's approval. A n intensive w o r k s h o p i n the writing of poetry, concentrating o n furthering the student's knowledge of current poetic forms while at the same time increasing awareness of her or his o w n voice, her or his i n d i v i d u a l g r o u n d for writing, and the development of her or his o w n poetic. Students w i l l be expected to read a variety of contemporary w o r k , both poems and statements that poets have made about their o w n poetics. Students w i l l have the opportunity to try a variety of forms, for instance, the short lyric, the serial poem, narrative verse, prose poetry. Academic - English 113 Environmental Science ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE m a x i m u m enrolment is 25 students per year. POST BACCALAUREATE DIPLOMA To apply for the Program, students must submit two application forms: (1) a general College admission form (see "Admission" section i n this calendar), and (2) and Environmental Science Program application form. Forms are available through the Pure and A p p l i e d Science D i v i s i o n or the Office of the Registrar. Inquiries for admission and further information should be directed to the Environmental Science Program, Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences Division, telephone 986-1911, extension 2453. Instructional Faculty J.D. B O N S E R , B.A.Sc., M . A . S c . (UBC), P h . D . (Waterloo) K . A . J . D A V I D S O N , B . A . (Winnipeg), M . A . (Manitoba) W . G A H E R T Y , B.Sc. (M.I.T.), M.Sc. (Stanford) S. G R O V E S , A . B . (Radcliffe), P h . D . (UBC), Coordinator of Environmental Science . R . M . M A C Q U E E N , B.Sc. (Waterloo), M.Sc. (UBC) L . H . N I K L , B.Sc., M.Sc. (SFU) J. H . N O R I E , B.A.Sc. (UBC), M.Env.Des. (Calgary) R. K . P A I S L E Y , B.Sc. (UBC), M.Sc. (Washington), J.D. (California), L L . M . (London School of Economics) N . P O T T T N G E R , B.Sc., M.Sc. (UBC) C T . R E A R D O N , B . A . , L . L . D . (Dalhousie), M . A . (Queen's), M . A . (M.I.T.) A . R O J A S , M . A . (York), Ph.D. (York) D . F. S H E R A T O N , B.A.Sc. Ph.D. (UBC) V . M . T R O U P , B.Sc. (Hons.) (McMaster), M.Sc. (UBC), Coordinator of Environmental Science S. Y E E , B.Sc. (UBC) A . W H I T E H E A D , B.Sc. ( U . V i c ) , M.Sc. (UBC) S. W I L K I N S , B . A . , M.Sc. (McMaster) R. J. W O Z N O W , B.Sc. (Alberta), P h . D . ( N e w Brunswick) General Information The D i p l o m a Program in Environmental Science is intended for students w h o have already completed a degree in science and w h o w i s h to acquire the knowledge and practical skills necessary for dealing w i t h environmental issues and projects i n the w o r k place. This is a full year program designed to prepare students to accept leadership roles in environmental problem solving through a combination of academic studies and field assignments. Areas of emphasis include applied ecology, toxicology, project management, environmental assessment, law, and ethics. Completion of an in-depth impact assignment involving work placement or directed studies is also required. Admission Requirements The normal requirement for admission is a degree i n a science or engineering discipline. Successful applicants w i l l have strong written and inter-personal communication skills and w i l l be selected on the basis of academic record, relevant experience and a personal interview. The Academic - Environmental Science 114 These applications, together w i t h the official transcripts and other pertinent documents, should be received by the Office of the Registrar by M a r c h 31. Program Content Fall Credits A p p l i e d Ecology 3 Computer Applications i n Environmental Science 0 Environmental Ethics 3 Land Use Impact and Sustainability 3 Seminar/Selected Topics 3 12 Spring Environmental Planning & Project Management 3 Environmental Toxicology & Waste Management 3 Environmental L a w 3 Environmental Impact Assessment 3 Computer Applications i n Environmental Science (continued) 3 Seminar/Selected Topics 3 18 Summer Field School (May) 3 P r a c t i c u m / G > o p (June, July) 3 6 Course Descriptions Environmental Science 500 Applied Ecology (3) (4,4,0) (F) A n examination of the impact of human activities o n ecosystem structure and dynamics. H u m a n interactions w i t h ecosystems are emphasized as well as the principles of sustainable development and pollution ecology. Environmental Science 501 (3) (4,4,0) (S) Environmental Toxicology and Waste Management A n investigation of the toxicology of exposure to environmental contaminants, i n humans and other organisms, i n a range of environments. Measurement, monitoring and remediation techniques are examined. Environmental Science 502 Environmental Ethics (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n application of ethical concepts to environmental issues. Topics w i l l include environmental decision making, the relationship between market economics and the ethics of environmental preservation, and the implications of environmental ethics for various sectors of society. Environmental Science 503 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Environmental Law The current status of environmental l a w i n Canada, particularly w i t h i n the province of British C o l u m b i a , w i l l be examined. The course w i l l include a critical analysis of important case studies and current environmental assessment guidelines. Environmental Science 504 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Environmental Planning and Project Management A n introduction to basic management skills w h i c h have practical value i n environmental planning and decision making. Critical thinking, risk management, project planning, budget management, and c o m m u n i t y involvement i n environmental planning w i l l be discussed. Environmental Science 505 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Environmental Impact Assessment (3) (3) (4,0,0) (F) Seminar: Selected Topics in Environmental Science I This seminar series is designed to provide a forum for discussion between faculty, students, and invited guests. Topics w i l l be chosen on the basis of student interest, current environmental issues, and the availability of guest speakers. Environmental Science 509 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Seminar: Selected Topics in Environmental Science II A continuation of E n v Sci 508. Environmental Science 510 (3) (2,4,0) (Su) Field School Practical experience i n data collection, field techniques, and project development. Most of this course w i l l be conducted off the m a i n campus at strategic environmental locations. Students w i l l be given assignments w h i c h emphasize instrumentation, environmental monitoring, data collection, and teamwork. Environmental Science 511 (3) (4,0,0) (Su) Environmental Science Practicum A n examination of the environmental impact assessment process (EIA) as a tool i n environmental decision making. This course w i l l review current federal and provincial procedural requirements and the relationship between E I A and other regulatory processes. Integration of E I A and social issues and the role of public hearings w i l l also be discussed. Case studies w i l l be used as focal points for discussion. Environmental Science 506 Environmental Science 508 A n opportunity to apply classroom theory through work experience. This is a n in-depth assignment i n v o l v i n g w o r k placement or directed studies i n resource-based, industrial, or public sectors. Students sponsored b y a specific sector or employer may be able to fulfill this requirement under supervision i n their normal w o r k place. (4,0,0) (F) Land Use Impact and Sustalnability This course w i l l investigate environmental issues arising from c o m m o n land use practices and critically evaluate approaches to sustainable land use and land use conflict. Topics include linear developments such as highways and transmission lines, site contamination, land fills, erosion, and acid rock drainage. Remediation, evaluation of land use competition, and native land claims w i l l be discussed. Case studies w i l l be used for illustration. Environmental Science 507 (3) (4,0,0) (F&S) Computer Applications in Environmental Science A n introduction to the use of computers for simulation, modelling and geographically-based information storage i n environmental science. Academic - Environmental Science 115 French 120 Instructional Faculty (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) University Preparatory French I L . C A N T I N O R R - E W I N G , B . A . (Montreal), M . A . (SFU) L . G A R E A U , B . A . (Laval), M . A . (SFU) O . K E M P O , B . A . (Alta.), M . A . , Ph.D. (UBC) C . M O R G A N , B . A . (Laval), M . A . (UBC) Instructional Associate A . F I E C H T E R , B . A . (UBC), C.I. Certificate (Langara) H . L A C O U R S E , D i p . Court Interpreting ( V C C ) , D i p . Conflict Resolution (Mediation), Justice Institute (B.C.) P. O U E L L E T , B . A . (York U . Toronto) COURSES French 100/101 U n i v . Preparatory French (Grade 12) French 120/121 1st year U n i v . French French 170/171 2nd year U n i v . French French 270/271 This course, together w i t h French 121, constitutes Grade 12 French. This is a conversational approach to the French language, i n c l u d i n g continuing instruction i n basic grammar and laboratory practise. French 121 (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) University Preparatory French II Prerequisite: French 120 ( m i n i m u m Grade C-) or permission of the instructor. Summary of Programs LEVEL Beginners' French (0 - Grade 11) Prerequisite: French 100/101 or French 11 or permission of the instructor. This course, together w i t h French 120, constitutes Grade 12 French. A continuation of French 120, this course is designed to give a limited fluency i n speaking and reading as w e l l as w r i t i n g skills. French 170 (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) First Year University French I Prerequisite: G r a d e 12 French, or French 120/121, or permission of the instructor. A l l French courses are transferable to S F U , U B C and U V i c . For details consult the Transfer G u i d e . To be taken by all students intending to proceed to a major or honours program at another institution. Continues the linguistic development of the student by means of grammar revision, weekly written and oral exercises, weekly assignments, compositions and appreciation of francophone literary w o r k s . FRENCH PROGRAMS French 171 UNIVERSITY TRANSFER CREDIT (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) First Year University French II The following French courses meet on a twice-a-week basis: four hours of instruction, plus one hour of conversation with a native French speaker, and 3 / 4 hour of language laboratory work. Students w i t h a competence i n the language beyond the level of the course i n w h i c h they are registered w i l be required to w i t h d r a w . Students w h o are not sure of their language level should contact an instructor. French 100 (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) Prerequisite: French 170 ( m i n i m u m Grade C-) or permission of the instructor. A continuation of the w o r k done i n French 170. French 270 (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) Second Year University French I Prerequisite: French 170/171 w i t h a grade of "C" or better, or permission of the instructor. Beginners' French A n advanced course w i t h emphasis on written work, i n c l u d i n g composition, translation and stylistic exercises. For absolute beginners and those w h o do not have Grade 11 French or the equivalent. A n intensive introduction to the French language through grammar, conversation, and laboratory practise. Literary works chosen from the francophone literature w i l l be studied and w i l l require some background reading. This course includes cultural enrichment through the m e d i u m of videos and music. French 101 (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) French 271 (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) Beginners' French Second Year University French II Prerequisite: French 100 Prerequisite: French 270 w i t h a grade of "C" or better, or permission of the instructor. This course, together w i t h French 100, covers h i g h school French Grades 8,9,10 and 11 and prepares the student for French 120. Academic - French 116 A continuation of the w o r k of French 270. Geography Instructional Faculty K . E W I N G , B.A., M.Sc. (Michigan) C . G R A T H A M , B.Sc., M.Sc. (UBC) C . G R E E N B E R G , B . A . , M . A . , ( U . of Manitoba), P h . D . (UBC) B. M C G I L L I V R A Y , B.A., M . A . (UBC) S. M A C L E O D , B.A., M . A . (UBC) J. M E L I G R A N A , B . A . (Toronto), M . A . (Queens) J. M I K I T A , B.A., M . A . (SFU) S. ROSS, B . S c , M.Sc. (UBC) G . W I L S O N , B.SC. ( N Y State), M . A . (UBC) General Information Geography courses are offered for students w h o are interested i n pursuing a career i n Geography as well as for those students desiring both A r t s and Science electives, or for those w h o w i s h to have a better understanding of the cultural and physical landscapes. The study of Geography opens the doors for men and w o m e n i n a w i d e variety of fields including: Teaching, U r b a n Planning, Forestry, Resource Management, T o u r i s m , Recreation, Economic Consulting, M i n i n g , Fisheries, Geographic Information Systems, Meteorology, and M a p making. The focus of Geography is on the environment i n w h i c h w e live. These courses i n Geography w i l l give y o u a w h o l e new perspective on the w o r l d . University Transfer Credit analyze some of the most serious concerns i n the w o r l d today. The environment is i n jeopardy from our actions — what can w e do about it? Geography 102 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Environmental Geography: Global Concerns The focus of this environmental course is the recognition that environmental issues are not restricted to isolated regions; rather, they have become global crises. A c i d rain, the greenhouse effect, depletion of the world's resources are but a few of the examples illustrating the global scale of our environmental problems. Identifying and understanding the processes responsible for the problems are most important; however, finding solutions is also critical to this course. Geography 106 (3) British Columbia: A Regional Analysis (4,0,0) (F) A b o d y of information that is frequently missing from our education is that of the province w e live i n . This course informs y o u about B . C . — its physical environment, the risks of l i v i n g i n this province, the variety of peoples, and the economics involved i n its resources. From an economic, political, historical, and cultural perspective one learns that contemporary problems are frequently a function of the past. For those interested i n business, teaching, or w a n t i n g a basic knowledge of B.C., this is an excellent course. A l l Geography courses at C a p i l a n o transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c Note: This course also serves as C a n a d i a n Studies credit to S F U . Course Descriptions Geography 108 (3) Canada: A Nation of Regions Geography 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Human Geography: People, Places and Cultures Different cultures i n different landscapes are compared and contrasted to our o w n . This course examines the many issues of h u m a n population, perception of the environment, diffusion of ideas, and cultural aspects of resource use and urban growth, to give students a v i e w into the many concerns on the h u m a n side of Geography. Geography 101 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Environmental Geography: Perception & Change There are numerous environmental issues that reach a crisis from time to time. This course examines h o w w e perceive the environment, our lifestyles, and h o w o u r attitudes affect the environment. Such issues include o u r use of water, the food we eat, herbicides and pesticides, and our overall use of energy. This is an excellent course for those concerned about the w o r l d w e live i n . Lectures, seminars, informal discussions, and audio-visual materials are used to make students aware of, examine and (4,0,0) (F,S) The understanding of Canada and Canadians is becoming more and more important to our economic and social well-being. This course examines C a n a d i a n problems and issues i n terms of the different regions i n Canada. Topics include the changing economy, cultural diversity, urban growth, and resource management, as we focus o n the Maritimes, Quebec, Ontario, the Western provinces, and the N o r t h e r n frontier. Note: This course carries C a n a d i a n Studies credit to S F U and is a component of the professional development program. Geography 112 (3) Introduction to Earth Environments (4,2,0) (F,S) A n introduction to Physical Geography using films, lectures, labs and field trips to explain processes i n landscape development. Some of the environments to be considered are: glacial, volcanic, coastal, arid and fluvial. Academic - Geography 117 M a p s and aerial photographs w i l l be used to illustrate the various features. Emphasis w i l l be placed o n Canadian examples and the interactions between people and their physical environment, eg. the physical and cultural history of the Fraser River Delta; the Athabasca tar sands and native peoples; pipelines and permafrost. Note: This course fulfills the requirements for a lab science transfer credit. Geography 114 (3) Weather and Climate (4,2,0) (F,S) A physical geography course introducing students to the study of our atmospheric environment. Principles of climatology and meteorology w i l l be explained (using films, lectures and labs), to permit a basic understanding of the weather we experience daily and seasonally. Emphasis w i l l be placed o n C a n a d i a n examples and the interactions between climate and other elements of our environment, including humans (air pollution, urban climates and mountain weather for example). Note: This course fulfills the requirements for a lab science transfer credit. Geography 200 (3) Technology and Economic Environments (4,0,0) (S) Geography 201 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Urban Studies: Planning and Development M o r e and more of us are l i v i n g i n an urban w o r l d . This course is designed to examine problems and issues that arise w i t h urban living; including psychological problems, the cost of housing, transportation issues, slums, suburban living, and the future direction of cities. W h i l e this course uses local examples, it also draws o n examples from other cities i n the w o r l d . This course approaches these topics through field trips into the city, slides, films, and field research. U r b a n studies leads to careers i n urban planning, real estate, land management, architecture, and urban politics as well as g i v i n g general c o m m u nity awareness. (4,0,0) (S) This course examines the A s i a Pacific i n terms of its social, economic, physical, historical and political geography. Academic - Geography 118 Geography 214 (3) Our Atmospheric Environment (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: Geography 114 or permission of the instructor This course w i l l p r o v i d e an intermediate understanding of the processes at w o r k i n our atmospheric environment. Broad topics to be covered are atmospheric energy, moisture, and w i n d s . These concepts w i l l be applied to phenomena such as urban climates and air pollution at the small scale, weather and forecasting at the intermediate scale, and climate change, ozone depletion, and E l N i n o / S o u t h e r n Oscillation on a global scale. This course w i l l involve lectures, labs, and field work. Geography 221 (3) Map and Airphoto Interpretation (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: A t least one other Geography course A n examination of the concepts and themes of economic geography i n terms of production and consumption. The traditional primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary divisions i n economic geography are reviewed i n terms of contemporary issues. The purpose of this course is to illustrate the importance of economic processes and tools to understand our environment. Geography 205 (3) Asia Pacific Geography The emphasis is placed o n the historical development and present day relationships i n both East and Southeast A s i a . This course introduces the concept of the Pacific Century and recognizes British C o l u m b i a ' s position o n the Pacific. This is an excellent course for those interested i n the past, present and future of the A s i a Pacific region and especially for those considering a business career i n this region. This is a second year course w h i c h is essential for those considering Geography as a major and is also appropriate for those w h o intend to pursue careers i n Geography, Forestry, M i n i n g , Cartography, and the numerous other areas that use maps and airphotos. This course combines lectures and labs that cover the basics of m a p reading and interpretation, map m a k i n g , aerial photography, and remote sensing of the h u m a n and physical landscape. Geology Instructional Faculty D.J.A. A T H A I D E , B.Sc. (Hons) (McGill), M.Sc. (UBC), Prof. Teacher's Cert. (B.C.) A . G . T H O M L I N S O N , B.A., M.Sc., Prof. Teacher's Cert. (UBC) may best adapt to these ever-changing earth-environments and act as stewards of earth's environments and resources. Geology 111 Historical Geology (3) (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: Geology 110 or equivalent. General Information Geology courses are designed for students planning a university degree program i n the geological sciences or i n the arts, humanities or social sciences. Geology 110 and 111 are especially appropriate for students i n need of a laboratory science. They provide an understanding of the origin, structure, composition and history of the earth. Courses include weekly laboratory investigations and several field trips, both local and distant (overnight). L a b tuition fees are included i n the course fee, however students must purchase a lab manual and testing kit, and share some field trip costs. This course examines the methods geologists use to deduce the origin, age and evolution of earth and its life. These methods are then used to investigate h o w earth's lithosphere, hydrosphere and atmosphere evolved before giving rise to life, and h o w ever since, life has interacted w i t h land, water and air. Next, the origin and growth of our "home" continent and adjacent ocean basins are studied. Finally, the processes and events that shaped (and are still shaping) our immediate environment are looked at i n more detail. Uses and abuses of earth resources and environments since the arrival of human beings also form part of the course. This course serves as a C a n a d i a n Studies credit. University Transfer Credit A l l Geology courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . For details consult the B.C. Transfer G u i d e or Capilano College Transfer G u i d e available at the A d v i s ing Centre or College reception. GEOLOGICAL SCIENCES (INCLUDING GEOPHYSICS, GEOCHEMISTRY, ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND OTHER EARTH SCIENCES) FIRST Y E A R O N L Y Geology 110/111 Physics 108/111 or 110/111 or 114/115 Chemistry 108/109 or 110/111 M a t h 110/111 English (six credits) Course Descriptions Geology 110 Physical Geology (3) (4,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: N o n e . However, experience i n secondary level chemistry and physics w i l l contribute greatly to mastering physical geology. This course v i e w s the earth as a heat engine w h i c h continuously recycles air, water and solid earth materials. It examines h o w nature's recycling of these materials results i n both the origin and the eventual transformation of igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rocks. Next, it investigates h o w lithospheric plates interact with each other and w i t h external recycling (atmospheric and hydrospheric cycles). Finally it considers ways people Academic - Geology ~119 Instructional Faculty B. H A N K I N , B . A . (UBC), M . A . (Wash.) B. P I R E S - S T A D L E R , Teach. D i p . (Zurich) M . A . (SFU) The student w i s h i n g to major i n G e r m a n fulfills department requirements w i t h G e r m a n 310, w h i c h may be taken in the second year if student has first class standing i n G e r m a n 200 or third year by permission of the department. Instructional Associate R. F R E I B E R G , B.Ed. (Gottingen University, West-Germany) General Information N O T E : A l l courses i n G e r m a n include five and 3 / 4 hours of instruction per week, made u p of four hours of lectures; 3 / 4 hours of laboratory practice; and one hour of conversational practice w i t h a native speaker. Native speakers of G e r m a n w h o w i s h to take a first or second-year German course must consult w i t h the G e r m a n instructor first. University rules governing such students differ w i t h i n departments, but the Language Department has correspondence dealing w i t h matters relevant to credit transfer and point of entry. In order to avoid any misunderstanding, such students are invited to discuss these problems w i t h the department prior to enrollment. Students w i t h a German A b i t u r ' are not permitted to enrol i n the course. Students w i t h a competence i n the language beyond the level of the course i n w h i c h they are registered w i l l be required to w i t h d r a w . Students w h o are not sure of their language level should contact an instructor. University Transfer Credit A l l G e r m a n courses at C a p i l a n o transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . For details consult the Transfer G u i d e at the back of the Calendar. S F U : Students w h o w i s h to proceed to S F U and to pursue further courses i n G e r m a n are reminded of the present equivalency standards. Transfer a n d course challenge credit i n G e r m a n w i l l be given at S F U for Capilano College G e r m a n courses to a total of 11 semester hours. Exemption from and placement i n higher courses are determined by the results of a placement test or other assessment procedure. U B C : In the case of U B C , present equivalent standards provide transfer credit o n the following basis: Capilano College UBC G e r m a n 100 and 101 (3 credits each) G e r m a n 200 and 201 (3 credits each) 100 (3) Academic - German 120 200 (3) Course Descriptions German 100 (3) Beginning German (4,1.75,0) (F) A comprehensive introduction to the G e r m a n language: comprehension and speaking are reinforced through reading and w r i t i n g . Films, tapes, games, field trips, etc. help develop an awareness of the cultures of the G e r m a n speaking countries. German 101 (3) Beginning German (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: G e r m a n 100 ( m i n i m u m Grade C), G e r m a n 10 or the equivalent w i t h written permission of the instructor. This course is a continuation of G e r m a n 100 and must be taken i n order to realize First Year level college/university G e r m a n . G e r m a n 101 should be taken whenever possible, i n the term following G e r m a n 100. German 200 (3) Intermediate German (4,1.75,0) (F) Prerequisite: G e r m a n 101 ( m i n i m u m Grade C+), G r a d e 11 or 12 G e r m a n or the equivalent w i t h written permission of the instructor. Placement tests are available. G e r m a n 200 reviews basic G e r m a n grammar and usage, and introduces students to m o d e r n G e r m a n literature. It aims through the discussion of the cultures and concerns of the German-speaking peoples to increase the ability to communicate i n the fullest sense of the term. German 201 (3) Intermediate German (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: G e r m a n 200 ( m i n i m u m Grade C ) , G e r m a n 12 (or its equivalent w i t h written permission of the instructor.) Placement tests are available. Continues the review and development of G e r m a n language skills at the Intermediate level. Together w i t h G e r m a n 200 it completes the requirements for the Second Year of college/university G e r m a n . History Instructional Faculty R. C A M P B E L L , B A . (California), M . A . (UBC) R. F U H R , B . A . (UBC) M . A . (McGill) H . J O N E S , B.A., M . A . (UBC) M . L E G A T E S , B . A . (Washington), M . A . , M . P h i l . , P h . D . (Yale) D . S U T H E R L A N D , B . A . (UBC), M . A . (Newfoundland) General Information History teaches an understanding of the past that helps people cope w i t h the present and suggests possibilities for the future. Critical thinking and analysis form the core of this discipline and are essential skills i n a rapidly changing society. Students planning to major in History should have at least four history courses at the College. These can be A N Y four courses. A n intended major should also have a broad sampling of courses i n the Social Sciences and Humanities. Students planning to major i n history at S F U should take six history courses i n the first two years. For U B C the requirement is four history courses. Students planning to take honours should acquire a reading knowledge of an appropriate non-English language. A l l History courses at Capilano (including Women's Studies 220) transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . and count as Humanities credit for the Associate Degree. Course Descriptions (4,0,0) (F) The origins of civilization i n Egypt and Mesopotamia, the civilizations of Ancient Greece and Rome, the origins and development of Judaism and the early Christian Church. History 102 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Europe from the Reformation to the French Revolution A survey of European history beginning w i t h the 16th c. Protestant Reformation and including absolutism, the scientific revolution, the Enlightenment, the o l d regime and the French Revolution. History 103 (3) Europe in the 19th and 20th Centuries A m e r i c a n history from 1607 to 1877 including analysis of social and political developments from early settlement through the C i v i l W a r era. Emphasis is placed on the development of an " A m e r i c a n " culture, w i t h appropriate comparisons to the development of Canada. History 109 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Issues and Themes in U.S. History: 1865-present U.S. history from 1865 to the present. A study of the development of America as a w o r l d power after the C i v i l W a r . Special emphasis is given to " A m e r i c a n " culture, and appropriate comparisons are made w i t h Canada. History 110 (3) Canada Before Confederation (4,0,0) (S) Topics include the Industrial Revolution, the rise of political ideologies, nationalism and imperialism, the Russian Revolution, the two w o r l d wars, and the interw a r period. (4,0,0) (F,S) A study of N e w France and British N o r t h America. Special emphasis is placed on issues and ideas which have been significant i n the creation of Canada and, in particular, the m a k i n g of Canadian society i n preConfederation years. History 111 (3) Canada Since Confederation University Transfer Credit History 100 (3) History of the Ancient World History 108 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Issues and Themes in U.S. History: 1607-1877 (4,0,0) (F,S) The development of Canada since 1867. In particular we discuss the issues that affect most Canadians: relations w i t h the United States, prosperity and poverty, and the m a k i n g of a C a n a d i a n "culture". B y the end of the course students should have not only a better understanding of this country's past, but also what makes Canada unique. History 205 (3) British Columbia (4,0,0) (F) F r o m the first contact between natives and whites i n the 18th century to the present, this course analyses the main issues that have affected British Columbians. It also examines some aspects of the development of the N o r t h Shore. History 207 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Europe in the Middle Ages and Renaissance This course covers a colourful and creative period i n European history from the 3rd to the 15th century. Topics include the late R o m a n Empire and rise of Christianity, monasticism and the church, feudal society and politics, the rise of towns, the crusades, the Black Death, and the art, culture and society of Renaissance Italy. Academic -History 121 Human Kinetics (formerly Physical Education) History 208 (3) Canadian-American Relations (4,0,0) (S) This course examines the major events and themes that have shaped the Canadian-American relationship. F r o m the A m e r i c a n Revolution, the war that ultimately created both countries, to recent years, we analyse the influence that the United States has had o n Canada. History 209 (3) History of the Native Peoples of Canada (4,0,0) (S) U s i n g ethnohistorical approaches, this course examines the history of Canadian Indian, Inuit and Metis peoples. It gives particular emphasis to the attitudes, practices, policies and experiences that have shaped native-white relations and affected native peoples from 1450 to the present. Women's Studies 220 (3) Women & the Past: A Historical Survey (4,0,0) See Women's Studies section for course description. Instructional Faculty G . C H A L M E R S , B.Sc. (SFU), M.Sc., P h . D . (California) R . H . L A N G I L L , B.Sc., M . P . E . (UBC) General Information The Department of Kinesiology and H u m a n Kinetics (formerly Physical Education) offers a complete first year university program i n Kinesiology or H u m a n Kinetics, w h i c h enables students to meet the first year requirements at universities as noted below. For more information regarding the H u m a n Kinetics Program, please contact the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences Division, 984-4955. Admission To a p p l y for the Program, students must submit t w o application forms: (1) a general College admission form (see "Admission" section i n this calendar), and (2) a Kinesiology and H u m a n Kinetics Program application form. The P r o g r a m application also requires two references. These forms are available through the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n or the Office of the Registrar. These applications, together w i t h official transcripts and other pertinent documents, should be received b y the Office of the Registrar by M a r c h 31. Enrolment w i l l be limited to 35 students, and student selection w i l l be made on the basis of academic record. Students w h o a p p l y to the program after M a r c h 31 risk h a v i n g their admission denied due to lack of available space. Transfers to S.F.U. Kinesiology Program S.F.U. offers four different areas of concentration: 1) A c t i v e Health, (2) Health and Physiological Sciences, (3) H u m a n Factors/Ergonomics, and (4) H u m a n M o v e m e n t Sciences. Each area of concentration has a set of core and recommended courses both w i t h i n the Kinesiology Department as well as i n other departments. T o decide w h i c h courses to take at Capilano College students m a y have selected an area of concentration to w h i c h they w i s h to transfer. The required courses for that area of concentration can then be determined from the S.F.U. calendar, and C a p i l a n o College courses selected appropriately. Alternatively, a Capilano College student may decide to take a combination of courses w h i c h w i l l be applicable to a number of areas of concentrations, and then decide w h e n at S.F.U. the area of specialization. In either case, the courses selected at Capilano College, both w i t h i n the department of Kinesiology and H u m a n Kinetics, and w i t h i n other departments should be selected to ensure transferability to S.F.U. If i n doubt, students should consult w i t h academic counsellors at S.F.U. and C a p i l a n o College. Academic - History/Human Kinetics 122 Transfers to the University of Victoria The U n i v e r s i t y of Victoria Faculty of Education, School of Physical Education, also accepts transfer of some courses from C a p i l a n o College. T o determine which courses are transferable, counsellors at University of Victoria a n d / o r Capilano College should be consulted. Kinesiology 143 (3) (2,2,0) (F) Exercise Management A n introduction to exercise management and exercise physiology; conditioning methods, exercise techniques and fitness appraisal. Human Kinetics 110 (3) (3,2,0) (S) Transfers to U.B.C. Human Kinetics Program Analysis of Individual Sport and Dance Performance The U . B . C . Department of H u m a n Kinetics offers four areas of concentration. Courses for each of these areas are described below. Pre or corequisite: Kinesiology 142 FIRST Y E A R P R O G R A M Exercise Science English — A n y two of 100,102,103,104,105,106* H u m a n Kinetics 161,164 Kinesiology 142,143 12 credits from: Biology 108 or 110 and 111 Chemistry 104/105 or 108/109 or 110/111 M a t h 110/111 Physics 108 or 110 and 111 or 114/115 Health and Fitness English — A n y two of 100,102,103,104,105,106* H u m a n Kinetics 110,161,164 Kinesiology 142,143 Arts/Sciences: 6 credits Physical Education English — A n y two of 100,102,103,104,105,106* H u m a n Kinetics 110,161,164 Kinesiology 142,143 Arts/Sciences: 6 credits A n examination of the specific sport science principles w h i c h are used to analyze sports and dance skills, detect errors, and p r o v i d e methods for correction. The basis for understanding relationships between aesthetics and movement i n performance, and for understanding the role of form i n evaluating i n d i v i d u a l performances i n sport and dance are also emphasized. Human Kinetics 161 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Introduction to Social Aspects of Leisure and Sports A n introduction to and examination of the relationships between leisure, sports activities, and society. The political, economic and social basis of the development of sports and leisure i n the west are emphasized. Human Kinetics 164 (3) Dynamics of Motor Skill Acquisition (4,0,0) (F) A n introductory examination of motor s k i l l acquisition, and the variables w h i c h influence the learning and performance of motor skills. Investigation of the relationship between s k i l l acquisition, g r o w t h and development. Leisure and Sport Management English — A n y two of 100,102,103,104,105,106* Economics 111/112 H u m a n Kinetics 110,161,164 Kinesiology 142,143 Arts/Sciences: 3 credits •Note: English 100 and 102 DO NOT transfer together as first year English. Course Descriptions Kinesiology 142 (3) (4,2,0) (S) Introduction to Kinesiology A n introduction to the range of subject areas encompassed i n the discipline of kinesiology,with basic assessment procedures for i n d i v i d u a l status and performance according to functional anatomy, biomechanics, exercise physiology, and motor learning principles. Academic - Human Kinetics 123 Jazz Studies Japanese Instructional Faculty K . M I T O , B . A . (UBC) S. R O W L A N D S S H R I M P T O N , B.Ed. (UBC) Contact Persons: Ihor K u k u r u d z a , Internal convenor, Office CE124, M i k e Reveley, External Coordinator, Office CE124, Phone 984-4951. Instructional Faculty Instructional Associate K . B E N T L E Y , B . A . (U.Victoria) University Transfer Credit For details, consult the B.C. Transfer G u i d e . Students w i t h a competence i n the language beyond the level of the course i n w h i c h they are registered w i l l be required to withdraw. Students w h o are not sure of their language level should contact an instructor. Course Descriptions Japanese 100* (3) (4,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: For complete beginners (spoken and written) or permission from instructor. A comprehensive introduction to the Japanese language through the study of vocabulary, grammar and culture. Emphasis is placed o n aural comprehension i n the earlier stage, i n order to prepare students to speak the language. The Japanese writing system w i l l also be introduced. Japanese 101 ** (3) (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: Japanese 100 (knowledge of H I R A G A N A , K A T A K A N A and K A N J I (approximately 50 to 100) or permission from instructor. Students w i l l learn to comprehend simple discourse, simplified texts, speak i n a variety of situations, write simple sentences, and understand cultural differences. Japanese 200 (3) (4,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: Japanese 101 or permission from instructor. A course to provide students w i t h communicative skills at an advanced beginner's level of Japanese. Students w i l l acquire the ability to understand and speak i n various situations on a variety of everyday topics, and also to read adapted texts and write w i t h coherency. The cultural aspect of the language is an integral part of the course. Japanese 201 (3) (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: Japanese 200 or instructor's permission. Skills at an advanced beginner's - intermediate level. Students w i l l acquire proficiency i n situational and thematic speaking and writing, and also i n understanding and reading partly adapted spoken and written Japanese. This course w i l l prepare students to deal w i t h unadapted Japanese i n continuing courses of study. Academic - Japanese/Jazz Studies 124 F. A R D I E L , B . A . (SFU) M. BLACK D . D U K E , B . M u s . (UBC), M . A . (U. of N o r t h Carolina), P h . D . (UVic) L . F A L L S , A . R . C . T . (Toronto), B.Mus., M . M u s . ( U B C ) J. G E E , B.Mus., M . A . (UBC) S. G U N N C . H A N N E Y , B . M u s . (UBC) A. HAWIRKO L . K A A R I O , B . M u s . (UBC), M . M u s . (W.Wash.) N . K O L E S N I K O V , B . A . (Gnessin's M u s i c a l College) I. K U K U R U D Z A , C o n v e n o r R. M A R O I S , B . M u s . (Laval) A . M C I N T Y R E , B . M u s . (UBC) R. M C K E N Z I E , B . M u s . (UBC), M . M u s . ( U B C ) G . M C N A B , B . M u s . (UBC), M . M u s . (UBC) C. N E L S O N K . M O O R E , B . M u s . (UBC) P. O L F R E Y , B . M u s . ( U . Manitoba), M . M u s . (Ithaca) T. O X B O L , D i p . (Copenhagen) M . R E V E L E Y , B . M u s . (UBC), Coordinator, D i p l o m a (Berklee School of Music) P. S C H R E I B E R , B . M u s . (UBC) J. S C O T T J. S T A F F O R D B. T U R N E R , B. M u s (W. Wash.), M . M u s . ( N . Texas) A . W O L D , B . M u s . (UBC), A . R . C . T . (Toronto) General Information Capilano College offers four music programs: a two year D i p l o m a i n Jazz Studies, a two year Bachelor of M u s i c Transfer Program, and four year Degrees i n Jazz Studies and M u s i c Therapy. The degree programs are offered i n co-operation w i t h the O p e n Learning A g e n c y ( O L A ) w i t h degrees granted by the O L A ' s O p e n University. For more information see sections on M u s i c Therapy Program and Bachelor of M u s i c Transfer Program. Career Opportunities The t w o year D i p l o m a p r o g r a m is intended to p r o v i d e its students w i t h the skills necessary to develop careers as self-employed professionals i n the contemporary music industry. The four year Degree program provides a c u r r i c u l u m w h i c h balances and integrates the instruction of jazz, traditional music, and general academic electives to provide an enriched education at the degree level. It is an attractive option for those w h o w i s h to pursue music as a career and for those w h o w i s h to continue their musical development as part of a liberal arts education before p u r s u i n g other careers. Majors i n Vocal Performance, Instrumental Performance, A r r a n g i n g / C o m p o s i t i o n , and General Studies with an education stream are available. Facilities A s recording experience has become an essential part of today's musical training, the Jazz Studies Program has now integrated multi-track recording into the c u r r i c u l u m . V o c a l , instrumental, and arranging/composition students all make use of our multi-track facilities. C o m p o s i t i o n a n d arranging students w i l l w o r k w i t h electronic instruments i n our M i d i Studio. C o m p u t e r labs are available to students for supplemental help i n ear training, sight reading, and other basic music skills, as w e l l as the printing and recording of theory and arranging assignments. performance classes, placement i n Private M u s i c Instruction (PMI) and required remedial work. Information meetings, auditions and placement tests are held i n February and M a y . Please call 984-4951 for meeting times and a u d i t i o n appointments. Auditions A u d i t i o n s generally i n v o l v e the presentation of two contrasting (in tempo and style) prepared pieces and the demonstration of technical (e.g., scales, arpeggios) and sight reading abilities. L i v e a u d i t i o n and testing is preferred, but if y o u cannot attend i n person, it is possible to a u d i t i o n b y a u d i o o r video cassette and write y o u r theory test under local supervision. Contact the Jazz Studies P r o g r a m for more details a n d specific audition requirements. The Jazz Studies program prides itself i n the number and quality of specialized faculty it has o n staff. M o s t instructors are also top professional musicians w h o bring extensive practical experience to their classes. Separate auditions are held for the College Singers, Jazz Choirs, Stage Bands, Studio Vocal Performance Class, and Vocal Jazz Master Class. Acceptance into the program does not guarantee acceptance into these ensembles. It is the student's responsibility to sign up for and attend these auditions. Diploma Admission Requirements Registration A l l applicants must c o m p l y w i t h the General A d m i s s i o n Requirements of C a p i l a n o College, demonstrate a k n o w l edge of theory rudiments, and display level of performance o n their major instrument that is acceptable to the faculty. C o n t i n u i n g students may pre-register d u r i n g the month of A p r i l . Returning or new full-time students w h o have been accepted may register d u r i n g M a y and between A u g u s t 2 and 12. Part-time students may enroll d u r i n g in-person registration. Faculty Degree Admission Requirements For admission into a Jazz Studies Degree Program Major, students must comply w i t h the specific A d m i s s i o n Requirements for A c a d e m i c Studies, hold a two-year d i p l o m a i n Jazz Studies from C a p i l a n o College or its equivalent (including all English, General Elective and J a z z / M u s i c requirements as outlined below) and have the recommendation of the faculty involved w i t h their intended major. Admission Procedures Applicants will: 1. W r i t e a theory placement test. 2. Perform an audition o n their principle instrument. 3. Take an aural placement test. 4. Take a piano proficiency test. (Transferring and returning students only.) 5. Submit two letters of recommendation from a music professional or instructor. In the case of transferring and returning students, the auditioning instructor w i l l make recommendations regarding: acceptance, eligibility and placement i n Applicants should note the following dates: Feb. 23-24/95 A u d i t i o n s for i n c o m i n g students. M a y 1-5/95 Final round of auditions for i n c o m i n g students. M a y 12/95 Letters of acceptance/rejection to incoming students. June 1/95 Fee deposit and registration deadline for incoming students. Transfer of Credit The Jazz Studies Program accepts credits from other postsecondary institutions if they are applicable and have suitable equivalency. Because of the w i d e variations that exist i n approach a n d emphasis i n various music programs, the Jazz Studies Program reserves the right to examine for competency according to our course requirements before transfer credit is approved. This applies particularly to students w i s h i n g to enter at the third year level. Since the C a p i l a n o program emphasizes Jazz Studies and most other C a n a d i a n M u s i c degree programs provide a study of traditional music, block transfer of courses to other institutions is not available. Several i n d i v i d u a l courses have, however, been accepted by institutions w i t h similar offerings. Academic - Jazz Studies ~125 Special Fees and Expenses level of the course, no credit for either course can be applied toward the degree. The fees for private music instruction (P.M.I.) w i l l be announced at least one month prior to the beginning of the Fall term. The grade of D i n a course, although a m i n i m a l pass, is not sufficient to fulfil prerequisite requirements. In 1994-95 the fees for P.M.I, were $410 for the Jazz Studies Program and are subject to change without notice. P.M.I, lab fees are $30.00. Satisfactory Standing Students considered to be i n "Satisfactory Standing" are entitled to pre-register i n the next term of the program. A student w h o has not maintained a satisfactory standing i n a program i n any term may be denied permission to register i n that program i n a subsequent term, or be required to re-audition. To maintain satisfactory standing, all Jazz Studies students must be enrolled i n a full-time course of study (at least 12 credit hours) that includes a reasonable number of courses specific to their major (normally 3) and must achieve a grade point average above 1.8. In addition, Jazz Studies Degree students i n the following majors must achieve a m i n i m u m grade of B- i n all courses specific to their major. These are: Arranging/Composition Concentration P M I (Composition) A l l required Theory courses A r r a n g i n g I, II, III, IV Rhythm Section W r i t i n g Instrumental Performance Concentration P P M I Improvisation I, II, III, IV A l l Small Ensembles A l l Large Instrumental Ensembles Vocal Performance Concentration P P M I Improvisation I, II Vocal Master Class I, II Studio V o c a l Performance I, II, III, I V Vocal Jazz Master Class I, II, III, IV A l l Vocal Ensembles " C " grades (C-, C , C+) i n these courses can only be applied for credit toward the Bachelor of M u s i c i n Jazz Studies w i t h the permission of the Jazz Studies Grades Appeals Committee. W h e n unusual circumstances have resulted i n lower than expected grades i n a student's first semester of a continuing course, instructors may recommend to the Committee that the student be given probationary acceptance into the next semester of the course. If the student fails to achieve a m i n i m u m of B - i n the next Academic - Jazz Studies 126 Students should refer to the section o n academic performance i n the college calendar for further information on "Academic Probation". Graduation Requirements T W O Y E A R DIPLOMA Students w i l l be awarded a two year d i p l o m a i n Jazz Studies u p o n completion of the first two years of requirements for either the vocal or instrumental concentrations as outlined below. The English and General Elective credits are only required of those p l a n n i n g o n continuing toward a four year degree. For the purposes of the diploma, M u s . 220 and 221 may be replaced by six credits of Jazz, M u s i c or if approved b y the coordinator, General Electives. U p o n demonstration of sufficient piano skills a student m a y be g i v e n a course exemption from, or advanced placement i n , Class Piano. For those continuing for the degree, these required credits may be replaced w i t h credits from any J a z z , M u s i c or General Elective; for the purpose of the D i p l o m a itself, no replacement is necessary. Program Content Vocal Concentration FIRST Y E A R Fall Term Large Ensemble P M I 129 Class Piano I Jazz 114 The Language of M u s i c Jazz 103 Sightsinging/Ear T r a i n i n g I Jazz 184 Vocal Master Class I Jazz 136 History I M U S 120 •English 100 or 102 Spring Term Large Ensemble P M I 229 Class Piano II Jazz 115 Trad. H a r m o n y & C o m p . Jazz 106 Jazz Theory & C o m p o s i t i o n I Jazz 107 Sightsinging/Ear T r a i n i n g II Jazz 185 V o c a l Master Class II Jazz 137 History of Jazz Jazz 170 R h y t h m Section W r i t i n g Jazz 105 •English 103,104,105 or 106 Credits 1.0 2.0 1.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 3.0 3J) 16.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3£ 16.0 SECOND YEAR Fall T e r m Large Ensemble P M I 329 Jazz 214 Class Piano III Jazz Theory & Composition II Jazz 203 S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r Training III Jazz 284 V o c a l Jazz Master Class I Jazz 238 Studio V o c a l Performance I Jazz 236 " M U S . 220 H i s t o r y II *Gen. Elective Spring Term Large Ensemble P M I 429 Jazz 215 Class Piano IV Jazz Theory & Composition III Jazz 204 S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r Training IV Jazz 285 Jazz 239 V o c a l Jazz Master Class II Studio V o c a l Performance II Jazz 237 " M U S . 221 History III *Gen. Elective 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 3TJ 16.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 3J) 16.0 Spring Term Large Ensemble P M I 2xx Jazz 115 Class Piano II Traditional H a r m o n y & Jazz 106 Composition Jazz Theory & Composition I Jazz 107 History of Jazz Jazz 170 S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r Training II Jazz 185 Small Ensemble II Jazz 195 R h y t h m Section W r i t i n g Jazz 105 • E n g l i s h 103,104,105 or 106 SECOND YEAR Fall T e r m Large Ensemble P M I 3xx Jazz 214 Class Piano III Jazz Theory & C o m p o s i t i o n II Jazz 203 S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r Training III Jazz 284 1.5 1.5 3.0 3JD 16.0 Spring Term Large Ensemble P M I 4xx Class Piano IV Jazz 215 Jazz Theory & C o m p o s i t i o n III Jazz 204 S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r T r a i n i n g IV Jazz 285 Improvisation II Jazz 283 Jazz 295 Small Ensemble IV History IV M u s . 221 *Gen. Elective 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 3TJ 16.0 •See Academic Course Requirements. ••Students must complete M U S 120 plus any two of M U S 121, 220,221 to fulfil their traditional M u s i c H i s t o r y requirement. Graduation Requirements FOUR YEAR DEGREE Instrumental Concentration FIRST Y E A R Fall T e r m Large Ensemble PMI lxx Jazz 114 Class Piano I Jazz 103 The Language of M u s i c Jazz 184 S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r Training I Jazz 194 Small Ensemble I History I M U S 120 •English 100 or 102 Improvisation I Jazz 282 Small Ensemble HI Jazz 294 History III **Mus. 220 •Gen. Elective Credits 1.0 2.0 1.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 3.0 3XJ 16.0 1.0 2 0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3XJ 16.0 U p o n completion of the two year D i p l o m a i n Jazz Studies, students may apply to the Jazz program for permission to register as a third year student i n one of the degree options. Permission to enroll i n any major w i l l be based on completion of prerequisite requirements, and the recommendation of the faculty concerned. Continuation i n the Vocal Performance, Instrumental Performance and A r r a n g i n g / C o m p o s i t i o n majors is subject to review at the end of the third year of studies. Students may be accepted into some upper level courses before the completion of their D i p l o m a o n a part time or probationary basis w i t h the permission of the instructors i n v o l v e d , but official acceptance into the Degree program is necessary before any opportunity to graduate should be expected. These major areas of study m a y include Jazz or M u s i c electives w h i c h should be chosen i n consultation w i t h the Coordinator of the program. Students must complete all courses outlined i n one of the following major areas of study to be eligible for the Bachelor of M u s i c i n Jazz Studies degree from the B . C . O p e n University. 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 Academic - Jazz Studies 127 Major in Vocal Performance Spring Term THIRD YEAR Fall Term Large Ensemble PPMI 6xx Jazz 395 Small Ensemble VI Jazz 383 Improvisation IV Jazz 241 Counterpoint Jazz 272 Arranging II *Gen. Elective Large Ensemble PPMI 529 or 545 Jazz 338 Vocal Jazz Master Class III Jazz 336 Studio Vocal Performance III Jazz 240 Form and Analysis Jazz 370 Jazz Styles Jazz 380 Vocal Improvisation I *Gen. Elective Spring Term Large Ensemble PPMI 629 or 645 Jazz 339 Vocal Jazz Master Class IV Jazz 337 Studio Vocal Performance IV Jazz 241 Counterpoint Jazz 381 Vocal Improvisation II *Gen. Elective 2.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3,0 15.5 2.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3j) 14.0 FOURTH YEAR Fall Term Large Ensemble PPMI 729 or 745 Jazz 172 Arranging I Jazz 410 Conducting I Jazz 310 Jazz Pedagogy Jazz 460 Commercial Relations Jazz 494 Small Ensemble VII *Gen. Elective 2.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3£ 15.5 Spring Term Large Ensemble PPMI 829 or 845 Jazz 272 Arranging II Jazz 411 Conducting II Jazz 300 20th Century Theory Jazz 495 Small Ensemble VIII *Gen. Elective Total Credits 2.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 3.0 1.5 FOURTH YEAR Fall Term Large Ensemble PPMI 7xx Jazz 410 Conducting I Jazz 460 Commercial Relations Jazz 310 Jazz Pedagogy Jazz /Music Electives Jazz 494 Small Ensemble *Gen. Elective Spring Term Large Ensemble PPMI 8xx Jazz 300 20th Century Theory Jazz 411 Conducting II Jazz/Music Electives Jazz 495 Small Ensemble *Gen. Elective Total Credits 2.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Large Ensemble PMI 644 Composition II **PMI 6xx secondary requirement Jazz 300 20th Century Theory Jazz 372 Arranging III ***MUS221 History IV Jazz/Music Electives *Gen. Elective Major in Instrumental Performance Large Ensemble PPMI 5xx Jazz 394 Small Ensemble V Jazz 382 Improvisation III Jazz 240 Form and Analysis Jazz 172 Arranging I Jazz 370 Jazz Styles *Gen. Elective 128 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 3J) 14.5 Spring Term 3J) 15.5 Academic - Jazz Studies 2.0 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 3X) 15.5 124.5 Major in Arranging/Composition THIRD YEAR Fall Term 15.5 124.5 THIRD YEAR Fall Term 2.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3j) 15.5 * See Academic Course Requirements Large Ensemble PMI 544 Composition I **PMI 5xx secondary requirement Jazz Electives Jazz 370 Jazz Styles Jazz electives ***MUS 220 History III *Gen. Elective * See Academic Course Requirements 2.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3J) 14.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 3.0 1.5 3.0 1.5 3J) 16.0 FOURTH YEAR Fall Term FOURTH YEAR Fall Term Large Ensemble P M I 744 Composition III ***PMI 7xx secondary requirement Jazz 410 Conducting I Jazz 472 A r r a n g i n g IV Jazz 310 Jazz Pedagogy Jazz 460 Commercial Relations J a z z / M u s i c Electives *Gen. Elective 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3£ 14.5 Spring Term Large Ensemble P P M I 844 Composition IV ***PMI 8xx secondary requirement Jazz 411 Conducting II J a z z / M u s i c Electives *Gen. Elective Total Credits 1.0 3.0 1.0 1.5 4.5 3XJ 14.0 123.0 Large Ensemble P M I 7xx Jazz 410 Conducting I Jazz 310 Jazz Pedagogy **Jazz/Music electives ***Jazz/Music or N o n - M u s i c electives *Gen. Elective 1.0 2.0 1.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 3J0 15.0 Spring Term Large Ensemble P M I 8xx Jazz 300 20th Century Theory Jazz 411 C o n d u c t i n g II **Jazz/Music Electives ***Jazz/Music or N o n - M u s i c Electives *Gen. Elective T o t a l Credits 1.0 2.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 3.0 3TJ 15.0 124.0 Major in General Studies - Education Stream * See A c a d e m i c Course Requirements. * * A r r / C o m p students are expected to complete the equivalent of 6th term P M I on their principal instrument through completion of 4 terms of secondary P M I and a jury at a 600-level concentration or through completion of concentration P M I at the 500 and 600 level O R complete four semesters of P.M.I, secondary piano. ***Students w i s h i n g to pursue the A r r a n g i n g / C o m p o s i tion option w i l l replace M u s 220/221 in the second year of the D i p l o m a program w i t h Jazz 240,172 and Jazz 241,272. Major in General Studies THIRD YEAR Fall Term Large Ensemble P M I 5xx Jazz 370 Jazz Styles Jazz 240 F o r m and A n a l y s i s Jazz 172 Arranging I **Jazz/Music Electives *Gen. Elective S p r i n g Term Large Ensemble P M I 6xx Jazz 241 Counterpoint Jazz 272 A r r a n g i n g II *Gen. Elective **Jazz/Music Electives THIRD YEAR Fall Term Large Ensemble P M I 5xx M u s 210 Class W o o d w i n d s Jazz 370 Jazz Styles Jazz 240 F o r m and A n a l y s i s Jazz 172 Arranging I ***Jazz/Music or N o n - M u s i c Electives **Jazz/Music Electives *Gen. Elective 1.0 2.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 1.5 3X) 16.5 Spring Term 1.0 2.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 4.5 3XJ 15.0 1.0 2.0 1.5 1.5 3.0 6.0 15.0 Large Ensemble P M I 6xx M u s 211 Class W o o d w i n d s Jazz 241 Counterpoint Jazz 272 A r r a n g i n g II ***Jazz/Music or N o n - M u s i c Electives *Gen. Elective 1.0 2.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 6,0 16.5 FOURTH YEAR Fall Term Large Ensemble P M I 7xx Jazz 410 Conducting I Jazz 310 Jazz Pedagogy M u s 218 Class Brass ****MUED 106Music C u r r i c u l a ****MUED 302/303 Instrumental/Choral Techniques *Gen. Elective 1.0 2.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 4.0 3Tj 16.5 Academic - Jazz Studies 129 Spring Term Large Ensemble P M I 8xx Jazz 411 C o n d u c t i n g II Jazz 219 Class Percussion Jazz 300 20th CenturyTheory **Jazz/Music Electives *Gen. Elective T o t a l Credits LO 2.0 1.5 1.5 3.0 1.5 6j) 16.5 130.0 Teachable Minor It is advisable to complete a m i n o r i n a secondary teaching field as this greatly increases employment opportunities. The number of credits and prerequisite courses required for different minors varies considerably; students should be sure to consult w i t h Coordinator and Student A d v i s i n g before registering i n the first term. T o assist i n achieving a teachable m i n o r before graduation, students may substitute w o r k toward this end for the normal m i x of General Electives described under A c a demic Course Requirements. To graduate without this normal m i x of academic courses, students must achieve a m i n i m u m of 18 upper level credits i n their m i n o r and six credits of English. Non-music upper level courses must currently be taken at another institution. If necessary to establish prerequisites for a minor, 6 credits of general electives may be substituted for M u s i c 120, Jazz 170 and Jazz 105 d u r i n g the first year; these required courses m a y then be taken i n the second year i n place of M u s . 220 and 221 w h i c h w i l l i n turn be taken i n the third year. Non-music upper level courses must currently be taken at another institution. *See Academic Course Requirements ""•Jazz/Music Electives: In the General Major, at least 6 credits must be numbered 300 level or above to fulfil graduation requirements; i n the Education Stream at least 2 credits must be numbered 300 level or above. ***Music or N o n - M u s i c Electives: General program students m a y fulfil these requirements through any general, Jazz, M u s i c O R M u s i c Education elective acceptable to the program. ****These courses are currently not available at C a p i l a n o College, and w o u l d have to be taken at U B C . Substitution may occur o n advisement by U B C M u s i c Education. Secondary Music Teaching Instrumentalists i n the Education Stream w h o w i s h to enter secondary music teaching should include at least one year of a V o c a l Ensemble and one year of secondary Private M u s i c Instruction (PMI) i n voice i n their programs. Suitable Vocal Ensembles w o u l d include the Academic - Jazz Studies 130 Capilano College C o m m u n i t y C h o i r , C a p i l a n o Singers, Jazz Choir, and Jazz Vocal Ensemble. Students whose major is a w o o d w i n d instrument m a y substitute secondary vocal P M I instruction for Class W o o d w i n d s ; brass majors may similarly substitute secondary vocal P M I for Class Brass, and percussion majors for Class Percussion. Pianists may substitute secondary voice P M I for the four credits of Class Piano normally required for the degree. Elementary Teaching Students interested i n elementary teaching s h o u l d be sure to include 3 credits of laboratory science, 3 credits of mathematics and 3 credits of history or geography. O f all general electives completed, 6 credits s h o u l d be i n Canadian studies. Academic Course Requirements *General Education Requirements English 100 or 102 and 103,104,105 or 106 6.0 Humanities 6.0 Social Sciences 6.0 Science/Math 3.0 Elective 3J) 24.0 It is expected that all English requirements w i l l be completed before entrance into the third year of the program. Note that the education stream requires 30 credits of general electives. Ensemble Requirements A l l large ensembles, regardless of the actual number of weekly hours of attendance required, have an assigned unit value of one credit hour. A semester profile requiring two credit hours of ensemble is met by enrollment i n two separate ensembles. Students terminating i n the two year d i p l o m a program may meet their ensemble requirements through the completion of any four ensemble courses. Students enrolled i n the four year Jazz Studies Degree Program are required to complete a combination of traditional and jazz ensembles to complete their requirements. Instrumental Performance Ensemble Requirements Four semesters of traditional ensembles: These can be met b y enrolment i n the Capilano College C o m m u n i t y C h o i r or Capilano Singers, or b y participation i n another approved c o m m u n i t y ensemble. Eight semesters of jazz ensemble: Including: Stage Band (ENSJ 135), Jazz C h o i r (ENSJ 105) and G u i t a r / B a s s Ensemble (ENSJ 220) at the 200 level and above. (Note the G u i t a r / B a s s Ensemble I/II, while a prerequisite, is not acceptable for large ensemble credit i n the degree program). Course Descriptions For M u s i c a n d M u s i c E n s e m b l e course descriptions, (ie. M u s . 120,121,220,221 a n d E n s m 100,150,200 a n d 250) see the M u s i c Transfer section of this C a l e n d a r . Piano, guitar and bass performance majors can sometimes substitute other courses to complete their ensemble requirements. This is done through special arrangement w i t h the co-ordinator of the program. ENSJ 105,205,305,405 Jazz Choir (by audition only) Percussion students are expected to complete four semesters of traditional ensemble, four semesters of jazz ensemble, and eight semesters of percussion ensemble. They may substitute these for four of the normal requirement of 6 credits of Improvisation. Rehearsal and performance i n one of C a p i l a n o College's Jazz Choirs. Students w i l l be auditioned d u r i n g the first week of classes. The intent of the class is to b u i l d group singing abilities i n such areas as phrasing, blending and intonation. *Performances are a mandatory part of the course. Arranging/Composition Ensemble Requirements Four semesters of traditional ensembles and four semesters of jazz ensembles. See Major i n General Studies below. Vocal Performance Ensemble Requirements ENSJ 120 Guitar/Bass Ensemble I (1) (3,0,*) (F) (1) (3,0,0) (F) Performance i n guitar/bass ensemble for the development of sight reading and phrasing skills. Emphasis w i l l be o n single-note reading i n all areas of the neck. Credit from this course is not applicable to the E>egree progam. Four semesters of concert choir: C a p i l a n o College C o m m u n i t y C h o i r or the Capilano Singers. E N S M . 100 series section 1 or 2. ENSJ 135,235, 335,435 (1) Jazz Ensemble (by audition only) Four semesters of jazz choir: N i t e C a p or Capital Jazz. ENSJ 105 series section 1 or 2. Participation i n the C a p i l a n o College large Jazz Ensemble for development of phrasing and sight reading skills. Four semesters of Jazz Vocal Ensemble: starts at ENSJ 306 series. •Performances are a mandatory part of the course. First year vocal performance students i n the degree program are expected to enroll i n E N S M 100 and E N S M 101, and should consult w i t h their private music instructor before enrolling i n any other vocal ensembles ENSJ 136,236, 336,436 (1) (2,0,*) (F) Instrumental Ensemble (by audition only) Major in General Studies Ensemble Requirements Four semesters of traditional ensembles: These can be met b y enrolment i n the Capilano College C o m m u n i t y C h o i r or Capilano Singers, or b y participation i n another approved ensemble. Four semesters of jazz ensemble: Including Stage Band (ENSJ 135), Jazz C h o i r (ENSJ 105) and G u i t a r / B a s s Ensemble (ENSJ 220) at the 200 level or above. Percussionists must participate i n four semesters of percussion ensemble; these courses can replace Jazz 282, 283, Improvisation. (3,0,*) (F) Students rehearse i n small 'like instrument' ensembles under an instructors supervision i n preparation for a number of performances. •Performances are a mandatory part of the course. ENSJ 140,240,340,440 Percussion Ensemble (1) (4,0,*) (F) A n ensemble comprised exclusively of percussion instruments of both definite and indefinite pitch. Students w i l l develop their sight reading a n d interpretive skills. •Performances are a mandatory part of the course. ENSJ 155,255,355,455 Jazz Choir (by audition only) (1) (3,0,0) (S) (1) (3,0,0) (S) A continuation of Jazz Choir. ENSJ 170 Guitar/Bass Ensemble II A continuation of ENSJ 120, w i t h more emphasis o n complex rhythms. Academic - Jazz Studies 131 ENSJ 185,285, 385,485 (1) (3,0,0) (S) Jazz Ensemble (by audition only) A continuation of Jazz Ensemble. ENSJ 186,286, 386,486 (1) (2,0,0) (S) A continuation of E N S J 185. (1) (4,0,0) (S) Percussion Ensemble (1) A study of traditional principles of voice leading w i t h harmonic vocabulary extending to the secondary d o m i nant, and b l l aug. 6th and i n c l u d i n g tonicization, simple modulation a n d pivot chords. Binary a n d ternary forms w i l l be introduced. Jazz 107 (1.5) Jazz Theory and Composition I A continuation of Percussion Ensemble. ENSJ 220,320 Guitar/Bass Ensemble lll/V (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Jazz 103 or equivalent Corequisite: Jazz 107 Instrumental Ensemble (by audition only) ENSJ 190,290, 390,490 Jazz 106 (1.5) Traditional Harmony and Composition (3,0,0) (F) (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Jazz 103 or equivalent Corequisite: Jazz 106 A performance ensemble comprised primarily of bassists and guitarists. Students w i l l develop their sight reading a n d interpretive skills. A n introduction to jazz theory including: chord scales, extended chords, functional analysis of chord progression, primary and secondary root motion, a n d analysis and composition of music i n the style of jazz standards a n d the blues. ENSJ 270,370 Jazz 114 Prerequisite: ENSJ 170 o r audition (1) (3,0,0) (S) Guitar/Bass Ensemble IV/VI Class Piano I A continuation of E N S J 220/320. Corequisite: Jazz 103 ENSJ 306,356,406, 456 (1) Jazz Vocal Ensemble (by audition only) (2,0,0) (F,S) This course includes performance of various styles of a cappella and accompanied vocal ensemble repertoire w i t h an emphasis o n jazz literature and small group performance i.e. one singer per part. Jazz 103 (3) (4,0,0) (F) The Language of Music Jazz 115 Class Piano II A n examination of the basics of tonal music i n c l u d i n g the study of the overtone series, intervals, scales, modes, chord symbols, figured bass, roman numeral analysis, melodic inharmonics, phrase structure, diatonic triads and voice leading. Prerequisite: Jazz 114 Corequisite: Jazz 106 and 107 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Rhythm Section Writing Prerequisite: Jazz 103 Students w i l l undertake the study of score preparation, notation, basic musical terms a n d articulations, a n d w r i t i n g for the r h y t h m section instruments. Academic - Jazz Studies 132 (2,2,0) (F) This course is designed for students w h o w i s h to learn basic keyboard skills. Reading, improvisation, transposition a n d harmonization are the skills developed d u r i n g this course a n d the three subsequent levels. Theoretical concepts are applied at the keyboard and include diatonic triads a n d sevenths of the major key, a l l major, m i n o r a n d modal tetrachords. A weekly lab evaluates material covered i n class. Students practice o n the department's pianos. Corequisites: Jazz 184 (or M U S 112) and Jazz 114 Jazz 105 d) (D (2,2,0) (S) A continuation of Jazz 114. In addition, keyboard sequences, arpeggios and major scales are introduced along w i t h easy original repertoire. Jazz 136 (1.5) Vocal Master Class I (by audition only) (2,0,0) (F) A n introductory course intended to develop the student's solo vocal performance capabilities through exploration of various popular and jazz musical styles. Material is prepared for performance w i t h a keyboard accompanist. This class is open to students not majoring i n Voice. Vocalists w h o are judged to be at a sufficiently advanced level at their audition may substitute music electives for this course. Successful completion does not guarantee acceptance into higher level vocal courses. Jazz 137 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Vocal Master Class II Prerequisite: Jazz 136 Continued exploration of chord progression and melody including: analysis of popular chord progression, mixed mode chord progression, augmented 6th chords, tonicization, chord scales/harmonic extensions. A continuation of Jazz 136. Jazz 204 Jazz 170 History of Jazz (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Jazz 203 A survey of jazz through styles and stylists from its roots in Africa to the present. Jazz 171 (1.5) Jazz Theory & Composition III (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Continued exploration of chord progression and melody including: analysis of modern jazz chord progression, parallel harmony, 70s jazz theory of modal areas, m o d e r n voicing techniques, reharmonization. History of Popular Music A survey of popular and rock music styles of the 20th century. Jazz 172 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Arranging I Prerequisite: Jazz 103, to be taken w i t h or after Jazz 107 and Jazz 105. A study of four-part block harmonization arranging techniques. Jazz 184 Jazz 205 (1.5) Prerequisites: Jazz 105, Jazz 209, Jazz 107 W r i t i n g for modern synthesized r h y t h m section ( d r u m machine, synthesizers, samplers) and an exploration of percussion instruments and their use i n various musical styles. Jazz 208 (1.5) (1.5) (2,2,0) (F) Corequisite: Jazz 103 A course designed to acquaint students w i t h the role of the music producer and some of the technology used i n music production. A u r a l and sight training concentrating o n melodic, rhythmic dictation and sightsinging. Jazz 209 Jazz 185 Prerequisite: Jazz 106,107, and 115 (1.5) (2,2,0) (S) Sightsinging/Ear Training II Corequisite: Jazz 106 a n d 107 A continuation of Jazz 184. (1.5) (0,3,0) (F) For all instruments, requirements include several hours of rehearsal a week plus a number of performances. T h e styles studied are varied. Students are expected to develop i n d i v i d u a l and ensemble performance abilities and a professional attitude to both performance and rehearsal. Class Piano III (0,3,0) (S) (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Small Ensemble II A continuation of Jazz 194. Jazz 203 Jazz Theory & Composition II (2,2,0) (F) This course is designed to acquaint students w i t h the basic principles of M I D I , synthesis, and computerized sequencing; students w i l l learn the operation of d r u m machines, 4 track recorder, computer programs and synthesizers. Jazz 214 (1.5) (1.5) Introduction to MIDI and Music Synthesis Small Ensemble I Jazz 195 (2,0,0) (S) Music Production Sightsinging/Ear Training I Jazz 194 (2,0,0) (F) Midi Rhythm Section (1) (2,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: Jazz 115 For students w h o have taken Jazz 115 or have had previous keyboard experience. Students are introduced to c o m m o n idiomatic accompaniment patterns as w e l l as four-part chorale studies, keyboard sequences, m i n o r scales and chords. Basic keyboard techniques are emphasized i n c l u d i n g relaxation, touch, rotation, weight transfer and their musical application i n simple repertoire. T h e lab hour is utilized to develop sight reading skills at the keyboard. Emphasis w i l l be o n developing the skills necessary to use the piano as a tool i n writing and arranging. Prerequisite: Jazz 106 and 107 or permission of the instructor. Academic - Jan Studies 133 Jazz 215 Class Piano IV (1) (2,2,0) (S) Jazz 270 Song Writing (1.5) (2,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: Jazz 214 Prerequisite: jazz 103 or permission of the instructor. A continuation of Jazz 214 w i t h increased complexity of repertoire and technique. A n investigation of the techniques and roles of lyrics and lyric writing for popular song styles. Jazz 236 Jazz 272 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) (1-5) Studio Vocal Performance I (by audition only) Arranging II A course designed to develop the student's studio performance ability through preparation and performance of selected solo and ensemble material i n the college's recording studio. Prerequisite: Jazz 172 and Jazz 105 Corequisites: Jazz 203 Jazz 237 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Studio Vocal Performance II Prerequisite: Jazz 236 A r r a n g i n g projects for various combinations of instruments, plus a study of two and three-part w r i t i n g . Jazz 282 Improvisation I (1.5) (1,2,0) (F) Prerequisites: Jazz 107,115 and 185 A continuation of Jazz 236. Jazz 238 (2,0,0) (F) (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Vocal Jazz Master Class I (by audition only) A course to teach the basics of improvisation on chord changes. The first term w i l l be devoted to rhythmic concepts, basic chord-scale relationships and development of technical exercises for basic chord progressions. Prerequisite: Jazz 137 This course is intended to develop the live performance abilities of the student through the study of jazz repertoire. Students w i l l study style and interpretation and perform w i t h some of Vancouver's top jazz musicians. Jazz 239 Vocal Jazz Master Class II (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Jazz 283 Improvisation II Jazz 284 A continuation of Jazz 238. Sightsinging/Ear Training III (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: jazz 106 or M U S . 101 A study of complete works exhibiting the most significant formal designs of the 18th and 19th centuries, using a variety of visual means to clarify the roles of harmonic, melodic, and rhythmic structure i n the articulation of musical form. (1,2,0) (S) A continuation of Jazz 282. This term w i l l be devoted to analysis of chord progressions and more advanced chordscale analysis. A t the end of this term, students should have the basic theoretical knowledge necessary to analyze and l e a m to improvise on any "standard" jazz tune. Prerequisite: Jazz 238 Jazz 240 Form and Analysis (1.5) (1-5) (2,2,0) (F) (1.5) (2,2,0) (S) (1.5) (0,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: Jazz 185 Corequisites: Jazz 203 A continuation of Jazz 185. Jazz 285 Sightsinging/Ear Training IV Prerequisite: jazz 284 Corequisites: Jazz 204 A continuation of Jazz 284. Jazz 241 Counterpoint (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Jazz 240 and Jazz 203 A study of tonal counterpoint emphasizing its use from late Baroque through the c o m m o n practise period. Academic - Jazz Studies 134 Jazz 294 Small Ensemble II Prerequisite: Jazz 195 A variety of jazz styles/eras w i l l be studied, advancing chronologically from "bebop" and "mainstream" standards, through contemporary jazz of the 60s and 70s and jazz-rock fusion, to current jazz styles. Course operation is o n two levels of study; instructional and lab performance. Jazz 295 (1.5) (0,3,0) (S) Jazz 372 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Small Ensemble IV Arranging III Prerequisite: Jazz 294 Prerequisites: Jazz 204, Jazz 272 A continuation of Jazz 294. A study of vocal w r i t i n g styles and techniques. This course is offered on alternate years. Jazz 300 (3) (4,0,0) (S) 20th Century Theory Jazz 380 Prerequisites: Jazz 240, Jazz 204 Vocal Improvisation I (By audition only) Prerequisites: Jazz 204, 215, 284 A survey of compositional techniques and theoretical principles utilized from 1890 to present coupled w i t h an examination of various major composers and masterpieces of their music. Jazz 310 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Jazz Pedagogy Jazz 381 Vocal Improvisation II Concepts, methods, and resources; examination and comparison of textbooks, recordings, tapes, and materials related to the study of jazz. Prerequisite: Jazz 380 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Studio Vocal Performance III (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) A continuation of Vocal Improvisation I. Jazz 382 (1.5) (1,2,0) (F) Improvisation III Prerequisite: Jazz 283 Prerequisite: Jazz 237 A continuation of Jazz 237. Jazz 337 (2,0,0) (F) A course intended to develop the soloistic abilities of the jazz singer through the study of improvisation. The linear, harmonic and rhythmic aspects of jazz improvisation are studied through analysis and performance of materials appropriate for vocalists. Prerequisite: Jazz 204 Jazz 336 (1.5) (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Studio Vocal Performance IV This course contains both a lecture and lab component. Content w i l l include: substitution of chord scales, tonicization, diminished chord scales, riff blues melodies, analysis and composition of solos i n various styles. Prerequisite: Jazz 336 Jazz 383 A continuation of Jazz 336. Improvisation IV (1.5) (1,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: Jazz 382 Jazz 338 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Vocal Jazz Master Class III Prerequisite: Jazz 239 A continuation of Vocal Jazz Master Class II instruction w i t h more emphasis on i n d i v i d u a l contribution and responsibility. Jazz 339 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) A continuation of Jazz 382. Content w i l l include; altered and symmetrical scales, exploration of the harmonic resources of scales, pentatonic and altered pentatonic scales, 4th chord stacks, polychordal triad relationships, outside playing, the philosophy of free jazz. Jazz 394 Small Ensemble V (1.5) (0,3,1) (F) Vocal Jazz Master Class IV Prerequisite: Jazz 295 Prerequisite: Jazz 338 A t this level the student w i l l receive instruction i n ensemble performance for the recording studio. Students w i l l perform and produce under supervision. A continuation of Jazz 338. Jazz 370 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Jazz Styles Jazz 395 (1.5) (0,3,1) (S) Small Ensemble VI Prerequisite: Jazz 170 Prerequisite: Jazz 394 A follow u p to Jazz 170. Detailed study of the major figures i n jazz from 1940 to the present, such as C h a r l i e Parker, John Coltrane, Bill Evans. A continuation of Jazz 394. Academic - Jazz Studies 135 Jazz 410 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) PMI (Various Numbers) (1) (.5,0,0) (F,S) Conducting I Secondary Private Music Instruction Prerequisites: Jazz 204, 215,240,285 This course consists of a series of half-hour lessons o n the student's secondary instrument. A study of basic conducting techniques. Jazz 411 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Note: T o enroll i n any P M I courses students must receive written permission from the program coordinator. Conducting II PMI Lab Prerequisite: Jazz 410 A continuation of C o n d u c t i n g I w i t h emphasis o n vocal and instrumental approaches. Jazz 460 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Commercial Relations in Music A course i n v o l v i n g aspects of the music industry includi n g copyright, contracts, performing rights organizations and the recording industry. Jazz 472 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Arranging IV Prerequisites: Jazz 272 Corequisite: Jazz 204 Course content includes writing techniques for large jazz ensemble. This course is offered o n alternate years. Jazz 494 (1.5) Small Ensemble VII (by audition only) (0,3,0) (F) A jazz performance ensemble for more advanced players. Students w i l l be required to perform i n public several times d u r i n g the semester. Jazz 495 (1.5) (0,3,0) (S) Small Ensemble VIII A continuation of Jazz 494. PPMI (various numbers) (3) (1.5,0,0) (F,S) Concentration Private Music Instruction for Performance Majors A course designed to permit students i n the Performance Majors to pursue in-depth study of h i s / h e r o w n music specialty. The course consists of a series of one and one half hour lessons or equivalent. PMI (Various Numbers) (2) (1,0,0) (F,S) Concentration Private Music Instruction A course designed to permit the student to pursue study of h i s / h e r o w n music specialty. The course consists of a series of one-hour lessons. Academic - Jazz Studies 136 This lab involves attendance at a number of concerts and is intended to broaden the musical experience of students by exposing them to performances i n a variety of jazz and popular styles. Attendance is mandatory for graduation i n the Jazz Studies Program. Grades are based o n attendance and may influence the P M I mark. Kinesiology Instructional Faculty G . C H A L M E R S , B.Sc., (SFU), M.Sc., Ph.D. (California) R. L A N G I L L , B.Sc., M . P.E. (UBC) General Information The Capilano College Department of Kinesiology and H u m a n Kinetics offers a complete first year university p r o g r a m i n kinesiology, designed for students planning o n transferring to Simon Fraser University for second year for completion of a major or a degree i n the subject. For more information regarding the Kinesiology Program please contact the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n , 984-4955. Admission To a p p l y for the Program, students must submit t w o application forms: (1) a general College admission form (see "Admission" section i n this calendar), and (2) a Kinesiology and H u m a n Kinetics Program application form. The Program application also requires t w o references. These forms are available through the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n or the Office of the Registrar. These applications, together w i t h official transcripts and other pertinent documents, should be received by the Office of the Registrar b y M a r c h 31. Enrolment w i l l be limited to 35 students, a n d student selection w i l l be made on the basis of academic record. Students w h o a p p l y after M a r c h 31 risk having their admission denied due to lack of available spaces. Transfers to U.B.C. Human Kinetics Program The U . B . C . Department of H u m a n Kinetics offers four areas of concentration: (1) Exercise, (2) Health and Fitness, (3) Physical Education, and (4) Leisure and Sport Management. For information o n the H u m a n Kinetics (formerly Physical Education) Program, see H u m a n Kinetics section. Transfers to the University of Victoria The University of Victoria Faculty of Education, School of Physical Education, also accepts transfer of some courses from Capilano College. T o determine w h i c h courses are transferable, counsellors at U . V i c , a n d / o r C a p i l a n o College should be consulted. Each area of concentration has a set of core and recommended courses both w i t h i n the Kinesiology Department as w e l l as i n other departments. T o decide w h i c h courses to take at Capilano College, students may have selected an area of concentration to w h i c h they w i s h to transfer. The required courses for that area of concentration c a n then be determined from the S.F.U. calendar, and Capilano College courses selected appropriately. Alternatively, a Capilano College student may decide to take a combination of courses w h i c h w i l l be applicable to a number of areas of concentrations, and then decide w h e n at S F U the area of specialization. In either case, the courses selected at C a p i l a n o College, both w i t h i n the department of Physical Education and Kinesiology, a n d w i t h i n other departments should be selected to ensure transferability to S F U . If i n doubt, students should consult w i t h academic counsellors at S F U and C a p i l a n o College. A t y p i c a l first year program may be: Biology 108 or 110 and 111 Chemistry 104/105 o r 108/109 o r 110/111 Kinesiology 142 M a t h 110/111 Physics 108 or 110 Suggested electives: Kinesiology 143 Physics 111 (required at S F U as part of the first t w o year's requirements) Course Descriptions Kinesiology 142 (3) Introduction to Kinesiology 4,2,0) (S) A n introduction to the range of subject areas encompassed i n the discipline of kinesiology,with basic assessment procedures for i n d i v i d u a l status and performance according to functional anatomy, biomechanics and exercise physiology. Kinesiology 143 (3) Exercise Management (2,2,0) (F) A n introduction to exercise management and exercise physiology; conditioning methods, exercise techniques and fitness appraisal. Transfers to S.F.U. Kinesiology Program The Kinesiology Program at S F U offers four different areas of concentration: 1) Active Health, 2) Health and Physiological Sciences, 3) H u m a n Factors/Ergonomics, and 4) H u m a n Movement Sciences. Academic - Kinesiology 137 Labour Studies Contact: 984-4954 Instructional Faculty C . A S K E W , B . A . (W. Ontario), L L . B . (UBC), M e m b e r of the B.C. Bar N . A M O N , B . A . (Kent), M . A . (SFU) E. B E A D L E Cert. (Ins. C c l of B . C . , Ins. C c l of Wash) M . B O L T O N , B . A . , L L . B . (UBC), M e m b e r of the B.C. Bar V . C O C H R A N , L L . B . (UBC), M e m b e r of the B.C. Bar S. D A V I S , B . A . , L L . B . (Queen's), M e m b e r of the B.C. Bar E. D E C K E R , B . A . (McMaster) S. D I A M O N D G . H O R I L L O , L L . B . (U.Vic.), M e m b e r of the B.C. Bar G . J A M I E S O N , B . A . ( U . Winnipeg), L L . B . (U. Manitoba), L L . M . (UBC), M e m b e r of the B . C . Bar F. K E N N E D Y L . K U E H N , B . A . , M . A . (Reed College) E. L A V A L L E , B.Comm., L L . B . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Duke) L. M C G R A D Y , B . A . (Toronto), L L . B . (Man.), M e m b e r of the B . C Bar S. O ' D O N N E L L , B . A . , M . A . (UBC) J. P A T E R S O N , B . A . (UBC) J. P A T T E R S O N , B . A . , M . A . , (York) L L . B . (UBC), M e m b e r of the B.C. Bar J. P R I C E , B . A . , M . A . (UBC) D. R O G E R S , D i p l o m a (BCIT) S. R U S H , Q C , B . A . (W. Ontario), L L . B . (UBC), M e m b e r of the B . C Bar J. S A Y R E , B . A . (U. of Chicago), L L . B . (Toronto), M e m b e r of the B . C Bar L . S P E R L I N G , B . A . (Wisconsin) B. S T R I N G E R , B . A . (SFU), R . N . (Regina), M.Sc. (McMaster) G . W A U G H , B.A. (Reading), M . A . (UBC), Standard Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist (Faculty on leave) A . N . M A C L E A N , B. A (Alta), L L . B . (UBC) B. M E R R A L L , (Diploma) Labour College of Canada S. S A U N D E R S , B . A . (Windsor) General Information The L a b o u r Studies Programme is committed to meeting the special education needs of B . C . workers, their organizations and the labour movement i n general. Close relations w i t h the labour movement are maintained through the Users' A d v i s o r y Committee w h i c h is open to representatives of unions w h o use the program. This hard-working group of representatives actively engage i n promoting and developing the program. Courses i n Labour Studies are offered on both a credit and credit-free basis. The Fall program is offered i n October and November and the S p r i n g program i n M a r c h through M a y . Each Fall and S p r i n g special brochures Academic - Labour Studies 138 describing the courses to be offered are issued. The brochures are available b y contacting the Labour Studies Programme at 984-4954. Courses are scheduled i n the evening and on selected Fridays, Saturdays and Sundays. Bursary The George N o r t h C h a i r was established by friends i n memory of this outstanding member of the trade u n i o n movement. The award is available to assist w i t h registration costs for u n i o n members or their family members who w i s h to attend courses i n the Labour Studies Programme. U n i o n members are first expected to seek sponsorship from their u n i o n if they are eligible, before seeking a Bursary. Course Descriptions LSP 100 (1.5) (F) Introduction to Economics for Trade Unionists A n economics course emphasizing both the simplicity of most economic ideas, and the relevance of economics to an understanding of the w a y C a n a d i a n society operates. It focuses on the reasons w h y economists disagree about free trade, the role of government i n the economy and the role of unions, and isolates the political nature of most economic arguments. Topics discussed include the workings of the market system, the idea of competition and the reality of m o n o p o l y power, the potential benefits and costs of "free trade", and the causes and consequences of inflation and employment. LSP 101 (1.5) (S) Labour Economics: Alternatives & Options This course builds on the material from L S P 100 to provide information on alternative economic models i n c l u d i n g Marxist economic theory. Discussion focuses on the development and nature of capitalist economics and the causes of short and long term economic crises. LSP 105 Corporate Financial Statement Analysis (1.5) (F,S) A general introduction to reading and understanding financial statements focusing o n corporate income statements and balance sheets. There is discussion of concepts such as the definition of profit and investment return and h o w to determine the cost of employee benefits. LSP 109 Legal Research Skills (1.0) (F,S) This course provides students w i t h a general understanding of the fundamental principles of legal research. Students learn the basics of legal research b y d o i n g a series of specific research problems. The Labour Relations Board library is used b y the participants to undertake hands-on research assignments. LSP 110 B.C. Labour Law (15) (F,S) A basic but comprehensive course designed to acquaint u n i o n members as w e l l as officers and staff w i t h the essentials of the provincial labour law. The course covers organizing, unfair labour practices, arbitration, strikes, lockouts and picketing, amongst other topics. The sessions include detailed examination of the L a b o u r Relations Code, important Labour Relations Board decisions, as well as court decisions dealing w i t h labour law issues. LSP 111 The Canada Labour Code (1.5)(F,S) A broad examination of the C o d e and decisions w h i c h affect unions under federal labour jurisdiction. Introduction of labour l a w research methods and their application. Emphasis is placed o n the policy underlying the code and the creation and effect of the collective agreement. LSP 113 (1.5) (F.S) Public Service Staff Relations Act (PSSRA) A w i d e examination of the federal labour laws dealing specifically w i t h the public sector worker and their impact. Emphasis on labour l a w research methods and their application, collective agreements, grievances and back-to-work legislation for "essential" service workers. LSP 115 (1.0) (F.S) Issues in Occupational Health and Safety A general background to and overview of the m a i n social, medical, economic, technical and legal issues facing B . C . workers i n the field of health and safety. Special attention is given to the Workers' Compensation Board. LSP 116 (1-0) (F,S) Workers' Compensation Act and the WCB The course provides a general understanding of the Workers' Compensation A c t by the W . C . B . The statutory and administrative framework of the Workers' C o m p e n sation Board and all phases of claims handling are examined. Students are p r o v i d e d w i t h information required to represent workers w i t h compensation appeals w i t h special emphasis on r e v i e w i n g W . C . B . claim files, securing evidence, presenting the evidence by written submissions and at oral hearings. LSP 117 Introduction to UIC Procedures (1.0) (F,S) The U n e m p l o y m e n t Insurance A c t is a basic part of Canada's "social safety net". H i g h unemployment makes unemployment insurance more important than ever to w o r k i n g people. This course is intended to help u n i o n officers and ordinary workers understand h o w unemployment insurance works. M a n y topics are covered, from the determination of insurable employments to types of benefits, a v o i d i n g trouble w i t h a claim, and termination. The complex appeal system is thoroughly discussed, and students are offered a chance to take part i n a simulated Board of Referees hearing at the final session. Students become familiar w i t h the U n e m p l o y m e n t Insurance A c t and Regulations, policy manual, umpire's decisions, and other research tools. LSP 118 Human Rights Law (1.0) (F,S) A n examination of the essential practices and procedures in h u m a n rights law focusing on sexual harassment. This course offers up-to-date legal information from the provincial and federal jurisdictions. It provides an assessment of legal protection under the H u m a n Rights Act of British C o l u m b i a , the C a n a d i a n H u m a n Rights A c t , and the C a n a d i a n Charter of Rights and Freedoms, as well as collective agreements and institutional policies. The course provides the participant w i t h a thorough understanding of liability, the process of filing a complaint, and appropriate remedies i n human rights law. LSP 119 Civil Rights and the Work Place (1.0) (F,S) Specific civil rights problems arising i n the work place, including issues of political, economic and legal rights of the worker; examination of legal remedies available to trade unions and the employee to prevent infringement of civil rights i n the w o r k place; protection of civil rights under the provincial and federal legislation through contracting and i n collective agreements. A problemsolving format w i t h discussions of current civil rights issues, "right-to-work" legislation, race and sex discrimination. LSP 120 (1.5) (F,S) Politics: Understanding Government Bureaucracy A course w h i c h outlines h o w government operates i n various spheres, the impact it makes on the citizen, h o w to utilize procedures for redressing grievances that result from bureaucracy, and what channels are open for citizen participation. In addition, the course looks at the civil servant and h i s / h e r relationship to other workers. Academic - Labour Studies 139 LSP 122 Politics: Labour Policy in Canada (1.5) (F,S) Provides a basic understanding of the structures and processes of policy making i n Canada w i t h a direct focus on the formation of Labour Policy. The participant gains a specific knowledge of the structures of government i n Canada, learns the impact federalism has o n policy formation, and becomes familiarized w i t h channels of policital input. LSP 130 Sociology of Work (1.5)(F,S) This course assists i n the understanding of the social context i n w h i c h w o r k occurs. A n attempt to develop tools to understand the various social settings i n w h i c h work has been placed is undertaken. The different ways in w h i c h w o r k i n g people have been manipulated by the new social engineers is also studied. LSP 131 Race and Ethnic Relations d-5)(F,S) LSP 142 History of the Labour Movement in B.C. (1.5) (F) The birth and g r o w t h of trade unionism i n B . C . T h r o u g h a w i d e collection of printed and visual materials participants analyze the r a w and vital struggles between B.C.'s w o r k i n g people and the industrialists w h o opposed them. The major economic and political issues of the movement are traced; the right to organize, the right to bargain, the demand for the nine and eight-hour day, the problems of racism and immigration, the struggle to organize the industrial, public and clerical sectors, the fight for w o m en's rights, political expression. LSP 150 Women in the Work Force (1.0) (F,S) This course focuses on what w o m e n want to d o i n their union. It encompasses the political realities of the labour movement as it is today, as well as personal and emotional politics w i t h i n the trade u n i o n movement as they exist i n our sexist society. LSP 151 (1.0) (F,S) Leadership Skills, Assertiveness and Advocacy The issue of racism has been used i n the past to weaken and d i v i d e unions. This course w i l l help unionists become sensitive to complexities of race and ethnic relations; give practical advice on integrating minority workers into the u n i o n and develop techniques to deal w i t h biases and prejudice at the work place and i n the community. Approaches to combatting the disruptive effects of racism w i l l be discussed. Attempts not only to provide w o m e n w i t h the skills they need to take a leadership role i n their trade u n i o n , but also takes a careful look at the w a y sex role stereotyping inhibits us from developing these skills. This course covers the following areas: W o m e n and Power, Assertiveness, A d v o c a c y , O r g a n i z i n g and G r o u p Dynamics. LSP 140 History of the Labour Movement in Canada LSP 155 (1.0) (F,S) Indian Land Claims and the Trade Union Movement (1.5) (S) A survey of the history of the labour movement i n Canada from the formation of the w o r k i n g class i n the 19th century through to mass industrial unionism. B y looking at specific conflicts a good overview is obtained of the struggles of the labour movement to gain the right to organize, obtain u n i o n recognition, bargain collectively and provide decent wages and w o r k i n g conditions. LSP 141 (1.0) (F,S) Telling Your Union's Story: A Course in Practical History This is a companion course for the larger course i n Labour History, but it can be taken separately. It is designed to give some basic research skills, skills that can be applied toward learning the history of y o u r u n i o n - its development, policies, past struggles and victories. It is meant to be a practical course: the participants learn h o w to use resources, h o w to a p p l y them, and h o w to present the results to others. Academic - Labour Studies 140 This course acquaints the participant w i t h the position of native people on the issue of land claims. A n understanding of the implications of native land claims for the trade union movement and the history of native people i n Canada and British C o l u m b i a is gained. This history is studied i n relation to the whole question of land. LSP 160 (3.0) (F,S) Media for Trade Union Education and Organization The objective of this course is to become familiar w i t h simple media production skills for use i n the labour movement. The participant learns h o w to record and dub audio material, use an instamatic or 35 m m still camera for slides, produce a simple slide-audio show, use portable video equipment for basic recording, write news releases, pamphlets, and internal newsletters and edit audio and video tape. LSP 161 Working with Mass Media (1-5){F,S) This course is designed to acquaint trade unionists w i t h the native of print and electronic mass media w i t h a v i e w to i m p r o v i n g techniques for relating to the media. Specific topics w h i c h emerge from the classes w i l l be dealt w i t h , typical of w h i c h might be media ownership and the process of "newsmaking". LSP 162 (1.5) (F,S) Working Culture and History of Labour Arts Since its beginning, Canadian labour has w o r k e d to b u i l d a cultural life supportive of the concerns of w o r k i n g people. A t the same time, visual artists, film makers, dramatists, musicians, writers and other cultural workers have identified w i t h the movement for social change embodied i n organized labour. This course explores the history of Canadian labour culture, the influence of various ethnic and international currents i n creating a rich cultural identity and the limits and possibilities opened by the advent of mass media. Examples of film, video, television, song, literature and visual art are used as focal points for discussion. LSP 163 Media Workshops (1-5) (F,S) The a i m of this workshop is to gain the skills for singletray slide-tape production. O n completion of the course, the learner w i l l be able to script a slide-tape programme; prepare and shoot graphics; record, edit and mix a n elementary audio tape; shoot the slides for a slide-tape programme; and pulse and playback a slide-tape. LSP 170 (1.5) (F,S) Communications: Public Speaking and Parliamentary Procedures A l l the skills and techniques necessary for effective communications i n active u n i o n involvement. Designed to meet the needs of active unionists and officers, this course combines principles and practice i n a "learn w h i l e d o i n g " format. Training i n the following skills areas: 1. effective public speaking: i n c l u d i n g methods of oral communication, effective listening and response, confidence b u i l d i n g , and style development. Role plays aid the participant i n overcoming fears and speech anxiety w h i l e m a x i m i z i n g organization, objectives and analysis of impact. 2. effective meetings: effective chairing, preparation of agendas, and b u i l d i n g a good "process" w i t h the assistance of rules of order. LSP 180 Stewards' Training (1.5) (F,S) This course is intended to assist stewards and union members i n developing confidence i n their ability to adequately represent their fellow workers at the office or job-site as w e l l as provide the m i n i m u m technical skills i n advocacy and contract interpretation. In addition, the course provides a brief overview of the history of the N o r t h A m e r i c a n Labour Movement and its institutions as they have developed. LSP 181 Collective Bargaining (1.5)(F,S) Technical and practical information for the u n i o n negotiator. Includes instruction on the bargaining process including preparation and development of proposals; contract language and costing. Bargaining table advocacy skills are explored. Material is available for the specific needs of public and private sector bargaining. A bargaining simulation is held as an integral part of the course. LSP 182 Union Local Administration (1.5)(F,S) This course is designed to provide u n i o n activists and local officers w i t h basic skills i n parliamentary procedures as well as the administrative duties of officers and committee members i n local unions. The course requires considerable student participation to develop debating and advocacy skills. LSP 190 Contract Costing (1.0) (F,S) This course evaluates the "numbers game" played at the bargaining table and i n the media around bargaining issues. It deals w i t h u n i o n and employer approaches to costing the different elements of bargaining proposals and settlements. Topics discussed include: • wages and benefits and the concept of total compensation; • the effects of inflation and design of C O L A clauses; • sources of information for monetary negotiations and the uses and limitations of external comparisons. Participants also consider issues such as strategy, the public relations aspects of costing, and the relationship of costing to pay equity. Academic - Labour Studies 141 LSP 191 Introduction to Pension Plans (1.0) (F,S) This course, useful for Pension Trustees, potential Trustees, u n i o n officers and pension plan administrative staff, is a thorough examination of pension plans and pension issues. Topices developed and discussed include defined benefit and money purchase plans; regulation of pensions; the law of trusts; investment principles and practices; the design, financing, administration and c o m m u n i cation of pension plans; strategic planning for pensions. LSP 192 (1.0) (F,S) Introduction to Health & Welfare Benefits This course has been developed to provide a w o r k i n g understanding of the various aspects of Health & W e l fare/Benefit Plans. The following topics are incorporated: what is contained i n a Health & Welfare Plan; government involvement; designing a benefit plan, costing components; methods of financing a benefit plan; benefit plan administration. LSP 210 Arbitration (1.5)(F,S) This course, w h i c h is open to students w h o have previously completed L S P 110, 111, 113 or any other Labour L a w course, is an advanced course dealing w i t h matters such as rules of evidence, procedures, selection of arbitrators, arbitration powers and a brief history of arbitration. It deals w i t h grievance arbitration arising out of the collective agreement. LSP 216 (1)(F,S) Workers' Compensation Appeals - Intermediate Level This course is open to students w h o have previously completed L S P 116 or have experience i n representing workers w i t h compensation appeals. The course provides an understanding of the Workers' Compensation appeals process w i t h special emphasis o n policies, procedures and practice b y preparing and presenting appeals at the Workers' Compensation Review Board. Students are provided w i t h practical skills for reviewing medical evidence and requesting medical legal opinions. A key part of the course is a case study that involves preparation of an appeal and the presentation of the appeal to a panel of the Workers' Compensation Review Board. LSP 226 (1)(F,S) Advanced Workers' Compensation - Appeal Preparation & Presentation The course is open to students w h o have previously completed L S P 116, L S P 216 or have experience i n representing workers w i t h compensation at the appeal level. This course provides detailed review of A d v a n c e d Academic - Labour Studies 142 Workers' Compensation A p p e a l s to the A p p e a l s Tribunal (Commissioners) and to the M e d i c a l R e v i e w Panel. Students review appeals procedures a n d policies for advanced appeals and completed practical skills exercises. Mathematics Instructional Faculty A . E . T . B E N T L E Y , B.Sc. (Hons.) (UBC), M . A . , P h . D . (Missouri), Coordinator of Mathematics R.C. B R E W S T E R , B.Sc. (Hons.), M.Sc. ( U V i c ) , P h . D . (SFU) P. C A R T E R , B.Sc. (Hons) (Sheffield) M . S c , P h . D . ( U B C ) L . F . H A R R I S , B . A . , M . A , ( U B C ) , P h . D . (Austral. Nat. U ) R. H A U S C H I L D T , B.Sc. (Hons.) (Queen's), M.Sc. (UBC) J. J O H N S T O N , B.Math (Waterloo), B.Ed. (Toronto), M . M a t h (Waterloo) C . M O R G A N , B.Sc. (Hons.), M.Sc.,Ph.D (Memorial) R.R. R E N N I E , B.Sc, M.Sc. (Brigham Young), Ph.D. (UBC) K . V . T O W S O N , B . S c , M . S c . (SFU) R . H . V E R N E R , B . S c ( U B C ) , M.Sc. (EWSU), B.C. Teaching Cert. (UBC) A . W A T E R M A N , B.Sc. ( U B C ) , M.Sc. (SFU), B.C. Teaching Cert. (UBC) C . W A T K I S S , B.Sc. (Carleton), M . S c , P h . D . (Toronto) some programs at the universities, the Mathematics Department advises students to consult the university calendar and to seek guidance from a college counsellor, advisor, or m a t h instructor for the appropriate course selection. A. Students planning to proceed in Science, Computing Science, Mathematics, Architecture and Forestry. These students normally take M a t h 110/111 d u r i n g their first year. Comments: 1. Students p l a n n i n g to pursue mathematics or statistics at U B C s h o u l d take i n their first year: M a t h 110/111; Physics 114/115 or 110/111 or 108/111; Chemistry 110/111 or 108/109; C o m p u t i n g Science 110/111; English (six credits). 2. M a t h 101/102 are recommended b y some science departments at S F U . Laboratory Supervisor L Y N N , W . , B.Sc. (Carleton), M . A . S c . (Waterloo) General Information The Mathematics Department offers courses i n mathematics and statistics at the h i g h school through second year university level. B. Students planning to proceed In Arts or Commerce Programs. 1. Students p l a n n i n g to pursue a program i n the Faculty of Arts, w h o w i s h to satisfy a one year science course elective, normally take one of the following two course combinations: M a t h 101/102; 103/108; 105/108 or 110; 107/108; 108/109 or 110/111. I) Options for Mathematics 11 Equivalency A . Classroom Format: M a t h 099 B. Self Paced Format: M a t h 009/010 II) Options for Mathematics 12 Equivalency A . Classroom Format: 1. M a t h 103 or 2. M a t h 105 or 3. M a t h 107 B. Self Study Format: M a t h 103 V i d e o instruction M a t h 107 is a specialized M a t h 12 equi\ alent designed for business, commerce and some non-science programs. M a t h 103 and 105 are general M a t h 12 equivalents. M a t h 103 is an expanded version of M a t h 105 meeting 6 hours per week and includes some of the M a t h 099 content. A l l of these M a t h 12 equivalent options receive i n d i v i d u a l transfer credit at S F U . If combined w i t h a calculus course (Math 108 or M a t h 110) all receive transfer at U B C to U B C M a t h 111. U B C faculties that require M a t h 12 for admission to first year grant 3 credits o n l y towards a degree for U B C M a t h 111. III) Options for University Level 2. Students planning to enter second year Commerce at Capilano College take: a) M a t h 108 & 109 (or M a t h 110 & 111). (For students entering w i t h a stronger math background.) b) M a t h 107 & 108 (or M a t h 105 & 110). (For students entering w i t h a weaker math background.) Note: ( i ) Students planning to enter the Commerce Program at U B C must not take M a t h 101. (ii) Students planning to enter second year Commerce at U B C must first complete M a t h 108 and 109. For a detailed description of the commerce courses and programs at C a p i l a n o College see the Calendar section titled Commerce. 3. For transfer to Business A d m i n i s t r a t i o n at S F U , the following are required: M a t h 107, (if B.C. M a t h 12 not completed) and M a t h 108. In addition, M a t h 101 is advised. For H o n o u r s i n Business A d m i n i s t r a t i o n , M a t h 109 is required. 4. Students p l a n n i n g to study economics at U B C must take M a t h 108 and 109. Entering students should Ube the following three sections, Parts A , B, and C , as guidelines for selecting math courses at the first year level. D u e to the specialized needs of Academic - Mathematics 143 Mathematics 009 Arithmetic See Calendar section entitled Engineering. A review of the basic arithmetic operations. Applications to percentage, ratio, proportions, areas and volumes. This is a self-paced course primarily intended for returning students w h o require a basic math refresher. University Transfer Credit Except where explicitly noted, all math courses numbered 101 or higher transfer to S F U , U B C or U . V i c . For details, consult the B.C. Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e available at the A d v i s i n g Centre or College Reception. (1) (0,3*,0)(SU,F,S) C. Students planning to proceed in the Engineering Program. * Students are generally required to attend 3 scheduled hours per week for this course. Mathematics 010 (1) Elementary Algebra (0,3*,0) (SU,f,S) Math Placement Tests (MPT) Prerequisite: M a t h 009 or permission of the instructor. A l l students wanting to enrol i n a Precalculus course (Math 103,105 or 107) or a C a l c u l u s I course (Math 108 or 110) must write a mathematics placement test if their mathematics prerequisites were completed: Reviews and develops basic algebraic skills necessary i n the solution of algebraic equations and the factorization of polynomials. Introduction to analytic geometry w i t h emphasis o n straight lines. This course is offered o n a self-paced format. (a) prior to the previous calendar year (1994 for 1995 courses; 1995 for 1996 courses) * Students are generally required to attend 3 scheduled hours per week for this course. OR (b) at a B.C. secondary school (or equivalent) w i t h a final letter grade standing below the following exemption requirements: M a t h 103: at least a " P " i n M a t h 12 M a t h 105: at least a " C " i n M a t h 12 M a t h 107: at least a " C " i n M a t h 12 M a t h 108: at least a " B " i n M a t h 12 M a t h 110: " A " i n M a t h 12 or at least a " B " i n both M a t h 12 and Calculus 12 To write the Precalculus placement test, students must have at least a " C " grade i n M a t h 11 or at least a " P " grade i n M a t h 12. To write the Calculus placement test, students must have at least a " C " grade i n M a t h 12. M P T are offered on a regularly-scheduled basis throughout the year. Please contact the Registrar's Office or the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n for more information. Graphing Calculator The Mathematics Department believes that the graphing calculator greatly enhances mathematics instruction and learning. Students enrolling i n first year courses, M a t h 103 or higher, are required to have a graphing calculator. Specific recommendations o n make and m o d e l w i l l be available d u r i n g the registration period. Course Descriptions Note: Students are strongly cautioned that normally they need at least a " B - " grade i n a prerequisite course (preferably w i t h i n the past year) to have a reasonable chance of success at the next course level. Academic - Mathematics 144 Mathematics 099 (3) Intermediate Algebra (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: M a t h 11 w i t h a " P " or permission (signature) of a Mathematics instructor. M a t h 099 begins w i t h introductory algebra and continues w i t h the development of intermediate algebra. Students w i l l be introduced to linear and quadratic functions, logarithms and trigonometry. This course is primarily for students w h o require a M a t h 11 equivalent and w h o anticipate taking precalculus (Math 103,105 or 107). Mathematics 101 (3) Introduction to Statistics (4,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: M a t h 11 or M a t h 010 or M a t h 099 or B M T H 045 w i t h at least a " C - " grade or permission of the instructor. A n introduction to the language of statistics and some statistical methods, including r a n d o m variables and their distribution; r a n d o m sampling, normal distribution, estimation of parameters and testing hypotheses. Mathematics 102 (3) Statistical Methods (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: M a t h 101 w i t h at least a " C - " grade. A study of important statistical methods c o m m o n l y used in the analysis of research data, i n c l u d i n g t-tests and their non-parametric competitors, one and two-way analysis of variance, chi-square tests and regression analysis. Mathematics 103 (4.5) (6,0,0) (SU,F,S) Intermediate Algebra and Precalculus N O T E : This course is not transferable to U B C except if combined w i t h M a t h 110 or M a t h 108. Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Tests (MPT) O R completion w i t h i n the past year of M a t h 12 w i t h at least a " P " grade; or M a t h 010 or B M T H 045 w i t h at least a " C " grade; o r M a t h 099 w i t h at least a " C - " grade. geometric progressions, c o m p o u n d interest and annuities, summation notation, binomial theorem. N o duplicate credit for M a t h 103/105/107. Mathematics 108 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Calculus for Business and Social Sciences I Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Tests (MPT) O R completion w i t h i n the past year of M a t h 12 w i t h at least a " B " grade; or M a t h 103 or M a t h 105 or M a t h 107 or B M T H 046 w i t h at least a " C - " grade. A brief review of introductory algebra, plus intermediate algebra a n d precalculus, w i t h a focus on functions, mathematical models, graphs, trigonometry, logarithms, and exponential functions. (Students w i l l be brought to the same level as those completing M a t h 105 by the end of the term). Primarily for students w h o anticipate taking calculus courses or w h o require a M a t h 12 equivalent course. A brief review of algebra, functions, and analytic geometry. The derivative w i t h applications to curve sketching, optimization, growth and decay. The integral w i t h applications. N o duplicate credit for M a t h 103/105/107. Mathematics 109 N o duplicate credit w i l l be given for M a t h 108/110. (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) This course may be completed by guided self-study format using Calculus for Business and Social Sciences II video instruction. Prerequisite: M a t h 108 or M a t h 110 w i t h at least a " C - " Mathematics 105 (3) grade. (4,0,0) (SU,F,S) Precalculus Mathematics N O T E : This course is not transferable to U B C except if combined w i t h M a t h 110 or 108. Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Tests (MPT) O R completion w i t h i n the past year of M a t h 12 w i t h at least a " C " grade; or M a t h 010 or B M T H 045 w i t h at least a " B " grade; or M a t h 099 w i t h at least a " B - " grade. A review of algebra and a discussion of functions, graphs, mathematical models, trigonometry, logarithms and exponential functions. Primarily for students w h o anticipate taking calculus courses or w h o require a M a t h 12 equivalent course. N o duplicate credit for M a t h 103/105/107. Mathematics 107 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Precalculus for Business and Social Sciences N O T E : This course is not transferable to U B C unless combined w i t h M a t h 108. Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Tests (MPT) O R completion w i t h i n the past year of M a t h 12 w i t h at least a " C " grade; or M a t h 010 o r B M T H 045 w i t h at least a " C " grade; o r M a t h 099 w i t h at least a " C - " grade. The mathematical models/applications in this course w i l l be mainly business/finance oriented. Linear and quadratic equations and inequalities, absolute value, systems of linear equations, functions and graphs, inverse functions, mathematical modelling, exponential and logarithm functions, circular and trigonometic functions, right-triangle trigonometry, arithmetic and Trigonometric functions, applications of the definite integral, integration techniques. Functions of several independent variables, partial derivatives, extrema, Lagrange multipliers, multiple integrals, some techniques for s o l v i n g differential equations, systems of linear equations and matrix algebra. N o duplicate credit w i l l be given for M a t h 109/111. Mathematics 110 Calculus I (4.5) (6,0,0) (SU,F,S) Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Tests (MPT) O R completion w i t h i n the past year of M a t h 12 w i t h an " A " grade; or M a t h 12 and Calculus 12 w i t h at least a " B " grade i n each; or M a t h 103 o r M a t h 105 or B M T H 046 w i t h at least a " C - " grade. Limits, continuity, the derivative, rules of differentiation, implicit differentiation, related rates, curve sketching, optimization, differentials; definite integrals and antidifferentiation; logarithmic and exponential functions. N o duplicate credit w i l l be given for M a t h 108/110. This course may be completed by guided self-study format using video instruction. Mathematics 111 (4.5) (6,0,0) (F,S) Calculus II Prerequisite: M a t h 110 w i t h at least a " C - " grade. A study of the anti-derivative; the integral, techniques of integration, applications of the integral; polar coordinates, parametric curves; sequences, infinite series and Taylor's Theorem. N o duplicate credit w i l l be given for M a t h 109/111. Academic - Mathematics 145 Mathematics 152 (3) (4,0,1) (S) Mathematics 215 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S)* Linear Algebra and Differential Equations Introduction to Analysis NOTE: This course is intended for students i n the Engineering Program. Prerequisite: M a t h 110 and 111 with at least a " B - " average. Corequisite: M a t h 111 A n introduction to systems of linear equations and matrices, vector spaces and linear transformations, determinants, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, inner product spaces. The theory w i l l be applied to first order linear differential equations, first order linear systems and engineering topics. A course for students w h o plan to proceed i n mathematics. Logic, sets, functions, limits of sequences and series; introduction to continuity, the derivative, R i e m a n n Integral. * M a t h 215 to be offered i n the Fall or S p r i n g w h e n sufficient student demand is evident. Mathematics 230 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Calculus III The Math Department offers a full second year university transfer program in math. Students planning to take 200 level math should seek advice from math instructors. Mathematics 200 (4,0,0) (F) (3) Prerequisite: M a t h 111 w i t h at least a " C - " grade. Corequisite: M a t h 200 (if not already completed) o r permission of instructor. Analytical geometry of three dimensions; partial differentiation, applications; double and triple integrals; transformations to various coordinate systems. Linear Algebra Prerequisite: M a t h 111 w i t h at least a " C - " grade. A n introduction to systems of linear equations and matrices, vector spaces and linear transformations, determinants, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, inner product spaces. Theorems and proofs are an important component of the course. Mathematics 204 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S)* Probability and Statistics for Applications A calculus based introduction to classical and nonparametric techniques for inferences about means, variances and analysis of variance. The emphasis w i l l be on problem formulation, models, assumptions and interpretation. Regularly scheduled "labs" w i l l introduce course participants to appropriate supporting statistical software. *Math 204 to be offered i n either Fall or Spring term. (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to Probability and Statistics Prerequisite: M a t h 111 w i t h at least a "C-" grade or M a t h 110 and permission of instructor. A calculus based study of probability, discrete and continuous random variables, mathematical expectation, moment generating functions, Central L i m i t Theorem, sampling from normal populations, confidence intervals, hypothesis testing. Academic - Mathematics 146 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: M a t h 230 w i t h at least a " C - " grade. Vector calculus; line and surface integrals; Green's Theorem; vector fields; divergence theorem; Stokes's Theorem; applications. Mathematics 235 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to Differential Equations Prerequisite: M a t h 108 or M a t h 110 w i t h at least a " C - " grade or permission of the instructor. Mathematics 205 Mathematics 231 Calculus IV Prerequisite: M a t h 200 and M a t h 230 w i t h at least a " C - " grade. A n introduction to ordinary differential equations; first order equations; higher order linear differential equations; linear systems; power series techniques; Laplace transform method; the phase plane, applications. Music Transfer BACHELOR OF MUSIC TRANSFER PROGRAM University Transfer Contact: Lars Kaario, Coordinator, Office F R I 19, Phone 984-4951. Capilano College offers the first two years of a Bachelor of M u s i c Degree. A l l courses i n the Bachelor of M u s i c Transfer Program are transferable to School of M u s i c at the University of British C o l u m b i a and to the Faculty of M u s i c at the University of Victoria. Students wishing to transfer to the Faculty of Arts at U B C , S F U , or U V i c w i t h a major i n M u s i c s h o u l d take M u s i c 100/101/102,112/113, 120/121 i n their first year, and M u s i c 200/201, 212/213, 220/221 i n their second year. O u r students have also received transfer credit to the following universities: Alberta, Calgary, Dalhousie, Regina, Brandon, York, Western Ontario, M c G i l l and Western Washington. Instructional Faculty M . A R M A M N I , A . R . C . T . (Toronto), B.Mus., M . M u s . (UBC) G . A L C O C K , A . R . C . T . (Toronto) D. ASTOR, B A . (UBC) J. B E R A R D U C C I , B . M u s . (UBC), M . A . (W. Wash.) N . B O H N A , B.Mus., M . M u s . (UBC) S. B O S W E L L , A . R . C . M . (Royal College of M u s i c , London) K . C E R N A U S K A S , D i p . (Salzburg), B . M u s . (Toronto) N . D I N O V O , B.Mus., M . M u s . (UT) L . F A L L S , A . R . C . T . (Toronto), B.Mus., M . M u s . ( U B C ) J. G E E , B.Mus., M A . (UBC) P. H O Y , B . M u s . (U.Texas), M . M u s . , D . M u s . (USC) L . K A A R I O , B . M u s . (UBC), M . M u s . (W.Wash.), Coordinator K . K O B Y L A N S K Y , D i p . (Ryerson), D i p . (Tchaikovsky Conservatory, Kiev), B.Mus., M . M u s . (UBC) D. M C C O Y , M.Mus. (UBC) A . M C I N T Y R E , B . M u s . (UBC) G . M C N A B , B.Mus., M . M u s . ( U B C ) K. M O O R E , B.Mus. (UBC) T. N I C K E L S , B . A . ( U . C . L . A . ) A . N O D W E L L , B . M u s . (UBC), M . M u s . (UVic) G. R A M S B O T T O M C . R O G E R S , M . A . (West. Ont.) P. S C H R E I B E R , B. M u s . (UBC) P. S H A W , B . M u s . (Ohio) D . V A N D E R E Y K , B. M u s . , M . M u s . ( U B C ) K . V A N K A M P E N , B.Mus. M . M u s . ( U B C ) S. W O O D Y A R D , B . M u s . (Victoria) General Information Capilano College offers four music programs: a two-year D i p l o m a of M u s i c from the Bachelor of M u s i c Transfer Program, a two-year D i p l o m a i n Jazz Studies, a four-year Degree i n Jazz Studies and a four-year Degree i n M u s i c Therapy. For information on Jazz Studies see section on Jazz Studies. For information on the M u s i c Therapy Program see section on M u s i c Therapy. T W O Y E A R DIPLOMA A N D T R A N S F E R ABILITY T O T H I R D Y E A R U N I V E R S I T Y Career Opportunities • Private M u s i c Teacher - w i t h the completion of the two year d i p l o m a program • first two years toward a M u s i c degree leading to a career i n M u s i c Education or Performance Admission Requirements Entering students should have a basic knowledge of music rudiments (approximately at the level of Toronto Conservatory Rudiments II). Students entering o n piano must be at a grade ten level (Toronto Conservatory). Piano students w h o require a qualifying term may enroll i n other courses. Students entering i n composition must have a w o r k i n g knowledge of diatonic harmony. Students entering i n voice or instruments other than piano must have a performance level acceptable to the faculty. Admissions Procedure A l l applicants must: 1. C o m p l y w i t h the general admission requirements of Capilano College and the specific admission requirements for A c a d e m i c Studies. 2. Participate i n a private interview w i t h the music coordinator or a program instructor. 3. Write a theory placement test and take an ear test. 4. Play an audition on their major instrument: this w i l l consist of two contrasting pieces, technique, and sight reading. 5. Write the C a p i l a n o College E D T (English Diagnostic Test) or the Provincial LPI. If y o u received an " A " grade in English 12 or Literature 12, then y o u are not required to write either. (Creative W r i t i n g 12 does not count as E n g l i s h 12.) Please try to have y o u r E D T or LPI mark before y o u r audition and interview. A u d i t i o n s w i l l i n v o l v e the presentation of two contrasting prepared pieces and a demonstration of the student's instrumental technique and sightreading ability. Academic - Music Transfer 147 Returning students may pre-register d u r i n g the m o n t h of A p r i l . N e w students demonstrating sufficient instrumental a n d / o r theoretical accomplishment in their placement test m a y preregister d u r i n g M a y and early A u g u s t to ensure their enrolment. Students m a y register d u r i n g i n person registration. A l l interviews, auditions, and placement tests are held i n M a y and August. Early application is advised. Graduation Requirements The complete program requirements must be successfully completed to receive an Associate i n A r t s and Science Ehploma. Scholarships and Bursaries The program offers several substantial scholarships and bursaries w h i c h vary i n amount from year to year. A m o n g those offered are the Canadian Daughters' League Bursaries and the N a n M c L e a n G o o d w i n Scholarships as w e l l as several First and Second Year Scholarships. For further information ask the Co-ordinator of the program. Special Fees and Expenses The fees for private music instruction (P.M.I.) w i l l be announced at least one m o n t h prior to the beginning of the Fall term. M a x i m u m tuition for full-time study for the 1994/95 academic year was $1,140.00 per semester. Included i n this m a x i m u m tuition are the costs of all required Private M u s i c Instruction. A deposit of $40.00 of the P.M.I, fees must be paid b y the end of the Registration period i n order to take P.M.I. N o late registration is a l l o w e d . Program Content Credits FIRST T E R M E N S M 100 or 110 L0 P M I 100 Level 2.0 M u s i c 100 3.0 M u s i c 112 1-5 • M u s i c 114 10 M u s i c 120 3.0 • • M U S 360 or ENSJ 135 or E N S J 140, M U S 110 or M U S 218 or M U S 210 or M U S 122 or A r t s Elective 1.0-3.0 English 100 or 102 3j) 15.5-17.5 SECOND TERM E N S M 150 or 160 P M I 200 level M u s i c 101 M u s i c 102 M u s i c 113 • M u s i c 115 Academic - Music Transfer 148 10 2.0 2.0 10 1-5 10 M u s i c 121 3.0 • * M U S 361 or ENSJ 185 or ENSJ 190, M U S 110 or M U S 219 or M U S 211 or M U S 123 or A r t s elective 1.0-3.0 English 103 or 104 or 105 or 106 3,0 15.5-17.5 THIRD TERM E N S M 200 or 210 P M I 300 Level M u s i c 200 M u s i c 212 • M u s i c 214 * * M U S 110 or 210 or ENSJ 235 or ENSJ 240, or M U S 218 or M U S 122 or A r t s elective M u s i c 220 English 200 or 212 FOURTH TERM E N S M 250 or 260 P M I 400 Level M u s i c 201 M u s i c 213 • M u s i c 215 **MUS 111 or 211 or E N S 285 or E N S 290 or M U S 219 or M U S 123 or A r t s elective M u s i c 221 English 201 or 213 L0 2.0 3.0 L5 L0 1.0-3.0 3.0 3£ 15.5-17.5 1 2 3 L5 1 1.0-3.0 3 3 15.5-17.5 •If a student is a piano major, then h e / s h e may take a secondary P M I . ••Students may graduate w i t h 62 to 64 credits depending on w h i c h options they choose. G u i t a r students must take Guitar Ensemble through Extension Services. Such students may graduate w i t h 60 credits by excluding the optional courses from their program. BACHELOR OF MUSIC THERAPY COURSE STREAM Students planning o n going into the Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy program i n the third year w i l l take the following program of courses for the first t w o years. The student that completes this series of courses w i l l receive a D i p l o m a i n M u s i c . A t this time they m a y choose to transfer to a university to finish a Bachelor of M u s i c or they m a y a p p l y to the M u s i c Therapy P r o g a m to stay at Capilano College and complete a Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy. FIRST T E R M ENSM100 P M I 100 1.0 2.0 M U S 100 M U S 112 * M U S 114 M U S 120 M U S 360 E N G L 100 3.0 1.5 1.0 3.0 1.5 3TJ 16.0 SECOND TERM E N S M 150 P M I 200 M U S 101 M U S 102 M U S 113 * M U S 115 M U S 121 E N G L 103,104,105, or 106 *PSYC 100 or P S Y C 101 1.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 3.0 3.0 3XJ 17.5 THIRD TERM E N S M 200 P M I 300 M U S 200 M U S 212 * M U S 214 M U S 220 P S Y C 204 (Devel. Psyc) B I O L 104 ( H u m a n Biology) 1.0 2.0 3.0 1.5 1.0 3.0 3.0 3j) 17.5 FOURTH TERM E N S M 250 P M I 400 M U S 201 M U S 213 • M U S 215 M U S 221 P S Y C 205 (Psyc or A g i n g ) M U S 361 1.0 2.0 3.0 1.5 1.0 3.0 3.0 L5 16.5 tuning, tone quality, musical phrasing, balance, diction and professional presentation. A varied concert program w i l l be learned and several performances w i l l be g i v e n each semester. ENSM 110 Orchestra I (1) Rehearsal and performance of concert repertoire. Prospective students must contact the M u s i c Department at least one week before classes commence to arrange for an audition. Persons w i n n i n g a position through audition w i l l be allowed to register. ENSM 150 Choir II (1) ENSM 160 (1) Orchestra II (4,0,0) (S) A continuation of E N S M 110. ENSM 200 Choir III (1) (4,0,0) (F) A continuation of E N S M 150. ENSM 210 (1) Orchestra III (4,0,0) (F) A continuation of E N S M 160. ENSM 250 Choir IV (1) (4,0,0) (S) A continuation of E N S M 200. ENSM 260 (1) Orchestra IV A continuation of E N S M 210. ** It is recommended that students take P S Y C 101 d u r i n g the summer between 2nd and 3rd term through the O p e n Learning Institute. A continuation of E N S M 250 For a description of the M u s i c Therapy Program, see the M u s i c Therapy Program section of the Calendar. ENSM 350 ENSM 300 (1) (1) (4,0,0) (S) (4,0,0)(F) (4,0,0) (S) A continuation of E N S M 300 Course Descriptions For Jazz and Jazz Ensemble (ENSJ) course descriptions, see the Jazz Studies section of this Calendar. (1) (4,0,0) (S) A continuation of E N S M 100. * If student is a Piano Major, then he/she may take a secondary P M I . ENSM 100 Choir I (4,0,0) (F) (4,0,0) (F) ENSM 400 (1) (4,0,0) (F) A continuation of E N S M 350 ENSM 450 (1) (4,0,0) (S) A continuation of E N S M 400 A n exploration of choral music from the Renaissance to the present. Emphasis w i l l be placed on ensemble, Academic - Music Transfer 149 Music 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Music 114 (1) (2,2,0) (F) Theory I Piano Class Corequisite: M u s i c 112 Theory II: Harmony This course is designed for students w h o w i s h to learn basic keyboard skills. Reading, improvisation, transposition and harmonization are the skills developed d u r i n g this course and the three subsequent levels. Theoretical concepts are applied at the keyboard and include diatonic triads and sevenths of the major key, all major, minor and modal tetrachords. A weekly lab evaluates material covered i n class. Students practice o n the department's pianos. Prerequisite: M u s i c 100 Corequisites: M u s i c 102 and 113 Music 115 A study of music from c. 1600 to 1800 w i t h an emphasis on diatonic harmony u p to simple modulation. T h e student w i l l learn control of chord progression and voice leading. Music 101 (2) (3,0,0) (S) A continuation of the core component of M u s i c 100. H a r m o n i c vocabulary w i l l include simple modulation and secondary dominants and sevenths displayed i n a variety of styles and textures. Binary and ternary forms w i l l be introduced, but analysis of repertoire w i l l not be emphasized. This course must be taken i n conjunction w i t h M u s i c 102 to fulfill the objectives of second year theory. Music 102 (1) (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: M u s i c 100 Corequisites: M u s i c 101 and 113 (2,0,0) (F) Music 120 (3) (3,0,*) (F) History I Music 121 (3) (3,0,*) (S) History II Prerequisite: M u s i c 120 A study of music history of the M e d i e v a l and Renaissance periods. Music 122 (2,0,0) (S) (1.5) (2,0,0) Lyric Diction: English and German A n exploration of the application of the principles of diction for singers i n English and G e r m a n through the m e d i u m of the International Phonetic A l p h a b e t (IPA). Class Strings A continuation of M u s i c 110. Music 112 (1.5) Ear Training and Sight Singing I A continuation of M u s i c 114. In addition, keyboard sequences, arpeggios and major scales are introduced along w i t h easy original repertoire. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. A practical study of the violin family. (1.5) Prerequisite: M u s i c 114 * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. This course is the traditional supplement to M u s i c 101. It explores the links between harmonic w r i t i n g i n works d r a w n from the 17th and 18th centuries. Students w i l l gain a sense of the importance of harmonic and linear details to compositions as a whole. Music 111 (2,2,0) (S) A survey of music history from the time of ancient Greece to the present. Theory II: Repertoire Analysis Music 110 (1.5) Class Strings (1) Piano Class (3,0,0)(F) Music 123 (1.5) (2,0,0) Lyric Diction: French and Italian Corequisite: M u s i c 100 Study of the aural recognition of intervals, chords, and harmonic movement. The student w i l l learn to: transcribe melodies and rhythms; sight sing using Solfege and scale degrees; read rhythms. A n exploration of the application of the principles of diction for singers i n French and Italian through the m e d i u m of the International Phonetic A l p h a b e t (IPA). Music 200 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Theory III Music 113 (1.5) Ear Training and Sight Singing II Prerequisite: M u s i c 112 Corequisites: M u s i c 101 and 102 A continuation of M u s i c 112 Academic - Music Transfer 150 (3,0,0) (S) Prerequisites: M u s i c 101 and M u s i c 102 Corequisite: M u s i c 212 A study of advanced tonal procedures: review of nonchord tones, mixture, seventh chords, applied V and VII, diatonic modulation, seventh chords with added dissonance. A detailed study of compound ternary and rondo forms. Investigation of the fugue. Music 218 (1.5) Class Brass (2,2,0) (F) A practical study of the brass family. Music 201 Theory IV (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Music 200 Corequisite: Music 213 (2,0,0) (F) (2,0,0) (S) (1.5) (3,0.0) (F) A continuation of Music 113. (3,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Music 212 Corequisite: Music 201 (2,2,0) (F) For students who have taken Music 115 or have had previous keyboard experience. Students are introduced to common idiomatic accompaniment patterns as well as four-part chorale studies, keyboard sequences, minor scales and chords. Basic keyboard techniques are emphasized including relaxation, touch, rotation, weight transfer and their musical application in simple repertoire. The lab hour is utilized to develop sight reading skills at the keyboard. Music 215 (1) Piano Class Prerequisite: Mus 120 or Musl21 A survey of music history of the Baroque period and Classical period. Music 221 History IV (3) (3,0,*) (S) Prerequisite: Music 220 * Some concert attendance will be required. (2,2,0) (S) A continuation of Music 214 with increased complexity of repertoire and technique. (1.5,0,0) (F) This will provide a knowledge of Kodaly methodology and the skills necessary to use this teaching method in a classroom. Music 361 (1.5) Method Studies in Music Education: Orff Methodology A continuation of Music 212. Music 214 (1) Piano Class (3,0,*) (F) Music 360 (1.5) Method Studies in Music Education: Kodaly Methodology Prerequisite: Music 113 Corequisite: Music 200 Music 213 (1.5) Ear Training and Sight Singing IV (3) A survey of music history of the Romantic period and the 20th century. A continuation of Music 210. Music 212 Singing III Music 220 History III * Some concert attendance will be required. A practical study of the woodwind family. Music 211 (1.5) Class Woodwinds (2,2,0) (S) A practical study of the percussion family. A study of chromaticism: the phrygian II, augmented sixth chords, other chromatic chords, chromatic voiceleading techniques, chromaticism in larger contexts. A detailed study of sonata, sonata-rondo, and variation forms. Music 210 (1.5) Class Woodwinds Music 219 (1.5) Class Percussion (1.5,0,0) (S) This will provide a knowledge of Orff methodology and the skills necessary to use this teaching method in a classroom. PMI (Various Numbers) (2) (1,0,0) (F,S) Concentration Private Music Instruction A course designed to permit the student to pursue indepth study of his/her own music specialty. The course consists of a series of one-hour lessons. PMI (Various Numbers) (1) Secondary Private Music Instruction (.5,0,0) (F,S) This course consists of a series of half-hour lessons on the student's secondary instrument. Note: To enroll in any PMI courses students must get permission from the coordinator of their Music Program. Academic - Music Transfer ~151 Philosophy Philosophy 120 (3) Understanding Scientific Reasoning Instructional Faculty M . BATTERSBY, B . A . ( N Y U ) , P h . D . (UBC) J. D I X O N , B . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) S. G A R D N E R , B . A . ( M c G I L L ) , B.Phil. (Oxford), P h . D . (Concordia) S. P E R S K Y , B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) Y . W E S T W E L L - R O P E R , M . A . , E d . D . (UBC), D . P h i l (Oxford) University Transfer Credit A l l Philosophy courses offered at Capilano College have transfer credit at every university i n British C o l u m b i a . Critical thinking is taught i n all philosophy courses. (4,0,0) (F,S) A n introduction to the part of philosophy concerned w i t h questions of value. These include such issues as: "What is morality?", " W h y be moral?", "What is the relationship between l a w and morality?", " A r e there any objective - moral values?", as w e l l as such issues as abortion, suicide, civil disobedience, capital punishment, and the environment. The emphasis of the course varies from instructor to instructor. Philosophy 102 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Introductory Philosophy: Knowledge and Reality A n introduction to the part of philosophy concerned w i t h questions about the ultimate nature of the w o r l d we live i n and o u r knowledge of it (traditionally called Metaphysics and Epistemology). The issues discussed include: the existence and nature of G o d , the place of h u m a n beings i n the universe, the nature of reality, h u m a n nature, h u m a n knowledge and skepticism, freedom and determinism, the relationship between m i n d and body, and others. The emphasis of the course varies from instructor to instructor. Philosophy 110 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Critical Thinking A n introduction to the basic rules of clear and rational thought. The student w i l l be taught through extensive examples h o w to detect false reasoning, illegitimate appeals to emotions, inconsistencies and contradictions. The goal is to develop our logical awareness to the point that w e can no longer be victimized by the rhetoric of everyday life, and can develop o u r o w n arguments w i t h clarity a n d confidence. Academic - Philosophy 152 This course w i l l provide students w i t h an introduction to m o d e r n formal logic, and then utilize that skill to explore such topics as the nature and testing of scientific theories i n both the natural and social sciences, the difference between causal relations and correlations, and rational decision m a k i n g . Attention w i l l be g i v e n to both the problem-solving and philosophical aspects of scientific reasoning. There are no prerequisites, but the course is a natural continuation of Philosophy 110, and w i l l appeal especially to students w h o have an interest i n either the natural or social sciences. Philosophy 140 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Philosophy and Law: Introduction ta Canadian Law Course Descriptions Philosophy 101 (3) Introductory Philosophy: Ethics (4,0,0) A general introduction to the fundamental principles of jurisprudence and to the basic legal institutions of Canada. In addition to addressing such philosophical questions as, "What is a law?", "Is it the case that l a w is what legislatures say it is, or what courts say it is?", and " H o w do y o u tell whether a l a w is good or bad?", the course also examines the history and theory of C a n a d i a n l a w (including the development of the C a n a d i a n Constitution), the system of C a n a d i a n courts, and the roles of members of the legal profession. A s w e l l , consideration is g i v e n to the nature of legal reasoning, the doctrine of precedent, and principles of statutory interpretation, and an introduction is p r o v i d e d to the fields of contract, torts, administrative and family l a w , as w e l l as to the process of law reform. Philosophy 141 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Philosophy and Law: Introduction to the Criminal Justice System A n introduction to an analysis of theories of punishment and rehabilitation through an examination of the operational practices of the C a n a d i a n criminal justice system. In the course of studying the structure and operations of the criminal justice system i n its various stages from the moment of initial police involvement to the correctional disposition of convicted offenders, the course focuses on both theoretical and practical decision m a k i n g . Theoretical concerns include: i n d i v i d u a l c i v i l liberties i n relation to police procedures, notions of evidence, sentencing theory, and current correctional strategies. The above t w o courses are modelled o n SFU's C r i m i n o l ogy 131/135 and are intended for both philosophy students and those interested i n p u r s u i n g further studies i n the field of criminology. Philosophy 200 (3) Political Philosophy (4,0,0) (F) This course provides an analysis of the rationale for political institutions and action. Some of the questions considered: Are we really obliged to obey the law? Can the law be justifiably represented as authoritative, or is the real foundation of law in the policeman's holster? Does the state have good reason for involving itself in compulsory programs of education? This is not a study in the history of political thought and every effort is made to view problems from a contemporary perspective. Philosophy 201 (3) Political Philosophy (4,0,0) (S) This course examines the values and assumptions behind the ideologies of liberalism, communism, meritocracy, conservatism, democratic socialism and anarchism. Topics include liberty and equality, power and authority, private rights and the public good, sovereignty, democracy and justice. Philosophy 207 Business Ethics (3) (4,0,0) This course is an introduction to contemporary philosophical thinking on ethical issues in business. It covers such topics as the power of multinational corporations, bribery and extortion in international business, the ethics of hiring practices, advertising and behaviour control, the conflict between employee loyalty and moral independence, and the responsibilities of corporations and business professionals. The course will also introduce students to a number of classical ethical theories and theories of economic justice. Philosophy 208 (3) Environmental Ethics (4,0,0) This course deals with contemporary ethical issues arising from the relationship between human beings and their natural surroundings. Topics include general questions about rights and moral standing (e.g. do trees, animals and future generations have moral claims on us?), issues concerning the preservation of the wilderness, the depletion of natural resources, and the global effects of pollution, as well as problems affecting the formation of social policy. Open to anyone in first or second year. No prerequisites. Philosophy 209 Biomedical Ethics (3) (4,0,0) This course will focus on ethical issues that arise in the health sciences, especially in medicine, but also in biology, psychology and other professions. Among the topics to be considered are abortion and reproductive technology; euthanasia; paternalism and autonomy; resource allocation; involuntary hospitalization and behaviour control. All moral problems will be examined from both an applied and theoretical point of view. Philosophy 210 (3) Metaphysics and Epistemology I (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: At least one Philosophy course or permission of the instructor. A n introduction to some of the traditional problems of metaphysics and epistemology. Some of the questions considered are: Does God exist? What is the relationship between faith and reason? Does free will exist? Is sense perception a reliable source of knowledge? What is the nature of causality? Is materialism true? What is the nature of mind? What is the relationship between mind and body? What is the scientific method? While this is not a course in the history of Philosophy, it will cover many of the classical attempts to answer these questions. Philosophy 211 (3) Metaphysics and Epistemology II Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) Philosophy 210 or permission of instructor A continuation of Philosophy 210. Philosophy 220 (3) Philosophy in Literature (4,0,0) A n examination of the lively relationship between Philosophy and Literature. Philosophical theories will be approached and discussed via literary work which either embodies the theories or grounds them in human experience. Textual sources will range from the classical Greek plays to last month's best seller. Philosophy 221 (3) Existentialism in Literature (4,0,0) This course is, in spirit, a continuation of Philosophy 220, but it is centred on the Philosophy of Existentialism in literature. There will be an introductory set of lectures on Existentialism as a philosophy. Textual sources will range from Dostoyevsky's "Notes from the Underground" to Sartre's "Nausea." Philosophy 222 (3) Philosophy of Culture (Aesthetics) (4,0,0) A n introduction to philosophical analysis of cultural works. The course will provide an exploration of aesthetic theory, examining both traditional works of art as well as contemporary cultural productions in a variety of media. One of the objectives of the course is to make sense of what a society is "saying" through its popular culture. Academic - Philosophy ~153 Physics Philosophy 240 (3) Philosophy and Gender Relations (4,0,0) Focused on a w i d e range of philosophical reading, this course w i l l focus on questions such as: What is the good life and its relation to intimacy and family? W h a t is the good person? A r e there different models for different genders? What constitutes a good relationship? H o w important are mutuality, respect, affection, sex, and interdependence to such a relationship? W h a t counts as equality/equity? H o w s h o u l d the answers to such questions influence our v i e w s o n such social issues as affirmative action, prostitution a n d pornography? The impact of "Women's Liberation" and the "Men's Movement" w i l l be discussed, as w i l l varying suggestions for overcoming the "gender gap". This course should be of interest to men a n d w o m e n equally; indeed, it is assumed that the quality of class discussion w i l l be a function of the degree to w h i c h the perspectives of both genders are well represented. Instructional Faculty D . B R A K E , B.Sc. (Hons.) (Memorial), M.Sc. (SFU) M . F R E E M A N , B.Sc. (Hons.) (UBC), M.Sc. (Cal. Tech.), Ph.D. (UBC) S. G R E E N S P O O N , B.Sc. (Hons.) (McGill), M.Sc., P h . D . (Waterloo), C o n v e n o r of Physics F. P A R V A Z , B.Sc. (Tehran), M . S . D i p . (San Diego State) Laboratory Supervisors and Technician D . C I A R N I E L L O , B.Sc. ( U B C ) , Laboratory Supervisor, Technician V . M O E N , B.Sc. (SFU), Laboratory Supervisor B. S I M S O N , B.Sc. (SFU), Laboratory Supervisor General Information A l l first year physics courses except Physics 116 include a weekly two hour laboratory period. The cost of the labs is included i n the course tuition fee except for lab manuals. University Transfer Credit A l l physics courses at C a p i l a n o carry transfer credit. For details please refer to the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or C a p i l a n o College Transfer G u i d e available at the A d v i s i n g Centre or College reception. Students w i t h Physics 12 p l a n n i n g to transfer to U . B . C . should take Physics 114 or Physics 114 and 115, depending o n their plans. Consult the U . B . C . calendar for specific program requirements. Physics FIRST Y E A R Physics 114/115 or 110/111 or 108/111 Chemistry 110/111 or 108/109 M a t h 110/111 English (six credits) Non-science Elective or Geology, Biology or C o m p u t i n g Science (six credits) SECOND YEAR Physics 200/201,210/211,218/222 M a t h 200,230,231,235 Elective (six credits) Students interested i n honours physics should consult physics instructors. Course Descriptions Physics 104 (3) Principles of Physics (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: N o physics prerequisite. M a t h 12 or B M T H 046 or M a t h 103 or M a t h 105 is required. Physics 104 is accepted at BCIT as equivalent to Physics 12. Academic • Philosophy/Physics 154 This course serves as a n introduction to physics for students w i t h little or no background i n the subject. It is intended for students not taking further studies i n science. Topics include mechanics, energy, ray optics and heat. T h i s course is not offered every year. Physics 108 (4.5) Basic Physics (6,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: M a t h 12 or B M T H 046 or M a t h 103 or M a t h 105. M a t h 110 is a pre-or corequisite. The course covers the material of Physics 110, together w i t h those topics from high school physics needed b y a student w i t h no previous background in physics. A student passing this course should be able to enter Physics 111 i n the Spring. Physics 110 (3) General Physics I (4,2,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: Physics 12 or Physics 11 or B P H Y 042 or Physics 104; a n d M a t h 110 is a pre- or corequisite. A survey of mechanics covering vectors, statics, kinematics, dynamics, energy, momentum, rotation, gravitation, vibration, and special relativity. Physics 111 (3) General Physics II (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " i n either Physics 110 or 108 or 114; and M a t h 110. M a t h 111 is a p r e - o r corequisite. A n y student w h o has attempted the course w i t h i n the last year w i l l not be a l l o w e d to register without the instructor's permission. Electricity and magnetism, waves, physical optics, sound, and atomic and nuclear physics. Physics 114 (3) Fundamental Physics I (4,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: Physics 12 or B P H Y 042 or Physics 104; M a t h 110 is a pre- or corequisite. A survey of mechanics covering vectors, kinematics, dynamics, energy, momentum, rotation, gravitation, vibration, waves and special relativity. This course, together w i t h Physics 115, is particularly suitable for students going into the physical sciences or engineering. Physics 115 (3) (4,2,0) (S) Fundamental Physics II Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " i n Physics 114 or at least a " B " in Physics 108 or 110. M a t h 111 is a pre- or corequisite. Note: Physics 114/115 are at a more advanced level than Physics 108/110/111, and are particularly suitable for students going into the physical sciences or engineering. Physics 116 (3) Fundamental Physics III (4,0,0) (S) Note: This course is intended for Engineering Program students transferring to U B C . Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " i n Physics 114, or w i t h permission of instructor, Physics 108 o r 110; M a t h 111 and Physics 115 are corequisites. Statics of particles, equilibrium of rigid bodies, rigid b o d y statics and internal forces. Extension of principles from Physics 114 and application to practical problems. Thermometry, thermal properties of matter, heat. Geometrical optics. The Physics Department offers a full second-year university transfer program in physics. Students planning to continue in a physics program at university may wish to consult with a physics instructor. Physics 200 (3) Thermal Physics and Waves (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " i n either Physics 111 or 115; and M a t h 111. M a t h 230 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. Temperature, heat, the zeroth, first, second and third laws of thermodynamics, kinetic theory, and waves. This course, together w i t h Physics 201, 210 and 211, is required for students majoring i n physics and recommended for students majoring i n chemistry. Physics 201 (3) Electricity and Magnetism (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: A t least a " C -" i n Physics 200; M a t h 230. M a t h 231 is a pre- or corequisite. M a t h 235 is a recommended corequisite. Physics 211 must be taken concurrently. The study of electric and magnetic fields; dc and ac circuits; L R , R C , L R C circuits; resonance; Maxwell's Equations, Fourier A n a l y s i s and electromagnetic waves. Physics 210 (1) Physics Laboratory I (0,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: A s for Physics 218 w h i c h must be taken concurrently. A weekly three hour lab i n mathematical methods, thermodynamics, electrical measurements and mechanics. Electricity and magnetism, A C circuits, physical optics, sound, and atomic and nuclear physics. Academic - Physics "l55 Political Studies Physics 211 (1) Physics Laboratory II (0,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: A s for Physics 201, w h i c h must be taken concurrently. A weekly three hour lab i n electricity and magnetism, electronics and mechanics. Physics 218 (3) Methods of Measurement and Analysis (4,0,0) (F) (4,0,0) (S) Mechanics Prerequisite: A t least a C - i n Physics 218; and M a t h 200, 230. M a t h 235 is a recommended corequisite. N e w t o n i a n mechanics of particles and rigid bodies. Topics include rocket propulsion, collisions, central forces, rotating frames of reference, and rotation of rigid bodies. A l l Political Studies courses at C a p i l a n o are transferable to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Use of computer software to solve numerical problems i n Physics, including simulations. Applications include drag forces and the driven, d a m p e d oscillator. (3) E . M . L A V A L L E , B . C o m m . , L L . B . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Duke) P. M I E R , B . A . (SFU), M . A . (Toronto) C . S Y L V E S T E R , B . A . (Gonzaga), M . A . (Notre Dame) D . W I N C H E S T E R , B . A . (Concordia), M . A . (UBC) University Transfer Credit Prerequisite: A t least a C - i n either Physics 111 or 115; and M a t h 111. M a t h 200 and 230 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. Physics 210 must be taken concurrently. Physics 222 Instructional Faculty Course Descriptions Political Studies 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) An Introduction to Western Political Thought - Plato to Machiavelli The purpose of the course is to introduce students to the tradition of Western political i n q u i r y from the Ancient Greeks to the emergence of the N a t i o n State. Elements w i t h i n this tradition w i l l be approached from an historical and philosophical perspective. Particular emphasis w i l l be placed u p o n the critical reading of original texts and background material w i l l be presented i n lectures and additional reading. Major topics include ancient and medieval political thought, and the rise of the national state. Political Studies 101 (3) Contemporary Ideologies (4,0,0) (F,S) A n introduction to the u n d e r l y i n g ideas and historical development of the major ideologies of the m o d e r n era. The course includes reading and discussion of core historical w o r k s w h i c h shaped the progress of Liberalism, Conservatism, Anarchism, Social Democracy, Fascism and M a r x i s m . It also includes critical evaluations of subideologies such as Feminism, Environmentalism, Racism and Nationalism. Political Studies 102 (3) Comparative Government (4,0,0) (F,S) W h e n Aristotle set out to understand the hows and w h y s of government he started b y collecting the constitutions of some 150 political systems. Students i n Political Studies 102 w i l l collect cases as w e l l , although the number of systems studied w i l l be limited to a handful of states at most, and the elements of government explored w i l l go far beyond merely the constitutions of those countries. B y analysing i n some detail the formal and informal political structures of these systems, it is hoped students w i l l gain a critical understanding of the range of political systems and political cultures existing w o r l d wide, as w e l l as a greater appreciation for their o w n . Academic - Physics/Political Studies 156 Political Studies 103 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Introduction to Politics and Government Political Studies 203 (3) International Organizations This survey course w i l l introduce students to the five major subfields of Political Studies—Political Theory, Comparative Politics, International Relations, Public Policy, and C a n a d i a n Government—and provide students w i t h the fundamental concepts for political analysis and debate. Political Studies majors w i l l find here a firm foundation i n the concepts, methods, approaches and issues discussed i n other courses i n the discipline. N o n majors w i l l find the course provides them w i t h the tools for analyzing and understanding the political events w h i c h shape our w o r l d . Since the collapse of the C o l d W a r , International Organizations i n general and the U n i t e d Nations i n particular appear to be p l a y i n g increasingly important roles on the w o r l d stage. But are they really? B y using the tools of both the historical and theoretical perspectives, this course attempts to answer this question b y examining the g r o w t h of International Organizations - governmental and non-govemmental, regional and global - since the emergence of the Concert of Europe i n 1815, p a y i n g particular attention to the League of Nations, The United Nations, and the European C o m m u n i t y . (This course is a pre-requisite for students planning to continue s t u d y i n g Political Studies at SFU) Political Studies 104 Canadian Government (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) This course introduces students to the structures and processes of C a n a d i a n government and politics. Topics to be explored w i l l include the constitution, federalism, the status of Quebec, political culture and an examination of the role of the P M O , the bureaucracy, political parties and their impact on the quality of Canada's parliamentary democracy. Political Studies 201 (3) International Relations (4,0,0) (F,S) In order to p r o v i d e students w i t h the background to understand the nature of international relations, this course w i l l examine both the events that have been occurring o n the w o r l d stage, as well as the possible explanations for those events. T o that end, the course w i l l focus o n such topics as underdevelopment, local and global wars, the environmental crisis, third w o r l d debt, militarism, disarmament, and regional conflict. Students w i l l also critique theories offered to explain these events. Political Studies 202 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Government and Politics of British Columbia This course w i l l provide an understanding of the political institutions, dynamics, a n d socio-economic processes of the provincial, regional, and m u n i c i p a l governments i n B . C . Specifically, it is intended to familiarize students w i t h the activities of political parties and government institutions i n B . C . It is designed to develop students' skills i n critically analyzing the B.C. political process from several methodological perspectives w i t h i n the discipline of political studies. Political Studies 206 (3) Scope and Methods of Political Analysis (4,0,0) (F.S) (4,0,0) (F) This course introduces the student to the variety of approaches and tools available to those s t u d y i n g politics. Students w i l l become familiar w i t h the nature of and debates inherent to contemporary political studies, as w e l l as the strengths a n d weaknesses of the various methods employed by students of politics. B y d e v e l o p i n g their o w n research project, students w i l l struggle first-hand w i t h the issues central to all types of social science research: selecting from alternative models of explanation, attempting to isolate variables, and dealing w i t h questions of cause and effect to name but a few. Students may have the opportunity to develop and w o r k o n a proto-type political studies journal as w e l l . Political Studies 207 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Selected Issues in Contemporary Social and Political Theory Prerequisites: Political Studies 101. This course transfers as a 300 level course at S F U . This course w i l l examine some of the major contributions to social and political thought beginning w i t h the rise of the Welfare State to issues associated w i t h contemporary societies. Topics w i l l include a discussion of the role of the state, the contributions of The Frankfurt School, NeoM a r x i s m , Cultural Theory, the current interest i n Democratic Theory, the role and place of "new" social movements i n contemporary society, the meaning of liberty, the renewal of nationalism; and h o w particular theorists have responded to these developments, (for example, Keynes, Arendt, Gramsci, Althusser, Poulantzas, Bahro, Foucault, Habermas, Offe, Friedman, Marcuse, Williams, Bauman, Keane, H e l d a n d Melucci). Academic - Political Studies 157 Psychology Psychology 201 Instructional Faculty University Transfer Credit A l l Psychology courses at Capilano transfer to SFU, UBC, and UVic. Course Description (4,0,0) (F,S) A course designed to introduce the beginning psychology student to some of the major concepts and approaches necessary to an understanding of human behaviour from a psychological perspective. Learning, development, and other selected issues are included. Psychology 101 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Theories of Behaviour Prerequisite: Psychology 100 A course for those students who desire a complete survey of the basic areas of Psychology (when combined with Psychology 100), before proceeding to an in-depth study of particular areas. Course content will cover research methodology and the remainder of introductory topics not addressed in Psychology 100. Psychology 200 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Group Dynamics P. AVERY, B.A. (York), M.Ed. (Toronto) E. BOYLE, B.A. (U. Chicago) M.A., Ph.D. (UBC) E. ECCLES, B.A. (Hons.), M.A. (UBC) R. H A W R Y L K O , B.A. (Hunter), M.A. (SFU) P. K A R N , B.A. (Carleton), M.A., Ph. D. (York) M . MACNEILL, B.A. (Alta.), M.A. (Manitoba), Ph.D. (Calgary) S. MOE, B.A., M.A. (Mexico) L. MOREY, B.A., M.A. (UBC) Ph.D. (U. of Sussex) R. SNOW, B.A. (Hons.) M.A., Ph.D. (SFU) J. WATERS, B.A. M.A. (SFU), Ph.D. (SFU) C. ZASKOW, B.A. (UBC), M.A. (SFU), Ph.D. (S.F.U.) Psychology 100 (3) Introduction to Psychology (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 and 101 A study of the behaviour of people in family and friendship groups. This course provides an intellectual and experiential approach to small group theory and allows the student to practice constructive interpersonal skills in a supportive, small group setting. Psychology 203 (3) History of Psychology (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Psychology 100; Psychology 101 recommended. This course will examine the development of psychological thought to gain a critical understanding of contemporary psychology. Issues will range from the mind-body problem, and the nature of science, to an analysis of historical and contemporary schools in psychology. Psychology 204 (3) Developmental Psychology (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Psychology 100; Psychology 101 recommended. A study of the child's development from infancy to adolescence, including the development of social behaviour, personality, language and cognitive processes. Students will be encouraged to do research projects and observations. Psychology 205 (3) The Psychology of Aging (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 and 101 A course dealing with the psychological development of the individual from early adulthood to death, with emphasis on intellectual and personality changes, and the social context of aging. As well as being exposed to basic research in the area, students will be encouraged to develop an empathic understanding of the aging process through such means as community projects. Social Psychology Prerequisite: Psychology 100; Psychology 101 is recommended. A study of the dynamics and effects of social influences on individual human behaviour. The course looks at such topics as attitudes and attitude changes, social beliefs, roles, conformity, group processes, prejudice, interpersonal attraction and psychological effects of the physical environment. Academic - Psychology 158 Psychology 206 (3) Adolescent Psychology (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 and 101 Examines the research findings and theories pertaining to the development and behaviour of adolescents. Topics covered will include biological and sexual maturation, personality, intelligence, motivation and social issues such as delinquency and family relationships. Psychology 212 (3) Research Methods in Psychology (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 and 101 A course for students w h o intend to major i n one of the social sciences; psychology majors should take this course and its sequel, Psychology 213. This course w i l l introduce the student to current research methods i n major areas of psychology. Students should understand the principles of research methodology, and be able to evaluate, design and conduct research i n psychology. Psychology 213 (3) Statistical Methods in Psychology (4,0,0) (S) solving, creativity and artificial intelligence w i l l be examined, as well as experiments i n social cognition and cognition across the lifespan. Women's Studies 110 (3) Women and Psychology (4,0,0) A psychological examination of the construction of gender-roles, their development i n childhood and maintenance i n adulthood. The course w i l l examine current research i n biology, socialization, personality and mental health and w i l l include issues of current interest such as sexuality, aging, violence against w o m e n , gender relations and the workplace. Prerequisite: M a t h 12 or equivalent, Psychology 100 and 212. A continuation of Psychology 212 for psychology majors. This course deals w i t h descriptive and inferential statistics as applied i n psychology. These w i l l be considered as they are used i n psychological research. Psychology 220 (3) Theory of Personality (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Psychology 100; Psychology 101 recommended. A study of the various theories of personality from psychoanalytic theory to learning theory. Included w i l l be the ideas of Freud, Rogers, M a s l o w and others. Concepts to be considered w i l l include the development of personality, and the structure and dynamics of personality. The course w i l l include consideration of theoretical problems, and students w i l l become familiar w i t h empirical research i n these areas. Psychology 222 (3) Abnormal Psychology (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 a n d 101. A study of the various models and perspectives for v i e w i n g patterns and treatment of abnormal behaviour. Included w i l l be an examination of the research as to h o w the medical model, behaviouristic school, humanistic school, psychoanalytic school, cognitive school and interpersonal school view normal and abnormal behaviour. This course w i l l also focus on the historical and contemporary approaches to treatment. Psychology 230 (3) Cognitive Psychology (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Psychology 100; Psychology 101 recommended. This course w i l l address many of the issues relating to the thinking processes. Research into memory, problem Academic - Psychology 159 Sociology Both Sociology 100 and 101 are required for students intending to major in Sociology at S F U or U B C . Instructional Faculty G . B A I L E Y , B. Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Oregon) N . G A Y L E , B . A . (York), M . A . (Western), Ph.D. (UBC) C . H A T H A W A Y , B . A . (S.U.N.Y.), M . A . (Wash U . , M o . ) R. I S O L A , B.A., M . A . (SFU) A . R O J A S , M . A . , Ph.D. (York) M . SPEIER, B . A . (New York), M . A . , Ph.D. (Berkeley) General Information A l l courses i n Sociology are geared to help the student comprehend personal and global events i n a relevant and meaningful way. Sociology should thus help the student i n h i s / h e r endeavour to cope w i t h our increasingly complex society. A major i n Sociology leads to work i n the following areas: social work, teaching, probation work, criminology, industrial Sociology, communications, media, government research and related areas. University Transfer Credit A l l Sociology courses at C a p i l a n o transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . A l l 200 level courses w i l l provide the S i m o n Fraser transfer student w i t h assigned credit toward second-year courses. The U B C transfer student w i l l be provided w i t h unassigned credit towards a major. Course Descriptions Sociology 100 (3) Social Structures (4,0,0)(F,S) The course systematically covers major topics and issues of concern to anyone w h o wishes to begin to understand and come to terms with, the modern w o r l d i n a personally and sociologically relevant way. The basic theme of the course is that we are, to a greater extent than generally imagined, produced, structured and run by the "social machine". This "social machine" comprises institutions such as the family, religion, class system, mass media, education as well as rules, customs, laws, etc. This course looks at h o w we are influenced by this "machine" and i n turn h o w we react to that influence. Both Sociology 100 and 101 are required for students intending to major i n Sociology at S F U or U B C . Sociology 101 (3) Concepts of Theories of Society (4,0,0) (F,S) W i t h current social conditions i n m i n d , this course analyses the general development of sociological thought in the 19th and 20th centuries. W e w i l l look at three major approaches to understanding society (structural functionalism, conflict theory and symbolic interactionism) and employ these approaches to analyse events of current interest. Academic - Sociology 160 Sociology 200 (3) Canadian Society (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Sociology 100 or 101, or permission of the instructor. A n introduction to the study of C a n a d i a n society and culture, i n c l u d i n g an analysis of the major C a n a d i a n institutions studied on a national basis, w i t h special emphasis on the dynamics of change i n a multicultural, complex society. Sociology 201 (3) British Columbia Society (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Sociology 100 or 101, or permission of the instructor. A continued sociological approach to the dynamics of Canadian society w i t h special emphasis on British C o l u m b i a . Close attention w i l l be given to social movements and economics, historical and cultural developments w h i c h have shaped British C o l u m b i a from a frontier into a modern industrial society. Sociology 210 (3) Current Social Issues (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Sociology 100 or 101, or permission of the instructor. A study of social concerns and cultural problems c o m m o n to current conditions i n the 20th century i n our society and i n global perspectives. Classical sociological concepts w i l l be used to examine current social issues i n a global framework of political, economic, and cultural analysis, such as mass violence, the economics of the arms race, the sociology of war and peace, social inequality, etc. Current issues are placed i n the context of the student's daily w o r l d , as it is happening n o w — this should develop the student's sociological imagination. This course can be taken by itself, or as a complement to Sociology of the Third World. Sociology 211 (3) Sociology of the Third World (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Sociology 100 or 101, or permission of the instructor. A study of the major theories of development and under development, social and cultural responses to under development, and the inter-relationship of social institutions i n and between the "developed" and "under developed" societies. This course w i l l p r o v i d e students w i t h an opportunity to better understand the social, economic and political causes and effects of under Spanish development. Both sociological and "non-sociological" literature on the meaning and effects of "under development" w i l l be considered. This course may be taken b y itself or as a complement to Sociology 210, Current Social Issues. Instructional Faculty C. F U R S T E N W A L D , B . A . ( U . N . A . M . Mexico), M . B . A . (City Univ., Seattle) Instructional Associate Sociology 222 (3) Sociology of the Arts (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Sociology 100 or 101, or permission of the instructor. A sociological study of art and artists i n western and nonwestern societies. The course w i l l relate the various art forms (painting, music, literature) to the social context i n w h i c h they exist and to their social production; hence it w i l l develop an understanding of the interrelationships between ideas (aesthetic codes), social institutions, cultural politics and political economy. This course is particularly recommended as a complement to Sociology 101 or 223. Sociology 223 (3) Media and Society (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Sociology 100 or 101, or permission of the instructor. A n intensive study of the relationship between a society's communication systems as media and its technological, economic and political base, its ideology, its behaviour patterns and its cultural life. This w i l l encompass current forms of television, radio, magazines, all forms of advertisement, news production and the movies. This course is particularly recommended as a complement to Sociology 222 or 100. J. G A C I N A , B . A . (SFU), P.D.P. (SFU) K . M A T T S O N , B . A . (SFU), Licenciatura (Barcelona) E. U N D E R H I L L , B . A . , B.Ed. (UBV), M . A . (U. of Western Ontario) General Information Spanish 100/101 courses include 5-3/4 hours of instruction per week, made u p of three hours of lecture, one hour of Hispanic culture studies; 3 / 4 hours of laboratory practice and one hour of conversational practice. Spanish 200/201 courses include six hours of instruction per week, made u p of four hours of lecture and two hours of conversational practice. N a t i v e speakers of Spanish are not allowed i n first year courses. If they w i s h to take second year courses i n Spanish, they must consult w i t h the Spanish instructor first. University rules governing such students differ w i t h i n departments, but the Language Department has correspondence dealing w i t h matters relevant to credit transfer and point of entry. In order to a v o i d any m i s u n derstandings, such students are invited to discuss these problems w i t h the Department prior to enrollment. Students w i t h a competence i n the language beyond the level of the course i n w h i c h they are registered w i l l be required to w i t h d r a w . Students w h o are not sure of their language level should contact an instructor. University Transfer Credit A l l Spanish courses at C a p i l a n o transfer to S F U , U B C and UVic. S F U : Students w h o w i s h to proceed to S F U and to pursue further courses i n Spanish are reminded of the present equivalency standards. Elective credit w i l l be g i v e n at S F U for all Capilano College Spanish courses. Exemption from and placement i n higher courses are determined b y the results of a placement test or other assessment procedure. A s a result of the placement test, area credit may be granted w h i c h w o u l d count toward a major i n Spanish. Courses w h i c h do not qualify toward a major w i l l be awarded elective credit only. U B C : A t U B C , present equivalent standards equate Spanish 100 and 101 w i t h Spanish 100; Spanish 200 and 201 w i t h Spanish 200. The student w h o plans to major i n Spanish may enter U B C ' s Spanish w h e n the student completes the Capilano courses. Academic - Sociology/Spanish 161 Thai Course Descriptions Spanish 100 (3) First Year Spanish I Instructional Faculty (4,1.75,0) (F) This is a beginners' course w h i c h offers a comprehensive introduction to the Spanish language. Emphasis is placed on grammar and the development of the students' speaking, understanding and writing skills. Spanish 101 (3) First Year Spanish II (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: Spanish 100, G r a d e 10 Spanish completed, or permission from instructor. A continuation of the w o r k of Spanish 100, this course should be taken, whenever possible, i n the term following Spanish 100. Recommended also for those w h o are considering taking Spanish 200 at a later date and need review work. Spanish 200 (3) Second Year Spanish I (4,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: Spanish 100/101, Grade 12 Spanish completed w i t h a m i n i m u m of a " C " grade, or permission of instructor. A review of Spanish grammar w i t h special emphasis on problematic areas normally encountered by students of the language. The reading, writing and oral fluency of the student w i l l be improved through translations, compositions and a high degree of conversation. A l s o , the student w i l l be introduced to H i s p a n i c Literature. Classes w i l l be conducted i n the Spanish language only. Spanish 201 (3) Second Year Spanish II (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: Spanish 200 w i t h a m i n i m u m of a " C " grade, or permission from the instructor. A continuation of the w o r k of Spanish 200. This course should be taken, wherever possible, i n the term following Spanish 200. Academic - Spanish/Thai 162 J. P L A C Z E K , B . A . (Windsor), M . A . Linguistics ( U B C ) , Ph.D. South East A s i a n Studies (UBC) P. P L A C Z E K , Language Associate, B . A . (Thammasat University) Bangkok Students w i t h a competence i n the language beyond the level of the course i n w h i c h they are registered w i l l be required to w i t h d r a w . Students w h o are not sure of their language level should contact an instructor. Course Descriptions Thai 100 (3) (4,2,0) (F) This course provides instruction and practice both i n beginning language and i n the cultural background w h i c h is so necessary to place the examples into meaningful contexts. The international phonetic alphabet is used to a v o i d confusion of sounds. The basic vocabulary and sentence structures are covered, and social routines and c o m m o n idioms are stressed as well. Students have time to practice a l l structures introduced, and are encouraged to initiate their o w n conversations. A t the end of the course students have better than survivallevel fluency, and use only Thai for basic classroom routines. They are ready to learn to write. Thai 101 (3) (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: Thai 100 or equivalent This course reviews the basic material of Thai 100, and introduces the script. Students learn h o w to write the words they already k n o w . M o r e complex structures are introduced, along w i t h more idioms, c o m m o n expressions, and exceptions to basic rules. Classes are conducted almost all i n Thai, except for occasional detailed historical or technical explanations. A t the end of the course students k n o w h o w to respond to typical situations i n Thai and to elicit basic everyday information from Thais. They can read simple Thai passages and the basic road signs and are at a level of reading and writing equivalent to Thai grade four students. Instructional Faculty D . M O O R E , B . F . A . (UVic.) B. M U R D O C H , B.F.A. ( U V i c ) , M . F . A . (UBC) T. F O R R E S T , B.F.A. (B.C. O p e n University) S. A T K I N S , B . A . (SFU) D . P R I C E , B . A . (SFU) M . F . A . (UBC) General Information The Theatre Program runs courses i n the Fall and S p r i n g terms through the College's A c a d e m i c Division. These are available to both full-time and part-time students w h o w i s h the opportunity to continue their interest i n Theatre at a post-secondary level. The a i m of the program is to provide a professional approach to Theatre through i n class instruction and performance experience, both on campus and on tour. Auditions are not required for entry to Theatre 100 or 101. Theatre 200 and 201 courses require an audition or instructor's permission for entry or to waive a prerequisite. Check with the department for audition dates. This program prepares students w h o are professionally inclined for specialized training at other Colleges, U n i v e r sities and Theatre schools, w h i l e p r o v i d i n g academic transfer credit to students w i t h a casual interest i n Theatre. A l s o , for those w h o w i s h to pursue theatre for the sheer joy of it, these courses p r o v i d e an excellent introduction to the discipline and develop skills w h i c h are easily utilized i n non-theatre situations. Theatre 101 Acting II (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) 101 is a continuation of Theatre 100, exploring performance improvisation and non-scripted theatre, a workshop course focusing on improvisation as an essential tool i n developing the actor's imaginative resources and p r o v i d ing the confidence necessary to any form of "thinking o n one's feet." Improvisation w i l l be taught as a performance skill i n its o w n right through the use of theatre games such as seen at Theatre Sports, but it w i l l also be explored as a means to develop and amplify scripted works. Theatre 105 Bodywork I (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Bodywork is a studio course designed for students both experienced and inexperienced w i t h movement techniques. These workshop classes focus on body awareness and alignment, strength, flexibility, and coordination. Class work w i l l develop personal confidence, coordination, imagination, and discipline. Ensemble work w i l l emphasize collaboration, support and communication skills essential for group dynamics. Studio presentations w i l l form a component of the term's w o r k . Theatre 107 (3) Vocal Communication (4,0,0) (F,S) University Transfer Credit This is a workshop course for students interested i n developing the voice and oral presentation. The course deals with talking: developing a clear, pleasant, animated and well-projected voice. Theatre courses at Capilano have transfer credit or elective credit at S F U , U B C and U V i c Please consult Transfer G u i d e and instructor for the most recent transfer information. Improved vocal technique is linked to good vocal c o m m u nication w i t h an emphasis on speaking before groups. Skill and confidence is built through presentation of vocal exercises using poetry and drama. Course Descriptions Theatre 100 Acting I (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) This is a w o r k s h o p course i n the art of the actor, focusing on voice, movement, and scene w o r k to develop the studenf s awareness of the actor's resources and h i s / h e r o w n strengths and weaknesses as a performer. In addition to readings and a written analysis of a professional production, the student w i l l rehearse and perform a monologue and a short scene, a p p l y i n g approaches and techniques taught i n class to the final presentation of these scenes for an invited audience. V i d e o and audio tapings of student work w i l l be used to augment i n d i v i d u a l comment and coaching p r o v i d e d by the instructor. T w o or three professionals w i l l give guest workshops and introduce the student to specific applications of using the voice i n the w o r k i n g w o r l d . Potential guest lecturers: actors, radio and television announcers, public speakers, singers, and others. Theatre 120 (3) The Elements of Theatre I (4,0,0) (F) The Elements of Theatre I looks at the evolution of theatrical performance from its ritualistic beginnings to the spectacular melodramas of the 19th Century. Lectures and play readings w i l l be augmented w i t h slide and video presentations of classic works from the great ages of Theatre and Drama. The Elements of Theatre I also provides background insights into the historical contributions of the Actor, Academic - Theatre 163 Playwright and Theatre Critic. The work of these collaborators is studied i n the context of performances w h i c h the class w i l l attend and discuss, writing papers and prepari n g presentations on the w o r k of the playwright and the director, with the student's critical insights being shared in class. The shows attended w i l l be chosen from the seasons of companies performing in Vancouver. Theatre 121 (3) The Elements of Theatre II (4,0,0) (S) Theatre 121 is an academic look at the modern theatre the plays, methods of presentation and major artists that have shaped the w a y w e v i e w ourselves through the m e d i u m of live performance. Slides and video tape presentations as well as play attendance w i l l supplement lectures and discussion as w e examine the development of Western Theatre Art. Special emphasis w i l l be placed o n the work of the Director and Scenic Artist from the turn of the century — the various reactions to Realism including the Epic Theatre of Bertolt Brecht, the eclectic experiments of Peter Brook and the actor-centred w o r k of Jerzy Grotowski — to our present Post-Modernist mix. There are no prerequisites for this course, though it is a continuation of the material covered i n Theatre 120. Theatre 150 (3) Introduction to Production and Design I (4,0,0) (F) This is an intermediate introduction to the basic elements of theatrical production and design. It gives a practical look at m o d e m theatrical design of sets, lighting, costume, properties, and promotional materials. It examines the roles of the people involved i n producing a show ~ designers, publicist, lighting and sound technicians, stage manager, and construction crews — w i t h students having the opportunity to try out one or more of these roles i n production situations. U s i n g a lecture and w o r k s h o p format, the student is familiarized with the theory and practice of technical theatre, shop organization, and the use of hand and power tools, basic construction, electricity and lighting, publicity, and backstage organization. Students w i l l build, tech, and crew final presentations of first and second year acting courses. Theatre 151 (3) Introduction to Production and Design II (4,0,0) (S) This is a continuation of Theatre 150. Students w i l l participate i n the design and construction of the spring presentation and become the production team responsible for the planning and execution of the design concept through all its phases — from pre-production meetings through shop drawings and construction to opening night and beyond. The focus of the course shifts to specific production and design skills required to mount and Academic - Theatre 164 publicize the show chosen. Assignments w i l l vary depending on the student's aptitude, desire and time commitment, as department standards a i m at professionally produced and run productions for a p a y i n g public audience. Theatre 200 (3) Script and Stage (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: Theatre 100 or 101, or by audition This acting course focuses o n scripted material and the means that the actor uses to bring about a full rendering of the work chosen. Students are introduced to the discipline of acting within the context of production, so such topics as w o r k i n g w i t h a director, w o r k i n g w i t h i n a rehearsal schedule, using props, set and costumes are approached i n a practical studio workshop format. This course is project-oriented, and students w i l l have the opportunity to perform w o r k i n a short r u n before a public audience. Theatre 201 (3) Rehearsal and Performance (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Theatre 200, or by permission of instructor This course takes the lessons learned i n Theatre 200 and applies them on a larger scale. This term's topic is: What is the job of the actor i n the context of a fully produced play? A professionally mounted performance marketed to the community is the format for this course. Students w i l l learn the process of rehearsal from the actor's perspective from casting through to production post mortem. A u d i t i o n i n g and the preparation of finished audition pieces w i l l form a portion of both terms' work. Women's Studies Women's Studies 110 (3) Women and Psychology Instructional Faculty (4,0,0) M . D E N I K E , B . A . (Hons.) (SFU), M . A . (UBC) Women's Studies offerings are taught by fully qualified instructors w h o have experience i n the field relevant to their courses. Those faculty not appointed in the W o m en's Studies Department itself are seconded from disciplines relevant to Women's Studies. University Transfer Credit Students w h o wish to pursue further courses i n Women's Studies are advised that U B C , S F U and U V i c have programs i n Women's Studies. Course Descriptions Note: courses marked w i t h an asterisk (*) may not be offered i n 95/96. Check the current timetable. Women's Studies 100 (3) Introduction to Women's Studies (4,0,0) This course w i l l examine the status and role of w o m e n i n C a n a d i a n Society. Topics w i l l include the impact of Women's Studies on traditional academic disciplines; the nature and origins of patriarchy; w o m e n and work; reproductive rights, pornography and sexuality. It w i l l investigate issues of power centering around race, class and sexuality. It w i l l trace the development of sex role divisions i n the family and other social institutions; examine the influence of education, media and art on the development of women's social and legal status. Women's Studies 104 (3) Women Writers and Feminist Criticism* (4,0,0) A discussion-oriented course intended to broaden the students' awareness of, and appreciation for, literature produced by women writers w i t h emphasis o n contemporary writers. It w i l l also introduce students to current feminist literary theory. Women's Studies 106 (3) Contemporary American Women Writers* (4,0,0) A discussion-oriented literature course intended to broaden and intensify the student's awareness of and appreciation of contemporary and recent important A m e r i c a n w o m e n authors. There w i l l be brief consideration of 19th and early 20th century works, but the focus w i l l be o n works published since W W I I , i n c l u d i n g w o r k s of the 1980s. A l t h o u g h the focus w i l l be on plays, stories, novels, and poetry, there w i l l be some exploration of those biographical matters and issues of critical status that mark the rise of women's writings from a sub-genre to full status acceptance by the best critics today. A psychological examination of the construction of gender-roles, their development i n childhood and maintenance i n adulthood. The course w i l l examine current research i n biology, socialization, personality and mental health, and w i l l include issues of current interest such as sexuality, aging, violence against women, gender relations and the workplace. Women's Studies 113 Women in Politics* (4,0,0) (3) This introductory course i n Women's Studies w i l l examine women's political participation i n the political process from a multidisciplinary feminist format. The course w i l l focus on Canadian examples and encourage students to examine the difficulties that affect w o m e n i n particular. Students w i l l be encouraged to research possible solutions to increasing women's political participation. Women's Studies 122 (3) Women in Anthropology* (4,0,0) The anthropological perspective applied to w o m e n i n different cultures of the w o r l d : their role i n economic, political, religious, kinship, and expressive systems; exploration of the w o r k of w o m e n anthropologists and the effect of theory on understanding women; women's experience i n cultures of the w o r l d . Women's Studies 130 Women and Art (4,0,0) (3) This course surveys the history of women's involvement in Western art. The position of w o m e n i n the visual arts and art history w i l l be discussed and the methodological issues involved i n reclaiming the history of w o m e n artists explored. Women's role as producers of art w i l l be considered from A n t i q u i t y to the 20th Century and the social, cultural and economic background of each period w i l l be examined i n order to understand the conditions under w h i c h these artists w o r k e d . The image of w o m e n in art w i l l be looked at to reveal the underlying ideologies of each period. Students taking W M S T 130 w i l l not receive duplicate credit for A H I S 109. Women's Studies 140 (3) Women, Science and Technology (4,0,0) This course w i l l provide an insight into the role that science and technology play i n our society and their impact on the lives of w o m e n . Topics w i l l include an historical review of the role w o m e n have played i n the development of science, investigation of the reasons for the traditionally l o w participation of w o m e n i n scientific Academic - Women's Studies 165 and technical fields, the relationship between science and gender and discussion sessions on a variety of topics such as ecofeminism, ecology and the environment, reproduc tive technologies, sociobiology, information technology. Women's Studies 220 (3) Women and the Past: An Historical Survey (4,0,0) A survey of the lives of w o m e n from the Ancient W o r l d to 20th century N o r t h America. A n uncovering of women's participation in and contribution to the making of history. Private lives as w e l l as public and political activities w i l l be studied. The course w i l l examine reasons behind the extent to w h i c h w o m e n have been "hidden from history." Academic - Women's Studies 166 Career/Vocational Programs Capilano College offers a variety of employment-related programs. The programs offered are under constant review to make certain that students are taught the latest techniques and skills. Advisory committees, composed of employers, review and recommend content of all programs. Admission is limited and applicants are considered on the criteria established for each program area. In general, Grade 12 standing is required for two year Diploma Programs although others may be admitted on the basis of their experience and abilities. Due to the timely nature of these programs, requirements and profiles may change. are required at Capilano College for the certificate or diploma. Students wishing transfer credit should present suitable documentation to the Registrar's office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. All approved transfer credits are noted on the student's Permanent Student Record. Full information on transfer of specific courses is available from the Admissions Advisor, Counsellors and in the Division. Admission Dates Contact the individual departments for current information. Enrolment in some Programs may be curtailed due to space and equipment limitations. Consequently, those students who contemplate entrance are encouraged to apply early. Applicants are required to have an interview with the Program Coordinator prior to admission. Student Course and Work Load Unsuccessful applicants who wish to be considered for the next year must re-apply. Full-time programs are designed so that successful completion is a full-time task. Students are advised not to undertake other activities that require large time commitments, including employment, while undertaking full-time studies. Canadian Studies Specialty Students who wish to concentrate their studies on Canadian content courses can apply for a Canadian Studies Specialty to be applied to their diploma. See section on General Information. Graduate Employment Practicums Employment opportunities for graduates have been good, however the College does not guarantee jobs for its graduates. For some practicums students may be required to have a Criminal Records check. Exemption Standing Course Description Code Students may be exempted from certain courses upon the successful demonstration of acquired skills and knowledge. Such exemption standings will be noted on the Permanent Student Record. On the right hand side of each course description there is a series of code letters and numbers, for example: Students granted such exemptions will have their total course load reduced by the number of exempted credits to the maximum of two courses or six credits per academic year without effect upon the status of the certificate or diploma in the particular program. Such exempted credits are not necessarily transferable to other institutions. Exemption in excess of two courses, or six credits may be awarded a student only upon the recommendation of the appropriate Program Coordinator and the Dean. Transfer to and from Other Institutions There is agreement among all public B.C. Colleges to accept each other's credits upon transfer, if applicable to a program given at the admitting college, and given suitable equivalency. Capilano College reserves the right to review individual course credits. Transfer credits are granted to students ON ADMISSION for acceptable work done at other institutions: the transfer credits reduce the total number of credits which INF0143 (3.0) Research Methods in the Electronic Age (3,0,1) (S) Each course is designated by the department name and course number (INFO 143). The number in brackets following the course designation (3.0) indicates the number of credits for the course. The second set of parentheses includes the lecture, lab and other hours for the course. For INFO 143 there will be 3 lecture hours, no lab hours, and one other hour per week. The third set of parentheses indicates the term in which the class is usually offered. Example: F-Fall, S-Spring, SUSummer. INFO 143 is offered in the Spring term. Please check the timetable to confirm the term offered as this may change after the calendar is printed. The course title (Research Methods in the Electronic Age) is indicated on the line below the department name and course number. The nominal length of a term is 16 weeks. Please see the Academic schedule on page 10 for the first and last days of classes and for the dates of the examination period. Career/Vocational - General Information 169 Applied Business Technology Contact: 984-4959 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY D . B L A N E Y , I.D. (UBC), C.P.S. D. C L A R K , Lab Supervisor J. C L A R K , R . N . (Regina G e n . Hosp.), Teaching D i p . (Univ. of Sask.) V . C O C H R A N , L L . B . (UBC) C . C R A M , B . A . , M . A . , Prof. Teaching Certificate, ( U . ofT.) L . C R O W E , B.Sc. (U of Conn.) M . B . A . ( N Eastern Univ.) S. F R E U N D , I.D. (UBC), Legal Assistant Certificate M . G I O V A N N E T T I - S E W A R D , B.S.A. (St. F.X.), B.Ed. (Mt. St. Vincent), T E S L C . G R I E V E S , B.Ed., Sec. ( U B C ) S. H O R N , I.D. (UBC) L . JEST, I.D. (UBC), M . E d . (SFU) S. L I V I N G S T O N E , R . N . , M . A . M . S . (London, Eng.) D. P H I L L I P S B. S M H H , B.A., Prof. Teaching Cert. (UBC) B. SPICER, B. C o m m , Standard Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) W . T I L L E Y , B.Ed. (UBC), M . A . (SFU) K. V I C K A R S , B.Ed., Lic.Acct. (UBC), C . G . A . G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . (UBC), Standard Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B.C. Registered Psychologist A . W H I T E , Instructor/Lab Supervisor achieve this goal by maintaining an ongoing relationship w i t h the business community through the placement of all our students i n practicums ranging from two to four weeks. Students have the opportunity to practice their skills i n a business environment before leaving the program to seek employment. Each year, an average of 85% of our students are employed i n their area of expertise. Why the Department of Applied Business Technology at Capilano College? • Q u a l i t y Education: small classes, personalized instruction, and professional instructors • Career Training: secretary, clerk typist, accounting clerk, medical office assistant, legal secretary and w o r d information processing • flexibility: day, part-time or full-time • L o w Cost: our professional training courses are competitive w i t h other institutions on the L o w e r Mainland • N e w Technology: electronic typewriters, microcomputer training i n fully equipped microcomputer labs. The Department of A p p l i e d Business Technology coordinates and delivers seven different programs to students w i t h v a r y i n g levels of skills. These programs/courses provide y o u w i t h a comprehensive education i n preparation for employment i n business. Support Staff Martha Mackay, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant Faye Ulker, Receptionist OFFICE TECHNOLOGY PROGRAM Contact: 984-4959 General Information Students i n the A p p l i e d Business Technology D i v i s i o n receive practical, job-related training for a w i d e range of administrative and clerical positions. O u r 10-month programs provide students w i t h a high level of competency i n computer applications, communication skills, basic accounting procedures, and office administration. A l l of our faculty have considerable experience i n business and are continually up-grading their skills to meet the demands of the new technology. Students enrolled i n the A p p l i e d Business Technology D i v i s i o n may choose from the following program: • A c c o u n t i n g Assistant Program • A c c o u n t i n g Support Program • Administrative Assistant Program • Business Fundamentals Program • Legal Secretarial Program • M e d i c a l Office Assistant Program • Office Assistant ESL P r o g r a m The goal of the A p p l i e d Business Technology D i v i s i o n is to provide our students w i t h marketable skills. W e Career/Vocational - Applied Business Technology 170 The Office Technology Programs prepare graduates for responsible positions i n the office administrative field. A l l Office Technology Programs offer extensive training i n written communications, administrative procedures, accounting, and computer applications—word processing, spreadsheets and database. Each program includes a two-week supervised w o r k practicum. Specialized training is provided for administrative, accounting and office assistant positions. Applications for Admission A l l applications for admission must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar, together w i t h official transcripts and other pertinent documents. Graduation Requirements In order to receive a certificate for any of the Office Technology programs y o u must successfully complete the courses, accumulate the required credits for graduation, and maintain a grade point average of 2.0. Special Fees and Expenses Program Content Costs of tuition, textbooks and supplies change regularly. Contact the office at 984-4959 for up-to-date information. FIRST T E R M Business English I O T E C 111 Business Systems and Procedures O T E C 115 Accounting Procedures I O T E C 117 Microcomputer Applications I O T E C 146 Awards and Scholarships G e r r y Turner M e m o r i a l A w a r d - Office T e c h n o l o g y Programs G e r r y Turner worked for the College for many years. She was Secretary to the Principal, and also w o r k e d i n the Deans' offices, the Bursar's office, Purchasing, C o m m u n i t y Education, Placement, and Accounting. Wherever she was, Gerry gave her best, and her aim was always to promote excellence, and to improve the image of the college i n the community. This award is maintained by Gerry's friends at Capilano College w h o continue to remember her good humour, gentle demeanor, and always even disposition. The G e r r y Turner A w a r d is granted on the basis of scholastic excellence a n d financial need to a student i n an Office Technology Program i n the Spring term. 1. ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANT PROGRAM NB: Students who do not achieve a minimum ofaC in OTEC 111 and OTEC 146 must receive written permission from th program convenor to be able to continue in the program. SECOND TERM Microcomputer Applications II O T E C 147 Administrative Applications O T E C 148 Business W r i t i n g O T E C 211 Document Transcription O T E C 235 Organizational Behaviour O T E C 252 Directed W o r k Experience O T E C 300 THIRD TERM Document Design O T E C 233 Introduction to N e t w o r k s O T E C 234 Career Opportunities Certificate Requirements: The Administrative Assistant i n today's m o d e r n office provides a high level of technological and administrative support to management. Graduates of this program are finding employment i n a w i d e range of technological support positions i n c l u d i n g administrative and executive assistants, office managers, and computer applications trainers. 2. ACCOUNTING ASSISTANT PROGRAM The Program The Administrative Assistant Program is a full-time, tenmonth program offered from September to June. This program provides students w i t h training i n English grammar and composition skills, interpersonal skills, computer applications and m u c h more. A valuable component of the training that students i n this program receive is a two-week practicum i n a business setting. Credit 3.0 3.0 3.0 6TJ 15.0 4.5 3.0 3.0 1.5 3.0 15 16.5 3.0 15 4.5 36.00 Career Opportunities The A c c o u n t i n g Assistant Program provides students w i t h an understanding of both manual and computer accounting systems and the ability to apply this k n o w l edge to business situations. Students w i l l also be introduced to other computer applications and general office procedures. Graduates are finding employment as accounting assistants, junior bookkeepers, and full-charge bookkeepers for small and medium-sized firms. In addition, graduates of this program have the skills to start their o w n businesses, to ladder into the Business A d m i n i s t r a t i o n Program to take more advanced financial courses towards a d i p l o m a or degree, and to pursue a more advanced career i n accounting through a professional certification program. Admission Requirements The program convenor conducts a personal interview w i t h each applicant that meets the following admission criteria: 1. C o m p l e t i o n of Grade 12. 2. Touch typing at 40 w p m . 3. Strong English skills. The Program The A c c o u n t i n g Assistant Program is a full-time, tenmonth program offered from September to June. This program provides students w i t h training i n accounting, general office procedures, and computer applications. A two-week w o r k practicum is included i n this training program. Career/Vocational - Applied Business Technolo 171 Admission Requirements Admission Requirements Students are required to have a personal interview with the program convenor or to attend an information meeting prior to program admission. ESL Students who wish to take this program must have a personal interview with the program convenor and must meet these admission criteria: 1. Minimum of mid-to-high intermediate English language skills. 2. Good spoken English. Program Content FIRSTTERM OTEC 111 OTEC 115 OTEC 117 OTEC 146 Business English I Business Systems and Procedures Accounting Procedures I Microcomputer Applications I 3.0 3.0 3.0 60 15.0 FIRST TERM ESL. 050 Conversation for Business ESL. 092 Vocabulary and Reading for Business OTEC 113 Business English and NB: Students must achieve a minimum of a B grade in the final Communications exam of OTEC 117 to continue in this program. OTEC 117* Accounting Procedures I (optional) SECOND TERM OTEC 146 Microcomputer Applications I OTEC 140 Administrative Procedures 1.5 OTEC 149 OTEC 212 OTEC 211 OTEC 217 OTEC 252 Microcomputer Math and Business Applications Business English II or Business Writing Accounting Procedures II Organizational Behaviour THIRD TERM OTEC 219 Microcomputer Accounting OTEC 232 Financial Document Presentations OTEC 300 Directed Work Experience Certificate Requirements: 3.0 3.0 4.5 3.0* 60 16.5 3.0 3.0 4.5 30 16.5 3.0 1.5 15 6.0 36.0 SECOND TERM ESL. 051 Advanced Conversation for Business OTEC 147 Microcomputer Applications II OTEC 150 Administrative and Business Procedures OTEC 211 Business Writing or Business English II OTEC 212 Interpersonal Skills OTEC 251 Directed Work Experience OTEC 300 THIRD TERM Practicum Certificate Requirements 3.0 4.5 3.0 3.0 1.5 L5 16.5 33.0 3. OFFICE ASSISTANT ESL PROGRAM * This program is presently under review and the detailed listing of courses and course content may be changed by the time the program is offered in September 1995. Career Opportunities Graduates are finding employment in entry-level positions which include general office assistants, receptionists, accounts payable and receivable clerks. The Program The Office Assistant ESL Program is a full-time, ninemonth program offered from September to May. This program provides students with training in general office skills, computer applications and English grammar and composition skills. Students are required to complete a work practicum as part of their training program. 4. BUSINESS FUNDAMENTALS PROGRAM The Program The Business Fundamentals Program is a four-month program that may be taken on a full-time or part-time basis during the fall or spring semester. The Business Fundamentals Program has been designed for students who require basic business skills training or who need to upgrade their skills. Many students take this program as a stepping stone to a more advanced program of studies. Admission Requirements This program is open to students who want to begin their studies at the college level in a supportive learning environment. Program Profile OTEC 111 OTEC 113 OTEC 115 Career/Vocational - Applied Business Technology 172 Business English or Business English & Communications 3.0 Business Systems & Procedures 3.0 O T E C 117 O T E C 146 O T E C 123 O T E C 245 Accounting Procedures I Microcomputer Applications I or W o r d Processing Procedures and Introductory Microcomputer Applications Certificate Requirements 3.0 O T E C 217 O T E C 300 6J0 Accounting Procedures II (continued from first term) Directed W o r k Experience Total Program Credits: 15 4.5 25.5 15.0 Course Descriptions 5. ACCOUNTING SUPPORT PROGRAM (4,0,0)(F) Career Opportunities Office Technology 111 Business English I The graduates of the Accounting Support Program are finding employment as accounting clerks, bookkeepers, general office assistants, and accounting assistants. The course w i l l review the fundamental principles of grammar, spelling, and punctuation. M e m o writing w i l l be covered. The Program Office Technology 112 Language Skill Development The Account Support Program is a full-time, six-month program offered from January to June. This program provides training in English grammar and composition skills, administrative procedures, manual and computer accounting, and computer applications. The A c c o u n t i n g Support Program also includes a two-week supervised practicum. Graduates of this program w i l l have the necessary skills for an entry-level position i n the accounting field. After completion of the A c c o u n t i n g Support Program, graduates have the options of finding employment, starting their o w n businesses, or w o r k i n g i n an accounting position as they continue their studies and work towards a d i p l o m a or degree through the Business Administration Program. Admission Requirements Students are required to have a personal interview w i t h the program convenor or to attend an information meeting prior to program admission. Program Content FIRST T E R M Business English and O T E C 113 Communications Business Systems and O T E C 115 Procedures Accounting Procedures I O T E C 117 W o r d Processing Procedures O T E C 123 Accounting Procedures II O T E C 217 Introductory Microcomputer O T E C 245 Applications SECOND TERM Administrative Procedures O T E C 140 Computerized A c c o u n t i n g O T E C 215 (3) (1.5) (2,0,0)(F) This course w i l l train students to apply the correct techniques of written communications to their proofreading, verifying, and editing. Office Technology 113 (4.5) Business English and Communications (6,0,0)(S) This course w i l l train students i n grammar, spelling, punctuation, correct w o r d usage, proofreading skills and business writing. Office Technology 115 (3) Business Systems and Procedures (4,0,0)(F,S) This course w i l l review basic math skills and train students to correctly compute and accurately maintain business records. Office Technology 117 Accounting Procedures I (3) (4,0,0)(F,S) This course introduces students to the theory of accounting and to tasks performed i n the basic accounting cycle. Emphasis is placed on correct analysis, accuracy, and thoroughness as well as on independent decision making. 4.5 Office Technology 123 (4.5) Word Processing Procedures 3.0 3.0 4.5 4.5 This course w i l l instruct students i n the theory and practical applications of a w o r d processing program. This course w i l l also b u i l d keyboarding speed and accuracy skills. 13 21.0 Office Technology 140 Administrative Procedures 1.5 1.5 This course w i l l introduce the student to basic office administrative procedures associated w i t h the modern business office. Topics include records management, time management, and office management procedures. (1.5) (6,2,0)(S) (2,0,0)(S,Su) Career/Vocational - Applied Business Technology Office Technology 146 (6) (8,2,0)(F) Microcomputer Applications I (3) (4.5) (6,2,0)(S) Prerequisite: O T E C 111 or equivalent This course utilizes the computer to assist students in d e v e l o p i n g / i m p r o v i n g their letter and memo writing skills. Emphasis w i l l be placed on sentence and paragraph structure and composition skills. Microcomputer Applications II Office Technology 215 Prerequisites: O T E C 146 or equivalent Computerized Accounting Students w i l l become proficient i n the use of a w o r d processing w i n d o w s program. Students w i l l also be introduced to spreadsheet programs for both D O S and w i n d o w environments. This course w i l l introduce students to technological developments and advances i n office automation. Prerequisite: O T E C 117 or equivalent Office Technology 148 (3) (4,0,0)(S) Administrative Applications Students w i l l apply their knowledge of records control, time management, and other administrative procedures to office simulations. This course w i l l p r o v i d e reinforcement of procedures used i n w o r d processing b y producing complex documents w h i c h require formatting, computer software operations, and language s k i l l decisions. Office Technology 149 (4,0,0)(S) Business English II This course w i l l train students i n the theory and practical applications of a w o r d processing software program and a database program. This course w i l l also b u i l d keyboarding speed and accuracy skills. Office Technology 147 Office Technology 212 (3) (4,0,0)(S) Microcomputer Math and Business Applications The students w i l l review the math functions related to spreadsheets. In addition, the students w i l l become proficient users of spreadsheets i n both D O S and w i n d o w environments. Students w i l l also receive a n overview of technological advances i n office automation. Office Technology 150 (3) Administrative and Business Procedures (4,0,0)(S) This course w i l l introduce students to the basic office administrative procedures associated w i t h the modern business office. The students w i l l develop the skills to correctly compute and accurately maintain business records. (1.5) (2,0,0HSu) This course is designed to instruct the student i n the use of the accounting application program, A C C P A C , for entering, storing and retrieving records, and producing standard financial reports. Office Technology 217 Accounting Procedures II (4.5) (6,4,0XS,Su) Prerequisite: O T E C 117 or equivalent This course is a continuation of O T E C 117 w i t h emphasis on accounting systems and procedures. Business simulations are used extensively throughout the course. Office Technology 219 (3) (4,0,0)(Su) Microcomputer Accounting Prerequisite: O T E C 117 or equivalent A hands-on course to develop proficiency i n the use of A C C P A C for completing accounting procedures, including accounts receivable, accounts payable, payroll, general ledger, and inventory control. Off ice Technology 232 (1.5) (2,2,0)(Su) Financial Documents Presentations Prerequisite: O T E C 146 or equivalent The students w i l l use the graphic capabilities of desk-top publishing to enhance the appearance of financial reports, tables, and other financial information. Office Technology 233 (3) (4,2,0)(Su) Document Design Prerequisites: O T E C 146 and O T E C 147 or equivalents Office Technology 211 (3) (4,0,0)(S) Business Writing Prerequisite: O T E C 111 o r equivalent This course utilizes the computer to improve the student's quality of grammar, spelling, and w o r d usage, and to develop a n d / o r improve composition skills. Career/Vocational - Applied Business Technology 174 Students w i l l use the graphics capabilities of desk-top publishing to enhance the appearance of letterheads, reports, tables, brochures, news releases, etc. Office Technology 234 Introduction to Networks (3) (4,2,0)(Su) Prerequisites: O T E C 146 and 147 or O T E C 146 and 149, or equivalents Students will learn how a network operates, how to research information from bulletin boards, and some basic troubleshooting techniques. Office Technology 235 Document Transcription (1.5) (2,0,0MS) Prerequisites: OTEC 111 and OTEC 146 or equivalents The development of transcription skills to produce mailable correspondence using microcomputers. Spelling, punctuation, and grammar will be reviewed. Office Technology 245 (1.5) (2,0,0)(S) Introductory Microcomputer Applications Students will learn to use spreadsheets for specialized office procedures including the creation of forms, reports, and spreadsheets. Off ice Technology 251 Interpersonal Skills (1.5) (2,0,0)(S) This course will provide students with an understanding of interpersonal communication techniques that can positively influence job performance. Students will practice in-person and telephone responding, customer service and issue resolution skills in a supportive environment. Office Technology 252 Organizational Behaviour (3) (4,0,0)(S) This course will provide students with an understanding of interpersonal communication techniques that can positively influence performance on the job. This course will also identify the positive administrative and supervisory skills that program graduates will need as they wish to assume additional career responsibility in the future. Office Technology 300 Directed Work Experience (1.5) (2,0,70)(S,Su) This course involves both lectures on job search techniques and resume preparation. In addition, at least a thirty-hour work practicum must be completed in an industry placement related to the student's program of study. LEGAL SECRETARIAL PROGRAM Contact: 984-4959 Career Opportunities The exacting field of law offers excellent career opportunities for students graduating as legal secretaries. This very specialized program provides intense training in traditional secretarial skills as well as legal procedural courses including: Civil litigation, wills and probate, corporate law, conveyancing and mortgaging, family and legal office procedures. Upon completion of the program, students find employment in specialized, as well as general, law offices. Many graduates of the Legal Secretarial Program proceed to the Part Time Legal Assistant Certificate Program. the Legal Assistant Program requires Option students to have two-years' work experience as a legal secretary prior to enrolling in the first course. Legal Secretarial Program graduates are required to have one year of work experience as a legal secretary. This allows them to further their education in the evening while earning a salary and gaining valuable experience in the legal support field. The Program This nine-month vocational program covers five main areas of law providing a fundamental understanding of the legal system in B.C. Students are trained in legal terminology and procedural rules. They will review relevant legislation, and acquire necessary skills in the formatting and handling of legal documents. Shorthand, typing, legal office procedures, hands-on computer technology and a two-week legal office work practicum are included in the curriculum. A Capilano College certificate is granted upon successful completion of the program. Admission Procedures Students are admitted to the Program twice a year, in September and January. Applications may be made at any time. Applications for Admission must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar, together with official transcripts and any other pertinent documents. To ensure your name is on the list for the Information Meetings held twice a year, call The Department of Applied Business Technology at 984-4959. Interested applicants are invited to attend an information meeting. A n evaluation of keyboarding speed and English language proficiency will be conducted at this time. During the meeting, an appointment for a personal interview may be arranged. Career/Vocational - Applied Business Technology 175 D u r i n g your interview, y o u w i l l have an opportunity to ask further questions, and discuss your qualifications and career goals. Y o u r test results w i l l be reviewed w i t h y o u at this time. The objective of the personal interview is to assist i n selecting applicants w h o w i l l be most suited to the career of Legal Secretary. Admission Requirements 1. H i g h school diploma or equivalent 2. English language proficiency 3. Keyboarding of 45 w p m SECOND TERM Corporate Procedures L G S T 110 Basic Conveyancing & Mortgage L G S T 112 Procedures W i l l s & Probate Procedures L G S T 114 L G S T 117 Legal Office Procedures Practicum L G S T 119 Computer Applications L G S T 122 i n the Legal Office Legal Machine Transcription L G S T 130 and Skill Development In addition to registration and tuition fees, students can expect to spend approximately $900.00 on textbooks and supplies. Graduation Requirements A program completion certificate is awarded to students who have successfully completed 35.25 credits. Awards The following law firms have established scholarships i n this program: Davis and C o m p a n y , C a m p n e y and M u r p h y , Russell and D u M o u l i n Candidates for scholarships must rank in the top grade point averages during first tenn and must demonstrate potential as professional, career-minded legal secretaries. Program Content FIRST T E R M Credits Family L a w Procedures L G S T 108 Basic Litigation L G S T 109 Introduction to the Legal System L G S T 116 Legal Document Processing L G S T 123 on the M i c r o c o m p u t e r Organizational Behaviour L G S T 124 C M N S 159 Communications for Legal Secretaries Career/Vocational - Applied Business Technology 176 1.5 3.0 1.5 4.5 3.0 3£ 16.5 3.0 5.25 THIRD TERM L G S T 119 Practicum (continued) 35.25 Total Program Credits: Course Descriptions Legal Secretary 108 Family Law Procedures Special Fees and Expenses 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 18.75 Please submit the following material prior to or d u r i n g the pre-admission interview: (a) A resume describing your education, skills, and w o r k experience. (b)Transcripts from all educational institutions y o u have attended (c) A letter of recommendation from a former employer or teacher. 3.0 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F,S) Introduction to the procedures, rules and legislation applicable to divorce and family l a w litigation. Legal Secretary 109 Basic Litigation (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Introduction to court procedures i n the Supreme C o u r t of B.C. The course w i l l cover procedures i n pre-trial preparation, the preparation of documents, the use of precedents i n the Supreme Court. Legal Secretary 110 Corporate Procedures (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) A n examination of the B.C. Companies A c t and the various documents that a legal secretary must be familiar with in order to incorporate a company and attend to routine filings and resolutions. Records Office requirements, annual proceedings, preparing share certificates and registration, etc., w i l l also be covered. Legal Secretary 112 (3) (4,0,0) (S,Su) Basic Conveyance & Mortgage Procedures This course covers the contract of purchase and sale, Land Title A c t requirements for registration of title in B.C., search procedures, preparation of primary and secondary documents and forms involved in conveying title and registering charges. Emphasis w i l l be on preparing documents acceptable to the Land Title Office, such as transfers, mortgages, and related forms for a residential conveyance. Legal Secretary 114 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F,S) Legal Secretary 124 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Wills and Probate Procedures Organizational Behaviour A n examination of the W i l l s A c t , and Estate A d m i n i s t r a tion Act. Students w i l l prepare the necessary documents to obtain Letters Probate i n the Supreme Court of B . C . and be familiar w i t h documentation required for issuance of Letters of Administration. This course looks at the effects of i n d i v i d u a l and group behaviour i n organizations. Topics include leader behaviour and power, motivation, attitude development, perception, work stress and conflict. Students w i l l also learn h o w to apply communication, problem solving and conflict resolution skills toward a n organization's overall effectiveness. Legal Secretary 116 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F,S) Introduction to the Legal System This course acquaints students w i t h a w o r k i n g knowledge of the Canadian and B.C. C o u r t System, ethics of the legal profession and the rules of the L a w Society relating to trust accounts, w i t h added emphasis on legal vocabulary. Legal Secretary 117 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S,Su) Legal Scretary 130 (5.25) (7,2,0)(S,Su) Legal Machine Transcription and Skill Development After a review of basic transcription skills, students w i l l develop skills i n transcribing legal materials. S k i l l b u i l d i n g w i l l continue through the use of remedial drills, power drills and short and sustained timed writings. Legal Office Procedures A course to prepare legal secretarial students for positions in l a w offices. Instruction i n time keeping, diary systems, use of l a w library, ethical responsibilities, filing, and other procedures particular to the profession. Emphasis w i l l be placed on the structure of a l a w office, the differences between large and small offices, and the office procedures unique to the practice of law. Legal Secretary 119 (1.5) (2,0,60) (S,SU) Practicum W o r k experience i n v o l v i n g 24 lecture hours and at least 60 hours of related office experience i n the legal field. A l s o covered is the resume, job application, cover letter and interview. Legal Secretary 122 (3) (4,2,0) (S,SU) Computer Applications in the Legal Office The student w i l l learn to identify the components of office automation. The student w i l l also require a practical knowledge and an understanding of basic spreadsheet and data base concepts. Legal Secretary 123 (4.5) (6,2,0)(F,S) Legal Document Processing on the Microcomputer U s i n g WordPerfect software o n an I B M compatible microcomputer, the student w i l l be introduced to basic through advanced w o r d processing concepts. Proficiency w o r k i n g w i t h the program w i l l be acquired through the production of various legal documents. Career/Vocational - Applied Business Technology 177 MEDICAL OFFICE ASSISTANT PROGRAM Awards and Scholarships Contact: 984-4959 The Maureen Piekaar Bursary was established in memory of Maureen Piekaar, an instructor in the Medical Office Assistant Program. A bursary of $250 to $300 will be awarded to a second-term MOA student based on a financial need and a satisfactory standing of 70% or better. Career Opportunities The health care industry is one of the largest industries in Canada, and the Medical Office Assistant is a recognized member of the modern medical team. Graduates of this program have the specialized training required to work in a number of medical settings: receptionist or medical assistant in an office or clinic, or in a hospital as an admitting clerk or department stenographer. The Program This Medical Office Assistant program offers pre-service, specialized education for prospective students which includes: • Medical terminology and anatomy and physiology • Medical ethics • Medical transcription • Medical records management • Aseptic techniques • Preparation, assisting and follow up of patient for medical examinations • Specimen collection and basic office diagnostic procedures • Financial record keeping and computer medical billing • A two-week work practicum in industry Admission Requirements All applicants must meet with the Program Coordinator prior to registration to assess whether or not they have the personal qualities and clerical skills necessary to be a successful Medical Office Assistant. Prior to admission students must complete a St. John's Standard First Aid Certificate and achieve a 35 wpm keyboarding speed. All Applications for Admission must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar, together with official transcript and any other pertinent documents. Program Content Credits FIRST TERM 3.0 CMNS 110 Communications Medical Document Processing I 3.0 MOA 100 Medical Administrative Procedures I 3.0 MOA 105 Clinical Procedures I 1.5 MOA 107 Anatomy & Related Physiology MOA 109 and Pathology I 3.0 MOA 111 Medical Terminology I 3.0 Medical Document Processing II 15 MOA 121 18.0 SECOND TERM Keyboarding Skill & MOA 102 Speed Development 1.5 Medical Machine Transcription 3.0 MOA 103 MOA 106 Medical Administrative Procedures II 1.5 Clinical Procedures II and MOA 108 Pharmacology 3.0 Anatomy & Related Physiology MOA 110 and Pathology II 3.0 MOA 112 Medical Terminology II 3.0 Directed Work Experience 1.5 MOA 115 15 MOA 122 Computers in Health Care 18.0 Total Program Credits: 36 Course Descriptions Medical Office Assistant 100 (3) Medical Document Processing I (4,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: Keyboarding speed of 35 wpm Keyboarding skill development and introduction to WordPerfect 5.1; basic to advanced applications. Graduation Requirements Students completing 36 credits, as outlined in the above profile, will be awarded a Capilano College Program Completion Certificate. Special Fees and Expenses In addition to tuition and registration fees, students can expect to spend approximately $800.00 on textbooks and supplies. Career/Vocational - Applied Business Technology 178 Medical Office Assistant 102 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Keyboarding Skill and Speed Development Remedial drills, power drills, short and sustained timed writings to increase speed and accuracy in medical keyboarding. Medical Office Assistant 103 (3) (4,2,0) (S) Medical Office Assistant 111 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Medical Machine Transcription Medical Terminology I Prerequisite: M O A 100 & 111 Introduction to Greek and Latin prefixes, suffixes, roots, and combining forms c o m m o n to medical terminology. Practice i n transcribing medical consultation letters and hospital reports from dictation equipment. This course entails a mandatory two-hour lab. Medical Office Assistant 105 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Medical Administrative Procedures I (4,0,0) (3) Prerequisite: M O A 111 Continuation, reinforcement of terminology i n M O A 111. Students w i l l learn office procedures c o m m o n to medical offices and hospitals. The students w i l l gain expertise i n meeting the patient, m a k i n g patient appointments, keeping patient records, maintaining a filing system, and processing patient accounts for submission to licensed Medical Office Assistant 106 (1.5) Medical Administrative Procedures II Medical Office Assistant 112 (3) Medical Terminology II (2,0,0) (S) Medical Office Assistant 115 (1.5) Directed Work Experience (2,0,54) (S) F o l l o w i n g successful completion of term two, a medical office/clinic or hospital work practicum is arranged for the student. Before the w o r k placement, the student w i l l be required to attend career preparation lectures w h i c h w i l l include practice sessions for the employment interview. Prerequisite: M O A 105 Continuation of M O A 105. Students w i l l be able to perform financial recordkeeping for the medical office. Medical Office Assistant 107 (1.5) (2,4,0) (F) Clinical Procedures I Prerequisite: St. John's Standard First A i d Certificate Students w i l l learn about clinical procedures pertinent to the doctor's office and the hospital setting. The course includes general information about physical and mental health; medications and health products. Students w i l l learn h o w to use and maintain medical office equipment. There is a mandatory lab component. Medical Office Assistant 121 (1.5) (2,2,0) (F) Medical Document Processing II Prerequisite: M O A 100 A d v a n c e d w o r d processing applications are used i n a medical environment. Medical Office Assistant 122 (1.5) Computers in Health Care (2,1,0) (S) The student w i l l acquire skills to use the microcomputer to accumulate patient demographic data, disease data, and accounts receivable data for claims submission and research purposes. Medical Office Assistant 108 (3) (4,.4,0)(S) Clinical Procedures II and Pharmacology Prerequisite: M O A 107 Continuation of M O A 107. There is a mandatory lab component. Medical Office Assistant 109 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Anatomy and Related Physiology and Pathology I A study of structure, function and interrelationships of the organic systems of the body. C o m m o n medical disorders, operative procedures and related terminology w i l l be studied i n conjunction w i t h the systems. Medical Office Assistant 110 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Anatomy and Related Physiology and Pathology II Prerequisite: M O A 109 A continuation of M O A 109. Career/Vocational - Applied Business Technology 179 Applied Information Technology E-mail: infotec@hubcap.mlnet.com Contact: 984-1727 Instructional Faculty R. B A I L E Y M . B A T T E R S B Y , B.A. ( N Y U ) , P H . D . (UBC) G . B L I T S T E I N , A.S.P. ( B R O O K S INSTITUTE) V. BUSCH C . K I L I A N , B . A . (Columbia), M . A . (SFU) M. L'HEUREUX A . L O R E K , B.A., M . L . S . D . P O R T E R , B.A. (UToronto), M . E d . (SFU) D. STETAR D.TAIT L. W U Coordinator: Lawrence W u / C r a w f o r d K i l i a n Lab Supervisor: Lawrence W u Staff: Cathy Cole, 984-1727 General Information D u r i n g the last decade, society and the economy have rapidly changed, increasingly becoming information- and communication-based. W i t h i n business and industry, and between governments, the capability to deal w i t h information and its processing has become an important factor i n maintaining a competitive edge. U n t i l the beginning of the 1980s, there was a confidence that the private and public sectors could either rely on information created internally, or access commercially available information. A s we move through the 1990s and approach the 21st century, it becomes increasingly obvious i n these sectors that individuals w i l l need to control their o w n access to information. They w i l l use the microcomputer, both alone and connected to other microcomputers and mainframe systems. The interaction w i t h this information w i l l become an integral part of the new wave of western development. The A p p l i e d Information Technology program w i l l identify issues facing the new communicators and w i l l train students i n the skills to acquire, select, organize and communicate that information using the latest i n interactive computer technology and telecommunications. Through an intensive hands-on immersion into the w o r l d of electronic communications, students w i l l become capable handlers of. the technology, w i t h advanced research and critical thinking skills, and increased sophistication i n interactive computer presentation. Admission Requirements • College entrance level English • Computer literacy and a modest keyboarding rate • Students w i l l be required to attend an interview prior to acceptance Career/Vocational - Applied Infotec 180 N O T E : Applications for A d m i s s i o n , together w i t h official transcripts and other pertinent documents must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar. Special Fees and Expenses • Personal computer system capable of performing tasks required i n this program. (See program brochure for further information) • Texts, software, disks • Modem • Bulletin B o a r d / E mail/conferencing fees/data b a n k / research time Important Note This is a general view of the A p p l i e d Information Technology program. W h i l e we have made every effort to describe courses and requirements accurately as of Fall 1994, we work i n a fast-changing field. N e w releases i n hardware and software may require changes i n course content, course credit and scheduling, and studentpurchased equipment. The program w i l l ensure that students and applicants learn of such changes at the earliest possible moment. DIPLOMA PROGRAM The D i p l o m a Program is a 10-month, full-time program w i t h a class limit of 20 students. Please contact the InfoTec Department for application details and program information. Diploma Program Profile Fall: Foundation Term September 05 - December 15,1995 September, October C M N S 125-01 C o m m u n i c a t i o n Theory C M N S 140-01 Introduction to Interactive W r i t i n g I N F O 153-01 Research Methods I N F O 166-01 A p p l i e d Telecommunications I N F O 167-01 Systems, Tools, Utilities M D I A 141-01 Computer Presentation P H I L 170-01 Critical T h i n k i n g I N o v e m b e r , December C M N S 141-01 Interactive W r i t i n g G R P H 140-01 Graphics I I N F O 150-01 Contemporary Issues I N F O 151-01 Interactive Communications I I N F O 154-01 Electronic Info. Research & Management I N F O 156-01 Technical Support: Foundation I N F O 161-01 Project Management Credits 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 M D I A 142-01 Computer Managed Learning & Training P H I L 171-01 Critical T h i n k i n g II T e r m Credits 1.5 L5 24.0 S p r i n g : Exploration T e r m January 02 - A p r i l 19,1995 January, February G R P H 141-01 Graphics II I N F O 155-01 Interactive Communications II I N F O 172-01 Technical Support: Concentration (MMD) I N F O 180-01 Computer Mediated Communications M U S 090-01 Digitized Sound I March, April I N F O 172-01 Technical Support: Concentration (MMDXconfd) I N F O 180-01 Computer Mediated Communications (conf d) C M N S 142-01 A d v a n c e d Interactive W r i t i n g G R P H 142-01 Graphics III I N F O 158-01 Interactive Communications III I N F O 183-01 Time-Based Data Integration T e r m Credits 1.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.75 15.75 0.75 1.5 6.0 1.5 15 11.25 51.00 (9 Credits awarded for pre/postgraduate work or experience) Course Descriptions CMNS 125 (1.5) Communication Theory (F) A brief survey of principles underlying communication: interpersonal, print, radio, film and television, with application of those principles to the digital media. CMNS 140 (1.5) Introduction to Interactive Writing (F) Students develop a clear, concise writing style, become aware of various genres and the styles they require, can "translate" from technical jargon into English, and gain basic editing and rewriting skills. (1.5) (F) Students master the structure of expository, narrative, analytical and argumentative writing, and go o n to propose, write and revise extensive documents for both technical and non-technical readers. CMNS 142 (1.5) Advanced Interactive Writing (S) Students plan, outline and write extensive documents; design clear, simple instructions for reader response; apply interactive w r i t i n g skills to specific projects such as an electronic magazine. Some attention to the nature of online discourse and the principles of hypertext. GRPH 140 Infotec Graphics I Summer: Professional D e v e l o p m e n t T e r m A p r i l 2 9 - J u n e 21,1995 M a y , June G R P H 143-01 A d v a n c e d Graphics IV I N F O 160-01 Self-Marketing I N F O 164-01 Professional Development I N F O 173-01 Technical Support: Augmentation ( A W P ) I N F O 182-01 Cross Platform Development T e r m Credits: TOTAL CREDITS CMNS 141 Interactive Writing (1.5) (F) Enhancement of visual literacy through the development of generic graphics skills and abilities. Students develop a critical awareness of different presentation formats, learn to make an effective visual analysis, and develop facility in solving graphic problems within the computer environment. The focus is on the graphical aspects i n the design of the user interface and the production of effective b / w graphics for the design of an interactive multimedia project. GRPH 141 Infotec Graphics II (1.5) (S) Further investigation of basic graphic skills introduced i n Graphics I. In addition, students learn to produce graphics for interactive multimedia using colour, objects and paths. Introduction to layout for print publication. GRPH 142 Infotec Graphics III (1.5) (S) In addition to layout for print publication, students extend graphic exploration to focus on "time" as a design element i n interactive multimedia. Sequential presentations are coupled w i t h the basic rules learned from Graphics I and II. Students learn to produce graphics for use w i t h M a c r o m i n d Director. GRPH 143 (.75) Infotec Advanced Graphics (SU) Graphics production requires a combination of technological and aesthetic skills. A u g m e n t i n g the graphics design skills developed so far, the student is introduced to advanced graphics production techniques and tools i n this workshop-based course. Career/Vocational - Applied Infotec 181 INF0150 (1.5) Contemporary Issues I (F) A study of cultural, ethical, political, economic and aesthetic issues arising w i t h the increasing use of computers, as well as the impact of new information systems on human understanding and society. Students survey print and electronic media to research current comment on these issues; synthesize and analyze their findings; and present their work i n both written and spoken forms. INF0151 (1.5) Interactive Communications I (F) This course first examines the concept of interactive communications - the active involvement of a h u m a n m i n d w i t h a computer - and the history of developments in the field to date. User interface design forms the basis for a model designed by each student. INF0153 Research Methods (1.5) (F) Students learn to analyze information requirements, select appropriate information sources and devise a research strategy. In addition to print material, the course also covers electronic resources such as online library catalogues, journal indexes and various C D - R O M products. INF0154 (1.5) (F) Electronic Information Research and Management In this continuation of I N F O 153, emphasis falls on academic and popular online sources such as K n o w l e d g e Index and other databases available on CompuServe. Students also look at Infomart (electronic newspapers), C a n / O L E (Canadian government sources), and consumer-oriented database distributors such as Delphi, A m e r i c a Online, etc. INF0155 (1.5) Interactive Communications II (S) This project-based course expands on concepts covered i n I N F O 151 and expands to include critical evaluation techniques for interactive communications products. INF0156 (1.5) (F) Technical Support: Foundation This is an introduction to programming concepts. Students learn about components i n programming and the approaches to structured programming using these components. Career/Vocational - Applied Infotec 182 INF0158 (1.5) Interactive Communications III (S) A continuation of I N F O 155, the concept of Beta testing is introduced and applied. Students design, produce, test and revise projects using the authoring tool M a c r o m i n d Director i n this course. INF0160 Self-Marketing (1.5) (SU) This course focuses on the basic principles of marketing yourself and your ideas to the business community. It includes an overview of marketing theory, application of the theory into job market evaluation, preparation of a personal marketing plan, and a selling skills w o r k s h o p . INF0161 (1.5) Project Management (F) This course teaches skills necessary to manage a n d produce interactive communications projects. Students consider management issues such as administration, preproduction and production planning, copyright clearance, collaboration and team building. INF0164 Major Project (6.0) (SU) In the final term of the program, each student chooses and undertakes a professional development activity i n consultation w i t h the instructor. The activity may take the form of a practicum, or a project for a client, or a selfdirected project, or the development of a personal business plan. A l l projects must reflect knowledge and skills learned from the program. Guest speakers from the industry report on current conditions, and finally, students present a portfolio of their work. INF0166 (1.5) Applied Telecommunications (F) This course provides an introduction to the basics of modems, communications software, telecommunications protocols, the use of electronic mail and bulletin board systems. INF0167 (1.5) Systems, Tools, Utilities (F) This course familiarizes students w i t h the design, structure and operation of the Macintosh computer system software, the basic concepts and use of local area networks, and related peripheral equipment. Students w i l l examine system-related utility programs and begin an introduction to data integration. INF0172 (3.0) Technical Support: Concentration (S) The focus of this course is i n developing expertise i n the primary interactive multimedia authoring tool chosen for the Program; currently, M a c r o m i n d Director is our choice. In addition to concentrating on the specifics of this development tool, concepts i n structured p r o g r a m m i n g from I N F O 156 w i l l be applied i n support of projects from I N F O 155/158. INF0173 (1.5) Technical Support: Augmentation (SU) After developing expertise i n a primary multimedia development tool, students w i l l be given the opportunity to expand their repertoire of development tools. The focus is on the efficient application of authoring k n o w l edge from one environment to a different environment. A u t h o r w a r e is currently our choice of development tool for courseware and computer-based training. B u i l d i n g on structure programming concepts gained i n I N F O 156 and the expertise i n Director developed i n I N F O (Course number T B A ) , students turn their focus on Authorware. INF0180 (3.0) Computer Mediated Communications (S) MDIA 141-01 (1.5) Course Presentations (F) This course explores the related planning, design, and implementation skills needed for effective desktop presentation. Students learn to design and build an outline, determine what hardware and software applications w i l l best realize the design, interrelate graphics w i t h support text, structure and deliver the final presentation. MDIA 142 (1.5) Computer Managed Learning & Training (F) This course examines the concepts underlying the learning process and h o w the computer can be used to enhance this process. The instructional design process w i l l be examined and w i l l provide a platform for the investigation and application of a process to plan, produce, implement, and evaluate computer-delivered learning and training strategies. MUS 090 Digitized Sound (1.5) (S) A u d i o is an important component in computer-based multimedia. In addition to the fundamental concepts of digital audio, students learn the techniques for digitizing and editing sound samples for use i n interactive multimedia presentations. The use of computer mediated communications systems for d o i n g collaborative w o r k at a distance and h o l d i n g asynchronous conferences has proliferated because of the availability of simple client-server tools e m p l o y i n g graphic user interfaces. This course addresses the issues of administration and implementation of communications systems for telecommuting, computer-based conferencing, online education, and collaborative w o r k using the computer, the Internet, and dial-up access. Basic concepts of critical thinking and argumentation students examine the concepts of argument, premise, conclusion, and argument structure and develop facility i n using these concepts. INF0182 (1.5) Cross-Platform Development PHIL 171 Critical Thinking II (SU) This course focuses on the transfer of multimedia projects from one computer platform to another. Topics include design and production consideration for cross-platform media integration, w i t h comparisons between the M a c i n tosh and I B M - P C compatibles. Students w i l l evaluate the Microsoft W i n d o w s user interface, Windows-based multimedia and file translation methods. Projects from the Macintosh environment w i l l be transferred to the equivalent W i n d o w s environment. INF0 183 (.75) Time-Based Data Integration (S) PHIL 170 Critical Thinking I (1.5) (1.5) (F) (F) A continuation of Critical T h i n k i n g I, the course examines the graphical representation of statistical information as a form of appeal. EVENING CERTIFICATE PROGRAM The Certificate Program offers credit courses for part-time studies i n the evening. Students may enroll i n any number of courses. Courses may be applied toward a certificate i n A p p l i e d Telecommunications (from InfoTec) or i n Business Communications (from Communications Dept.) Please contact the Infotec Department for course dates and details. Students w i l l be introduced to the Q u i c k T i m e system extension and to the tools used for integrating multimedia data into the Q u i c k T i m e file format. Data capture, compression, assembly and editing techniques and the issue of synchronization are part of this course. Career/Vocational • Applied Infotec 183 Certificate Courses CMNS 145 Computer Writing (3.0) The micro computer's efficient text-editing and revision abilities make it a powerful tool for writers. In this course, students learn to develop a clear, effective writing style, and to progress from editing exercises to producing an extensive document intended for the computer screen (especially for online publication), print, or other workplace applications. This course is also offered i n a self-paced, online format. INF0143 (3.0) Research Methods in the Electronic Age A s information technology increases i n efficiency, the quantity of information generated multiplies. A s a result, the ability to find, assess, and retrieve useful information becomes increasingly essential to productivity. This course explores methods of research necessary for the effective use of electronic information sources such as C D R O M s , online library catalogues, commercial and government databases, i n addition to conventional print sources in libraries. INF0166 (1.5) Applied Telecommunications Electronic mail and online information services are now common i n the workplace, and telecommuting is a real option to some. This course teaches the basics of modems and communications software. Students learn to use email and a local bulletin board system. Some classes w i l l take place online using a modem. This course is useful preparation for those w i s h i n g to explore the Internet further. INF0180 (3.0) Computer Mediated Communications The use of computer mediated communications systems for collaborative w o r k and conferencing has proliferated w i t h the availability of simple client-server tools employing graphic user interfaces. This course addresses the issues of administration and implementation of c o m m u n i cations systems for telecommuting, computer-based conferencing, online education, and collaborative w o r k using the computer, the Internet, and dial-up access. INF0146 (1.5) Advanced Internet: Tools and Techniques for Professionals This course is a response to the need for ongoing training and practice w i t h the emerging services and tools for making use of the Internet for professional purposes. Case studies w i l l be used to illustrate the possibilities for Internet use i n c l u d i n g telecommuting, telework, distance education, online shopping, research, and information brokering. This course w i l l provide students w i t h practical k n o w l edge of the latest client-server tools for electronic m a i l , computer conferencing, file storage and transfer, research, and multimedia publishing. Students w i l l actively use each of the tool types for course assignments and w i l l assemble a customized "tool kit" for use i n their professional work, i n addition, students w i l l either assemble a portfolio of professional examples for use i n an awareness/training session w i t h their colleagues or employees, or they w i l l assemble a portfolio and business plan for making Internet access a component of their professional work. This course w i l l be delivered as an online seminar i n distance education format. INF0168 (1.5) System Introduction: Macintosh INF0147 (1.5) Hypermedia on the Internet: Using Netscape In this hands-on course, students learn to set up their o w n Macintosh, to use A p p l e ' s System 7 effectively, and to maintain their Macintosh system using a variety of utility software programs. This course is highly recommended for those interested i n further studies with InfoTec. This course w i l l provide students w i t h a background i n the use of hypertext systems and specifically i n the use of H T M L servers w i t h the N C S A Mosaic client tool for W i n d o w s and Macintosh workstations. Students w i l l research and explore the variety of H T M L servers emerging o n the Internet. They w i l l critique the servers they explore against the theoretical and practical standards of hypertext use. Students w i l l also b u i l d a n d demonstrate a sample H T M L server of their o w n w h i c h illustrates a thematic approach to information creation, storage, and dissemination. Issues such as intellectual property and copyright w i l l be factored directly into the course. INF0179 (1.5) Internet and Online Skills This course provides students w i t h a background on the development of the Internet, as well as practice i n the use of software tools to navigate and probe the Internet for useful resources, both human and information. This course w i l l be delivered as an online seminar i n distance education format. Career/Vocational - Applied Infotec 184 Business Administration Contact: 984-4960, Fax: 984-1734 A l l of our faculty have firsthand business experience and remain active i n their specialties. Instructional Faculty W e continually review and update our programs according to market needs so that our graduates have the skills employers demand. A recent review of our programs by our A d v i s o r y Board, graduates, students and faculty led us to accentuate our training i n problem-solving, written and verbal business presentations, and team w o r k . This makes our graduates even more employable i n today's highly competitive job market, and gives them the expertise to succeed i n the workplace of the future. O u r graduates proceed to occupations such as: D . B R O W N E , B . A . , M . A . (UBC) B. C A M P B E L L , (Seneca) A . W . C A R T E R , B.Sc., M . B . A . ( U of A , C i t y U ) G . F A N E , D i p . Tech., B.Sc., M . B . A . , C . M . A . (BCIT, C i t y U . , UBC) G . H . F A R R E L L , M . B . A . , C . M . A . , F . C . M . A . (SFU) F. G R U E N , B.Mgt.Eng., M . A . S c . (RP1 Waterloo) E. H A L L , B . A . (Hons.) A T . C , G o l d s m i t h ( U . of London) C . H I L L , B . A . (Santa Clara) P. H O L D E N , B.A., L L . B . , M . B . A . ( U B C , U . of Ottawa, UBC) G . H U G H E S , B.A.Sc. ( U of T), C G A S. I B A R A K I , D i p . Physics (Okanagan College), I.S.P., C N I W . I N G L I S , B.A., D i p . M k t g . - ( U B C , U . Montreal) W . I N K S T E R , C . G . A . , (Canada), A C S M (Capilano) C . K I L I A N , B.A., M . A . (SFU) J.D. L O B L A W , B . A . ( U of T) R. L O N G W O R T H , B.Sc., M . E d . (Concordia, St. Michaels) I.S.P. C . M C K I E , B.Comm., M . B . A . , P.T.C. ( U B C , C i t y Univ.) L . M I C H A E L S , B.Sc., B.Ed., M . E d . ( U of A ) K . W . M O A K , B . A . , M . P . A . (UVic) F. M O R R I S , B . A . , L L . B . , L L . M . ( M c G i l l , U . W . Ont.) B. M O S E L E Y , B.A., M . B . A . (Univ. of Cal) R.C. N I C H O L S , B . C o m m . , C . M . A . ( U of A ) R. O ' C O N N O R , B . A d m i n . (Ryerson), I.S.P. F. P A R V A Z , B.Sc. (Tehran) M . S . D i p . (San Diego State) J. P E N D Y G R A S S E , B.Sc., Teacher's Cert. (N.Dakota) P. P O D O L A K , Cert. Display (Aus.) J. S A R R E A L , B.Sc., M.Sc., Ph.D., A C S M , ( U . of Philippines, U . of florida, N . Carolina U . , Capilano) D . S A U E R , B . A . , M . B . A . (SFU, U B C ) G . S I M O N , B.Sc., M.Sc. (UBC) M . T A Y L O R , B.Sc. ( U of A ) L . T E E T Z E L , B. C o m m . (UBC), M P A (Queens) M . V A N H O R N , B.Ed. (U of A ) , A C S M (Capilano) A . H . VICK, B.Comm. (UBC) K . V I C K A R S , B.Ed., Lie. Acct. (UBC), C . G . A . A . W A T S O N , B.A., A I B C , M . B . A . ( U of C , APII) G . W A U G H , B.A., M . A . - Reading, (UBC) J. W I L S O N , B. C o m m . , C A . (UBC) H . B. Y A C K N E S S , B . C o m m . , M . B . A . , C A . (SFU) Support Staff Dorothy Webb, D i v . Assistant Sharon Miletic, Student Employer Assistant/Receptionist General Information For 20 years, the Department of Business A d m i n i s t r a t i o n at C a p i l a n o College has stressed a balanced combination of classroom learning and hands-on business education. •Operations Manager •Accountant •Production Manager •Store Manager • P r o m o t i o n Manager •Systems A n a l y s t •Sales Representative • L e n d i n g Officer •Research Coordinator •Financial Analyst In the past, many of our graduates have developed careers w i t h large corporations such as General Foods, I C . B . C , M c K i m , Baker-Lovick, B B D O A d v e r t i s i n g , The Future Shop, Labatt Breweries, Brights Wines, B C Tel, and B.C. H y d r o . The entrepreneurial skills gained i n the program have also led many graduates to administrative jobs i n smaller firms. These include M i n e r v a Technologies, Umberto's Kitchens, Western System Controls, and many other small businesses. Admission Requirements A l l first-time students must complete an A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n form, available from the Office of the Registrar or from our Department. Persons interested i n any of our programs should a p p l y for admission early i n the calendar year. Entry is based on business experience, previous high school or post-secondary grades, and where necessary, a personal interview. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar, together w i t h official transcripts and other pertinent documents. Program Flexibility Whether y o u choose part-time or full-time studies i n Business Administration, y o u w i l l always accumulate credits toward a certificate, diploma or degree. W e have designed our programs to suit your needs as w e l l as the needs of employers. The flexibility of our programs allows y o u to start w i t h Capilano, build y o u r o w n educational package today and continue to learn w i t h us in the future. Career/Vocational - Business Administration 185 Entrance Requirements Program Information Students seeking admission to the Department of Business Administration w i l l be required to: W e offer the following choices of business programs, w h i c h are described i n detail i n this order: 1. Have Completed These Academic Requirements: • English: (English 12 w i t h a C+ grade or better) • M a t h : (Academic M a t h 11 w i t h a C grade or better) • Business Administration Entrance Exams: Mature applicants w h o do not meet the English and M a t h requirements can take entrance exams. C a l l us for the Entrance Exams Fact Sheet. 2. Provide an Official High School Transcript or Equivalent Interim grades w i l l be considered for students currently enrolled i n Grade 12. 3. Complete An Application Form • Capilano College A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n F o r m • $20 Application Fee • Submit to the Office of the Registrar Transferability Students w h o have already completed degrees or taken other university or college courses may apply to have those credits transferred towards the Business A d m i n i s tration programs at Capilano College. T o ensure a smooth transition, please provide the Registrar's Office w i t h transcripts and course outlines w h e n y o u apply. A student must complete at least 50 percent of the p r o g r a m requirements at Capilano College. Professionalism at Capilano O u r graduates have achieved an excellent reputation based o n professional performance and positive attitude. O u r classes stress the importance of maintaining that reputation. A s future leaders and business administrators, students must be prepared to model appropriate professional behaviour w h i l e engaged i n College and Collegerelated activities. This is the type of behaviour expected from a p a i d , professional manager or leader. Students w i l l be asked to sign a "Professional Standards" document acknowledging their commitment to such standards. Contact System For additional information please call the Department of Business Administration: (604) 984-4960. A d d r e s s your correspondence to: The Department of Business Administration Capilano College 2055 Purcell W a y N o r t h Vancouver, B.C. V7J 3 H 5 Fax: (604)984-1734 Career/Vocational - Business Administration 186 D i p l o m a (2 yr.) A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a (3 yr.) Bachelor's Degree (4 yr.) Accelerated D i p l o m a (12 mo.) Business C o m p u t i n g C o - o p D i p l o m a (3 yr.) Professional Accounting Transfer Package Retail M a r k e t i n g C o - o p Program Evening Certificate Program Local Govt. A d m i n . Prof. Cert. Program Other Programs English Requirement A l l Business Administration d i p l o m a students must complete English 100 to graduate. T o be eligible for English 100 y o u must have an ' A ' i n English 12 or attain a suitable mark i n the English Diagnostic Test (EDT). The English 100 course may be taken at any time, but it is preferred that y o u take it i n the FIRST T E R M as it could be a pre-requisite for other courses. Check the course descriptions i n the following pages. Accounting/Finance Designations M a n y of the courses offered i n the D i p l o m a and Degree programs are transferable to Chartered Accountant ( C A ) , Certified General Accountant ( C G A ) , and Certified Management Accountant ( C M A ) accreditation programs. See information included w i t h specific course descriptions and the Transfer G u i d e . Currently Enrolled Students Students w h o are currently enrolled i n a Certificate, D i p l o m a or Degree program must adhere to the requirements of the program at the time of their entrance. The Department w i l l make every effort to see that the courses required for completion are made available. DIPLOMA PROGRAMS - TWO YEAR - FULL-TIME STUDIES (60 CREDITS) Students graduating w i t h a C a p i l a n o College D i p l o m a w i l l have the skills and knowledge required to be effective managers. A l l students must complete the courses listed below, w h i c h w i l l teach them to apply progressive business practices to their jobs. Courses are taught b y instructors w i t h practical, up-to-date business knowledge. M a n y of the faculty hold full or part-time positions i n their area of specialty. Class sizes are approximately 35 students, and the faculty are i n direct contact w i t h all their students. A full-time course load provides a m i n i m u m of 20 instructional hours weekly. W e suggest at least 40 hours w e e k l y of outside studies and preparation time. The first year of the d i p l o m a program w i l l provide students w i t h general business knowledge in A c c o u n t i n g , Communications, Marketing, C o m p u t i n g and Organizational Behaviour. In the second year, students may concentrate on a particular area of specialization that w i l l a l l o w them to continue their studies beyond the two-year d i p l o m a . This includes the option to obtain a bachelors degree (Bachelor of Administrative Studies, [B.A.S.]) through the O p e n Learning Agency's O p e n University. B A D M 101 B A D M 106 B C P T 121 B F I N 141 E N G 100 -FALL Management Organizational Behaviour Business C o m p u t i n g I Accounting Composition Credits 3 3 3 3 2 15 FIRST Y E A R - S P R I N G B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods B A D M 107 Business L a w I* B C P T 122 Business C o m p u t i n g II B M K T 161 Marketing C M N S 220 Business W r i t i n g & E d i t i n g 3 3 3 3 3 15 *Note: Students planning to concentrate in accounting may take B F I N 142 Financial A c c o u n t i n g I i n place of B A D M 107 Business L a w I i n the spring term. L a w must then be taken i n the second year ( B A D M 107). Students not planning to take B F I N 142 may take Marketing i n the first term and Accounting i n the second term. SECOND Y E A R - F A L L B A D M 201 Business Systems B A D M 210 Business Statistics Business Elective Business Elective General Elective S E C O N D YEAR - SPRING B F I N 241 Finance For Managers E C O N 111 M i c r o Economics Business Elective Business Elective General Elective Credits 3 3 3 3 3 15 Credits 3 3 3 3 3 15 Total D i p l o m a C r e d i t s 60 Concentrate Your Studies With Business Electives The Capilano College Business D i p l o m a allows y o u to choose courses that interest y o u . Six of the 10 second-year courses are electives, w h i c h y o u select at the end of y o u r first year. Y o u can use the electives to concentrate y o u r studies, focus on career goals or broaden your education. N o other two-year business d i p l o m a program gives y o u so m u c h flexibility in designing y o u r education. Y o u can use the Business electives to commence specialization i n any of these management areas: •Accounting •Computing •General Management "Finance •Retail M a r k e t i n g 'Marketing The following is a partial list of Business elective courses. Students p l a n n i n g to continue their studies beyond a D i p l o m a should consult a coordinator to ensure they choose the appropriate electives. B A D M 301 B A D M 302 B A D M 303 B A D M 304 B F I N 142 B H N 341 B H N 351 B M K T 360 B M K T 261 B M K T 263 IBUS 321 Operations Management H u m a n Resource Management Industrial Relations Business Policy Financial Accounting I Cost Accounting I Taxation M a r k e t i n g Research Advertising Salesmanship International Business We strongly recommend that the two general electives be University Transfer courses. Students should consider courses in Geography, Economics, Sociology, any language, etc. However, any non-business courses are acceptable. Calculus is a requirement in the B.A.S., therefore y o u may w i s h to take M A T H 107 - "Pre-Calculus for Business and Social Sciences" as a general elective i n your second year, if y o u have not obtained at least a " C " grade in M A T H 12. Registration times for second year courses are based on first-year grades. Students w i t h the highest grades have the first choice of electives. Students must maintain a m i n i m u m 2.0 G P A to continue their studies from term to term. Those w h o fail to meet the m i n i m u m level may be required to w i t h d r a w for at least one term before reapplying to the department. A D V A N C E D DIPLOMA - THIRD Y E A R SPECIALIZATION P R O G R A M (30 CREDITS) FOLLOWING A T W O - Y E A R DIPLOMA Students wanting more concentrated business knowledge may complete the A d v a n c e d Business D i p l o m a . Y o u w i l l establish y o u r area of specialization and gain specific training pertinent to management practices in General Management, A c c o u n t i n g or Marketing. A n advanced D i p l o m a requires 30 credits in addition to a Business A d m i n i s t r a t i o n D i p l o m a . To obtain an A d vanced D i p l o m a y o u must complete the courses identified Career/Vocational - Business Administration 187 b e l o w and an appropriate number of electives for a total Additional Option For Advanced Diplomas of 30 credits. Y o u may complete an additional option for any A d vanced Business A d m i n i s t r a t i o n D i p l o m a i n the following ways: 1. Complete the Core courses required for all advanced diplomas, plus all the courses required as requisites for a particular option. Indicate on your Request for Evaluation Form, that y o u w i s h to be evaluated for two options, and state what the options are. If y o u have successfully completed all courses, your d i p l o m a w i l l then read: "Business A d m i n i s t r a t i o n A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a " . Both options y o u have completed w i l l be listed immediately below, for example: " A c c o u n t i n g and Finance Options". In addition, y o u r permanent student record and transcript w i l l bear this information. 2. Complete an A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a . A t a subsequent time, y o u decide to complete the additional courses i n another option. Y o u complete these courses, then submit your Request for Evaluation together w i t h y o u r original diploma. Y o u r d i p l o m a w i l l then be reissued to read: "Business Administration A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a " . The options completed w i l l be listed i m m e d i ately below, for example: " A c c o u n t i n g and M a r k e t i n g Options." Electives offered in this program can be any business course or any course required to complete the Bachelor's Degree (B.A.S.) If y o u plan to earn a Business Degree at Capilano, y o u should carefully choose your electives to fit the Degree requirements. See your coordinator for more information. Third Year (Advanced Diploma) Courses R e q u i r e d for A l l A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a s B A D M 308 B A D M 309 B A D M 304 Management Practicum Cross-cultural Perspectives* Business Policy Credits 1.5 1.5 3.0 *This course is still under development G e n e r a l Management A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a B F I N 244 Managerial Accounting B A D M 302 H u m a n Relations B A D M 301 Operations Management Plus approved electives Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 15.0 Advanced Accounting Diploma Credits Required: B F I N 142 Financial Accounting I 3.0 Plus any six of the following courses, at least four of w h i c h must be taken i n Year 3: B F I N 341 B H N 342 B F I N 346 B H N 347 B H N 249 B H N 350 B H N 351 Cost Accounting I Cost Accounting II Financial Accounting II Financial Accounting III A c c o u n t i n g Microcomputer Applications A d v a n c e d Financial Management Taxation Advanced Marketing Diploma Required: M a r k e t i n g Research B M K T 360 Advertising B M K T 261 Salesmanship B M K T 263 Bachelor of Administrative Studies (Business 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 Plus any three of the following courses: B M K T 362 B M K T 364 B M K T 365 B M K T 367 IBUS 357 Events Marketing & Management Consumer Behaviour M a r k e t i n g Strategies & Decision M a k i n g Promotion Strategy & Analysis International Marketing 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Note: A t least four of the six marketing courses must be taken in the third year. Career/Vocational - Business Administration 188 THE BACHELOR'S DEGREE (B.A.S.) Management) C a p i l a n o College business d i p l o m a graduates have the option of pursuing the O p e n University's (OU) Bachelor of Administrative Studies degree. Capilano College students w h o complete the Business Ehploma may be eligible for a block transfer of up to 60 credits toward the O U degree. The transferability of Capilano College's three-year A d v a n c e d Business Diplomas is currently under review. The block transfer is available to recent graduates. Students w h o graduated prior to 1989 w i l l have their programs i n d i v i d u a l l y reviewed and m a y need to take additional courses to make up for any deficiencies i n the block transfer. Students may also have to make u p some courses if they received exemptions in the Capilano College program. To be eligible for the full block transfer of 60 credits toward the Bachelor of Administrative Studies degree program, graduates must meet the f o l l o w i n g requirements: • an appropriate Capilano College business d i p l o m a • a m i n i m u m G P A of 2.67 (70%) • a m i n i m u m grade of 60% for courses i n introductory economics and statistics • completion of specific course requirements w i t h i n the diploma program • completion of the diploma program w i t h i n the last seven years. Current programs are under review, but at present are available in four areas of study: General Management, Accounting, M a r k e t i n g and Computer Systems. Interested students are encouraged to inquire about offerings. D i p l o m a holders with an overall G P A of less than 2.67 or w h o have graduated seven or more years ago may also apply to the Open University for entry into the degree completion program. These students may receive a reduced block transfer. Each d i p l o m a program (except C o m p u t e r Systems) consists of three terms of study. Degree completion requirements may be met b y taking approved business courses at Capilano College, university transfer courses at Capilano College, a n d / o r courses offered by the O p e n University. A l l transfer credit is subject to O U ' s transfer credit guidelines as outlined i n the O U calendar. For more information on this program, contact the O p e n Learning Agency's Education Access Services at (604) 4313300 or 1-800-663-9711. ACCELERATED BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DIPLOMA PROGRAMS These 12-month programs are designed to offer business training for mature students. The students have the opportunity to gain a clear understanding of business principles and to refine and add to the on-the-job experience they have previously acquired. A unique feature of the Accelerated D i p l o m a Program is the credit given for work experience. For a D i p l o m a , students must obtain 60 credits, of w h i c h nine advance credits are assigned for a m i n i m u m work experience of seven years. The remaining 51 credits are earned from satisfactory completion of regular Business Administration courses. Admission Requirements A d m i t t e d students should have a m i n i m u m of seven years business experience i n industry, government, education, private business or the military. In addition, acceptance to the program is based on the nature of the applicant's work experience, maturity, aptitude and ability to manage a program of concentrated studies. Since enrolment is limited, interested students should call the Department as soon as possible to arrange an interview. Transcripts from secondary school as w e l l as from all post-secondary institutions you have attended are required w i t h your application, as w e l l as a resume. N e w students to Capilano College must complete a College application form. These are available from the Office of the Registrar or the Business A d m i n i s t r a t i o n Department. The FIRST T E R M begins i n M a y , the S E C O N D T E R M begins i n September, and the T H I R D T E R M begins i n January; each consisting of 15 weeks of instruction and encompassing 20 to 24 class hours a week. To allow for the particular educational needs of students who may have diverse w o r k i n g backgrounds, certain courses offered b y the Department may be substituted for others i n the Second and Third Term. The Coordinator's approval must be obtained. The accelerated programs normally begin i n M a y each year. The C o m p u t e r Systems Management begins i n January. Please check w i t h the program convenor to ensure when the new courses w i l l be offered. 1. ACCELERATED GENERAL MANAGEMENT S U M M E R (Classes start M a y 8) B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods B C P T 121 Business C o m p u t i n g I B F I N 141 Accounting B M K T 161 Marketing B C P T 122 Business C o m p u t i n g II FALL B A D M 107 B F I N 241 B M K T 263 B A D M 302 SPRING B A D M 301 B A D M 304 B A D M 308 B A D M 309 B H N 244 Business L a w I Finance for Managers Salesmanship H u m a n Resource Management 2 Business Electives Operations Management Business Policy Management Practicum (1.5 credits) Cross-Cultural Perspective (1.5 credits) Management Accounting 2 Business Electives 2. ACCELERATED ACCOUNTING MANAGEMENT S U M M E R (Classes start M a y 8) B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods B C P T 121 Business C o m p u t i n g I B H N 141 Accounting B H N 141 Financial Accounting I C M N S 250 Communications B A D M 201 Business Systems (optional) FALL B A D M 107 B M K T 161 Business L a w Marketing Career/Vocational - Business Administration 189 B F I N 241 B F I N 341 B F I N 346 SPRING B A D M 210 B F I N 342 B F I N 347 B F I N 350 C M P T 155 C M P T 180 Finance Managers Cost Accounting I Financial Accounting II Business Elective T E R M II - M a r . / A p r i l C M P T 153 Object Oriented Programming I C M P T 182 Introduction to Systems C M P T 191 Accounting for Managers I C M P T 222 Microcomputer Applications II Statistics Cost A c c o u n t i n g II Financial A c c o u n t i n g III Advanced Financial Management 2 Business Electives 3. ACCELERATED MARKETING MANAGEMENT S U M M E R (Classes start M a y 8) May/June B C P T 121 Business C o m p u t i n g I B F I N 141 Accounting I B M K T 161 Marketing July/August Quantitative Methods B A D M 102 Business C o m p u t i n g II BCPT122 FALL B A D M 107 B M K T 261 B M K T 263 B M K T 360 SPRING B F I N 241 B A D M 304 B A D M 308 B A D M 309 B M K T 365 B M K T 367 T E R M V - Sept./Oct. B C O P 305 N e t w o r k II C M P T 224 Microcomputer Applications IV C M P T 276 Projects i n Industry C M P T 289 Systems Implementation Total C r e d i t H o u r s Finance for Managers Business Policy Management Practicum (1.5 credits) Cross C u l t u r a l Business (1.5 credits) Marketing Strategies & Decision M a k i n g Promotion Strategy & Analysis 1 Business Elective A n y appropriate Business Administration course of 3 credits. 4. ACCELERATED COMPUTER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT Capilano College offers a 10-month program leading to a D i p l o m a i n Computer Systems Management. Thirty-two seats w i l l be available for qualified students w h o are prepared to devote 10 months to this intense daytime program. The program is offered i n two-month segments to enable y o u to concentrate intensely over a shorter period of time. Program Content Career/Vocational - Business Administration 190 T E R M III - M a y / J u n e B C O P 231 Data Management C M P T 223 Microcomputer Applications III C M P T 154 Object Oriented P r o g r a m m i n g II C M P T 293 Systems Design TERM IV-July/Aug. B C O P 215 Network I C M P T 184 V i s u a l Basic C M P T 172 Employment Preparation C M P T 230 Operating Systems Business L a w Advertising I Salesmanship Marketing Research 2 Business Electives T E R M 1 - JanVFeb. B S M G 160 Marketing C M P T 152 Structured Programming Quantitative Methods for Managers Microcomputer Applications I Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 3X) 12.0 1.5 3.0 3.0 3J) 10.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 12.0 3.0 3.0 1.5 3J) 10.5 3.0 1.5 1.5 3j) 9.0 54.0 BUSINESS COMPUTING CO-OPERATIVE DIPLOMA PROGRAM (BCOP) This unique, three-year program combines cooperative workplace practicums w i t h an innovative c u r r i c u l u m that follows the first year of the regular Business D i p l o m a program. Job placements for qualifying students are fulltime for a four-month term and are made through arrangements between the College and employers. Students, i n their second and third years, w o r k closely w i t h an advisor to gain the best possible placement. U p o n completion of their four academic terms and two w o r k terms, graduates receive a Business D i p l o m a w i t h C o - o p designation. A d v a n c e d standing may be granted to qualifying students. Career Opportunities W i t h the comprehensive training provided, graduates w i l l secure positions as business analysts, programmers, sales representatives, and computer user support. Program Content Prerequisite: First Year Business A d m i n . D i p l o m a Program or equivalent T E R M 1 - FALL B C O P 131 Introduction to P r o g r a m m i n g & Programming Logic B C O P 171 The Developmental Tools of Information Systems B C O P 204 Business C o m p u t i n g III B C O P 205 A p p l i e d Statistics for Business B C O P 206 Accounting for Managers Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3XJ 15.0 *Plus a series of non-credit seminars on e m p l o y m e n t orientation. T E R M 2 - SPRING B C O P 214 Business C o m p u t i n g IV B C O P 215 Network I B C O P 231 Data Management C M P T 184 Visual Basic C M P T 189 Introduction to a T h i r d Generation Language TERM 3 - SUMMER B C O P 301 Co-op Placement 1 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3TJ 15.0 6XJ 6.0 T E R M 4 - FALL B C O P 303 Information Systems and Client Server 3.0 B C O P 304 Business C o m p u t i n g V 3.0 B C O P 305 N e t w o r k II 3.0 B C O P 306 C + + Level I 3.0 C M P T 230 Operating Systems Concepts 3JJ 15.0 T E R M 5 - SPRING B C O P 302 Co-op Placement II 6XJ 6.0 TERM 6 - SUMMER B C O P 322 Directed Studies 3.0 C M P T 289 Systems Implementation 3.0 B C O P 325 N e t w o r k III 3.0 B C O P 326 C + + Level II 3.0 B S M G 200 Business Policy 3TJ 15.0 T o t a l Program Credits 102.0 In the dynamic w o r l d of data processing, nothing is static! A s a result, we are constantly i m p r o v i n g and updating the Business C o m p u t i n g C o - o p Program i n a balanced manner. W e strive to blend the mainstream of data processing w i t h the leading edge of the emerging technologies. Therefore, the components of the program and the details of the courses are subject to adjustment without notice. PROFESSIONAL ACCOUNTING TRANSFER PACKAGE This package of courses is designed to maximize transfer credit to professional accounting associations: Certified General Accountants ( C G A ) , Certified Management Accountants Society of B . C . ( C M A ) , and Chartered Accountants ( C A ) . Student's wanting to maximize their transfer credit i n the shortest possible time w o u l d select courses from these recommended below. Students w i l l not receive a d i p l o m a or certificate without further courses. S U M M E R (Classes start M a y 8) B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods B F I N 141 Accounting I C M N S 250 Business W r i t i n g B F I N 142 Financial A c c o u n t i n g B A D M 201 Business Systems B C P T 121 Business C o m p u t i n g I 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 FALL B A D M 107 B F I N 341 B F I N 346 B F I N 241 Business L a w I Cost A c c o u n t i n g I Financial A c c o u n t i n g II Finance for Managers 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 SPRING B F I N 342 B F I N 347 B F I N 350 B A D M 210 Cost A c c o u n t i n g II Financial A c c o u n t i n g III A d v a n c e d Financial Management Business Statistics 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 These offerings are subject to change. RETAIL MARKETING CO-OP PROGRAM Contact Persons: Charlene H i l l , 986-1911, local 2313 D o u g Loblaw, 986-1911, local 2342 General Information 1. After one year of successfully completing the course requirements of this program a student can obtain a Retail M a r k e t i n g C o - o p Certificate. 2. U p o n successful completion of the 1 year Co-op Certificate program 6 courses w i l l be transferable to the Business A d m i n i s t r a t i o n D i p l o m a Program. A student could then go on to complete the D i p l o m a requirements. 3. A student w h o completes a Business A d m i n i s t r a t i o n D i p l o m a w i t h a m i n i m u m G P A of 2.67 (70%) may be eligible for a "block" transfer of u p to 60 credits toward the O p e n University's Bachelor of Administrative Studies Degree (BAS). Students w i s h i n g to complete Career/Vocational - Business Administration ~191 their degree requirements may do so through Capilano College and the O U . For more information on the O U degree program please refer to the complete description i n the course calendar. This exciting new Co-op program offers something for everyone, i n c l u d i n g the opportunity to earn your tuition and more while y o u study the practical w o r l d of Retail Marketing. Career Opportunities M a n a g i n g y o u r o w n business Store Manager - independent or chain Department Manager Wholesale Sales Representative Manufacturer's Sales Representative Manufacturer's Agent Fashion Promotion Marketing Research-Field Operator Sales Manager Advertising Manager Buyer and Central Buyer V i s u a l Presentation Specialist Sales Promotion Manager Sales Representative Consumer Products Marketing Assistant Retail or Design Consultant 3.0 FIRST Y E A R - S P R I N G 3.0 B M K T 161 Marketing 3.0 B M K T 263 Salesmanship 1.5 R M C P 154 A d v e r t i s i n g Production 1.5 R M C P 157 Special Event Management R M C P 173 Retail Finance/Store Management II 3.0 3£ R M C P 181 Strategic Retail B u y i n g 15.0 Instructional Credits Total Instructional Credits Total Co-op W o r k Credits 30.0 3.0 EVENING CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS The courses i n these programs, beginning i n September and January each year, w i l l teach the student basic managerial skills that are of practical value i n a w i d e variety of jobs. Classes are conducted b y Department faculty and industry specialtists and offered M o n d a y to Thursday evenings d u r i n g the term. Those enrolled i n the programs may take the courses at their chosen pace. A number of credit courses from both the full-time D i p l o m a Programs and the part-time Certificate Programs are offered evenings d u r i n g the Spring and Fall terms. 1. BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION CERTIFICATE Admission Requirements A Certificate i n Business Administration w i l l be awarded after successful completion of the two required courses and a choice of any four additional three-credit courses chosen from the Business A d m i n i s t r a t i o n evening or daytime offerings. • H i g h School d i p l o m a • A c a d e m i c M a t h 11 w i t h a C or better • E n g l i s h 12 w i t h a C+ or better • C a n a d i a n citizenship or landed immigrant status • An interview may be required Note: A l l applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted directly to the Office of the Registrar, together w i t h official transcripts and other pertinent documents. The program has been limited to 35 seats. Program Content FIRST Y E A R - F A L L B A D M 101 Management Business C o m p u t i n g I B C P T 121 Report W r i t i n g C M N S 152 Creative Retail Strategies R M C P 164 Retail Technology/Independent R M C P 172 Store Management I Instructional Credits C O - O P P L A C E M E N T - December-January R M C P 190 Fall C o - o p Placement Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3£ 15.0 Note: The students w i l l be given 12 hours of pre-employment seminars prior to their co-op w o r k experience period. Substitution may be allowed at the discretion of the evening program coordinator. REQUIRED B A D M 108 B M K T 161 Intro, to Business Marketing OPTIONAL B A D M 102 B A D M 103 B A D M 106 B A D M 107 B A D M 201 B A D M 210 B A D M 307 B A D M 268 B C P T 121 B C P T 122 B H N 141 B H N 142 Quantitative Methods I Supervisory Skills Organizational Behaviour Business L a w I Business Systems Business Statistics Business L a w II Entrepreneurship/Small Bus. Management Business C o m p u t i n g I Business C o m p u t i n g II Accounting Financial Accounting A n y other courses offered by the Business Administration Department. Career/Vocational - Business Administration 192 2. ADVANCED BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION CERTIFICATE A second or advanced certificate w i l l be awarded following successful completion of an additional four threecredit courses. These must be chosen from the Business Administration evening or daytime offerings. N o t e : A student must attain a 2.0 G P A or better to qualify for either certificate. 3. BUSINESS COMPUTING CERTIFICATE A Certificate in Business C o m p u t i n g w i l l be awarded after successful completion of the three required courses and a choice of any three additional three-credit courses chosen from the Business Administration evening or daytime offerings. REQUIRED B A D M 201 B C P T 121 B C P T 122 Business Systems Business C o m p u t i n g I Business C o m p u t i n g II The four courses described below are recognized by the M . O . A . and Board of Examiners as being transferable for credit toward the Intermediate Certificate in Municipal Administration. (For more details about the Board of E x a m i n e r s ' / M . O . A . Certificate Programs, contact Lillian Whittier, Executive Director, M u n i c i p a l Officers' Association, Victoria at 604-383-7032.) O n completion of the following four P A D M courses (Local Government Administration, Local Government Services, Local Government L a w , and M u n i c i p a l Finance in British Columbia), plus one other course, successful candidates w i l l be eligible to receive a Capilano College Professional Certificate in Local Government Administration. Courses P A D M 200 Local Government A d m i n i s t r a t i o n 3.0 P A D M 201 Local Government Service 3.0 P A D M 202 M u n i c i p a l Finance i n British C o l u m b i a 3.0 P A D M 203 M u n i c i p a l L a w i n British C o l u m b i a 3.0 B A D M , Academic or other course approved by the Department. 3.0 15.0 OPTIONAL B A D M 103 B A D M 106 B A D M 107 B A D M 108 B M K T 161 B F I N 141 B F I N 142 Supervisory Skills Organizational Behaviour Business L a w I Intro, to Business Marketing Accounting Financial Accounting A n y other courses offered by the Business Administration Department. LOCAL GOVERNMENT ADMINISTRATION PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATE This program is designed w i t h and for professionals currently employed by Municipalities, Regional Districts, Improvement Districts, or supporting agencies i n British Columbia. The purpose of the program is to provide opportunities for participants to gain increased knowledge of the political and organizational realities of local governments in B.C. as w i l l as identifying opportunities for change w i t h i n these systems. It is expected that participants w i l l be more effective managers, leaders and change agents as a result of their involvement in the program. The Education Committee of the M u n i c i p a l Officers' Association of British C o l u m b i a and the Provincial Board of Examiners has sanctioned several courses of study offered through the College and University systems i n British C o l u m b i a w h i c h , when supplemented by work experience i n B . C . local government w i l l lead to Provincial Certification. OTHER PROGRAMS UNDER CONSIDERATION 1. EVENT MANAGEMENT CERTIFICATE In response to the ever changing needs of Canadian business, the College's Department of Business A d m i n i s tration is developing a program offering courses leading to certification i n Event Management. Students w i l l study under professionals i n a unique environment and at a time that suits their commitments. Courses w i l l be planned i n both seminar format and the traditional lecture model. Subjects include Event Marketing, L a w , M e d i a Relations, Proposal W r i t i n g , Advertising, Merchandising, Financial Management, and Sales and Event Management. 2. INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS PROGRAM Recognizing that w o r l d trade has assumed a position of major importance i n the global community, the Business Department is developing an International Business program that w i l l provide a student w i t h a professional level of competence i n the international arena. This program w i l provide students w i t h the knowledge, cultural awareness and business skill required to d o business i n the ever g r o w i n g Pacific R i m countries. Career/Vocational - Business Administration 193 3. BUSINESS DEPARTMENT COOPERATIVE EDUCATION PROGRAM standard financial models i n analysis, problem solving, and decision-making. C o m p u t e r spreadsheet applications are utilized. This program while currently under development, is scheduled to start i n September. Students w o u l d combine classroom studies w i t h workplace experience. Qualifying students w o u l d work a two four month paid placement. U p o n completion of the two w o r k terms and the four academic terms the student w o u l d graduate w i t h a Business Administration d i p l o m a w i t h Co-op designation. Current research indicates most graduated student gain successful employment w i t h their workplace sponsors. Requirements: 1. Acceptance into a Business Administration full-time program or a m i n i m u m C+ i n M a t h 11 or equivalent. 2. A w o r k i n g knowledge of computer spreadsheets. COURSE DESCRIPTIONS REQUIRED DURING THE PERIOD COVERED BY THIS CALENDAR Applications of human relations management, i.e. leadership, power, authority, group dynamics, formal and informal organization, communications, conflict and the introduction of change. Note: These course descriptions are here as a reference for students enrolled i n programs requiring completion of these courses. Some descriptions refer to courses offered by the O p e n University and other departments of Capilano College. Y o u may w i s h to consult other areas of this calendar when seeking further data on specific courses. Previous course numbers are s h o w n i n brackets for reference only. Note: CA, CGA, and CMA Transfer Courses The Department offers a number of courses that provide transfer credit to other college and university programs. Refer to the B. C . Transfer G u i d e for details. In addition, the following professional bodies currently recognize courses taken at Capilano College: Institute of Chartered Accountants ( C A . ) Certified General Accountants Association (C.G.A.) Certified Management Accountants Society of B.C. (C.M.A.) Business Administration Course Descriptions BADM 101 Management (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Students w i l l take 4 modules from a list of mandatory and optional subjects w h i c h include Current Events, O r a l Presentation, M o d e r n Management, Ethics, Problem Solving and Creative T h i n k i n g . The course instructors w i l l facilitate discussion and integrate topics through the use of contemporary business issues. BADM 102 (BSMG 170) Quantitative Methods (3) (3,0,1) (S) This course provides a strong foundation i n the mathematics of finance and business. The student w i l l utilize Career/Vocational - Business Administration 194 BADM 103 (BSMG 163) Supervisory Skills (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Study of human elements i n organizations, w i t h emphasis on g r o u p behaviour. Concepts i n persuasion, guidance and understanding of the i n d i v i d u a l w i t h i n the group. BADM 106 (BSMG 175) Organizational Behaviour (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) The objective of this course is to allow the student to develop the necessary skills and conceptual tools to both understand and deal effectively w i t h human behaviour i n organizations. These skills are of at least two kinds: 1. interpersonal, that is, relating more effectively w i t h other i n d i v i d u a l s and groups, and 2. analytical, to be able to perceive and understand situations accurately, and make effective decisions based on this understanding. BADM 107 Business Law I (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Students w i l l be introduced to the components of the C a n a d i a n legal system, and w i l l examine the effect of both c o m m o n and statute l a w on business relationships. A study of the basic principles of commercial l a w w i l l provide the foundation for a detailed examination of Contract L a w , i n c l u d i n g the sale of goods, consumer protection legislation, and employment and labour l a w , as w e l l as an examination of tort law, company and partnership law, and creditor remedies. BADM 108 (BSMG 187) Introduction to Business (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) This course w i l l explain the five key tasks i n managing an enterprise: Planning, Acquisition of Resources, Organization, Activation and Control. In addition, the key organizational functions of Marketing, Production, Finance and Personnel are covered. The course is essentially an overview of the theoretical framework of the task of management. BADM 109 (BSMG 164) Retail Mathematics (3) (3,0,1) (S) This course provides a practical knowledge of the mathematical methods utilized i n retail operations. Students w i l l develop the ability to efficiently solve various types of problems relevant to retailing. BADM 201 (BSMG 192) Business Systems (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Prerequisite: B C P T 121 w i t h C grade or better. Students w i l l be required to apply the concepts and theories learned i n their first year courses to solve integrated business problems i n a logical and literate manner. The importance of accurate, dependable, management information for problem solving w i l l be illustrated through case study analysis and a major group project. BADM 210 (BSMG 171) Business Statistics (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) This course provides a strong foundation i n basic business statistics emphasizing analysis and decision-making i n the face of certainty and uncertainty. Spreadsheet applications of descriptive, inferential, and bivariate models are utilized. BADM 268 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Entreprenuership/Small Business Management Skills needed in problem solving and researching the small business environment w i l l be learned and applied. Business owners, managers and w o u l d be decision makers are encouraged to take this course. The instructor and guest lecturers from the business community w i l l lead students through detailed aspects of business from finance to h u m a n relations. The production of the business plan w i l l be discussed and part of a plan w i l l be written. BADM 301 (BSMG 262) Operations Management (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Prerequisite: B A D M 210 w i t h C grade or better. Of special interest to generalist managers and operators of small businesses, this one term course familiarizes the student w i t h the principles, practices and functions of production-operations management, using modern decision-making aids. Foundation skills i n production and control (inventory, quality and cost control) are examined using computing devices and procedures. BADM 302 (BSMG 268) (3) Human Resource Management (3,0,1) (F,S) small and larger business. Special emphasis w i l l be placed on the concept of personnel management being the responsibility of A L L management, not just the Personnel Department. BADM 303 Industrial Relations (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) This course deals w i t h the management of employment relations as conducted through collective bargaining. Practical problems are examined i n the light of public policy negotiating processes and dispute resolution. BADM 304 (BSMG 200) Business Policy (3) (3,0,1)(F,S) Prequisite: 75 credits The student gains a basic understanding of the concepts, purposes, and procedures of business policy, and an integrated view of the strategic management of business enterprise. Participating i n a practical business simulation game is a major component of the course. For accelerated, A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a and O p e n University (pending) students only. BADM 307 (BSMG 241) Business Law II (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Prerequisite: Preferably Business L a w I, or an introductory college or university course i n commercial or contract law, or by permission of the instructor. A second law course w i l l examine the effect of both c o m m o n and statute l a w o n business relationships. A review of the basic principles of commercial l a w w i l l lead to the examination of more complex contractual relationships such as agency, insurance, bailment, real property, commercial tenancy, legal devices for securing credit i n c l u d i n g mortgages, and bankruptcy. Other topics include competition l a w , management and operation of a corporation and intellectual property. BADM 308 Management Practicum (1.5) (1.5,0,-5) (S) Prerequisite: 75 credits Students w i l l spend t w o weeks gaining practical experience i n the workplace. W h i l e placements are the primary responsibility of each student, assistance w i l l be p r o v i d e d where possible by the faculty and program convenor. In some cases, a directed studies project m a y be undertaken in lieu of the practicum placement. For Accelerated and A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a students only. This course provides the student w i t h a basic, functional understanding of current p e r s o n n e l / h u m a n resourcemanagement concepts and applications i n developing Career/Vocational - Business Administration 195 BADM 309 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Issues in Cross-Cultural Business Prerequisite: 75 credits Contact w i t h other cultures i n business, whether at home or overseas, is inevitable. This contact includes customers, clients, partners, employers, employees and coworkers. Issues i n Cross-Cultural Business provides an overview of culture and it's components, w i t h an emphasis on the impact of values, attitudes and beliefs on both business and social expectations and behaviors. Awareness of one's o w n learned cultural foundation is applied to developing understanding, insight and practical skills i n dealing w i t h other cultures. A l s o included is specific information on business practices, expectations and behaviours for a number of cultures of significance to C a n a d i a n Business. BCOP 131 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Introduction to Programming and Programming Logic This is the foundation course for all programming skills developed b y the program. Design techniques using hierarchy charts and flowcharts w i l l be studied. The course w i l l use a computer language to demonstrate the structured programming skills necessary for good programming. BCOP 171 (3) (3,0,1) (S) The Developmental Tools of Information Systems A traditional look at the systems of development process. M o d e l l i n g and charting w i l l be included. The tools and methodology applied by the systems analyst w i l l be studied. The course covers the system life cycle, system flow charting, Data Flow Diagrams, P E R T / C P M Networks. BCOP 204 Business Computing III (3) (3,0,1)(F) Prerequisite: B C P T 122 w i t h m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. This course extends the students knowledge of D O S batch files to configure the modern P C for best performance. The course also provides more i n depth instruction on graphic presentations and Desktop Publishing i n the W i n d o w s environment. This course provides a strong foundation i n business statistical models and techniques emphasizing analysis and decision m a k i n g i n the face of certainty and uncertainty. Data Analysis software (SPSS) is utilized for applications of descriptive, inferential, bivariate and multiple regression models. BCOP 206 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Applied Statistics for Business Prerequisite: Acceptance into the full time Business C o m p u t i n g Co-op Program or a m i n i m u m C+ i n M a t h 11 or equivalent. A w o r k i n g knowledge of W i n d o w s . Career/Vocational - Business Administration 196 (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: B F I N 141 w i t h m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. Study of managerial and financial information requirements and controls necessary to support specific decisions w i t h an emphasis on budgeting, forecasting, controlling and decision making. BCOP 214 Business Computing IV (3) (3,0,1)(S) Prerequisite: B C O P 204 w i t h m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. Students w i l l develop applications for database management using the programming features of the D B M S . BCOP 215 Network I (3) (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: B C O P 131 and B C O P 204 w i t h a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. A n introduction to the field of data communications and networking, covering networking hardware/operating system concepts, modem, W A N , and L A N standards and protocols. BCOP 231 Data Management (3) (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: B C O P 171 w i t h m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. Data modeling, database design, enterprise modeling - a top-down view of organization and data control. BCOP 301 (6) (Su) (6) (S) (3) (3,0,1) (F) Co-op Placement I BCOP 302 Co-op Placement II BCOP 303 BCOP 205 (3) Accounting for Managers Information Systems & Client Server Prerequisite: B C O P 171 w i t h m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. A n introduction to client-server architecture and software using a systems approach. BCOP 304 (3) (3,0,1) (F) BCPT 122 (BSMG 222) (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Business Computing V Business Computing II Prerequisite: B C O P 214 w i t h m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. Prerequisite: B C P T 121 w i t h a m i n i m u m C - grade, or b y permission of the instructor. Development of solutions to mission critical business problems using advanced client/server-based tools. This course is a continuation of B C P T 121, p r o v i d i n g further uses of microcomputers i n business. Students w i l l receive hands-on experience w i t h spreadsheet and presentation graphics software a n d W i n d o w s software. BCOP 305 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Network II Prerequisite: B C O P 215 w i t h m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. (3) (3,0,1) (F) C ++ Level I Prerequisite: B C O P 131, C M P T 184, B C O P 214 w i t h m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. A n introduction to object-oriented programming using C++. BCOP 322 (3) (3,0,1) (Su) Directed Studies Prerequisite: Successful completion of year 2 of B C O P program. A student focused, computer related, research course. BCOP 325 (3) (3,0,1) (Su) Network III Prerequisite: B C O P 305 w i t h m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. N o v e l l 4.x System Management. BCOP 326 C + + Level II (3) (3,0,1) (Su) (3,0,1) (F,S) This second-year course helps students acquire skills to understand and manipulate sophisticated presentation, graphics and desktop publishing software, and related hardware, for the purpose of p r o d u c i n g h i g h quality business presentations and advertising materials o n a personal computer. BFIN 141 Accounting (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) This course is an introduction to financial concepts and business principles. Students w i l l record business transactions and create financial statements. A l s o they w i l l be exposed to a broad range of topics including budgeting, legal compliance, asset management and financial statement analysis. (When combined w i t h Financial A c c o u n t i n g I, this course w i l l exempt students from professional accounting association courses e.g. C.A., C.G.A., C.M.A.) This course is designed to prepare the student for courses in Managerial Accounting and Financial Management. BFIN 142 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Financial Accounting I Prerequisite: B C O P 306 w i t h m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. C o n t i n u i n g introduction and overview of object-oriented p r o g r a m m i n g principles using C + +. BCPT 121 (BSMG 180) Business Computing I (3) Business Computing Prerequisite: B C P T 122, Business C o m p u t i n g II (grade C or better) N o v e l l 3.x System Management. BCOP 306 BCPT 221 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) A n introduction to the use of microcomputers i n business. This course provides hands-on experience with w o r d processing, data management and Graphic User Interface software. A l s o , it looks at the operating system and its functions. Students w i l l examine the uses of computers today a n d the selection process for acquiring hardware and software. Prerequisite: B S M G 178 w i t h at least a C - grade, B F I N 141 w i t h at least a C - grade or O T E C 217 w i t h at least a C+ grade. This course is an introduction to the application of accounting principles and concepts. It includes a detailed study of source documents, the maintaining of books and records, internal control procedures, and preparing financial statements. (When combined w i t h B F I N 141 this course w i l l exempt students from professional accounting association courses e.g. C . A . , C . G . A . , C . M . A . ) BFIN 241 (BSMG 267) (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Finance for Managers Prerequisite: B F I N 141 and B A D M 102 w i t h at least C grade i n both courses. Career/Vocational - Business Administration 197 In this practical financial management course students study financial management techniques. They apply this knowledge to business decisions. Topics i n this course include: evaluating business performance, financial institutions and markets, valuation of financial assets, obtaining financing, managing assets and international finance. Contemporary financial issues are discussed throughout this course. BFIN 244 (BSMG 291, BFIN 343) (3) Management Accounting (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: B F I N 141 w i t h a m i n i m u m C - grade. This course introduces students to the specialized area of Management Accounting. It provides an overview of controls affected internally b y management using the tools of budgets, costing and analysis. Planning for an organization w i l l be examined from both the capital and operations perspectives. BFIN 249 (BSMG 252) (3) Accounting Microcomputer Applications (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: B F I N 142 w i t h a m i n i m u m C - grade. (3) (3,0,2) (F) A study of organizational decision m a k i n g and planning using accounting tools. Topics include the nature of accounting controls, c o m m o n control methods, measures of management performance, and the role of the management cost accountant. (C.G.A., C . M . A . , and C A . Transferable w i t h B F I N 342) (3) (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: B F I N 341 w i t h a m i n i m u m C - grade. A more in-depth study of subjects covered i n Cost Accounting I. Cost determination for manufacturing operations, planning and cost control systems, performance evaluation methods, and strategic decision-making methods. (C.G.A., C . M . A . and C A . Transferable w i t h B F I N 341) Career/Vocational - Business Administration 198 Prerequisite: B F I N 241, B F I N 141. A central theme of this course is investors u s i n g securities to create investment portfolios. This is accomplished b y studying such topics as: types of securities, security markets, m o d e r n portfolio theory, active asset management, balancing risk and return, and security valuation techniques. BFIN 346 (BSMG 255) Financial Accounting II (3) (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: B F I N 142 w i t h a m i n i m u m C - grade. This course studies the theories u n d e r l y i n g financial statement presentations, and is a logical continuation and reinforcement of the material covered i n B F I N 142. The course encompasses the study of Financial A c c o u n t i n g at the intermediate level. (C.G.A., C . M . A . a n d C A . Transferable w i t h B F I N 347) BFIN 347 (BSMG 256) Financial Accounting III (3) (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: B F I N 346 w i t h a m i n i m u m C - grade. A sequel to B F I N 346 w h i c h examines current developments i n financial accounting and their effects o n financial statement presentation. (C.G.A., C . M . A . and C A . Transferable w i t h B F I N 346) Transferable to S F U . BFIN 350 (BSMG 260/261) (3) Advanced Financial Management Prerequisite: B F I N 142 w i t h a m i n i m u m C - . BFIN 342 (BSMG 274) Cost Accounting II (3,0,1) (S) Transferable to S F U . Students w i l l complete microcomputer accounting implementation projects using A C C P A C accounting software. They w i l l be expected to demonstrate their understanding of the practical constraints of internal control i n the A C C P A C environment. Systems covered w i l l include general ledger, A / R and A / P (inventory optional). BFIN 341 (BSMG 264) Cost Accounting I BFIN 344 (3) Personal Investment Management (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: B F I N 142, B A D M 102 and B F I N 241 w i t h a m i n i m u m C - grade. The content of this course concentrates o n the development of analytical and conceptual skills for financial decision-making. The course places emphasis o n capital asset pricing models, capital budgeting a n d capital structures. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . Transferable w i t h B F I N 241) BFIN 351 (BSMG 286) Taxation (3) (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: B F I N 142 w i t h a m i n i m u m C - grade. This course familiarizes the student w i t h the C a n a d i a n income tax system as it applies to corporations, shareholders, and unincorporated businesses, so that the student can identify potential tax problem areas, complete the basic compliance forms, and appreciate its impact o n some business decisions. (Transferable to C . M . A . and CA.) BMKT 161 (BSMG 160) Marketing (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) This course covers the full spectrum of C a n a d i a n marketing of consumer products and services including: Market segmentation, consumer behaviour, products, packaging, distribution and promotion. Students w i l l analyze case problems and prepare a report about "real-life" product or service from a consumer point of view. Videos, guest speakers and in-class discussion about marketing topics w i l l assist i n the learning experience. BMKT 261 (BSMG 273) Advertising (3) (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: B M K T 161. This course w i l l examine the C a n a d i a n and American advertising industry from both micro and macro perspectives. It w i l l enable the student to grasp the basic theoretical and practical approaches to advertising and provide an insight into the various aspects of advertising history, creativity, communication systems, media choice, and other functions. This is not a course o n designing, creating, and preparing specific types of advertising, but is meant to serve as an overview of what advertising is and h o w it relates to other marketing concepts and operations. BMKT 263 (BSMG 230) Salesmanship (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) A n introduction to professional selling. C o m m u n i c a t i o n basics; i n c l u d i n g effective listening, probing, problem finding and solving, and creativity w i l l be covered. Specific techniques of professional selling including prospecting, qualifying and contracting prospects. The course w i l l also explore, i n depth, the organization and management of sales activities. BMKT 360 (BSMG 275) Marketing Research (3) (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisites: B M K T 161 and B A D M 210. A n introductory course indicating h o w to make the most out of marketing research. T h r o u g h practical applications of a research project, students w i l l learn the elements of research design, basic methods of collecting data, analysis and reporting. Applications of C a n a d i a n and A m e r i c a n research w i l l be studied. BMKT 362 (3) Event Marketing and Management (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: B M K T 161. The trend i n business is to extend marketing dollars and obvious methods i n creating special events. This course w i l l introduce the student to the strategy i n creating special events or attractions including product choice, c o m m u n i t y fit, c o m m u n i t y resources, market analysis, sponsor identification and benefits, administrative structure, volunteer management, public relations, media relations and management commitment. B . C . case studies w i l l be used. BMKT 364 Consumer Behaviour (3) (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: B M K T 161, B K M T 360. Today, as never before, studying the behaviour of consumers is paramount for anyone pursuing a business career, especially i n the marketing area. A blend of both concepts and applications from the field of consumer behaviour w i l l form the basis of this course. Students should find this subject very interesting and motivational w h e n applied to several aspects of business management i n c l u d i n g marketing research, creative advertising, team b u i l d i n g and environmental marketing. Research projects, case discussions and problem s o l v i n g w i l l be stressed i n both i n d i v i d u a l and team activities. BMKT 365 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Marketing Strategies and Decision Making Prerequisite: B M K T 161. This course w i l l explore in greater depth the concepts of values and lifestyles, product development, service marketing, positioning, strategic planning, tactical promotion, international marketing and marketing notfor-profit organizations. The focus w i l l be o n analyzing marketing problems, developing strategic decisionmaking skills and a p p l y i n g "hands-on" tactical solutions for results. Guest lecturers, projects and special field trips w i l l be used to enhance the classroom components. BMKT 366 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Professional Sales & Management Prerequisite: B M K T 263. This course w i l l cover two main topics, advanced professional selling techniques and sales force management. Students w i l l develop and practise their selling skills i n class and o n a real-life sales project. The tools and systems of sales management w i l l also be explored to prepare the i n d i v i d u a l for the human resource factor related to that type of position. BMKT 367 (BSMG 279) (3) Promotion Strategy and Analysis (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: B M K T 360 and B M K T 261. This is a course dealing w i t h the development of an advertising campaign. Students w i l l study campaign strategy i n c l u d i n g h o w it is planned and organized i n Career/Vocational - Business Administration 199 cooperation w i t h the production, marketing, sales and finance departments as w e l l as the use of outside agencies. Some time w i l l be spent w i t h advertising research as a pre and post control factor. BSMG 160 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Marketing/Sales CMPT 180 Provides an orientation to microcomputers i n business; i n c l u d i n g w o r d processing, communicating w i t h operating systems and spreadsheets. CMPT 182 A n overview of marketing as applied to computer and related markets and products. Students w i l l participate i n class discussions related to product planning, research, promotion and distribution systems. Each student w i l l make a sales presentation to the class. Introduction to Systems (3) (3,0,1) (F) (3) Provides a basic understanding of systems concepts and development of specific skills: form design, coding, flow charting, life-cycle phases and related written c o m m u n i cation. CMPT 184 (3) (3,0,1) (Su) A n introduction to object oriented programing using C++. (3,0,1) (Su) Prerequisite: C M P T 184 and C M P T 223 w i t h a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. Continuation of object-oriented programming and design using C + +. (3) A p p l i c a t i o n of object oriented visual development techniques to produce W i n d o w s applications. A l s o a foundation of the W i n d o w s p r o g r a m m i n g tools, A P I s , D L L s , D D E and O L E w i l l be studied. CMPT 189 Prerequisite: C M P T 152 w i t h a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. CMPT 154 (3) Object Oriented Programming II Prerequisite: C M P T 152 and C M P T 180 w i t h a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. (3,0,1) (S) Object Oriented Programming I CMPT 155 (3) Visual Basic Introduction to logic and program design. This course concentrates o n planning, designing and flow charting programs for business related problems. The m a i n part of the course is theory based w i t h some hands-on practical w o r k i n the latter weeks using a m o d e m p r o g r a m m i n g language. CMPT 153 (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: N o n e . Structured Programming Prerequisite: N o n e . (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: None. Prerequisite: N o n e CMPT 152 (3) Microcomputer Applications I (3,0,1) (S) Quantitative Methods for Managers Prerequisite: Acceptance into the full-time program o r permission of the instructor. (3) (3,0,1) (S) Intro to a Third Generation Language Prerequisite: B C O P 131 or C M P T 152 w i t h C o r better. Organization and writing of programs, program structure and language, test editing and compilation. Further, students w i l l learn h o w to handle I / O for disk and reports. Emphasis w i l l be placed o n developing typical business programs. CMPT 191 Accounting for Managers I (3) (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: None. Develops an understanding of the elements of the accounting cycle. Introduces basic accounting concepts and procedures as a basis for financial decisions. Emphasis w i l l be placed o n accounting information, systems and control. A survey of the basic quantitative tools used to a i d decision making. Financial and statistical concepts, methods and applications w i l l be examined. CMPT 222 CMPT 172 Prerequisite: C M P T 180 w i t h a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. (1.5) (1.5,0,-5) (Su) Employment Preparation Prerequisite: N o n e . Job search skills, career preparation, resume w r i t i n g , interview techniques and personal development. Career/Vocational - Business Administration 200 (3) (3,0,1) (Su) Microcomputer Applications II Provides a basic understanding of microcomputer concepts, hardware and software selection criteria, and system and application software. Provides hands-on experience w i t h W i n d o w s , spreadsheets and presentation graphics. CMPT 223 (3) (3,0,1) (Su) Microcomputer Applications III Prerequisite: C M P T 222 w i t h a m i n i m u m ' C grade or the process managers go through i n "internationalizing" their business, i n c l u d i n g h o w uncontrollable elements of international markets can impact business. permission of the instructor. IBUS 334 A n introduction to x B A S E concepts, databases, and Cross Cultural Relations programming. CMPT 224 (1.5) (3,0,1) (F) Microcomputer Applications IV Prerequisite: C M P T 223 w i t h a m i n i m u m 'C grade or permission of the instructor. Application of graphics and desktop publishing development techniques i n the production of presentations i n a W i n d o w s environment. (3) (3,0,1) (S) The objective of this course is to increase the student's cross-cultural awareness i n business settings. It looks at h o w different cultures negotiate and regard contracts, interpret commitments and deal with supplies and consumers. IBUS 340 (3) (3,0,0) International Trade Law Operating Systems International trade conventions and agreements, the legal processes of i m p o r t i n g and exporting, and the challenge of dealing w i t h conflicting domestic laws between countries w i l l be studied. Prerequisite: C M P T 184, C M P T 223 w i t h a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. IBUS 357 CMPT 230 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Comprehensive knowledge of the w i d e l y used operating systems: U N I X and M S - D O S . Some emphasis on file structures and recovery from hardware/software errors as w e l l as the operating system's Job Control Language. CMPT 276 (1.5) (1.5,0,.5) (F) Projects in Industry - Practicum W o r k experience w i t h host companies for the purpose of a p p l y i n g knowledge to complete an industry-oriented project. CMPT 289 Systems Implementation (3) (3,0,1) (F) (3) Prerequisite: IBUS 321 This course is an in-depth study of marketing internationally . It assumes the students understands uncontrollable variables i n a foreign market (as covered i n IBUS 321) and goes directly into the controllable variables and the management of marketing programs. IBUS 366 (3) International Banking and Finance (Course under development.) IBUS 370 Prerequisite: C M P T 293 w i t h a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. (3,0,1) (S) International Marketing (3) (3,0,0,) Customs and Documentation A project based course where students implement an online computer system a p p l y i n g analysis and design concepts from the System Development Life Cycle. This course w i l l provide a w o r k i n g understanding of the tools and methodology required to analyze the impact of Canadian C o m m o d i t y Taxes and current Canada C u s toms legislation on a business engaged i n import/export. CMPT 293 IBUS 374 (3) (3,0,1) (Su) (3) Systems Design International Transportation Strategies Prerequisite: C M P T 182 w i t h a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. This course provides a n introduction to commodity movement alternatives, relative costs of various forms of transportation, regulatory requirements, and traders' rights and responsibilities i n Canada and internationally. Practical experience i n logical design of on-line systems for businesses, use of structured systems analysis and design, data dictionary, structured charts. IBUS 321 (3) (3,0,1) (F) International Business This course w i l l be a blend of lectures, case studies and discussions of current events affecting business. Students w i l l learn the terminology of international business and PADM 200 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Local Government Administration Prerequisite: Current employment i n a M u n i c i p a l i t y , Indian Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting Agency, as well as P A D M 200 and P A D M 201, or permission of the instructor. Career/Vocational - Business Administration 201 This course w i l l include discussion of the structures and administration of local governments, as well as current issues i n local governance. Topics include: the history and purposes of local government; h o w local governments are organized and administered, their powers and limitations; sources of finance and methods of assessment and taxation; issues of sustainability; relations w i t h aboriginal governments, and issues of public participation such as interest group lobbying and public consultation. PADM201 Local Government Services (3) (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: Current employment i n a Municipality, Indian Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting Agency, as well as P A D M 200 and P A D M 201, or permission of the instructor. This course w i l l examine the services that municipalities provide to their citizens i n British C o l u m b i a . Services to be discussed include: Public W o r k s , Protective Services including Fire and Police, Regulatory Services, Water and Sewer Services, Refuse Collection and Solid Waste disposal, Recreation and C u l t u r a l Services, Environmental Protection Services, Health Services and Social and Welfare Services. PADM 202 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: Current employment i n a Municipality, Indian Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting Agency, as well as P A D M 200 and P A D M 201, or permission of the instructor. Retail Marketing Co-op Program Course Descriptions (formerly Merchandising Management) RMCP 154 (1.5) Creative Advertising Product (3,0,1) (S) This course w i l l give the students an understanding of retail advertising production as applied to business cards, newspapers, magazines and related promotion media from the standpoint of the creator, buyer, and the printer. RMCP 157 Event Management (3.0) (3,0,1) (S) The emphasis i n this course w i l l be to learn h o w to promote and produce a major event such as a trade or fashion show. Special Event Management w i l l i n v o l v e the planning and promotion. RMCP 164 Creative Retail Strategies (3) (3,0,1) (F) This course is the creative component i n the Retail M a r k e t i n g Program. Students w i l l learn visual presentation, colour and design, retail store design, and a full range of merchandising skills. They w i l l relate product and placement within a store environment and learn to develop comprehensive display strategies. RMCP 172 (3) Retail Technology/Store Management I (3,0,1) (F) This course w i l l examine the practices and issues of M u n i c i p a l Finance i n British C o l u m b i a and w i l l include discussion of the M u n i c i p a l A c t as it pertains to Financial Administration; the role of provincial government i n Financial Administration, the role of the provincial government i n Financial Administration, the role of the M u n i c i p a l Finance Authority; the Finance Function at the M u n i c i p a l / R e g i o n a l levels; Accounting and Financial controls i n Municipalities and Regional Districts; The Financial Planning Process i n c l u d i n g Short Term Budgets and L o n g T e r m Financial Planning; Financing Options; General Accounting/Treasury Functions; Assessment, Taxation. Collection. Retail Technology is the introductory segment to Store Management I. This course provides the student w i t h a working knowledge of cash register systems and point of sale terminals as well as the latest i n Interac Technology. PADM 203 (3) Municipal Law in British Columbia Prerequisite: R M C P 172 (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: Current employment i n a Municipality, Indian Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting Agency, as well as P A D M 200 and P A D M 201, or permission of the instructor. C u r r i c u l u m is currently being developed for Fall 1995. Career/Vocational - Business Administration 202 Store Management I is a practical application to Retail Management. Students w i l l be entirely responsible for operating the student store. The students act as Store Managers. They w i l l do Buying, Display, Promotion, Accounting, Scheduling and all those managerial skills involved i n operating a successful retail store. RMCP 173 (3) Retail Finance/Store Management II (3,0,1) (S) A continuation of Store Management I. This extension of the Store Management course exposes the student to daily systems analyses, banking procedures, monthly accounting practices and money management i n a practical setting. The students w i l l be responsible for m a k i n g financial decisions as w e l l as Buying and Promotional decisions for the student store. Commercial Animation RMCP 181 Strategic Retail Buying (3) (3,0,1) (S) Contact Person: D o n Perro - 986-1911, Local 2154 This course teaches the students to access their target and primary markets and to develop a strategy to enable them to be successful Retail Buyers. The Retail Buying component involves teaching the student to buy for Department Stores, C h a i n Stores, Regional C h a i n Operations, and Independent Retail Stores. What to Buy, W h e n to Buy, F r o m W h o m to Buy, and H o w M u c h to B u y w i l l all be covered i n this course. RMCP 190 (3) Fall Co-op Placement (Dec, Jan.) (F) Students w i l l gain direct practical w o r k experience through a paid co-op placement w i t h an employer that is part of our Retail Registry. D u r i n g December and January the student w i l l w o r k some 200 hours i n a business related to their preferred area of retailing, merchandising or marketing. A faculty member w i l l oversee this three credit course and both employers and the co-op employees w i l l complete written reports. Students w i l l return to their full-time studies at the end of the co-op placement. TWO-YEAR DIPLOMA IN COMMERCIAL ANIMATION Instructional Faculty D . Perro, B A , A r t & Design, E m i l y Carr, Teacher Development Program (Ontario) J. Delaney, Head of L a y o u t & Design, Delaney & Friends Cartoon Productions D . Brereton, B A A r t & Design, E m i l y C a r r M . Ghoreishi, D i p . A n i m a t i o n (Sheridan), D i p . Television A n i m a t i o n (Algonquin), Instructor's Cert., (Iran), Theatre Stage Design (Iran) In the past ten years, animation has exploded onto motion picture and television screens around the w o r l d . There has been an increasing demand for skilled animation artists caused by the continued success of both limited animation television series and major film productions. Commercial animation companies i n British C o l u m b i a have been approached by both A m e r i c a n and European animation producers to provide services a n d / o r coproduce animation projects. The only limitation of the industry to respond to these opportunities has been the shortage of commercially-trained animators. The Program This two-year d i p l o m a program w i l l be offered for the first time i n September 1995. The Commercial A n i m a t i o n Program w i l l prepare students for employment i n the animation industry, specifically i n the area of classical (character) animation. This intense program w i l l focus on d r a w i n g skills and studio procedures i n the production of animated commercials, television series, computer game design and production of feature films. The program w i l l w o r k closely w i t h producers of traditional and computer animation, establishing and evolving the curriculum to meet the industry's need for skilled animators and animation designers. Class size is limited to 22 students. Admission Requirements The Commercial A n i m a t i o n Program consists of four terms of study. N e w students are admitted each September i n a class of 22. Persons over 18 years of age or w i t h secondary school graduation are eligible for admission to the College and this program. A p p l i c a t i o n forms are available from the department and at Information Meetings held between January and A p r i l . Applicants w i l l be selected through portfolio submissions and an interview. Excellent d r a w i n g skills and a diversity of styles must be demonstrated i n the portfolio. Career/Vocational - Business Administration/Commercial Animation 203 Applicants w i l l be contacted for an interview in the M a r c h - M a y period and, if there are places available, i n August. Interviews are conducted until the class is filled. A d m i s s i o n is based on general ability, interest in C o m mercial A n i m a t i o n , noteworthy experience, previous work, education, and commitment to the Commercial A n i m a t i o n Program. FOURTH TERM Storyboard Design Computer Animation Life D r a w i n g 4 Major Projects Practicum Information Meetings Total Program Credits: Information meetings w i l l be held between January and A p r i l each year. Please contact the department at 9844940 for dates and rimes. Special Fees and Expenses Students may expect to pay approximately $4,500 for tuition, fees, materials and textbooks during the two-year program. Graduation Requirements In order to graduate from the Commercial A n i m a t i o n Program, the student must successfully complete all the component courses. Professional Standards A l l Commercial A n i m a t i o n students are required to adhere to high standards of academic performance and professional behaviour. Program Content (Subject to revision) (Under Development) FIRST T E R M Animation Drawing 1 A n i m a t i o n Design 1 Layout Design 1 Life D r a w i n g 1 Communication Skills F i l m Studies 1 SECOND TERM Animation Drawing 2 A n i m a t i o n Design 2 Layout Design 2 Life D r a w i n g 2 F i l m Studies 2 THIRD TERM C o l o u r and M e d i a Animation Drawing 3 A n i m a t i o n Design 3 Layout Design 3 Life D r a w i n g 3 4 2 2 3 2 _L5 15.5 7 2 2 3 _L5 15.5 2 6 2 2 3 15 Career/Vocational - Commercial Animation 204 2 4 3 3 2 14 60 Communications Contact Person: C r a w f o r d K i l i a n , Coordinator, Office HR102. Phone: 986-1911, local 2585. E-mail: ckilian@hubcap.mlnet.com free o n l y for part-time study. Accordingly, courses w i l l normally r u n i n the evenings. Students m a y take them i n any order and may take as long as they require (within reason) to complete a certificate. Instructional Faculty Students qualify for the Basic Certificate by completing four required courses a n d one optional course. Required courses w i l l be: C . K I L I A N , B . A . (Columbia), M . A . (SFU) B. REID, B . A . (Alberta) L . S A V A G E , B . A . , D i p . E d . (McGill), M . E d . (Alberta) A . S E D K Y , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( A i n Shams, Cairo) G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . (UBC), Standard Teaching Credentials (UK), B . C . Registered Psychologist M . W I T T M A N , B . A . (Toronto), M . A . ( U B C ) The Communications ( C M N S ) Department provides training i n w r i t i n g and speech for students i n C a r e e r / Vocational programs as well as those w i s h i n g to apply specific skills to the w o r l d of work. In addition to courses i n English basics, C M N S also offers courses i n business and technical writing, public speaking, a n d freelance writing. Career Opportunities In an information-based economy, good communication skills are a vital asset i n any career. M a n y career-program C M N S courses offer components o n effective job search techniques, i n c l u d i n g resume w r i t i n g and interviewing. Courses for freelance writers equip students w i t h the basic skills needed to market their work to magazines, newspapers and book publishers. Admission Requirements Students w i s h i n g to enrol i n a specialized career-program C M N S course must meet the admission standards of that particular program. In some cases students may w i s h to take the C M N S component before enrolling i n the rest of the program. Such students w i l l require permission of the coordinators of both C M N S and the career program i n question. Students w i s h i n g to enrol i n "open" sections of C M N S , such as those offered i n the evening, must meet general College admission standards. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar. Transcripts and other pertinent documents should be attached. BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS CERTIFICATE C M N S 145: C o m p u t e r W r i t i n g C M N S 170: Public Speaking C M N S 220: A d v a n c e d Business W r i t i n g and Editing C M N S 250: Technical W r i t i n g For the A d v a n c e d Certificate, students must also take I N F O 166 (Computer Systems/Telecommunications), plus any two optional courses. Optional courses w i l l include the following: C M N S 110: Standard English Usage (usually offered as a daytime course) C M N S 190: Freelance Article W r i t i n g I N F O 176: Desktop Publication for Print Where circumstances warrant, students may negotiate w i t h the C M N S Department to apply credit from other College courses to the Certificate program. For example, a student w h o has completed the C M N S component of a College career p r o g r a m may request application of credit for that course or courses towards the Certificate. Special Fees and Expenses Students enrolling i n the online version of C M N S 145 must purchase an account on The H u b , the Infotec bulletin-board system. Most C M N S classes, however, require no special fees; consult the coordinator if y o u have questions about such fees i n y o u r course. Awards and Scholarships The Lucille Fisher M e m o r i a l Scholarship is awarded annually to an outstanding student (or students) enrolled i n a fall term credit w r i t i n g course. The a w a r d is granted as early as possible i n the spring term of the same academic year. Course Descriptions Communications 110 (3) Standard English Usage (3,1,0) (F,S) A course i n grammar, spelling, punctuation, and diction. Students also gain experience i n proofreading, correcting and revising short written assignments. PROGRAMS (BCCP) The C M N S Department offers Basic and A d v a n c e d Certificates i n Business Communications. W h i l e the program is open to all persons, m a n y B C C P students are likely to be w o r k i n g i n the business w o r l d and therefore Career/Vocational - Communications 205 Communications 120 (3) Standard English Usage (3,1,0) (F,S) A course emphasizing structure and style i n spoken and written communication, w i t h some review of E n g l i s h basics as well. B y writing and editing short essays, students develop a writing style both concise and precise. Communications 125 (1.5) Communication Theory (3,1,0) (F) A survey of principles influencing interpersonal c o m m u nication as w e l l as mass media: print, film, video, and audio. Exploration of communication theory as it applies to digital media. Communications 130 (3) (3,1,0) (F,S) Introductory Media Communications A n introduction to writing and speaking for M e d i a Resources students. submit for publication. A spoken presentation may be required. Communications 154 (3) (3,1,0) (S) Communications in Recreation Prerequisite: C M N S 120 or proven English skills. W r i t i n g a n d speech related to O u t d o o r Recreation Management: reports, memorandums, press releases, article briefs and proposals. A spoken presentation may be required. Communications 155 (3) (3,1,0) (F) Communications in Early Childhood Education Effective verbal and nonverbal communication and the w r i t i n g of letters, reports and briefs. Spoken presentations may be required. Communications 156 (3) (3,1,0) (S) Advanced Media Communications Communications 140 (1.5) (3,1,0) (F) Introduction to Interactive Writing A course i n writing for computer media. Students learn to apply a clear, concise w r i t i n g style i n various genres; to "translate" from jargon into p l a i n English; and to develop basic editing and rewriting skills. Communications 141 (1.5) (3,1,0)(F) Interactive Writing W r i t i n g proposals and extensive documents for use i n print and electronic media. Communications 142 (1.5) Advanced Interactive Writing (3,1,0) (S) Designing and producing electronic magazines or portfolios w h i c h use text as a crucial element i n multimedia documents. Communications 145 Computer Writing (3) (3,1,0) (F) Writing, editing and revising technical and non-technical information for the computer m e d i u m . Attention to concise style, logical organization and the limitations of the computer screen. A continuation of C M N S 130 w i t h emphasis o n interviewing techniques i n applied situations. The course also deals w i t h public speaking and group leadership techniques. Communications 159 (3) (3,1,0) (F,S) Communications for the Legal Secretary Strong emphasis o n English basics (grammar, spelling, punctuation, correct usage), proofreading skills, and business writing. Communications 170 Public Speaking (3) (3,1,0)(S) Communications and the Arts Prerequisite: C M N S 120 or proven English skills. The use of language i n combination w i t h graphic and other arts. Attention to job-search strategies suitable for artists and craftspersons. W r i t i n g assignments include an article o n some aspect of art w h i c h the student w i l l Career/Vocational - Communications 206 (3,1,0)(F,S) Researching, organizing and presenting different k i n d s of speeches. Attention to voice training, nonverbal c o m m u nication, and public speaking i n various contexts. Communications 179 Legal Communications (3) (3,1,0) (F) For students i n the Legal Assistant Program, C M N S 179 emphasizes clear legal usage and style, as w e l l as business w r i t i n g formats i n law. Some attention as well to the fine points of English basics. Communications 190 Communications 153 (3) (3) (3,1,0) (F,S) Magazine Article Writing Researching and writing articles for publication i n news media a n d magazines. A n a l y s i s of magazine readership, techniques of researching and interviewing, the current market for articles and development of an effective prose style. Students w i l l write three articles i n suitable format and submit them for publication i n established periodicals. Early Childhood Care and Education Communications 220 (3) Advanced Business Writing and Editing (3,1,0) (S) Instructional Faculty Prerequisite: Successful completion of E N G 100. Researching, organizing, w r i t i n g and editing extensive business documents: reports, proposals, memorandums, press releases. Particular attention to clear style and logical organization. Communications 250 Technical Writing (3) (3,1,0) (F,S) The basic techniques of technical w r i t i n g for students from business or technical backgrounds: extended definition, process, procedure, description and summary. Intensive work i n descriptive w r i t i n g and vocabulary usage; examination of actual technical reports; study of the role of technical writers i n corporate settings. Communications 280 (3) Marketing Commercial Fiction (3,1,0) (F,S) Preparing short stories and novels i n commercial genres such as mysteries, romances, thrillers and science fiction. Discussion of the market for such fiction in Canada and the U.S. Students w i l l submit three assignments (such as three short stories or a novel synopsis and two chapters) i n marketable form. Students should discuss their plans w i t h the instructor before registering. Communications 290 (3) Marketing a Non-Fiction Book Contact: 984-4960 (3,1,0) (F,S) Planning, organizing, researching and w r i t i n g a publishable non-fiction book. Survey of potential markets, development of a detailed outline, and production of a proposal including a query letter, outline, and sample chapters for submission to an appropriate publisher. Students should discuss their plans w i t h the instructor before registering. R. A N N E , D i p . E . C . E . (Ryerson), B.Sc. (Columbia Pacific) A . C A R R , M . A . (SFU), D i p . E d . (London) J. C L A R K , R . N . (Regina General Hospital), Teaching D i p . (Sask.) S. L O W , B . A . (Alta), E . C . E . (Langara) M . R A W S T H O R N E , B.H.E., M . E d . (UBC), R . D . N . L.J. R E N N I E B.Sc., D i p . E.C.E. (Brigham Young) Coordinator O u r society is recognizing the importance of the early years i n children's development. There is an increasing need i n communities for child care services, and for trained staff w h o can ensure that the children's needs are met i n a variety of programs. The Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education program prepares students to w o r k i n various settings, i n c l u d i n g preschools and daycare centres. Support Staff: Sharon Miletic, Arlene M i l l e r , Diane M i l l s - Receptionists Judith Weiss - Divisional Assistant Career Opportunities Graduates of the programs have found rewarding careers w o r k i n g i n licensed preschool and daycare centres, i n schools as Special Education Teaching Assistants, aS C o m m u n i t y Care Licensing Officers, i n management positions i n childcare organizations and as consultants. The placement record for our graduates is excellent. Programs Early Childhood and Care Education Certificate: This is awarded to students w h o successfully complete the N o r t h Vancouver C a m p u s full-time or the Sunshine Coast C a m p u s part-time program. Infant & Toddler Certificate: F o l l o w i n g successful completion of the Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education Certificate program and the Infant & T o d d l e r Program, the student is awarded an Infant & Toddler Certificate from Capilano College. Special Needs Certificate: F o l l o w i n g successful completion of the Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education Certificate program and the Special Needs program, the student is awarded a Special Needs Certificate from Capilano College. Career/Vocational - Communications/Early Childhood Care and Education 207 Diploma Program: Upon Acceptance D i p l o m a i n Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education is granted b y C a p i l a n o College to students w h o have successfully completed the Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education Certificate and both the Infant & Toddler and Special Needs Certificates. Submit a completed medical report o n a form p r o v i d e d by the college, plus evidence of absence of active tuberculosis. The Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education Certificate and successful completion of the required 500 hours w o r k experience enables students to register as an Early C h i l d h o o d Educator i n British C o l u m b i a by a p p l y i n g to the Manager of Early C h i l d h o o d Programs at the C o m munity Care Facility Branch. Certificates i n Infant/ Toddler Education and Special Needs Education may also be acquired through the C C F B . Admission Requirements Enrollment i n the Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education Certificate programs is limited to twenty-five students. Applicants must be at least 19 years of age, be a h i g h school graduate, have college-level writing and academic skills and have 40 hours experience as an employee or volunteer i n a licensed early childhood setting w i t h i n the last two years. A commitment to young children and their families and evidence of interpersonal and life skills are also essential. Applicants should be aware that a criminal record check is n o w required by practicum placements and employers. Due to the intensity of the full-time program, it is recommended that applicants have at least one year of college or university experience. In preparation for a p p l y i n g to the E C C E Certificate program, prospective students may choose to take some of the following courses: English 100, A n t h r o p o l o g y 121, A r t History 100, Biology 104, Philosophy 101, Psychology 100,101, Sociology 100,101, Women's Studies 100. Admission Procedure 1. Complete an Application for A d m i s s i o n form directly to the Office of the Registrar (for students new to Capilano College) or, 2. Complete an Application for Readmission form (for returning students). Forms are available at the Registration Office. Attend the Information Meeting Write an assessment administered b y the Achievement Resource Centre. Attend the assigned small group interview. Admission Requirements to the Second Term Continuation into the second term of the programs is dependent u p o n the demonstration of satisfactory interpersonal, academic and t e a c h i n g / g u i d i n g skills. C is the m i n i m u m acceptable grade i n all courses. Practicum grades must be C or higher. Graduation Requirements In order to receive a certificate for any of the Early C h i l d h o o d Programs students must successfully complete the courses and maintain a grade point average of 2.0. Special Fees and Expenses The student can expect to spend approximately $700 on books and supplies. A d d i t i o n a l costs w i l l be incurred for a First A i d course and transportation for practicums. EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE AND EDUCATION CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS The N o r t h Vancouver C a m p u s offers a full-time 10 month program beginning i n late August. The Sunshine Coast C a m p u s offers a three year part-time program. These programs are based on the "Competencies i n Early C h i l d h o o d Education", and are approved b y the C o m m u nity Care Facilities Branch of the M i n i s t r y of Health. The foundation of the E . C . C . E . programs is the study of development from birth to adulthood. The history and current philosophies of early c h i l d h o o d education are examined. A n interrelated series of courses focus on the care and education of y o u n g children from an anti-bias perspective. Students also study p r o g r a m planning, curriculum content, health and nutrition, interpersonal skills and parent-teacher relationships. Theory and practice are closely related throughout the program. Students have practical experience i n three practicum centres under the guidance of qualified Early C h i l d h o o d Educators. In practicum centres students adhere to the Early C h i l d h o o d Educators of B.C.'s C o d e of Ethics. Courses are presented i n a manner w h i c h promotes active participation through demonstrations, oral reports, group projects, role play and discussions. Program Content At the Interview Submit a resume and three letters of reference. Complete a writing assignment. Career/Vocational - Early Childhood Care and Education 208 FIRST T E R M Credits/Lab C M N S 155 Basic Communications 3 Education 155 H u m a n G r o w t h and Dev. I 4.5 Education 170 Interpersonal Skills Education 171 Introduction to E.C.E. Education 172 G u i d i n g Y o u n g C h i l d r e n I Education 173 C u r r i c u l u m Development I Education 174 Health Education 175 Observing and Recording Education 176 A p p l i e d Theory—Practicum I 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3J) 19.5 INFANT & TODDLER CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Program Content 4 6 10 SECOND TERM Education 254 Theoretical Perspectives 3.0 Education 270 Intro, to W o r k i n g w i t h Families 1.5 Education 271 Intro, to Centre Organization 1.5 Education 272 G u i d i n g Y o u n g C h i l d r e n II 1.5 Education 273 C u r r i c u l u m Development II 1.5 Education 274 N u t r i t i o n 1.5 Education 275 H u m a n G r o w t h and Dev. 1.5 Education 276 A p p l i e d Theory—Practicum II 4.0 Education 277 A p p l i e d Theory—Practicum III 4J) 20.0 FIRST T E R M Education 350* A d v a n c e d C h i l d Development (Fall '96) Education 351* F a m i l y , School & C o m m u n i t y (Fall "95) Education 355 Physical Care & Safety (Fall '96) Education 356 Infant/Toddler Practicum A Education 357 Infant/Toddler Practicum B 4 6 6 16 EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE AND EDUCATION CERTIFICATE PROGRAM - SUNSHINE COAST CAMPUS The following courses w i l l be offered as part of the 3 year part-time program. Fall 1995 Education 155 H u m a n G r o w t h and Development I Education 171 Introduction to E . C . C . E . Spring 1996 Education 172 G u i d i n g Y o u n g C h i l d r e n I Education 173 C u r r i c u l u m Development I Education 177 Observing & R e c o r d i n g / A p p l i e d Theory I Education 276 A p p l i e d Theory II Education 277 A p p l i e d Theory III INFANT & TODDLER CERTIFICATE PROGRAM SPECIAL NEEDS CERTIFICATE PROGRAM These evening part-time programs are for the student w h o is certified as an Early C h i l d h o o d Educator or is i n the process of completing the required 500 hours w o r k experience. Each program consists of seven courses including two practicums. Courses are scheduled i n the late afternoon and evening. Practicums are scheduled on an i n d i v i d u a l basis to meet students' needs. Courses in these programs are scheduled on a two-year rotation. Students may begin at any time i n the sequence. There are three core courses w h i c h are part of both programs. SECOND TERM Education 352* Centre Operations (Spring '95) Education 353 Program Planning (Spring'95) Education 356 Infant/Toddler Practicum A Education 357 Infant/Toddler Practicum B Credits 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 8.5 2.0 1.5 1.5 15 6.5 SPECIAL NEEDS CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Program Content FIRST T E R M Education 262 Special Education (Fall '95) *Education 350 A d v a n c e d C h i l d Development (Fall '96) *Education 351 Family, School & C o m m u n i t y (Fall '95) Education 358 Special Needs Practicum A Education 359 Special Needs Practicum B Credits 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.5 9.0 SECOND TERM *Education 352 Centre Operations (Spring '95) 2.0 Education 354 Program Planning for Special Needs (Spring '96) 1.5 Education 358 Special Needs Practicum A 1.5 Education 359 Special Needs Practicum B 1.5 6.5 *These courses apply to both the Infant/Toddler & Special Needs Certificates. Course Descriptions Education 155 (4.5) Human Growth and Development I (6,0,0) (F) Course material spans the period from conception through the preschool years and examines physical, cognitive, language, and affective growth and development. A n introductory study of theories, principles of development, and child study techniques is included. Career/Vocational - Early Childhood Care and Education 209 Education 170 (1.5) (15,0,0) (F) Interpersonal Skills A n introductory course i n w h i c h students focus o n the development of self awareness and increased understanding of others. Students w i l l learn basic communication concepts and practice skills w h i c h contribute to effective interpersonal relationships. (1.5) (15,0,0) (F) Introduction to Early Childhood Education sponsor teacher. Weekly seminar discussions help students integrate theory and practice. Education 254 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Theoretical Perspectives This course provides an introduction to the history and philosophy of E.C.C.E. Major contemporary issues are examined. International childcare is discussed. Education 171 This course introduces the student to various programs for y o u n g children. The role of the Early C h i l d h o o d Educator, learning environments and the value of play are examined. Education 172 (1.5) This course develops a theoretical framework of guidance principles and techniques w h i c h support children's optimal development. (2,4,0) (F) Based o n the philosophy that play provides the foundation for children's growth and development, this experiential workshop course focuses on learning environments, curriculum planning and teaching strategies. Education 174 (1.5) Health and Safety of Young Children (2,0,0) (S) The course is designed to familiarize students w i t h some of the c o m m o n childhood illnesses. Particular emphasis is placed o n the management of the young child w i t h a health problem i n a preschool setting. The course also includes preventive health measures, and the symptoms of common childhood illnesses and communicable diseases. Education 175 (1.5) Observing and Recording (2,0,0) (F) A course w h i c h develops skill i n objectively observing and recording the behaviour of young children. Weekly supervised observations form the major part of the course. Different kinds of observational techniques are explored. The uses of teacher observations are examined. Education 176 (3) (2,0,6) (F) Applied Theory-Practicum I This introductory practicum is arranged by the college. It provides the student w i t h opportunities to observe y o u n g children and, at a beginning level, to plan, implement and evaluate activities under the supervision of a qualified Career/Vocational - Early Childhood Care and Education 210 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Introduction to Working with Families This course is designed to develop a beginning understanding of an effective relationship between the Early C h i l d h o o d Educator and the child's family. C o m m u n i t y resources w i l l be researched.. (15,0,0) (F) Guiding Young Children I Education 173 (1.5) Curriculum Development I Education 270 Education 271 (1.5) Introduction to Centre Organization (2,0,0) (S) A n introductory look at some of the administrative aspects of operating a centre for y o u n g children. This course assumes a knowledge of c u r r i c u l u m and daily program planning, and identifies necessary functions relating indirectly to children; e.g., handling finances, hiring staff, leadership and management, cleaning and maintenance, policies and procedures, etc. Provincial legislation regulating child care is examined. Steps to opening a centre w i l l also be discussed. Education 272 (1.5) Guiding Young Children II (2,0,0) (S) This course w i l l extend the studenf s repertoire of g u i d ance/teaching techniques. The focus is on responding to the needs of the i n d i v i d u a l child, on promoting a positive self concept and on fostering prosocial behaviour. Education 273 (1.5) Curriculum Development II (2,4,0) (S) The student w i l l acquire further knowledge, experience and skill i n planning, implementing and evaluating learning environments for groups of children. Education 274 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Food and Nutrition This course enables students to plan and prepare appropriate snacks and meals for the preschool child. The student is introduced to basic nutrients and their role i n h u m a n physiology, and the special requirements of the child for o p t i m u m health. Students are encouraged to w o r k cooperatively w i t h families and health professionals. Topics covered include m e n u p l a n n i n g and healthy eating habits, physical, social, religious and cultural differences, food purchase and storage, and food safety. Education 275 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) SPRING TERM Human Growth and Development II Education 356 and 357. This course covers the major theories of h u m a n development and changes that occur d u r i n g m i d d l e childhood and adolescence i n the areas of physical, emotional, social and cognitive development. See Fall T e r m Education 276 Applied Theory-Practicum II This is, generally, a five week, full-time practicum. If taken, however, on a part-time basis, the same number of hours are required. W o r k i n g w i t h a qualified Early C h i l d h o o d Educator students extend their competencies i n program planning and evaluation. Weekly seminar discussions focus on integrating theory and practice. Education 277 Applied Theory - Practicum III This is, generally, a five week, full-time practicum. If taken, however, o n a part-time basis, the same number of hours are required. In this practicum, students integrate and consolidate knowledge and skills gained throughout the program. The student w i l l be involved i n a l l aspects of p r o v i d i n g quality care and education for y o u n g children. INFANT & TODDLER CERTIFICATE PROGRAM FALL TERM Education 351 Family, School & Community The t e a c h e r / f a m i l y / c o m m u n i t y partnership w i l l be examined w i t h the focus being o n families w i t h infants, toddlers and children w h o need extra support. Education 356 Infant & Toddler Practicum A Through work experience i n an infant/toddler centre the student learns and practises h o w to protect, support and enrich the lives of y o u n g children i n each developmental area. SPECIAL NEEDS CERTIFICATE PROGRAM FALL TERM Education 262 Special Education This course w i l l examine the development of exceptional children and the variety a n d range for developmental differences. The history of inclusion w i l l be discussed. Education 351 Family, School & Community The t e a c h e r / f a m i l y / c o m m u n i t y partnership w i l l be examined w i t h the focus being o n families w i t h infants, toddlers and children w h o need extra support. Education 358 Special Needs Practicum A U n d e r the guidance of a qualified Special Needs Early C h i l d h o o d Educator the student practises how to program activities which include children who need extra support. Education 359 Special Needs Practicum B This practicum focuses o n w o r k i n g w i t h parents and the evaluation of a quality program. Students refine their skills of programming for inclusive groups of children. SPRING TERM Education 354 Program Planning for Children with Special Needs The student w i l l develop skills i n program p l a n n i n g for children w h o need extra support. Guidance strategies, activity plans and i n d i v i d u a l educational plans w i l l be examined. Education 358 Special Needs Practicum A Education 357 Infant & Toddler Practicum B This practicum focuses o n w o r k i n g w i t h parents and the evaluation of a quality program. These broader aspects of group care are central to the provision of quality care for infants and toddlers. See Fall Term. Education 359 Special Needs Practicum B See Fall Term Note: Education 351 is a core course and is, therefore, a component of both the Infant & Toddler and Special Needs Certificate programs. Courses offered i n 1996/1997 w i l l complete the t w o year rotation. Career/Vocational - Early Childhood Care and Education 211 Fisheries Science Sechelt Campus Only Course Descriptions Contact Person: Dave Bates 987-1535 or 885-9310 Fisheries Science 100 Introduction to Salmonid Biology FISH C U L T U R E T E C H N I C I A N C E R T I F I C A T E - DISTANCE LEARNING F O R M A T INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY (3) A n introductory course i n the basic biology of the salmonid. Course content examines the life histories, habitat and biology of these animals. D.J. B A T E S , D i p . Tech. (BCIT), B.Sc., M.Sc. (SFU), R.P.Bio. Career Opportunities Graduates of the program may find challenging careers with either the private or public fish culture sector. This includes the commercial aquaculture industry, government contracts w i t h fisheries agencies and consulting firms. A Fish Culture Technician, while w o r k i n g under the supervision of a manager, w i l l be responsible for the w e l l being of intensively reared salmonids. The Program The Fish Culture Technician Program is available i n distance learning format only. Students may register in one or more courses. U p o n completion the student is awarded the Fish Culture Technician Certificate. The distance learning program has been designed for individuals that are currently w o r k i n g or seeking employment in the fish culture field w h o wish to upgrade their academic credentials. Individualized programs may be available. Admission Requirements Prospective applicants should inquire by telephone or by writing to the Sechelt campus. A n information package and application w i l l then be forwarded. Graduation Requirements Students must successfully complete all Fish Culture Technician courses (30 credits). Program Content FSCI 100 FSCI 101 FSCI 102 FSCI 103 FSCI 105 FSCI 106 FSCI 120 A Q U A 131 FSCI 140 FSCI 141 Credits Introduction to Salmonid Biology 3 Fish C u l t u r e I 3 Fish C u l t u r e II 3 Water Quality 3 Salmonid N u t r i t i o n , Feeding & G r o w t h 3 Fish Health 3 Basics of Microcomputers 3 Aquaculture Business 3 W o r k Practicum 3 W o r k Practicum 3 30 Career/Vocational-Fisheries Science 212 Fisheries Science 101 Fish Culture I (3) A n introduction to the theory and techniques used i n the fresh water culture of salmon and trout. Course content covers collection, incubation and rearing of salmonids. The major emphasis is on hatchery production of salmonids for commercial aquaculture and enhancement purposes. Fisheries Science 102 Fish Culture II (3) A continuation of Fisheries Science 100. This course examines the intensive culture of salmonids reared in the marine environment. Content includes an introduction to the marine environment, smolt transport, salt water adaptation, cage culture and harvesting and processing. Fisheries Science 103 Water Quality (3) A n introduction to water quality w i t h respect to intensive salmonid culture. Course content examines water quality parameters that impact o n fish production and methods for measuring these parameters. Fisheries Science 105 (3) Salmonid Nutrition, Feeding and Growth A n introductory course in the applied aspects of salmonid nutrition. Course content includes nutritional requirements of cultured salmonids, feed formulation and manufacture, feeding methods and strategies, biology of growth and growth estimation. Fisheries Science 106 Fish Health (3) A n introduction to the science of fish health. This course examines the pathogens that frequently infect cultured salmonids. Course content examines the various groups of pathogens and methods used to prevent, m i n i m i z e the impact or treat these pathogens. Health and Human Services Fisheries Science 120 Basics of Microcomputers (3) The L T C A program is no longer offered by C a p i l a n o College and has been replaced by the Resident Care Attendant Program. A n introduction to the personal computer and associated software. Course content introduces the student to w o r d processing, spreadsheets and databases using the integrated software program Microsoft W o r k s . RESIDENT CARE ATTENDANT PROGRAM Aquaculture 131 Aquaculture Business Support Staff: (3) A n introduction to basic business w r i t i n g and record keeping. Fisheries Science 140 Field Practicum I (3) Contact: 984-4960 Sharon Miletic, A r l e n e Miller, Diane M i l l s , Receptionists Judith Weiss, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant FIVE-MONTH CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Instructional Faculty Practicums involve the student w o r k i n g for two 10-day periods at a fish culture facility. The student w i l l be involved i n the daily activities of these facilities w o r k i n g w i t h fish culture staff. Fisheries Science 141 Field Practicum II (3) T. A D L E R , B . A . (Toronto), M.S.W. (UBC) S. E N G E L B E R T , B . A . , R . N . B. M I L L E R , R . N . M . R A W S T H O R N E , M . E d . (UBC), R . D . N . , Coordinator K. T A Y L O R , R.N. Career Opportunities Practicums involve the student w o r k i n g for two 10-day periods at a fish culture facility. The student w i l l be involved i n the daily activities of these facilities w o r k i n g w i t h fish culture staff. POST-BACCALAUREATE IN FISHERIES SCIENCE A post degree program i n the applied aspects of fisheries management is currently under development. Courses available for future credit towards the post degree program or undergraduate academic transfer to Simon Fraser University include: FSCI 200 Salmonid Biology 3 FSCI 210 Intensive Salmonid C u l t u r e 3 The number of elderly people i n our c o m m u n i t y is increasing, and there is an ever-growing demand for qualified men and w o m e n to work full-time or part-time in this field of health care. Graduates of this full-time R C A program are qualified to w o r k w i t h residents i n various long-term care settings, including extended care facilities, intermediate care facilities and personal care residences. The potential for employment is excellent. The Program Capilano College offers a full-time certificate program recognized throughout British C o l u m b i a . T h i s program is designed to p r o v i d e students w i t h the opportunity to qualify to w o r k w i t h long-term care clients i n many different settings. The program integrates health care theory w i t h practice, teaching students the basics i n physical care w i t h a focus on the spiritual and emotional well-being of the resident. Practicum experiences take place i n a variety of intermediate care and extended care facilities. A l l students w h o are interested i n the R C A program must attend an information meeting and have an interview w i t h an R C A instructor. T w o programs are offered each year from September to January, and January to June. Applications are considered i n October for the January program, and i n M a r c h for the September program. Career/Vocational-Fisheries Science/Health and Human Services 213 Admission Requirements R C A P 110 R C A P 111 1. A l l prospective students are required to attend information meeting and have a student/instructor interv i e w prior to acceptance into the program. 2. Applicants must be at least 19 years of age and have a genuine desire to work w i t h elderly people and their families i n the health field. T w o references are required. 3. The m i n i m u m educational prerequisite is a grade 10 or equivalent. Students may be asked to complete a reading comprehension test. 4. Applicants need good physical and mental health, and are required to complete a medical report o n a form provided by the College, plus evidence of absence of active tuberculosis. 5. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted directly to the Office of the Registrar, together w i t h official transcripts. Graduation Requirements Attendance: The Resident Care Attendant courses are intensive; regular attendance is mandatory. Graduation requires a valid First A i d Certificate w h i c h includes C.P.R. The student is responsible for obtaining this and presenting it to the coordinator before the first day of classes. The St. John's Emergency Level Safety Oriented First A i d Certificate or any higher level is acceptable. Students must obtain a B- (2.67 G P A ) , with completion of all courses i n the program. The fees are i n accordance w i t h the College Calendar. The student can expect to spend approximately $200 on books and supplies. A d d i t i o n a l costs w i l l be incurred for a First A i d course, transportation for practicums, and for a C r i m i n a l Record Check. Financial A i d is available to eligible students. Awards and Scholarships The R C A program offers the Rosalind Brossard Scholarship. Program Content Credits 1.5 Career/Vocational - Health and Human Services 214 Course Descriptions RCAP 100 (1.5) Health: Lifestyle and Choices 3.0 1.5 (2,0,1) (F) This course provides an introduction to the concept of health and the concepts of a health enhancing lifestyle. Students w i l l reflect on their o w n experience of health, challenges and resources that m a y effect their lifestyle choices, and consequently, their health. RCAP101 (3.0) (4,0,2) (F) Health and Healings: Concepts for practice This course provides the opportunity to develop a theoretical framework for practice. Students w i l l examine the significant philosophical beliefs and theoretical understandings of competent practice. RCAP 102 Human Relations (1.5) (2,0,1) (F) This course focuses o n the development of self awareness and increased understanding of others. Students w i l l explore basic communication concepts and practical skills, w h i c h contribute to effective interpersonal relationships. RCAP 110 (1.0) Workrole Concepts in Resident Care Fees and Expenses FIRST T E R M R C A P 100 Health: Lifestyle and Choices R C A P 101 Health & Healing: Concepts for Practice R C A P 102 H u m a n Relations W o r k r o l e Concepts i n Resident Care 1.0 A p p l i e d Theory: Lab, and C l i n i c a l practicum i n Resident Care 7.0 R C A P 112 Special Needs i n Resident Care 3XJ 17.0 SECOND TERM R C A P 113 A p p l i e d Theory: Clinical Practice 4TJ T o t a l Program Credits 21.0 (2,0,1) (F) This course introduces students to the health care system and the role and responsibilities of the resident care attendant within the health care system. RCAP 111 (7.0) (2,4,14) (F) Applied Theory: Lab Practicum and Clinical in Resident Care This practical course offers students the opportunity to acquire the basic personal and clinical skills required b y the resident care attendant i n intermediate and extended care facilities. Students spend one day a week i n the College health lab learning the practical skills needed to w o r k w i t h long-term care residents. The first part of the course is a series of field trips designed to increase students' awareness of c o m m u n i t y facilities. In the second part of the course, the students spend two weeks i n an intermediate care facility. In the last part of the course, the students spend two days a week i n an extended care unit placement, supervised by a clinical instructor. Assignments are integrated w i t h the lab instruction and course work. assistance i n order that the i n d i v i d u a l may achieve the fullest possible participation i n society. A l l practicum and clinical placements are arranged b y the Services offered by the graduate Personal Assistant differ from the traditional medically-modeled services i n many ways: • service goals are defined by the service user, not the service provider or medical personnel. • services are oriented towards promoting m a x i m u m independence for the client i n all aspects of life. • services are directed towards enhancing an individual's present strengths and enabling the development of further strengths. • services may be p r o v i d e d i n a variety of settings. college. RCAP 112 (3.0) Special Needs in Resident Care (2,0,1) (F) This course b u i l d s u p o n content i n the other R C A courses, to help students to explore concepts and approaches w h i c h apply to the care of residents experiencing changes i n mental functioning. RCAP 113 (4.0) (0,35,0) (S) Applied Theory: Clinical Practice in Resident Care This four-week practical course provides an opportunity to a p p l y the caring philosophy with older adults in an intermediate a n d / o r extended care facility. Select, supervised experiences w i l l emphasize the application and integration of k n o w l e d g e and skills learned i n other courses. The final two weeks of the course provide an opportunity for the student to become better prepared to take on the role of the Resident Care Attendant. Opportunities w i l l be provided for the learner to gain increased self confidence i n the w o r k setting and to become socialized as a member of the health care team. PERSONAL ASSISTANT WORKING FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES Contact: 984-4947 Support Staff: A r l e n e M i l l e r , Diane M i l l s , Receptionists Judith Weiss, Divisional Assistant EIGHT-MONTH CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Because graduates must be prepared to w o r k effectively w i t h i n the full continuum of available settings, the Personal Assistant Program prepares students to assist persons w i t h disabilities i n a broad range of activities of daily living. The Personal Assistant Program ensures that students acquire knowledge and master skills necessary to deal w i t h the functional, emotional, social and medical implications of physical disabilities. Graduates of the program find employment i n many areas of the health field including: group homes, private homes, recreation programs and health care centres. Program The objective of the program is to provide the basic skills and knowledge required for a career i n the H e a l t h and H u m a n Services field. This full-time, eight-month certificate program integrates health care theory w i t h practice. Practicum experiences take place i n a variety of c o m m u n i t y health care settings. A l l students w h o are interested i n the Personal Assistant Program must attend an information meeting and have an interview w i t h a program instructor. Graduates w i l l have completed W H M I S , Food Safe, fire safety and core courses i n the Resident Care Attendant Program (formerly L o n g T e r m Care), and H o m e Support Attendant Program. Instructional Faculty T. A D L E R , B . A . (Toronto), M . S . W . (UBC) L . C U T H B E R T S O N , B.H.Sc.(O.T.) (McMaster), M.Ed.(Brock), Reg. O . T . (BC) M . D A Y A N , B.S.R. (UBC), Registered Physiotherapist J. GIBBS, R . P . N . , R.S.W., Coordinator M . R A W S T H O R N E , M . E d . (UBC), R . D . N . Career Opportunities In response to the trend for people w i t h physical disabilities to live i n the c o m m u n i t y rather than i n an institution, the Personal Assistant P r o g r a m prepares students to w o r k w i t h clients of all ages i n a variety of community settings. Students are trained to give client-directed personal Admission Requirements 1. A l l prospective students are required to attend an information meeting and have a student/instructor interview prior to acceptance into the program. Interviews are held i n m i d - M a y . Further interviews m a y be held i n m i d - A u g u s t , if spaces i n the program are available. 2. Applicants must be at least 19 years of age and have a genuine desire to w o r k w i t h physically disabled people i n the Health & H u m a n Services field. T w o references are required. 3. The m i n i m u m educational prerequisite is grade 10 or Career/Vocational - Health and Human Services 215 equivalent, with grade 12 preferred. Students may be asked to complete a reading comprehension test. 4. Applicants need good physical and mental health, and are required to complete a medical report on a form provided by the College, plus evidence of the absence of active tuberculosis. Some practicum placements require a Criminal Record Check. 5. Students need a valid First Aid Certificate which includes C.P.R. throughout the course. The student is responsible for obtaining this and presenting it to the coordinator before the first day of classes. The St. John's Emergency Level Safety Oriented First Aid Certificate or any higher level is acceptable. Attendance: The Personal Assistant Program courses are intensive; regular attendance is mandatory. Students must obtain a minimum B- average (2 .67 GPA) with completion of all courses in the program. Fees and Expenses The fees are in accordance with the College Calendar for a 30 credit program. The student can expect to spend approximately $200 on books and supplies. Additional costs will be incurred for a First Aid course, transportation for practicums, and for a Criminal Record Check. Course Descriptions (2,0,1) This course provides an introduction to community care, the home support industry and the role of the Home Support Worker. The course also offers home management skills needed for beginning home support practice. (2,0,1) This course builds upon other course materials to provide an introduction to the basic concepts and approaches involved in the care of clients experiencing changes in mental functioning. The course also explores the role of the Home Support Attendant in special needs family situations. PCAD 013 (3.0) Introduction to Physical Disabilities (4,0,2) (F) This course enables students to understand the theoretical basis for the procedures needed by the Personal Assistant Career/Vocational - Health and Human Services 216 (2,0,1) (F) In this course the student will develop the knowledge and skills required to fill the role of a Personal Assistant in a professional, ethical and caring manner to ensure that people with disabilities are valued. (0,4,11) (F) The first part of the practicum course is a series of field trips designed to increase the student's awareness of community resources. In the second part of the course students spend two weeks in a practicum placement arranged by the College. A clinical instructor visits and observes the student working in the practicum setting. Assignments are integrated with the lab instruction and course work in PCAD 013. PCAD 022 Human Relations II (1.5) (2,0,1) (F) This is the second course in human relations, in which the student continues to develop knowledge and skills related to the needs of clients with physical disabilities. Financial Aid is available to eligible students. HSA112 (1.5) Special Needs in Home Support PCAD 014 (1.5) Ethics and Values in Health Care PCAD 019 (1.5) Applied Theory - Practicum I Graduation Requirements HSA110 (1.5) Workrole Concepts in Home Support working with physically disabled clients of all ages. The procedures include the principles of body mechanics, medical asepsis, disabling conditions and their functional limitations. Both course content and assignments are integrated with lab and practicum placements in PCAD 019 and PCAD 039. PCAD 023 (1.5) Growth and Development (2,0,1 MF) This course is designed to introduce students to the major changes which occur in normal and abnormal development. The learner will identify basic human needs, assess how these needs are met and will establish how they fit into a continuum of care to meet the needs of people with disabilities. PCAD 024 (3.0) Advanced Physical Disabilities (4,0,2) (S) This is a continuation of PCAD 013. Students learn the theoretical basis of advanced procedures essential to the role of the Personal Assistant. The course content is also integrated with lab and practicum placements in PCAD 029 and PCAD 039. PCAD 029 (6.0) Applied Theory: Practicum II (0,35,0) (S) The student spends seven weeks in three different practicum settings arranged by the College. A clinical instructor visits and observes the student while on practicum. Assignments are integrated with lab instruction and course work in P C A D 024 A N D 059. HOME SUPPORT ATTENDANT PROGRAM Contact: 984-4960 Support Staff: Sharon Miletic, Arlene Miller, Diane Mills, Receptionists Judith Weiss, Divisional Assistant PCAD 049 (2.0) (0,4,2) (F) Applied Theory - Lab for Personal Assistants I FOUR-MONTH CERTIFICATE PROGRAM This course exposes students through simulations and paper problems/case histories to the functional limitation of medical and physical conditions that may be encountered working as a personal assistant. Students demonstrate and practice skills needed to work with clients who have a physical disability. Instructional Faculty PCAD 059 (1.0) (0,4,2) (S) Applied Theory - Lab for Personal Assistants II This course enables students to integrate and apply the knowledge and skills of a personal assistant working with physically disabled clients. Students demonstrate, practice, and gain feedback on their skills. The purpose of the lab is to prepare students for working with physically disabled clients on practicum placements. RCAP 100 (1.5) Health: Lifestyle and Choices (2,0,1) (F) This course provides an introduction to the concept of health and the concepts of a health enhancing lifestyle. Students will reflect on their own experience of health, challenges and resources that may effect their lifestyle choices, and consequently, their health. RCAP 101 (3.0) (4,0,2) (F) Health and Healings: Concepts for practice This course provides the opportunity to develop a theoretical framework for practice. Students will examine the significant philosophical beliefs and theoretical understandings of competent practice. RCAP 102 Human Relations (1.5) (2,0,1) (F) This course focuses on the development of self awareness and increased understanding of others. Students will explore basic communication concepts and practical skills, which contribute to effective interpersonal relationships. Part Time Courses Some P C A D courses will be open to part-time students working in the health care field, with a recommendation from their employer. T. ADLER, B.A. (Toronto), M.S.W. (UBC) H. BREWSTER, R.N. B. MILLER, R.N. M. RAWSTHORNE, M.Ed.(UBC), R D N , Co-ordinator A. WHITE, M.P.H. Career Opportunities The Home Support Attendant Program is designed to provide students with opportunities to develop the basic knowledge, skills and attitudes necessary to provide assistance to individuals and families in the community. The environment in which the Home Support Attendant functions is usually the client's home; however, the graduate may be required to provide assistance to clients/families in a variety of community settings. Graduates are prepared to function collaboratively as members of a multi-disciplinary community support team. Graduates work as front-line care providers under the direction and supervision of a health professional. Upon completion of the program, graduates are eligible for employment as a Home Support Attendant with a community Home Support Agency. With additional training and experience, the graduate may be able to assume other responsibilities appropriate to the job role. The Program At the present time, the college does not offer an ongoing, full-time program. However, if community demand is appropriate, the Home Support Program may be offered on a full-time or part-time basis. Capilano College offers a Certificate Program recognized throughout British Columbia. Admission Requirements 1. A l l prospective students are required to attend an information meeting and have a student/instructor interview prior to acceptance into the program. 2. Applicants must be at least 19 years of age and have a genuine desire to work with elderly people and their families in the health field. Two references are required. Career/Vocational - Health and Human Services 217 3. The m i n i m u r n educational prerequisite is a grade 10 or equivalent. Students may be asked to complete a reading comprehension test. 4. Applicants need good physical and mental health, and are required to complete a medical report on a form provided by the College, plus evidence of absence of active tuberculosis. 5. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted directly to the Office of the Registrar, together w i t h official transcripts. Program Content Credits H S A 110 H S A 111 H S A 112 H S A 113 R C A P 100 R C A P 101 R C A P 102 Workrole Concepts i n H o m e Support A p p l i e d Theory: Lab for H o m e Support Special Needs i n H o m e Support A p p l i e d Theory: Practicum for H o m e Support Attendants Health & Lifestyle & Choices Health & Healing: Concepts for Practice H u m a n Relations Total Program Credits: 1.5 3.0 1.5 6.0 1.5 3.0 L5 18.0 Course Descriptions HSA 110 (1.5) Workrole Concepts in Home Support (2,0,1) This course provides an introduction to community care, the home support industry and the role of the H o m e Support Worker. The course also offers home management skills needed for beginning home support practice. HSA 111 (3.0) (0,4,14) Healing: Personal Care Skills for Home Support This practical course offers the opportunity to acquire basic assistance skills i n line w i t h Personal Assistance Guidelines required by the H o m e Support Attendant. HSA 112 (1.5) Special Needs in Home Support (2,0,1) This course builds u p o n other course materials to provide an introduction to the basic concepts and approaches involved i n the care of clients experiencing changes i n mental functioning. The course also explores the role of the H o m e Support Attendant i n special needs family situations. Career/Vocational - Health and Human Services 218 HSA 113 (6.0) (0,54,0) This practice course provides an opportunity to a p p l y the caring philosophy w i t h i n d i v i d u a l s and families at various stages of the life cycle. Experience m a y be obtained i n community and institutional settings w i t h an emphasis on the application and integration of knowledge and skills learned i n other courses. RCAP 100 (1.5) Health: Lifestyle and Choices (2,0,1) (F) This course provides an introduction to the concept of health and the concepts of a health enhancing lifestyle. Students w i l l reflect o n their o w n experience of health, challenges and resources that may effect their lifestyle choices, and consequently, their health. RCAP 101 (3.0) (4,0,2) (F) Health and Healings: Concepts for practice This course provides the opportunity to develop a theoretical framework for practice. Students w i l l examine the significant philosophical beliefs and theoretical understandings of competent practice. RCAP 102 Human Relations (1.5) (2,0,1) (F) This course focuses on the development of self awareness and increased understanding of others. Students w i l l explore basic communication concepts and practical skills, w h i c h contribute to effective interpersonal relationships. Landscape Horticulture Contact: 984-4947 Special Fees and Expenses ONE YEAR CERTIFICATE PROGRAM In addition to the program tuition, students will incur further expenses of approximately $1200 for books, personal work gear and equipment, certification fees, field trip, conference and membership fees. Instructional Faculty L. KOSKITALO, Coordinator, B.Sc. (U. of M.), Ph.D. (UBC) R. WELSH, Dip. Landscape Tech. (B.C.l.T.) J. TAAFFE, P.Ag Support Staff: Judith Weiss, Divisional Assistant Career Opportunities Graduates of the Applied Landscape Horticulture program find employment in many areas of horticulture including: municipal parks, golf courses, residential and commercial landscape installation and/or maintenance; garden centre sales, nursery and greenhouse operations. Graduation Requirements Due to the intense nature of the program, regular fulltime attendance is crucial. Students are expected to attend and participate in all classes and program activities. Students with poor attendance may be required to withdraw. Participation in all field trips, including the 3day orientation field trip, is compulsory. Students must attain a minimum aggregate G.P.A. of 2.0, pass all courses, must possess a valid B.C. pesticide dispenser or acceptable applicator certificate, and attain a minimum 60% standing in plant materials to successfully complete the program. The Program The objective of the Landscape Horticulture program is to provide individuals with the basic skills and knowledge prerequisite to beginning a career in landscape gardening and landscape-related industries. This full-time 8 month certificate program integrates horticultural theory with practice; the first term emphasizing theory and the second term practical applications. Due to the popular nature of the program, and its limited enrollment, prospective students are advised to contact the Horticulture department by late April to arrange to attend early-May INFORMATION MEETING. Student/ instructor interviews can be arranged at the conclusion of this meeting. Admission Requirements 1. All prospective students are required to attend a student/instructor interview prior to acceptance into the program. Interviews are held in mid-May. Further interviews may be held in mid-August, if spaces in the program are available. Students who are unable to attend the interview should contact the program coordinator to make alternative arrangements. 2. Applicants must be at least 19 years of age and should have a genuine interest in and desire for commencing or continuing a career in horticulture. 3. The minimum educational prerequisite is grade 10, with grade 12 preferred. Students not proficient in basic mathematics and English may be required to take an upgrading course. 4. Applicants should be in reasonable health and physical condition. 5. Successful applicants will show evidence of development of interpersonal skills and emotional health. Awards and Scholarships The Applied Horticulture Bursary for $500 is presented at the beginning of the second term. Applications for this award will be received in mid-December, the award being based upon: • first term marks • program participation • financial need The B.C. Council of Garden Clubs Scholarship for $450 is presented at the beginning of the second term. This scholarship is awarded to the student who has demonstrated excellence in terms of scholastics and programs involvement. The Lynn Valley Garden Club Bursary for $250 is awarded to a B.C. resident horticulture student who has demonstrated satisfactory performance in terms of scholastics and program participation. Program Content FIRST TERM HORT 101 Introductory Horticulture HORT 102 Plant Materials I HORT 103 Growing Media & Fertilizers HORT 105 Plant Production HORT 107 P & T Gardens Practicum HORT 115 Basic Landscape Drafting Credits Labs 5.0 6 5.0 0 2.0 1 2.0 1 0.0 0 L5 3 15.5 11 SECOND TERM HORT 106 Landscape Irrigation & Drainage HORT 108 Landscape Design HORT 109 Plant Materials II HORT 110 Turfgrass Management 2.0 1.5 4.0 3.0 1 3 0 1 Career/Vocational - Landscape Horticulture 219 HORT 111 Business Practices HORT 112 Landscape Installation & Maintenance HORT 114 P & T Gardens Practicum 1.0 1 5.0 ao 0 16.5 12 Course Descriptions Horticulture 101 (5) Introductory Horticulture (6,6,0) (F) This course details commercial horticulture in B.C., covers basic plant science theory, deals with work site safety and develops basic horticultural skills including the use and proper care of hand tools, power equipment, day to day greenhouse operations, planting and watering techniques. Students participate in a 3-day orientation field trip near the beginning of this course. Students also participate in a WCB certified survival first aid practicum. Horticulture 102 Plant Materials I (5) (6,0,0) (F) A n introduction to woody and herbaceous ornamentals including deciduous trees and shrubs, conifers, broadleaf evergreens, bulbs, and ground covers. This course emphasizes identification, landscape values and requirements of the plant materials studied. Horticulture 103 (2) Growing Media & Fertilizers (3,1,0) (F) This course is designed to provide students with the media science knowledge necessary for the production and maintenance of plants in the greenhouse, nursery and landscape. Horticulture 105 Plant Production (2) (3,1,0) (F) To acquaint students with greenhouse and nursery production systems and methods. Topics will include: plant propagation, greenhouse production and nursery stock production. Students will successfully produce a number of specific greenhouse and nursery crops. Horticulture 106 (2) Landscape Irrigation and Drainage (3,1,0) (S) This course is designed to familiarize the student with the basics of turf and drip irrigation systems as well as basic landscape drainage systems. Students learn how to install, operate and maintain landscape irrigation systems. Horticulture 107 (0) P & T Gardens Practicum (0,0,2) (F) This is an optional landscape maintenance work experience at Park and Tilford Gardens. The objectives of the practicum are to develop a professional work ethic, to Career/Vocational - Landscape Horticulture 220 master basic gardening skills and to learn to complete tasks effectively and in a timely manner. Horticulture 108 Landscape Design (1.5) (1.5,3,0) (S) A highly practical introductory course in design theory and practices; plan reading and revisions; and basic design skills. Course materials are presented by means of lectures, visuals, projects and specific practicum labs. Horticulture 109 Plant Materials II (4) (4.5,0,0)(S) A continuation of HORT 102 with the emphasis on conifers, broadleaf evergreens, annuals and perennials. Horticulture 110 (3) Turfgrass Management (4.5,1,0) (S) A n introductory turfgrass course dealing with the selection of grasses for turfs, turfgrass installation, and maintenance (includes fertilization, irrigation, moving, cultivation, pest control practices) for residential and large area turfs. Horticulture 111 Business Practices (1) (1.0,1,0) (8) Deals with business establishment, business organizations, business operations, landscape estimating, quotations and contracts. Job search, job applications, resumes and interviews are also discussed. Horticulture 112 (5.0) Landscape Installation & Maintenance (5,6,0) (S) A largely applied course covering plant installation and common landscape maintenance practices. Landscape installation topics include: site preparation, use of aggregates, and construction of walks, steps, retaining walls, fences, trellises, and use of paving materials. Maintenance topics include: pruning, planting and transplanting, pest management, mulches, and methods of fertilization. Students write the B.C. Ministry of Environment General Dispenser and Landscape Applicator pesticide certification examinations. The majority of the course time is spent on field installation and maintenance work. Horticulture 114 (0) P & T Gardens Practicum (0,0,2) (S) A continuation of HORT 107. Horticulture 115 (1.5) Basic Landscape Drafting (1.5,3,0) (F) Course topics include: drafting skills and equipment, site measurement and evaluation, plan reading, graphic presentation and introductory quantity take-offs. Legal Assistant Contact: 984-4959 Instructional Faculty L . B A K E R , B A . (UBC), L L . B . (UBC) Teaching Cert. (SFU) D . C O C H R A N , B . A . L L . B . (UBC), Cert. Ed., M . A . E d . (SFU) V . C O C H R A N , L L . B . (UBC), Co-ordinator M . C R A G G , B . A . L a w (Durham), Teaching Cert. (UBC) W . E N W R I G H T , B.F.A. M . F . A . (UBC), L L . B . (McGill) J. F A I R L I E , B. M u s . L L . B . (UBC) N. HALL D . P H I L L I P S , L G A S Certificate M . S P E N C E , B.Sc. L L . B . (UBC) D . T H O M S O N , B.Sc., L L . B . (Queens) G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . (UBC), Standard Teaching Credentials (UK), B.C. Registered Psychologist Support Staff M . M A C K A Y , Divisional Assistant F. U L K E R , Receptionist TWO YEAR LEGAL ASSISTANT DIPLOMA U p o n completion of the two year program, students must complete a six m o n t h practicum under the supervision of a lawyer. Students are paid d u r i n g this practicum by their employer. A t the end of a successful practicum, the student is eligible for graduation. Faculty w o r k closely w i t h students and w i t h the legal c o m m u n i t y to ensure successful practicum placements. Faculty maintain close contacts w i t h the legal community, and several faculty members are practising lawyers. A s well, support is p r o v i d e d by an external A d v i s o r y Committee, w h i c h provides information on recent developments i n the legal community, and offers advice on topics ranging from c u r r i c u l u m changes to grad placements. Members of the A d v i s o r y Committee include representatives from the L a w Society of British C o l u m b i a , the Canadian Bar Association, private l a w firms, a government agency, and c r o w n corporations. Career Opportunities A legal assistant, while w o r k i n g under the supervision of a lawyer, is capable of originating w o r k and m a k i n g decisions. This person has knowledge of both procedural and substantive law. Some examples of w o r k functions are: interviewing clients; drafting pleadings, wills, probate, conveyancing and corporate documents; legal research; file management; assisting i n trial preparation. Graduates of the program w i l l find challenging careers w o r k i n g as legal assistants i n law offices, government agencies, and corporate legal departments. The program has been i n operation since 1976 and has a 90% placement rate. (This figure may fluctuate for any one graduating class depending on the economy.) Programs There are two legal assistant programs offered at Capilano College. 1. The Legal Assistant D i p l o m a Program. This is a two year full-time program designed for people without current legal experience. 2. The Legal Assistant Certificate Program. This evening program is designed for people w h o are presently w o r k i n g i n a l a w office w i t h at least two years' legal secretarial or paralegal experience. Admissions Requirements The successful applicant to the Legal Assistant Program typically has two years of post secondary university transfer education, an interest i n l a w , maturity and work experience. The applicant should also have good keyboarding skills and computer knowledge. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar, together w i t h official transcripts and other pertinent documents. Prospective applicants may a p p l y b y telephoning 9844959. Names w i l l be recorded and applicants w i l l receive the formal admission procedure outline. Information meetings may also be held. Coordinators w i l l then review all applications for the 35 seats available i n the program. A p p l i c a n t s w h o meet the program requirements w i l l be invited to have a personal interview. Academic Standards The Legal Assistant program requires students to maintain a cumulative 3.0 grade point average over the four terms. In addition, any student whose grade point average falls below 2.0 w i l l not be permitted to continue in the program. Special Fees and Expenses The student can expect to spend approximately $1000.00 per year on books and photocopying expenses. Since regular use of a l a w library is necessary for research Career/Vocational - Legal Assistant 221 purposes, students should include necessary transportation expenses. Financial assistance may be available i n the form of student loans and bursaries. Information on these is available at the Financial A i d Office. Graduation Requirements Regular attendance is necessary. Students must successfully complete all Legal Assistant courses offered (67.5 credits). Students must also complete six credits of university transfer courses at a 100 level or one three credit 100 level university transfer course and three credits of computer training equivalent to B C P T 121. These courses may be completed at any accredited postsecondary institution. In addition all students must complete a 6 month practicum, and receive a "Pass" grade prior to graduation. To be eligible to go out on a practicum students must maintain a cumulative 3.0 G P A . Intro, to Study of L a w Litigation Procedures I Legal Research Torts I Legal Communications Career Practicum Total Credits: A c a d e m i c Transfer: C o m p u t e r Course: D i p l o m a Requirement: 3.0 67.5 3.0 3J) 73.5 LEGAL ASSISTANT CERTIFICATE PROGRAM This is a part-time evening program designed for students w i t h at least two years legal secretarial or paralegal experience w h o are presently w o r k i n g i n a l a w office. Those without a legal background or the two years experience may be admitted to a particular course o n l y after consultation w i t h the Coordinator. It is the student's responsibility to initiate the contact w i t h the Coordinator prior to registration. Acceptance into a particular course does not mean a student has been accepted into the program as a whole. Two Year Legal Assistant Diploma Program Content FIRST T E R M L G A S 150 L G A S 152 L G A S 170 L G A S 252 C M N S 179 L G A S 199 Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 The Legal Assistant Certificate Program courses normally start i n September, although occasionally they may also start i n January. Contact the Legal Assistant P r o g r a m area at 984-4959 for registration deadline information. The requirements for the certificate must be completed w i t h i n five years of commencing the courses. The fiveyear period may be extended for one year i n exceptional circumstances. 15.0 SECOND TERM L G A S 156 Intro, to Evidence L G A S 162 Litigation Procedures II L G A S 176 Legal Office Procedures L G A S 180 Contracts I L G A S 254 Torts II L G A S 256 Family L a w Certificate Requirements 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 M 16.5 THIRD TERM L G A S 155 Conveyancing Procedures L G A S 172 Legal Drafting I L G A S 179 Legal Interviewing L G A S 181 Contracts II L G A S 255 Real Property L G A S 264 Insurance L a w I FOURTH TERM L G A S 153 Basic Corporate Procedures L G A S 157 W i l l s & Probate L G A S 174 Legal Drafting II L G A S 253 Company L a w L G A S 265 Insurance L a w II Career/Vocational - Legal Assistant 222 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 10 16.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 16.5 In order to attain the Legal Assistant Certificate students must successfully complete 39 credits. Thirty-three of these credits must be chosen from substantive Legal Assistant Courses. Students must also complete six credits of university transfer courses at a 100 level or one three credit 100 level university transfer course and 3 credits of computer training equivalent to B C P T 121. A 2.66 cumulative G P A must be maintained. Legal Assistant Certificate Program Content * Courses marked w i t h an asterisk are required courses and must be taken before a student is eligible to receive a certificate. + Students w i s h i n g to enter the program must first take L G A S 150 and then L G A S 170 before they w i l l be admitted to any course except L G A S 151. *+ *+ *+ L G A S 150 L G A S 151 L G A S 170 Introduction to the S t u d y of L a w Evidence Legal Research L G A S 172/174 L G A S 179 L G A S 180/181 L G A S 182 L G A S 252/254 L G A S 253 L G A S 255 L G A S 256 L G A S 264/265 L G A S 268 L G A S 271 LGAS 155 (1.5) Conveyancing Procedures Legal Drafting I & II Legal Interviewing Contracts I & II Creditors' Remedies Torts I & II Company Law Real Property Family L a w Insurance I & II Criminal Law Administrative L a w Introduce students to basic conveyancing procedures i n B.C., i n c l u d i n g the role of the conveyancing assistant, the structure of a real estate sale, the system of registration i n B.C., and basic procedures w h e n acting for a purchaser a n d / o r vendor. LGAS 156 (1.5) Introduction to Evidence Transfer Credits Transfer credits w i l l not automatically be given for courses taken at other institutions. Students w i l l be required to demonstrate current knowledge before course exemption w i l l be granted. Course Descriptions Please see program content to determine w h i c h courses apply to the program i n w h i c h y o u are interested. LGAS 150 (3) Introduction to the Study of Law (4,0,0) (F) Introduction to legal concepts and legal reasoning. The course w i l l cover the historical development of legal institutions and the principles of c o m m o n l a w and equity, the interpretation of statutes, and an analysis of the system; its strengths and weaknesses. Transferable to S F U . LGAS 151 Evidence (3) (4,0,0) (S) A n introduction to the l a w of evidence. A l t h o u g h some statutes w i l l be considered, emphasis w i l l be o n case l a w and current developments i n the law. Transferable to S F U . LGAS 152 (3.0) Litigation Procedures I (4,0,0) (F) Introduction to procedures i n the courts of B . C . The course w i l l cover basic procedures i n pre-trial preparation of documents, and the use of precedents i n litigation. LGAS 153 (1.5) Basic Corporate Procedures (2,0,0) (S) (2,0,0) (S) A n examination of the B . C . C o m p a n y A c t and the C . B . C . A . and the various documents required to incorporate a company and attend to routine filings and resolutions. Differences between reporting and non-reporting companies w i l l be studied. (2,0,0) (S) This course is an introduction to the l a w of evidence i n c l u d i n g relevancy, materiality, admissibility, o p i n i o n evidence, etc. LGAS 157 (3) Wills & Probate Procedures (4,0,0) (S) A n examination of the W i l l s Act, the Estate A d m i n i s t r a tion Act, and W i l l s Variation Act. Students w i l l prepare the necessary documents to obtain Letters Probate and Letters of Administration. Students w i l l also learn h o w to deal w i t h assets after Letters Probate or A d m i n i s t r a t i o n have been obtained. LGAS 162 (3) Litigation Procedures II (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: L G A S 152 This course is designed for legal assistants assisting i n a litigation practice. The rules of court w i l l be studied i n detail from the beginning of a process to trial. LGAS 170 Legal Research (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Provides the student w i t h the techniques and methodology of legal research and w i l l include functions such as reading briefs and legal documents; using encyclopedia, annotated reports, l a w reviews, case comments; locating decisions. LGAS 172 Legal Drafting I (3) (4,0,0) (F) Course work includes drafting of agreements, statements of claim and defences, letters and memos, and a study of the rules of statutory interpretation. Emphasis w i l l be placed on developing different w r i t i n g styles, rather than obtaining a detailed knowledge of specific areas of law. LGAS 174 Legal Drafting II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: L G A S 172 A continuation of the w o r k begun i n L G A S 172; students w i l l draft more complex documentation. Career/Vocational - Legal Assistant 223 LGAS 176 (3) (4,0,0) (F) LGAS 252 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Legal Office Procedures Torts I Practical information about the organization of legal offices. Instruction i n timekeeping, filing and c o m m u n i cations systems, use of data processing equipment i n l a w offices, ethical responsibility of legal assistants and legal terminology w i l l be covered. A n introductory study of torts. Principal topic to be studied is the l a w of negligence. LGAS 179 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Legal Interviewing This course w i l l give an understanding of the role of the legal assistant and of the process of legal interviewing. Students w i l l acquire skills i n conducting various types of interviews. LGAS180 (4,0,0) (F,S) LGAS 253 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Company Law The l a w relating to business associations. A n examination of rights and duties of officers, directors, a n d shareholders, as w e l l as an analysis of provincial securities practice. LGAS 254 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Torts II Prerequisite: L G A S 252 Contracts I This is a continuation of L G A S 252. Recovery of pure economic loss, nuisance, liability of statutory authorities, intentional torts and other areas are studied. The objective of this course is to give the students a general understanding of the fundamental principles of contract law, including offer and acceptance, certainty, intention, consideration, and privity. LGAS 255 LGAS 181 (3) (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Contracts II LGAS 256 This course is a continuation of L G A S 180. Topics include misrepresentation, interpretation, mistake, duress, and remedies. Family Law (3) (4,0,0) (F) Creditors' Remedies Discussion of the principles, practice and information gathering procedures necessary to realize on judgments. The case method w i l l be used and students are expected to be familiar w i t h the documentation used i n the above process. LGAS 199 Career Practicum (3) (2,0,0)(F,S,Su) Prerequisite: 3.0 C u m u l a t i v e G P A This includes the w o r k portion of the Career Practicum w h i c h consists of six months i n a law firm. It also i n cludes classroom seminars and instructor/student consultations. Students w i l l be assisted b y the instructor in finding a practicum, but it is the student's responsibility to obtain a practicum position. This practicum must be commenced w i t h i n two years of completing the Legal Assistant course requirements. Career/Vocational - Legal Assistant 224 (4,0,0) (S) A review of the c o m m o n law relating to real property as modified by legislation w i l l be studied i n this course using the case analysis method. Prerequisite: L G A S 180 LGAS 182 (3) Real Property (3) (4,0,0) (S) L a w and the family: marriage and its dissolution; rights and duties of spouses and parents; custody; access, guardianship, and adoption. LGAS 257 Wills and Estates (3) (4,0,0)(F,S,Su) This course w i l l cover substantive l a w issues that arise i n a wills and estates practice. Important practice issues w i l l also be covered, as w e l l as a review of applicable legislation. LGAS 262 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Litigation Procedures III Prerequisites: L G A S 152 and 162 This course covers divorce, Family Relations Act, and small claims procedures. LGAS 264 (3) (4,0,0)(F,S) Insurance Law I A n overview of C a n a d i a n Insurance l a w i n c l u d i n g structure of the industry, insurable interest, valuation, subrogation, contribution and indemnity and duty to disclose. Media Resources LGAS 265 Insurance Law II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Continuation of L G A S 264 covering agents' duties and responsibilities; form and formation of the insurance contract; cover, i n c l u d i n g exceptions to cover; the claims process; I.C.B.C. insurance issues. LGAS 268 Criminal Law (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Substantive elements of selected criminal offenses and consideration of various defences. The effect of the Charter of Rights on rights of the accused w i l l be also studied. Transferable to S F U . LGAS 271 Administrative Law (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) The law relating to administrative tribunals i n Canada. The rules of natural justice and fairness w i l l be examined as well as judicial review of decisions and administrative tribunals. Emphasis w i l l be o n provincial administrative tribunals and the effect of the Charter i n this area. Contact: 984-4940 Instructional Faculty J.V. B I Z Z O C C H I , B . A . (Michigan), Teaching Cert. (Sec.) (Michigan), V i d e o Production (Banff Centre) R. C A R V E R MORRIE E A M A N M . F E A R O N , B . A . ( M o u n t Allison), M . A . (UBC) G . M c A R T H U R , M . E d . (UBC) P. K E L L I N G T O N , F i l m Studies (UBC), A . A . S . M e d i a Spec. Cert. (Capilano) B. REID, B . A . (Alta.), A d v a n c e d Theatre (Banff Centre) S. R O G E R S , B . A . (Ryerson) K . W A T T , B . A . (Trent) J. W E S T E N D O R P , B . F . A . (UBC) Support Staff A n n e Gilbert, Program Assistant A l a n H o v d e n , Program Assistant Technical Staff Bryan Christie C a m Willams In recent years there has been an increasing awareness of the importance of the media i n communications, industry and education. Consequently there is a g r o w i n g market for personnel w i t h the appropriate training and attitude for w o r k i n these fields. Career Opportunities In 25 years of operation, the M e d i a Resources Program has graduated over 450 students. The majority of these graduates are employed as producers, directors, editors, writers, camera and audio operators, production assistants and equipment managers i n video, film, audio, photography, multi-image and multi-media production formats. They w o r k for educational institutions and private companies as w e l l as non-profit organizations. In addition, a number of graduates have set u p their o w n independent production companies. The Program F I L M , P H O T O G R A P H Y , V I D E O , A U D I O and C O M P U T ERS are vital components of the media m i x used i n all levels of educational and instructional communication. The M e d i a Resources Program is a two-year program training students for current and developing applications of media technologies. In areas of education, commercial and community media, there is an increasing readiness to use new techniques to foster learning, growth, and social interaction. Capilano College's M e d i a Resources Program prepares students for w o r k and leadership i n this growi n g media resources field. Career/Vocational - Legal Assistant/Media Resources 225 The core of the program is production training. Students are taught standards of excellence and effectiveness i n all forms of educational production work. Basic technical skills are taught in all media areas, and a large number of projects are completed b y students d u r i n g their braining. In this w a y students are prepared for a w i d e range of practical w o r k possibilities, rather than simply a proficiency i n theory. The program teaches students more than the necessary technical skills. Students learn the critical process of h o w to w o r k a production through from concept to completion. This involves understanding learning theory and instructional design as well as understanding the particular advantages of each m e d i u m . A major skill that the M e d i a Resources Program emphasizes is that of w o r k i n g effectively i n groups. Students i n this program w i l l have w o r k e d i n a large number of production groups i n a variety of production formats by the time they graduate. The program's instructional design reflects its practical goals. W o r k s h o p methods, hands-on training and field trips are used throughout the program. The College's training facilities are equipped w i t h a broad variety of standard audiovisual equipment. This ensures that students are ready to do quality w o r k w i t h the types of equipment presently used i n educational instruction, training, and community facilities. Admission Requirements The M e d i a Resources Program consists of four terms of study. N e w students are admitted each September i n a class of 28. Persons over 18 years of age or w i t h secondary school graduation are eligible for admission to the College and this program. Application forms are available from the department and at Information Meetings held between November and A p r i l . Applicants w i l l be contacted for an interview i n the January-May period and, if there are places available, i n August. Interviews are conducted until the class is filled. A d m i s s i o n is based o n general ability, interest i n media, noteworthy experience, previous work, education, and cornmitment to the M e d i a Resources Program. It is highly recommended that applicants to the M e d i a Resources Program take M e d i a 065 (Media Studies) and a media production course (such as filmmaking, photography, slide-tape, or video production) prior to a p p l y i n g to the Program. Everyone admitted to M e d i a Resources must take M e d i a 065 d u r i n g the first year i n the program (unless M e d i a 065 or an equivalent university-level film history course has been taken). Career/Vocational - Media Resources 226 Special Fees and Expenses Students may expect to pay approximately $6000.00 for tuition, fees, materials and textbooks d u r i n g the two-year program. Graduation Requirements In order to graduate from the M e d i a Resources Program, the student must successfully complete all the component courses. Professional Standards A l l M e d i a Resources students are required to adhere to high standards of academic performance and professional behaviour (as described i n the booklet Media Resources Department Guidelines). Program Content Major Program Requirements FIRST T E R M C M N S 130 M e d i a 100 M e d i a 156 M e d i a 181 M e d i a 183 M e d i a 189 M e d i a 190 M e d i a 195 Credits / L a b H o u r s 73.5 60 Basic Communications Intro, to V i d e o Computers i n M e d i a : Intro Basic A u d i o Production Photographic Production Research Methods Instructional Design Applications of Photography SECOND TERM M e d i a 150 Intro, to A n i m a t i o n M e d i a 172 Video Technology I M e d i a 173 Ed. M e d i a Applications: A u d i o M e d i a 182 A d v a n c e d A u d i o Production M e d i a 185 A d v a n c e d Photography M e d i a 186 Computers i n M e d i a P r o d . M e d i a 200 Intermediate V i d e o I M e d i a 202 Intermediate V i d e o II THIRD TERM M e d i a 260 A / V and Multi-Image Production M e d i a 271 Educational T.V. Systems M e d i a 272 V i d e o Tech II M e d i a 256 Computers and V i d e o I M e d i a 294 Educational M e d i a Applications M e d i a 250 Documentary Scriptwriting M e d i a 300 A d v a n c e d V i d e o Production 3 3 3 3 3 3 1.5 3 3 22.5 3 0 18 3 1.5 1.5 3 3 3 3 3 21 6 3 6 3 18 3 3 1.5 3 1.5 1.5 6 19.5 6 6 3 6 3 12 FOURTH TERM Career Preparation for C M N S 156 M e d i a Resources Students Production Resources M e d i a 263 M e d i a Specialist i n Education M e d i a 303 and Training Educational M e d i a M e d i a 304 Applications: Computers Major Projects M e d i a 299 TOTAL Media 172 Video Technology I 3 1.5 6 1.5 6 3 L5 10.5 0 12 73.5 60 PART-TIME COURSES Credits/LabHours M e d i a 055 Basic T . V . Studio Operation 1.5 M e d i a 061 Basic S l i d e / T a p e Production 3 M e d i a 065 M e d i a Studies 3 M e d i a 071 Basic Photography - O p e n Lab 3 M e d i a 073 A d v a n c e d Photography 3 M e d i a 074 Basic F i l m m a k i n g - O p e n Lab 3 M e d i a 090 Independent Production and Portfolio Presentation 1.5 M e d i a 092 Computers i n M e d i a - Desktop Publishing M e d i a 093 Computers i n M e d i a - Desktop Presentation 1.5 M e d i a 094 Computers i n M e d i a - HyperCard Applications 1.5 M e d i a 095 Introduction to Computer 1.5 Animation Course Descriptions Media 100 (3) Introduction to Video Production (3,0,0) (F) This course concentrates o n the basic skills involved i n video production w i t h an emphasis on camera techniques and visual sequencing. Media 150 (3) Introduction to Animation (3,0,0)(S) A n introduction to the theory and application of animation techniques. W h i l e film is the primary m e d i u m i n this course, computer animation concepts are also taught. Media 156 (3) Computers in Media: Introduction (3,0,0) (F) Basic computer skills i n w o r d processing and introductory training i n graphics and desktop publishing applications as they relate to media production. (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (S) A n introduction to video systems, i n c l u d i n g a history of video technology, components of a complete video system, and a comparison of different formats. Media 173 (3) Educational Media Applications: Audio (3,0,0) (S) A n introduction to the fundamental principles of sound generation and reproduction, and to the terminology, hardware, and systems related to audio components. Applications of audio technology, equipment maintenance, and critical analysis of product specifications are given special emphasis. Media 181 (3) Basic Audio Production (3,6,0) (F) A n introduction to basic production techniques; components include interviewing, scripting, dubbing, editing, m i x i n g , and packaging. The course also covers the operation of microphones, tape recorders and d u b / m i x facilities. Media 182 (3) Advanced Audio Production (3,0,0) (S) The application of production techniques i n a variety of situations, i n c l u d i n g multi-track recording and mixing, documentaries, location recording, radio plays, film and video soundtracks and music recording, often using the department's sound production studio. Media 183 (3) (3,6,0) (F) Theory and Applications of Photographic Production A n introduction to the photographic base relative to audiovisual production, including the camera and its controls, darkroom techniques, photosensitive materials and their control, and visual reproduction. Media 185 (3) Advanced Photography (3,6,0) (S) The application of photographic techniques, w i t h emphasis on combining shot sequences to tell a story, as w e l l as editing, layout, presentation, and basic studio operation. Media 186 (3) Computers in Media Production (3,3,0) (S) A n introduction to the use of computers i n pre-production to increase productivity. Emphasis is placed o n computer application i n graphics, budgeting, storyboarding and planning for the media. Career/Vocational - Media Resources 227 Media 189 (1.5) (1.5,0,0)(F) Media 260 (3) (3,3,0) (F) Research Methods A/V and Multi-Image Production Methods for planning, organization, and presentation of research for educational media productions. Sources considered w i l l include print, non-print, and people. A n introduction to the production of instructional s l i d e / tape programs. Includes operation of s l i d e / t a p e equipment, production of transparencies, sound track and design considerations, and the integration of sound and visuals. Media 190 (3) (3,3,0) (F) Instructional Design A n introduction to the fundamentals of instructional design as applied i n the production of educational media packages. Topics w i l l include systems theory, objectives, audience analysis, evaluation, curriculum, learning activities, and resources. Media 195 (3) (3,0,0) (F) Media 263 (1.5) (1.5,6,0) (S) Production Resources The comparative study of media technical systems and their operation; evaluation of various resources available in the L o w e r M a i n l a n d ; design a n d / o r modification of systems for media production and delivery; and interface of different types of systems. Special Applications: Photography A n introduction to the areas of darkroom maintenance, photographic chemistry, print finishing, small and m e d i u m format copy camera, and relevant copying materials used i n a variety of media applications. Media 200 (3) (3,6,0) (S) Intermediate Video I This course is designed to build on the basics of video recording and sequencing taught i n M D I A 100. Students w i l l focus on lighting, audio recording and editing for single camera productions. Workshops and exercises w i l l form a major part of this course as well as a final production w h i c h students w i l l produce i n production groups. Media 202 (3) Intermediate Video II (3,3,0) (S) In this course students w i l l learn the fundamentals of developing, writing, and presenting material suitable for basic video documentary productions. Media 250 (1.5) Documentary Scriptwr iting (1.5,0,0) (S) A n overview of the production planning process w i t h an emphasis on the roles of scripts, concepts, treatments and storyboards i n documentary production. Media 256 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (F) Computers and Video I Students w i l l b u i l d on existing computer skills but w i t h i n a video framework. Students w i l l be introduced to video titling, colour scanning, digital video effects and other computer media functions. Media 271 (3) (3,6,0) (F) Educational Television Systems This course assumes background i n basic portable video tape equipment and operations covered i n M e d i a 171 and is designed to develop the students' ability to effectively use multi-camera studio setups for the production of educational programs. These programs are of a quality suitable for cablecast or broadcast on the K n o w l e d g e Network. Media 272 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (F) Video Technology II This course assumes the background i n M D I A 172. It is an advanced technical course concerned w i t h those technical aspects of studio and field video production that are i m p o r t a n t to the video producer. Media 294 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (F) Educational Media Applications: A/V and Multi-Image Production This course considers the design, planning, costing, utilization and evaluation of audio-visual and m u l t i image production. G i v e n i n conjunction w i t h M D I A 260. Media 299 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (S) Major Projects Students w i l l w o r k i n production groups to produce programs for outside clients. Students are responsible for all aspects of these productions from contact to completion. Media 300 (6) (6,3,0) (F) Advanced Video Production This advanced production course develops students' basic production skills (taught i n M D I A 100, 200 & 202) to a level suitable to produce for cablecast, broadcast and instructional and corporate settings. Career/Vocational - Media Resources 228 Media 303 (1.5) (1.5,6,0) (S) Media 073 (3) (3,3,0) (F,S) The Media Specialist in Education and Training Advanced Photography A course concerned w i t h the uses of media for motivation, information transmission, emotive learning, and selfawareness. A field practicum course exploring the relationship of the media specialist to education i n general and the role of the media generalist in educational and instructional communication. A practical and lecture course i n advanced photography. Similar to M e d i a 185, this course is not for students enrolled full-time i n the M e d i a Resources Program. Media 304 (3) (3,0,0) (S) Educational Media Applications: Computers A theoretical and hands-on introduction to the use of computers i n education. Includes producing and evaluating computer-assisted instruction packages and computer-assisted video instruction. Media 074 (3) (3,0,0) (S) Basic Film Making - Open Lab A practical and theoretical course i n cinematography similar to M e d i a 253, but more limited i n scope and depth of coverage. This course w i l l provide access to production facilities rather than structured laboratory instruction. N o t for students enrolled full-time i n the M e d i a Resources Program. Media 090 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (S) (Open) Optional Courses Independent Production and Portfolio Each term the department w i l l offer a limited number of courses that are open to college students and community members not enrolled full-time i n the M e d i a Resources Program. These courses carry college credit and may be applied towards a Capilano College D i p l o m a . Check the timetable to see w h i c h ones w i l l be offered i n a given time. A survival guide to the w o r l d of freelancing, w i t h an emphasis on the various fields of audiovisual production. Topics include: portfolio preparation, developing clientele, budgeting, legal concerns, and developing new opportunities. Media 092 (3) (3,0,0) (F) Computers in Media - Desktop Publishing Media 055 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (S) Basic Television Studio Operation A n introduction to video and television techniques for studio production. Students w i l l design, shoot and edit several short subjects using the College's television studio (Dynamics Lab). A practical introduction to the computer as a tool for desktop publishing. The computer w i l l be used to assist in development of skills for layout and design for print materials. Media 093 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (S) Computers in Media Desktop Presentation Media 061 (3) (3,0,0) (S) Basic Slide/Tape Production A basic introductory course i n slide-tape production. Similar to M e d i a 260, but more limited i n scope and depth of coverage. This course is not for students enrolled fulltime i n the M e d i a Resources Program. A n introduction to the computer as a tool for desktop presentation. The computer w i l l be used to plan, design and deliver presentations for education, training, or industry. Media 094 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (S) HyperCard Applications in Media and Training Media 065 (3) (3,0,0) (F) Media Studies A n introductory analysis and historical overview of media, especially film, combining aesthetic concepts, production techniques, and theoretical foundations. See discussion on M e d i a Resources admission requirements. A n introduction to the use of hypercard to create tutorials, promotional material, and presentations. The applications w i l l be appropriate for educational, training, or business situations. Media 095 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (S) Introduction to Computer Animation Media 071 (3) (3,0,0) (S) Basic Photography - Open Lab A n introductory course i n c l u d i n g both practical and theoretical aspects of 35 m m photography. Topics include: the camera and its controls, d a r k r o o m techniques, visual reproduction, photo-sensitive materials, filtration, and composition. This course is an introduction to the field of computer animation. Students w i l l be given an overview of the animation process from storyboarding a concept through to rendering the images and final output. Emphasis w i l l be on hardware and software required to create computer animation as well as the terminology used b y professionals i n the field. Career/Vocational - Media Resources 229 Music Therapy Contact: 984-4951 The Program Instructional Faculty The M u s i c Therapy Program at C a p i l a n o offers the 3rd and 4th years leading to the Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy granted b y the British C o l u m b i a O p e n University. This degree program is designed so that students may enter third year w i t h a variety of backgrounds: music, general arts, education, or nursing etc. A l l four years may be completed at Capilano College. P. A V E R Y , B . A . (York), M . E d . (Toronto) J. B E C K O W , B. M u s . ( U C L A ) , D i p . M.T., M T A J. B R O D E U R , B.Mus. (Vincent d'Indy) M . A . , Ph.D. .P.U.) MTA K . B U R K E , B . A . (Antioch), D i p . M . T . (Capilano), M T A K . C A R W A N A , B.S.R. (UBC) R. G U R R M . H O W A R D , B.M.T. ( B C O U ) , M T A N . M C M A S T E R , B . A . (UBC), D i p . M . T . (Nordoff & Robbins), M T A E. M O F F I T T , B.Mus. (McGill) M . A . (CPU), D i p . M u s i c Therapy (Capilano), M T A Liaison Coordinator J. R A B I N O V I T C H , B. Fine A r t s (Concordia), D i p . M u s i c Therapy (Capilano) M . R A W S T H O R N E , M . E d . (UBC), R . D . N . J. W A T E R S , B.A., M . A . (SFU), Ph.D. (SFU) S. W I L L I A M S , B.Mus. (Toronto) M . C . A . T . (Hahnemann) M T A , C M T . Program Coordinator MUSIC THERAPY PROGRAM Contact Person: Stephen Williams, Coordinator, Fir B l d g , R o o m 118, Phone: (604)984-4951. BACHELOR OF MUSIC THERAPY BRITISH COLUMBIA OPEN UNIVERSITY Graduates of the Capilano College Music Therapy program receive a Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy from the British C o l u m b i a Open University of the O p e n Learning Agency. M u s i c therapists use the creative process inherent i n musical participation to assist individuals and groups to improve their mental, physical and emotional functioning. M u s i c therapists work w i t h deep emotions i n special therapeutic programs, run exercise and dance programs, lead choirs, instrumental ensembles and music appreciation groups as they contribute to therapeutic goals. M u s i c therapy is increasingly identified b y health care professionals as an effective catalyst for client motivation, stimulation and communication. Career Opportunities Graduates of the program w o r k w i t h all age groups, w i t h a w i d e range of physiological, cognitive and emotional disorders, i n a variety of clinical settings or i n private practice. They are trained to w o r k as part of a health care team. Career/Vocational - Music Therapy 230 This program provides students w i t h the opportunity to gain knowledge and develop competencies i n such areas as music therapy and practice; clinical disorders; assessment, p l a n n i n g and intervention; improvisation and music of many eras and cultures; interpersonal skills and group dynamics; basic research, and documentation. The program blends academic and experiential course work. Students deepen their experience of music, creative expression and the role of the arts. They are encouraged to explore their values, beliefs, feelings and communication patterns, to increase their effectiveness i n the field. They have field work i n a different setting for each of the four terms, i n w h i c h they are given increasing responsibility to design, implement and evaluate their o w n treatment programs, under clinical supervision. This course work fulfils the educational requirements for professional accreditation b y the C a n a d i a n Association for M u s i c Therapy. A supervised internship is also required before graduation, to fulfil the accreditation requirement for clinical work. The M u s i c Therapy Program has a policy regarding continuation i n the program. Admission Requirements to the Third Year N . B . For A d m i s s i o n Requirements to the first year, consult the entrance requirements to the M u s i c Department. A n interview w i l l also be required with the M u s i c Therapy faculty, however acceptance to the first year does not guarantee acceptance to the third year. A l l students entering the third year of the M u s i c Therapy Program must: 1. C o m p l y w i t h the general College entrance requirements. 2. Participate i n an interview w i t h the M u s i c Therapy Coordinator. Interviews are held i n M a y . 3. Play an audition o n h i s / h e r concentration instrument, demonstrating technique, repertoire, and musical sensitivity i n two contrasting pieces at an advanced level of proficiency. 4. H a v e completed one full year at the university level of M u s i c Theory, Ear Training and Sight singing. 5. H a v e successfully completed at least two years at the university level, including at least six credits of English, six credits of M u s i c H i s t o r y , twelve credits of psychology *, (including Introductory Psychology, Developmental Psychology and Psychology of Aging), three credits of Human Biology, three credits of Orff and Kodaly Methodology. 6. Have completed 9 elective credits. 7. Have some experience with people with special needs. 8. Be able to demonstrate a high level of maturity, integrity, and natural interpersonal ease. 9. Have basic guitar and keyboard skills at the level of University Class Piano. 10. Have word processing skills. * Abnormal Psychology is offered within the Music Therapy Program. PMI 300 PMI 2.0 Concentration Instrument Secondary Instrument LQ 17.5 FOURTH TERM Music & the Creative Arts MT451 Music Therapy IV MT461 Introduction to Research Methods MT462 for Music Therapists Improvisation III MT480 Practicum III MT491 Concentration Instrument PMI 400 Secondary Instrument PMI 1.5 3.0 3.0 1.5 6.0 2.0 LQ 18.0 Post Basic Program Requirements Note: In addition, students must meet the College's general admission requirements. See pg. 12 of this Calendar. MT 510 Internship (compulsory upon completion of all above courses) Graduation Requirements Some Music Therapy Practicum Placements To obtain the Bachelor of Music Therapy degree candidates must fulfill the admission requirements to third year, complete the 71.5 credits in the courses outlined below as well as the post basic requirements of the 9 credit internship. Continuation in the program and granting of the Bachelor of Music Therapy degree will be contingent upon demonstration of an adequate level of personal, academic and clinical skills as jointly evaluated each term by music therapy faculty and field supervisors. CHILDREN North Vancouver School Board Children's Hospital UBC Bob Berwick Preschool Program Content Credits Major Program Requirements FIRST TERM Improvisation I MT 320 Basic Clinical Skills MT330 The Influence of Music MT350 Music Therapy I MT360 Disabling Conditions of Adulthood MT364 Interpersonal Skills MT380 Concentration Instrument PMI 300 Secondary Instrument PMI SECOND TERM Music Therapy II MT361 Practicum I MT391 Abnormal Psychology PSYC 222 Disabling Conditions of Childhood MT 370 Concentration Instrument PMI 200 Secondary Instrument PMI 71.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 1.5 2.0 1.0 18.0 3.0 6.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 LQ 18.0 THIRD TERM Group Dynamics PSYC 201 Improvisation II - Guitar Improvisation MT420 The Influence of Music II MT450 Music Therapy III MT460 Practicum II MT490 3.0 1.0 1.5 3.0 6.0 9.0 PSYCHIATRY Riverview Hospital Westside Community Care Team GERIATRICS UBC Extended Care Yaletown House PALLIATIVE CARE Lion's Gate Hospital St. Paul's Hospital Course Descriptions Music 100 Theory I (3) (4,0,0) (F) A study of music from c. 1600 to 1800 with an emphasis on diatonic harmony up to simple modulation. Related concepts of form will be explored. The student will learn control of chord progression and voice leading. He/she will be familiarized with figured bass. Music 101 Theory II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Music 100 or equivalent. A continuation of Music 100 with the introduction of tonicization, modulation, diatonic sequence, and melodic and rhythmic figuration. Career/Vocational - Music Therapy 231 Music 112 (1.5) (3,0,0) (F) Music 221 (3) (3,0,*) (S) Ear Training and Sight Singing I History IV Study of the aural recognition of intervals and chords. The student w i l l learn to transcribe melodies and rhythms appropriate to their level, and to sight sing melodies using Solfege harmonic dictation. A course designed as a complementary study both for M u s i c and General A r t s students. This course w i l l examine music from Beethoven to the present day. The emphasis w i l l be o n aural recognition of the evolution of musical style and its relationship to its historical context. Music 113 (1.5) (3,0,0) (S) Ear Training and Sight Singing II * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. Music 360 A continuation of M u s i c 112. (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (F) Method Studies in Music Education: Kodaly Music 114 d) (2,2,0) (F) Piano Class This course is designed for students w h o w i s h to learn basic keyboard skills. Reading, improvisation, transposition and harmonization are the skills developed d u r i n g this course and the three subsequent levels. Theoretical concepts are applied at the keyboard and include diatonic triads and sevenths of the major key, all major, minor and modal tetrachords. A weekly lab evaluates material covered i n class. Students practice o n the department's pianos. Music 115 Piano Class (D (2,2,0) (S) A continuation of M u s i c 114. In addition, keyboard sequences, arpeggios and major scales are introduced along with easy original repertoire. Music 120 (3) (3,0,*) (F) History I A survey of musical history from the time of ancient Greece to the present. (3) (3,0,*) (S) History II A study of music history from Dufay to Monteverdi. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. Music 220 (3) Music 361 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (S) Method Studies in Music Education: Orff Methodology This w i l l provide a knowledge of Orff methodology and the skills necessary to use this teaching method i n a classroom. PMI (Various Numbers) (2) (1,0,0)(F,S) Concentration Private Music Instruction A course designed to permit the student to pursue i n depth study of h i s / h e r o w n music specialty. The course consists of a series of one-hour lessons. PMI (Various Numbers) (1) (.5,0,0) (F,S) Secondary Private Music Instruction This course consists of a series of half-hour lessons o n the student's secondary instrument. Note: To enroll i n any P M I courses students must get permission from the coordinator of their M u s i c Program. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. Music 121 Methodology This w i l l provide a knowledge of K o d a l y methodology and the skills necessary to use this teaching method i n a classroom. (3,0,*) (F) History III This course is designed as a complementary study both for M u s i c and General Arts students. The music from Cavalli to M o z a r t w i l l be examined emphasizing aural recognition of the evolution of musical style. Music Therapy Courses Music Therapy 320 Improvisation I (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) A n experiential study of free and structured improvisation forms for groups and solo work. Music Therapy 330 (3) (3,0,3) (F) Basic Clinical Skills A n introduction to the basic concepts of observation, assessment and goal setting, including six weeks of introductory field w o r k and in-class observations. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. Music Therapy 340* (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Midi Synthesis Technology A n introduction to the use of m i d i technology for the therapeutic setting. *Course implementation subject to funding. Career/Vocational - Music Therapy 232 Music Therapy 350 (3) (3,0,0) (F) Music Therapy 450 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) The Influence of Music The Influence of Music II A study of the physical and psychological impact of music, and its components for music therapy. A study of healing and music i n various cultures. A continuation of lecture and experiential exposure to the influence of music i n conjunction w i t h the expressive arts. Music Therapy 451 Music Therapy 360 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Music Therapy I This course presents the development of music as therapy, the clientele groups and their needs, and the potential of music as a therapeutic m e d i u m . (3) (4,0,0) (S) Music Therapy II This course presents three music therapy styles w i t h a focus o n theory, analysis, and practice. Included are Developmental M u s i c Therapy, N o r d o f f / R o b b i n s improvisational style, and the use of M u s i c Therapy i n i n patient psychotherapy. (3) (3,0,0) (F) Disabling Conditions of Adulthood (3) (4,0,0) (F) Music Therapy III A continuation of the presentation of music therapy styles, for psychiatry, palliative care, music education and in healing, i n c l u d i n g the work of H e l e n Bonny and M a r y Priestley. Assessment and treatment planning w i l l be covered i n depth. Music Therapy 461 Music Therapy 364 (2,0,0) (S) A n experiential exposure to leading creative arts activities w h i c h can be used i n conjunction w i t h music: eg. dance, visual arts, poetry. Music Therapy 460 Music Therapy 361 (1.5) Music and the Creative Arts (3) (3,0,0) (S) Music Therapy IV A n introduction to anatomy and physiology, normal and abnormal, and practical elements of standard treatment. This course focuses o n professional attitudes, skills, and awareness. Students learn job hunting skills, and practise leading workshops. Music Therapy 370 Music Therapy 462 (3) (4,0,0) (S) (3) (3,0,0) (S) Disabling Conditions of Childhood Principles of Research A basic introduction to abnormal child development and some major intervention approaches. A n introduction to elementary research designs and basic statistical procedures. Music Therapy 380 Music Therapy 480 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (F) (1.5) Interpersonal Skills for Music Therapists Improvisation III C o m m u n i c a t i o n and observation exercises to increase awareness of ingrained skills and habits, and to introduce new alternatives. A continuation of Improvisation II. Music Therapy 391 (6) (2,0,6) (S) Practicum II Field work, i n w h i c h students design, lead and document music therapy sessions, i n consultation w i t h staff supervision. Weekly seminars examine practicum issues. Music Therapy 420 (1.0) Music Therapy 490 Practicum III (6) (1,0,0) (S) (2,0,6) (F) Field work and weekly seminars. (Refer to M u s i c Therapy 391.) Music Therapy 491 Practicum IV (6) (2,0,6) (S) Field w o r k and weekly seminars. (Refer to M u s i c Therapy 391.). (1.5,0,0) (F) Improvisation II - Guitar Improvisation Post Basic Program Course Descriptions G r o u p leading using guitar improvisation, plus exploring current popular styles and idioms. Music Therapy 510 (9) Internship 1,000 hours of clinical field work, i n c l u d i n g monthly seminars. Career/Vocational • Music Therapy 233 Outdoor Recreation Management The College offers two programs: a two year d i p l o m a i n O u t d o o r Recreation Management and a part-time certificate program i n Wilderness Leadership. Contact: Judith Weiss, Divisional Assistant; or the coordinators listed * below, phone 984-4960. Instructional Faculty *D. B A S H A M , Coordinator *C. B O N I F A C E , Convenor O u t d o o r Recreation, B . S c , P . G . C . E . (Birmingham), M.Sc.(SFU) *T. B R A A K S M A , Coordinator, Wilderness Leadership Cert. (Cap. Col.), C A N S I Level II Inst, Master Inst. C R C A & R C A B C , C S A T o u r Leader D . C O L L I N S , B.Ed. (UBC), B.P.E. (UBC) D i p . General Studies & Finance & Investment ( V C C ) , R e d Cross C P R , First A i d & Childsafe Instructor, W C B Level I Instructor C . FISHER, D i p . Outdoor Rec. M g m t . (Cap. Col.), C P R Instructor, Red Cross W F A & Standard First A i d Instructor, O F A Levels 1,2,3 Instructor, CISSR W i l d e r ness Emergency Response Instructor S. FISHER, D i p . Outdoor Rec. M g m t . (Cap. Col.), C P R Instructor, Canadian Institute of Safety, Search & Rescue Emerg. Response Instructor, O F A Levels 1,2,3 Instructor D . F R E E Z E , D i p . Outdoor Rec. M g m t . (Cap. Col.), R C A B C & W K A B C Instructor J. H A T C H A R D , D i p . Outdoor Rec. Mgmt., Wilderness Leadership Cert. (Capilano), C A N S I Level II Inst., Master Inst. C R C A & B C R C A , C S A Tour Leader C . K I L I A N , B . A . (Columbia), M . A . (SFU) D . L O B L A W , B . A . (U. of Toronto) R. M c B L A N E , B.Ed., M . E d . ( U . of Alberta) J. R O U S E , B.Sc. (Mt. A l l i s o n U.), T o u r i s m M g m t . (Cert. C a p . Col.) D . S T E V E N S , D i p . Outdoor Rec. M g m t , Wilderness Leadership Cert. (Cap), St. John's Ambulance Instructors Cert., C A N S I , C S A T o u r Leaders Cert., R C A B C Master Instructor B. W H H E , B . A . , M . A . (SFU), Coordinator OUTDOOR RECREATION MANAGEMENT TWO YEAR OUTDOOR RECREATION MANAGEMENT DIPLOMA B.C.'s "super natural" environment is ideal for outdoor recreation, and with the g r o w i n g tourism business and increase in leisure time for most people, the d e m a n d for qualified, well-trained managers i n the field of recreation management is expanding rapidly. Nestled o n the forested slope of the N o r t h Shore mountains, close to Whitewater rivers, wilderness lakes, ocean shoreline, and mountain back country, the College is ideally suited for the challenging two-year program. Career/Vocational - Outdoor Recreation 234 The Outdoor Recreation Department is relaxed and informal; however, we set and maintain h i g h academic and wilderness leadership performance standards. Students w i l l appreciate the i n d i v i d u a l attention College faculty are able to provide. Career Opportunities The well-established Outdoor Recreation Management program provides excellent training for a w i d e range of careers i n federal and provincial parks, resorts, social service agencies, adventure tourism, and environmental education. Careful practicum placements and an increasing variety of career opportunities ensure that graduates readily find employment i n the field. The Program The c u r r i c u l u m includes several trips into B.C.'s wilderness areas, i n c l u d i n g backpacking experiences i n the Coast Mountains, canoeing o n coastal waterways, N o r d i c skiing i n the Cariboo, and West Coast environmental and cultural studies. O u r program has earned an excellent reputation for its top-quality management and technical skills, wilderness leadership training, and employment contacts. O v e r the past two decades, we have expanded our network of practicum placements, keeping us i n touch w i t h the latest developments and p r o v i d i n g access to career prospects. Admission Requirements Orientation meetings and interviews are scheduled i n the spring. Phone the department for dates and times. In order to be considered, applicants must be at least 19 years of age at the date of entry into the program, should have good reading and w r i t i n g skills, have previous relevant outdoor experience, and must be physically and psychologically prepared for the challenges of the program and the demands of the industry. Students a p p l y i n g for admission should be aware that attitude, field performance and participation are taken into account i n the departmental evaluation process. Note: Prior to admission, a doctor's certificate of health w i l l be required. A l l students need to be w e l l equipped w i t h outdoor gear and must be prepared to pay a d d i tional costs for field trips. Admission Procedure A p p l i c a t i o n for admission must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar, together w i t h official transcripts and other pertinent documents. It is recommended that y o u apply to the registrar's office for admission to the College prior to completing the following procedures for acceptance to the program: • Attend a n orientation meeting i n the S p r i n g (Jan./Feb.) • Sign u p for and attend an interview Course Descriptions Please bring the following documentation to your inter- Recreation 142 Skills Development view: • A t least two letters of reference • H i g h school or post secondary education transcripts • A resume of past experiences Graduation requirements • Students must successfully complete all courses i n the program i n order to graduate. • Students are expected to maintain a m i n i m u m 2.00 ("C") C G P A (Cumulative Grade Point Average). Students falling below this G P A w i l l be placed on academic probation or may be asked to leave the program, depending o n the circumstances. Program Content Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements C r e d i t s / L a b hours 58.5 12 6£ 0 64.5 12 FIRST T E R M C M N S 120 Basic Communications R E C 143 Recreation Delivery Systems R E C 152 Intro, to O u t d o o r Recreation R E C 156 Intro, to Environmental Studies R E C 157 Skills Development R E C 163 Wilderness First A i d I R E C 169 Landscape Interpretation 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 21.0 SECOND TERM C M N S 154 Communications i n Recreation R E C 142 Skills Development R E C 144 Outdoor Rec. Programming R E C 151 The Outdoor Environment R E C 153 Leisure Issues R E C 164 N o r d i c Leadership I B M K T 162 Small Bus. M g m t . I T O U R 110 Tourism: A n Industry Perspective 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 1.5 L5 21.0 3.0 FOURTH TERM R E C 255 Outdoor Recreation Practicum To develop basic skills competency i n a variety of outdoor skills including ocean navigation, canoeing, kayaking, search and rescue, and trail construction. T o gain k n o w ledge of industry associated organizations i n c l u d i n g Search and Rescue (SAR), R C A of B.C., C R C A , T A S K and S K E G Alliance, G V R D / C D N V Parks. Recreation 143 (3) Outdoor Recreation Delivery Systems (3,3) (F) The structure of delivery systems i n British C o l u m b i a i n c l u d i n g non-profit/non-governmental organizations. This course includes a basic introduction to the computer. Recreation 144 (3) Outdoor Recreation Program Planning (3,0) (S) Topics w i l l include: demands of the recreational programs, designing and implementing products and services based o n consumer desires, embracing the changing market place, creating program impact and satisfying customers. Recreation 151 (3) The Outdoor Environment 2XJ 7.0 Weather and climate and the impact of weather o n outdoor recreation activities. M o u n t a i n weather and personal forecasting w i l l be examined using field w o r k . Recreation 152 (3) Introduction to Outdoor Recreation 2.0 0 2.0 3.0 3.0 (3,2) (S) (3,0) (F) A n overview of the development of outdoor recreation. Nature and scope of outdoor recreation i n relation to modern leisure, nature of s u p p l y and demand, demand analysis as a planning tool, outdoor recreation resource perception, psychological nature of outdoor recreation, experience and behaviour, carrying capacities of w i l d l a n d s , land use conflict, multiple use policies, inventory techniques, land use zoning. Recreation 153 Leisure Issues 3.0 1.5 3.0 3.0 3XJ 13.5 (3,0) (S) 2.0 Note: R E C 162 Canoe Leadership I is offered as an option at the end of the second term. THIRD TERM R E C 178 H u m a n Relations i n Recreation R E C 233 Cross-Cultural Issues R E C 242 Outdoor Rec. Resource M g m t . & Nature Interpretation T O U R 120 A d v e n t u r e & Eco-Tourism B M K T 163 Small Bus. M g m t . II (3) (3) (3,0) (S) W o r k and leisure i n the h u m a n life cycle, adolescence, aging, special needs and leisure, cultural variations i n leisure, leisure-related social problems, lifestyle-based variation i n work and leisure, factors i n lifestyle choice, consumerism and outdoor recreation, sociological perspectives on present and future trends. 9J) 9.0 Career/Vocational - Outdoor Recreation 235 Recreation 156 (3) Introduction to Environmental Studies (3,2) (F) A n introduction to ecological principles and their application to environmental issues. Local ecosystems and their indicator species w i l l be examined through field work. Recreation 157 (3) Overland Travel Skills (3,0)(F) Overland travel and outdoor l i v i n g skills, navigation and trip planning. Recreation 164 (3) Nordic Leadership I (3,0) (S) This course is designed to give students comprehensive winter environments o n cross-country skis. The course includes a lecture and field trip series w i t h emphasis o n outdoor activity. Lecture topics include: equipment, waxing, clothing, fitness, avalanche awareness, nutrition, and safety. Skill levels w i l l reflect C A N S I and C S A standards. potential w i l l be evaluated by the faculty liaison person and agency supervisor, and students w i l l make a major presentation to the department at the conclusion of the practicum. Tourism 110 (1.5) Tourism: An Industry Perspective (1.5,0) (S) A n introduction to the tourism industry and its role i n the economy, i n c l u d i n g the scale, impact and major sectors of the tourism industry, tourism products i n B.C., development potential, language and terminology used i n the industry, tourism industry structure and organization, revenue and costs and case studies and applications. Students w i l l learn key legal issues i n the industry, and w i l l identify educational and professional career path opportunities i n various industry sectors i n the province. Tourism 120 (3) Adventure and Eco-Tourism (3,0) (F) Interpretation of mountain environments, local geology and landforms. The course w i l l include field work. A d v e n t u r e tourism products i n B.C. i n c l u d i n g rafting, heli-skiing, g u i d i n g and outfitting, ocean k a y a k i n g , and mountain travel; selling adventure tourism, identifying markets, packaging, legal liability, organization and structure, natural resource management, social, environmental and economic impacts and eco-tourism trends and issues. Recreation 178 (3) Human Relations in Recreation BMKT 162 (1.5) Small Business Management I Recreation 169 (3) Landscape Interpretation (3,2) (F) (3,0) (F) This course focuses o n leadership, motivation, c o m m u n i cations and group dynamics. It also deals w i t h h u m a n resource development including employee recruitment, selection, training and development, and performance appraisal. Recreation 242 (3) (3,3) (F) Outdoor Recreation Resource Management and Nature Interpretation Development of nature interpretation skills i n c l u d i n g program planning and design. This course also examines recreation resource management concepts and issues through case studies. There w i l l be a field trip focusing on interpretation and examining resource issues. Recreation 255 (9) Outdoor Recreation Practicum (9,0,0) (S) The practicum is designed to integrate classroom theory w i t h w o r k i n g experience i n the field. Students w i l l arrange w i t h the faculty liaison person to spend three and one-half months i n an acceptable agency placement and w i l l be responsible to a specific agency supervisor. Students w i l l be p r o v i d e d with terms of reference for the practicum experience. Student w o r k performance and Career/Vocational - Outdoor Recreation 236 (1.5,0) (S) A n introduction to marketing and market research. These foundation topics w i l l p r o v i d e a base u p o n w h i c h students w i l l develop k n o w l e d g e and skills related to operating a business of their o w n . BMKT 163 (3) Small Business Management II (3,0) (F) This course w i l l allow the student to develop a business p l a n utilizing workshops i n specific areas of s o u n d business planning. U p o n completion of this course the student w i l l have a p l a n ready for submission to financial advisors. WILDERNESS LEADERSHIP PROGRAM Program Content PART-TIME CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Canoeing Leadership The Program I. S K I L L S A C Q U I S I T I O N C E R T I F I C A T E FIRST Y E A R R E C 162 Canoe Leadership I R E C 163 Wilderness First A i d I This is a part-time program for the adventurous! Students w i l l learn the skills necessary to become accomplished leaders i n the outdoors. Canoeing and N o r d i c skiing are the major activities, and safe leadership is the emphasis. Emergency management, first aid, and wilderness contingency planning are stressed. A l s o , ethical behaviour i n natural environments and the responsibility to pass these attitudes on to others is accentuated. Students learn through practical experience and are trained to certifiable skill levels. A l l Wilderness Leadership courses provide up-to-date information on technique, equipment technology and job opportunities. Employer awareness of what our graduates have to offer and the demand for trained, skilled professionals i n self-propelled outdoor activities continues to grow. The Wilderness Leadership Program provides two levels of recognition: a Skills Acquisition Certificate and a Wilderness Leadership Certificate. Level One, the Capilano College Skills Acquisition Certificate, is designed to provide the student w i t h comprehensive activity skills and theoretical knowledge to be self-sufficient i n the field. Level T w o , the Wilderness Leadership Certificate, combines intermediate skills w i t h leadership training. Admission Requirements Students must be 19 years of age or older and meet the general college requirements. Admission Procedure Contact the O u t d o o r Recreation Department for applications and registration forms, 984-4960. N O T E : Applications for admission must be submitted to the Office of the Registrar, together w i t h official transcripts and other pertinent documents. Graduation Requirements Students w i l l enroll i n each per term, and must obtain a Bgrade i n each course i n order to continue i n the program. Because outdoor leaders are responsible for people's lives a student receiving a C grade must repeat the course or show proficiency i n that activity d u r i n g the following term before continuing i n the program. This must be arranged w i t h the consent of the Program Coordinator and the course instructor. Credits 3.0 3.0 SECOND YEAR R E C 262 Canoe Leadership II 3.0 II. W I L D E R N E S S L E A D E R S H I P C E R T I F I C A T E FIRST Y E A R R E C 162 Canoe Leadership I R E C 165 Intro, to Wilderness Leadership R E C 163 Wilderness First A i d I 3.0 1.5 3.0 SECOND YEAR R E C 262 Canoe Leadership II R E C 263 Wilderness First A i d II 3.0 3.0 Nordic Skiing Leadership I. S K I L L S A C Q U I S I T I O N C E R T I F I C A T E FIRST Y E A R R E C 163 Wilderness First A i d I R E C 164 N o r d i c Leadership I 3.0 3.0 SECOND YEAR R E C 264 N o r d i c Leadership II 3.0 II. W I L D E R N E S S L E A D E R S H I P C E R T I F I C A T E FIRST Y E A R R E C 163 Wilderness First A i d I R E C 165 Intro, to Wilderness Leadership R E C 164 N o r d i c Leadership I 3.0 1.5 3.0 SECOND YEAR R E C 263 Wilderness First A i d II R E C 264 N o r d i c Leadership II 3.0 Course Descriptions Recreation 162 Canoe Leadership I (3) (3,0)(F,Su) A comprehensive course i n the skills, techniques and knowledge of p a d d l i n g i n open canoes. This course includes knowledge i n proper h a n d l i n g of equipment, and instruction i n p a d d l i n g skills i n grades of water u p to and including grade two, rescue, portaging, river reading, canoe camping and teaching. Leadership techniques and canoeing skills w i l l be stressed throughout the course. U p o n completion of Canoe I, students w i l l be given the opportunity to take the Hat Water Instructors exam from BCRCA. Career/Vocational - Outdoor Recreation 237 Recreation 163 (3) Wilderness First Aid I (3,0) (F,S) Designed to meet the needs of the Outdoor Recreation leader or professional whose w o r k takes them into isolated environments. Outdoor practical sessions play a large part i n the delivery of the course content w h i c h addresses: basic life support techniques, situation and patient assessment, recognition and treatment of injuries, medical emergencies, and environmental emergencies. U p o n completion of W F A I, students w i l l be given the opportunity to gain Wilderness Emergency Response Certification from the C a n a d i a n Institute of Safety, Search and Rescue. Recreation 164 Nordic Leadership Recreation 264 (3) Nordic Leadership II (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: Nordic Skiing Leadership I or equivalent (3) (3,0) (S) This course is designed to give students comprehensive winter environments on cross-country skis. The course includes a lecture and field trip series w i t h emphasis o n outdoor activity. Lecture topics include: equipment, w a x i n g , clothing, fitness, avalanche awareness, nutrition, a n d safety. Skill levels w i l l reflect C A N S I and C S A standards. Recreation 165 (3) Introduction to Wilderness Leadership (1.5,0) (S) This course w i l l address topics w h i c h relate to Wilderness Leadership i n general, regardless of the activity. Topics covered include navigation, woodsmanship, clothing, equipment, menu planning, fitness, leadership styles and legal issues. Recreation 262 (3) Canoe Leadership II (3,0,1) (Su) Prerequisite: Canoe Leadership I This course w i l l b u i l d on the skills and knowledge acquired i n Canoe Leadership I. Course content includes: canoe construction and repair, canoe history and evolution of the aboriginal canoes, tandem and solo m o v i n g water skills, canoe poling, and extended tripping k n o w l edge. The course is designed to further develop p a d d l i n g skills, personal experience, teaching ability, and leadership techniques. Where applicable, the standards and instruction w i l l be from B C R C A and the C a n a d i a n Recreational Canoeing Association standards. Recreation 263 (3) Wilderness First Aid II (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: Rec 163 w i t h i n the past 3 years, grade of B- or better. A specialized occupational course intended for the i n d i v i d u a l requiring a good understanding of pre- Career/Vocational - Outdoor Recreation 238 hospital care and the implications i n an isolated environment w i t h limited equipment. Course content includes: search and rescue, injury prevention, anatomy and physiology, accident scene management, patient assessment and extended first a i d care, oxygen therapy, m u l t i ple injury management, medical and environmental emergencies. U p o n completion of W F A II (REC 263), students w i l l be given the opportunity to gain A d v a n c e d Wilderness Emergency Response Certification from the Canadian Institute of Safety, Search and Rescue. This course is designed to expand o n the experience awareness, knowledge, and activity skills initiated i n N o r d i c Skiing Leadership I. Emphasis w i l l be placed on acquiring teaching techniques and progressions for skating, classic and telemark skiing for group crosscountry skiing and multi-day ski touring trips. This course w i l l also deal w i t h safe winter travel, winter survival shelters, and leadership techniques. Tourism Management Co-op Contact: Judith Weiss, Divisional Assistant; Brian White or D o n Basham, Coordinators, phone 984-4960 Instructional Faculty D . B A S H A M , Coordinator, D M A T P D. B R O W N E , B A . , M . A . (UBC) G . F A N E , B.Sc., M . B . A . , R.I.A. G . H U G H E S , B.A.Sc. ( U . of T.), C G A W. INGLIS, B.A. Dip. Marketing R. M c B L A N E , B.Ed., M . E d . ( U . of Alberta) J. P E N D Y G R A S S E , B.Sc., Teacher's Cert. (Manitoba), Tour. M g m t . Cert. (Capilano), D M A T P J. R O U S E , B.Sc. (Mt. A . ) , Tour. M g m t . Cert., (Capilano College), S M A T P V . T I M M O N S , Sr. Cert. Hospitality and Tourism A d m i n i s t r a t i o n (B.C.l.T.), B . A . M . A . V a n H O R N , B . E d . ( U . of A.), A C S M (Capilano College) B. W H I T E , B . A . , M . A . (SFU), Coordinator, D M A T P TOURISM MANAGEMENT CO-OP DIPLOMA PROGRAM Capilano College's accelerated T o u r i s m Management C o op program is on the leading edge of tourism education i n B.C. O u r mission is to train students in the management skills necessary for the successful operation of travel generators, i n c l u d i n g resorts, adventure tourism, attractions, conferences, and special events. Marketing, research and entrepreneurial skills in tourism business are also emphasized. Recognition of our curriculum by the Pacific R i m Institute of T o u r i s m provides access to industry certification. Intensive technical skills courses, contact w i t h the industry, and a four and a half month supervised co-op work term encourages a professional attitude to the industry. The program's pragmatic business approach combined w i t h creative teaching promises a rewarding educational investment for students. The program should appeal to dynamic, outgoing individuals w i t h previous post-secondary education experience and a successful w o r k background i n tourism or a related field. The program is also designed for people considering a career shift, since the accelerated co-op model is cost-effective and requires m i n i m a l time out of the workforce. C a p i l a n o College T o u r i s m Management offers top quality faculty, a beautiful campus, and an exciting learning environment. If y o u are actively considering a career in tourism and think y o u have what it takes to be successful as a professional in the field, give us a call! Admission Requirements In order to be considered, applicants should be high school graduates, at least 19 years old w i t h good reading and w r i t i n g skills, and some work experience. Previous post-secondary education is a definite asset. Phone the T o u r i s m Department for dates of the information meetings and follow-up interviews. Admission Procedure Applications for admission must be submitted to the office of the Registrar, together w i t h official transcripts and any other pertinent documents. Please bring the following documentation to your interview: • A t least two letters of reference • Secondary school a n d / o r post-secondary education transcripts • A resume of past experiences Program Content T e r m 1 (January to A p r i l ) Credits T O U R 100 T o u r i s m C o o p Preparation 1.5 T O U R 111 T o u r i s m : A n Industry Perspective 3.0 T O U R 112 Tourism Marketing 3.0 T O U R 114 Organizational Behaviour in T o u r i s m 3.0 T O U R 118 Special Events as Tourism Generators 3.0 T O U R 120 A d v e n t u r e and Eco-Tourism 3.0 T O U R 129 C o m p u t e r Applications in T o u r i s m I 3TJ T O T A L 19.5 T e r m 2 (May to September) T O U R 130 Co-op Work Term TOTAL 10.5 T e r m 3 (September to December) T O U R 116 Financial P l a n n i n g in Tourism I 3.0 T O U R 123 Tourism Advertising 3.0 T O U R 127 T o u r i s m Resource and C o m m u n i t y Planning 3.0 T O U R 131 T o u r i s m Product Development 3.0 T O U R 139 C o m p u t e r Applications In Tourism II 3J) T O T A L 15.0 T e r m 4 (January to M a r c h ) H u m a n Resource Management in T O U R 113 3.0 Tourism 3.0 Financial P l a n n i n g i n Tourism II T O U R 125 3.0 T o u r i s m Research & Consultancy T O U R 231 International T o u r i s m T O U R 232 3.0 Policy & P l a n n i n g 3XJ Cross C u l t u r a l T o u r i s m T O U R 233 T O T A L 15.0 P R O G R A M T O T A L 60.0 Career/Vocational - Tourism 239 Course Descriptions Tourism 100 (1.5) Tourism Co-op Preparation (1-5,.5)(S) Tourism 118 (3.0) Special Events as Tourism Generators (3.0,1) (S) This course w i l l include a general overview of the co-op w o r k experience. The specific areas covered w i l l be goal setting, skills analysis, researching sectors and employers, job search techniques and preparation of resume, cover letter and thank y o u letter. Assistance w i l l be given i n job search b y faculty. This course w i l l cover all aspects of event management and event marketing: choosing the right event, designing a business (event) plan, event/cause marketing, sponsor proposals, managing the pre-event, event day(s) management, and post event activities. Students w i l l design a new special event and prepare a business p l a n for that event. The course w i l l also include case studies from existing events. Tourism 111 (3.0) Tourism: An Industry Perspective Tourism 120 (3.0) Adventure and Eco-Tourism (3.0,1) (S) (3.0,1) (S) A n introduction to the key concepts, language, and issues facing the tourism industry. Trends, market profiles and demographic factors, key industry sectors, tourism geography and key regional products i n B.C., tourism's role i n community development, social impacts of tourism, transportation, communication, and legal issues in tourism. A d v e n t u r e tourism products w i l l be examined; economic impact of the industry, selling adventure tourism, identifying markets, packaging, legal liability, organization and structure of the industry, government's role i n area and activity management, resource management issues, protecting resource areas, eco-tourism issues, land use planning, and product opportunities. Tourism 112 Tourism Marketing Tourism 123 (3.0) Tourism Advertising (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) The objectives of this course are to examine the existing tourism marketing system i n Canada; to develop the student's understanding of C a n a d i a n tourism marketing and the basics of consumer marketing; and to enable the students to relate to current aspects of tourism business and h o w they affect Canadian tourism marketing. Tourism 113 (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) Human Resource Management in Tourism H u m a n resource issues, job analysis, recruitment, interviewing, orientation, training and development, performance management, legislation, and labour-management relations. Tourism 114 (3.0) Organizational Behaviour in Tourism (3.0,1) (S) Individual behaviour, interpersonal communication skills, decision-making, group dynamics and team building, service management, conflict resolution, negotiation, and giving performance feedback. Tourism 116 (3.0) Financial Planning in Tourism I (3.0,1) (F) Financial control methods, inventory control, labour costs and controls, employee scheduling, payroll, loss prevention, reporting, accounting applications, financial statements, cash/credit transactions, basic financial planning. Career/Vocational - Tourism 240 (3.0,1) (F) This course is designed to give the student an understanding of the major aspects of C a n a d i a n tourism advertising. The course w i l l cover advertising planning, creative strategies and execution as w e l l as developing "real life" advertising campaigns. Tourism 125 (3.0) Financial Planning in Tourism II (3.0,1) (S) Designing a business plan, financial planning techniques, financial goal setting for tourism managers. Tourism 127 (3.0) (3.0,1) (F) Tourism Resource and Community Planning A n overview of tourism resource management issues and approaches, including heritage and cultural tourism planning, tourism resource inventory and planning methods i n c l u d i n g G I S (Geographical Information System) techniques, community tourism planning, and sustainability issues i n tourism. Tourism 129 (3.0) Computer Applications in Tourism I (3.0,1) (S) A n introduction to basic concepts of hardware, software, and applications of microcomputers i n business. Students w i l l gain hands-on experience w i t h w o r d processing, spreadsheet, and operating system software. Tourism 130 (10.5) Tourism Co-op Work Term (10.5,0) (Su) The co-op work term is designed to apply classroom theory and skills through work experience. Students will spend four and one-half months in an acceptable industry placement and will be responsible to a specific industry supervisor. The goal is to develop high calibre graduates who are better able to assume productive jobs. Summer work placements are sought by the students, with faculty co-op advisors assisting them to find placement. Students apply for positions and are selected by the employees and the College. policy analysis, comparative tourism development case studies, regional tourism policy and planning. Role of development agencies and tourism organizations. Tourism 233 (3) Cross-Cultural Tourism (3.0,1) (S) An overview of cross-cultural issues in tourism. The nature of prejudice and racism is examined as are effective communication skills and behaviours in selected cultures: gender relationships, business and social customs, body language, negotiation skills and others. Students' work performance and potential will be evaluated by the faculty and industry supervisor. Upon completion of the co-op work term, each student will make a major presentation to the class and faculty at a department retreat. Tourism 131 (3) Tourism Product Development (3.0,1) (F) With today's intense global competition for tourists combined with the subject and tangible nature of the tourism experience, operations and destinations are now compelled to analytically and methodically develop appropriate tourism products. This course will examine how to effectively develop, package and position tourism products for success in the market place. Tourism 139 (3.0) Computer Applications in Tourism II (3.0,1 MF) This course is a continuation of Tourism 129, providing further uses of microcomputers in business. Students will gain hands-on experience with graphical user interface, presentation graphics, and database management software. Tourism 231 (4.5) Tourism Research and Consultancy (3.0,1) (S) The role and function of consultants in tourism will be examined including the nature of the consulting business, business ethics, politics of consulting, business planning, staffing, marketing your services, consultant resumes, nature of competition, types of clients and client expectations. Analyzing and responding to requests for proposals, researching RFPs and writing proposals. (3.0,1) (S) Tourism 232 (3) International Tourism Policy and Planning A geographical overview of the Asia-Pacific region including demographics, physiography, environmental issues, tourism destinations and travel patterns. A review of politics in tourism and Asia-Pacific region national tourism policies. Methodology and approach to tourism Career/Vocational - Tourism 241 242 ? i, : • '•- >V :y*:V-. CL Asia Pacific Management Co-op ASIA PACIFIC MANAGEMENT COOPERATIVE PROGRAM Contact: Scott M a c l e o d , 984-4981, Fax 984-4992 Instructional Faculty Robert B A G S H A W , B. C o m m . , ( U B C ) , M . A . (Colorado), C o o p Coordinator A n d r e w B U T T , B . A . , L L . B . , (South Africa), International Business Francis K I E M , B.B.A., Ph.D. E d . (Jakarta), Indonesian Language H a i L E , B.A., (SFU), Vietnamese Language Barbara H A N K I N , B . A . ( U . B . C ) , M . A . ( W A S H . ) Directed Studies Scott M a c L E O D , B.A., M . A . (UBC), P h . D . i n progress, Economic Geography, Program Coordinator Louise M A Y , B . A . (Brock), M . A . , P h . D . (UBC), A s i a Pacific Perspectives Dameria N A I N G G O L A N , B . A . (Jakarta), M . A . (East Java), Indonesian Language Billie N G , B . A . (Int'l Christian U n i v . T o k y o ) , M . A . (London), Teach. Cert. G r a d . Master ( H o n g Kong), Language Teach. Cert. (UBC), Chinese Language, Cross Cultural Issues N o r i k o O M A E , B.A., M . A . , Teaching Cert., (Osaka U . of Foreign Studies), Japanese Language Jim P L A C Z E K , B.A.(Windsor), M . A . (UBC), P h . D (UBC) Thai Language Pontip P L A C Z E K , B . A . (Thammasat), Thai Language Charles PRIESTER, F C B A B.Comm.(Hons.), M . A . ( U B C ) , International Finance C a m e r o n S Y L V E S T E R , B . A . (Gonzaga), M . A . (NotreDame), Political Economy General Information This D i p l o m a Program has been developed to offer training to Canadians w h o are considering international careers. It is a joint-venture i n educational programming, bringing Canadian employers together w i t h students and the College to form a unique blend of experiential and academic training. This is a full-time p r o g r a m w h i c h offers an intensive c u r r i c u l u m designed to serve the student i n future international w o r k . Each student w i l l take the core courses i n Pacific and A s i a n Studies and International Business Trade and Finance. In addition, students w i l l choose an A s i a n language such as Japanese, Chinese (Mandarin), Indonesian or Thai. After nine months of study, eligible students w i l l complete a w o r k placement. T h i s co-op w o r k term w i l l normally be for twelve months. Students w i l l be evaluated by the College and the employer, and this w i l l become part of a student's record. Every effort w i l l be m a d e to secure co-op placements for students. Jobs w i l l be sought i n A s i a n countries and i n international C a n a d i a n organizations. The w o r k term w i l l terminate w i t h d e b r i e f ' ^ and re-entry sessions. Career targets of the ci rent class include areas such as Finance, International Marketing, Trade, T o u r i s m , Communications, H u m a n Resources, Development, Education, Planning, Journalism, U r b a n L a n d Development, Government and Non-Government organizations. Inquiries for application/information package should be directed to the A s i a Pacific Management Cooperative Program office, telephone 984-4981, F A X 984-4992. Admission Requirements Applications for the program are invited from: a) Those w h o have completed a degree i n Arts, Sciences or a professional area such as Business A d m i n i s t r a t i o n , Environmental Science, Agriculture, Engineering, Biotechnology, Forestry, or Computer Applications. b) Those w h o are currently employed and w h o are eligible for company sponsorship into this program. Sponsorship m a y come from a w i d e range of business and development organizations w h i c h have the c o m m o n factor of w a n t i n g their employees trained for international w o r k . The emphasis is on Canada's relationships w i t h P A C I H C R I M C O U N T R I E S and our potential to extend o u r network through trade, business, applied technology and development projects. * A d m i s s i o n m a x i m u m is 32 students per year. * Students are selected o n the basis of their academic record, relevant experience, a written submission and an interview. * Successful applicants w i l l have strong written, mathematical and inter-personal communication skills. * A p p l i c a n t s w h o demonstrate proficiency i n language acquisition and w h o have solid business experience w i l l have preference. The Program Course Descriptions Students w h o are interested i n a career i n the Pacific R i m w i l l follow an integrated program of study w h i c h i n cludes the historical, economic, political, cultural and business dynamics of the region. APMC 503 Co-op Preparation (3.0) (2,0,0) (F)(S) This course w i l l help students develop skills and an understanding for networking and w o r k i n g i n an A s i a n environment. Post-graduate Programs - Asia Pacific Management 245 APMC515 (.25) (0,0,2.5)(S) APMC 531 (2.25) Directed Studies International Finance II This twofold course allows students through directed research and a written paper to explore an area of special interest o r need. It also includes preparation for the final comprehensive exam. This course is a continuation of A P M C 518. APMC518 This course is a continuation of A P M C 520. (2.25) (3,0,0) (F) International Finance I (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Introduction to Business and Trade (2.25) (3,0,0) (S) Economic Geography II APMC 533 This series of courses w i l l a i m at p r o v i d i n g students w i t h an understanding of financial concepts and strategies that influence business i n the conduct of international commerce. APMC519 APMC 532 (3,0,0) (S) (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) International Business and Trade This course w i l l provide students w i t h a broad understanding of international marketing theories and their practical applications. APMC 534 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) International Management II This course provides students w i t h an understanding of the basic concepts i n v o l v e d i n marketing products and services as w e l l as w i t h a familiarity w i t h marketing terminology and the application of the "marketing concept". This course is a continuation of A P M C 525 but places a greater emphasis o n guest presentations b y senior executives whose companies actually are operating i n the A s i a Pacific Region. APMC 520 (2.25) Economic Geography 1 APMC 540 (5.25) Asia Pacific Perspectives I (3,0,0) (F) This course w i l l introduce students to current concepts i n socio-economic analysis and w i l l emphasize the spatial aspects of economic processes. Emphasis is on the d y n a m i s m of economic change and how this change interacts w i t h local social, political and environmental matrices. The course w i l l be issue oriented. There w i l l be a m i x of theoretical background, actual case studies, a n d training i n analytical skills. APMC 524 (1.5) Business Development Projects (2,0,2) (S) (3,0,0) (F) This course provides students w i t h a broad understanding of the Management Process and Functions as w e l l as w i t h the interrelatedness of these topics with H u m a n Behaviour i n Organizations. Students also study the application of this learning i n a n international context particularly w i t h respect to the A s i a Pacific region Post-graduate Programs - Asia Pacific Management 246 This series of courses is designed to introduce students to the historical and current social, political and cultural patterns of the A s i a Pacific region. Students w i l l review and develop skills i n cross-cultural communication. They w i l l also develop skills i n regional analysis that w i l l help them understand relationships w i t h i n A s i a and w i t h the West. APMC 541 (3.75) Asia Pacific Perspectives II (4,0,0) (S) This course is a continuation of A P M C 540. These are supervised team projects w o r k i n g w i t h Vancouver-based companies. Business plans and projects are prepared for A s i a n opportunities chosen i n conjunction w i t h the companies. APMC 525 (2.25) International Management (7,0,0) (F) APMC 545 (.75) International Case Studies (2,0,0) (S) This course w i l l be concerned w i t h the analysis of international business situations i n multi-cultural environments, usually A s i a n . (Not offered each year) APMC 550 (3) (2,0,0) (S) Cross Cultural Communication This course w i l l develop an understanding of the process of communication. Appreciation of the fact that c o m m u nication is significantly affected b y the culture, personality and experience of the communicator. This course w i l l also develop a n understanding of the students' o w n culture and it effects on behavior. APMC 560 (0) (4,0,0) (F) (S) Japanese 281 (3) (4,0.0) (S) Workshops Prerequisite: Japanese 280 This series allows students to "customize" the program by selecting from a range of courses w h i c h offer an opportunity to develop special skills or to study special issues concerning A s i a . This course is a continuation of Japanese 280. Lhinese 110 (3) (4,1,0) (F) Thai 100/101 (3) Please see listing i n the A c a d e m i c section of the Calendar. These courses are also open to A P M C P students. Intensive Chinese I (Mandarin) * Vietnamese 110 This course introduces students to the basics of M a n d a r i n . This course is designed to m a x i m i z e the acquisition of oral fluency and comprehension. The course w i l l lay the foundation for further understanding and study i n an immersion environment. This course introduces students to the basics of Vietnamese conversation, culture and language structure. Vietnamese 111 (3) (3) (4,0.0) (F) (4,0.0) (S) Prerequisite: Vietnamese 110 Chinese 111 (3) (4,1,0) (S) This course is a continuation of Vietnamese 110. Intensive Chinese II (Mandarin) * Prerequisite: Chinese 100 or 110 This course is a continuation of Chinese 110. Students w i l l develop communicative competence around themes and situations such as work, family, food, interests, m a k i n g appointments, asking for directions etc. Indonesian 110 (3) * Chinese 100 and 101 and Japanese 100 and 101 are acceptable as equivalents for Chinese 110 and 111 and Japanese 110 and 111 for the A s i a Pacific Management C o o p P r o g r a m only. (4,1,0) (F) Intensive Indonesian I This course develops basic oral and reading skills i n bahasa Indonesia through the study of grammar, vocabulary and culture. Indonesian 111 (3) (4,1,0) (S) Intensive Indonesian II Prerequisite: Indonesian 110 This course is a continuation of Indonesian 110. Japanese 110 (3) (4,1,0) (F) Intensive Japanese I * This course develops basic oral and written communicativf skills i n Japanese, through the study of vocabulary, gr; mmar, culture and introduction to w o r d processing. Japanese 111 (3) (4,1,0) (S) Intensive Japanese II * Prerequisite: Japanese 110 This course is a continuation of Japanese 110. Japanese 280 (3) (4,0.0) (F) Prerequisite: Equivalent of "Level Three" (Advanced Beginners Level) of the Japanese Proficiency Test or higher a n d the instructor's permission. A n intermediate course designed to provide students w i t h functional Japanese communication skills. Post-graduate Programs - Asia Pacific Management 247 Environmental Science ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE POST BACCALAUREATE DIPLOMA Coordinators V . M . T R O U P , B.Sc. (Hons.) (McMaster), M.Sc. (UBC) L . K . W A D E , B.Sc., M.Sc. (UBC), Ph.D. ( A . N . U . ) (on leave) Instructional Faculty M . B A T T E R S B Y , B . A . ( N Y U ) , P h D . (UBC) J.D. B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c (UBC), Ph.D. (Waterloo) K . A . J . D A V I D S O N , B . A . (Winnipeg), M . A . (Manitoba) S. G R O V E S , A . B . (Radcliffe), Ph.D. (UBC) L . H . N I K L , B . S c , M.Sc. (SFU) J. H . N O R I E , B . A . S c (UBC), M.Env.Des. (Calgary) R. K . P A I S L E Y , B . S c (UBC), M . S c (Washington), J.D. (California), L L . M . ( L o n d o n School of Economics) A . R O J A S , M . A . (York), Ph.D. (York) D . F. S H E R A T O N , B.A.Sc. P h . D . (UBC) S. Y E E , B.Sc. (UBC) A . W H I T E H E A D , B.Sc. ( U V i c ) , M.Sc. (UBC) R. J. W O Z N O W , B . S c (Alberta), P h . D . (New Brunswick) General Information The D i p l o m a Program i n Environmental Science is intended for students w h o have already completed a degree i n science and w h o w i s h to acquire the k n o w l e d g e and practical skills necessary for dealing w i t h environmental issues and projects i n the w o r k place. This is a full year program designed to prepare students to accept leadership roles i n environmental problem solving through a combination of academic studies a n d field assignments. Areas of emphasis include applied ecology, toxicology, project management, environmental assessment, l a w , a n d ethics. C o m p l e t i o n of an in-depth impact assignment i n v o l v i n g w o r k placement or directed studies is also required. For complete details on this program, see Environmental Science i n the Academic section of this calendar. Post-graduate Programs - Environmental Science 248 Extension Programs and Courses EXTENSION PROGRAMS AND SERVICES Contact: 984-4901 Extension Courses The College offers a variety of cost recoverable courses and programs through its Extension Programs and Services Department. There are no prerequisites for admission to non-credit courses but occasionally a certain level of proficiency is recommended for admission. The majority of Extension offerings are an outgrowth of the College's academic and career/vocational programs whose faculties contribute to the h i g h level of instructional competence of the programs. Courses and programs are d r a w n from the areas of arts, music, social sciences, natural sciences, career development, business, computer science, personal development, fashion, media, and modern languages. Educational study tours are also available through Extension Programs. Extension courses are not listed i n the Calendar — they are advertised i n seasonal brochures distributed throughout the community, i n newspaper ads and b y direct mail. Community Music School Eldercollege Eldercollege is a year-round educational community where m e n a n d w o m e n , 55 a n d older, can enjoy daytime study groups i n a stimulating atmosphere and the companionship of peers. Eldercollege is a participatory program. Members of Eldercollege can lead study groups, serve on the Eldercollege A d v i s o r y Board a n d its committees, and be study group participants. T o maintain a high quality offering at a m i n i m a l cost, o u r activities are both planned and operated by our members. For further information on Extension Programs and Services phone 984-4901 (lower mainland), 892-5322 ( H o w e Sound), or 885-9310 (Sunshine Coast). (For Extension Programs a n d Services tuition fee policy, please see fees section.) CANADIAN JOB STRATEGIES Various programs funded b y Employment and Immigration Canada are available. T r a i n i n g allowances m a y be provided to students not receiving unemployment insurance benefits and may continue for students o n employment insurance. Other E.I.C.-funded programs are also available i n Sechelt The C a p i l a n o College C o m m u n i t y M u s i c School offers group and private instruction for students of voice, theory, and a w i d e variety of instruments. Classes are held o n campus and i n other community locations. a n d Squamish. For information to prospective students Programs are listed i n the C o m m u n i t y M u s i c School calendar w h i c h is available annually i n June and i n the Extension Programs and Services Calendar published three times yearly. funding. and employers w i t h respect to job training under C a n a d i a n Job Strategies, call 984-4901. Note: These programs are offered subject to E.I.C. Contract Education Extension Programs and Services draws o n a w i d e range of educational resources to provide training for groups of any size i n all aspects of business and professional development. Co-sponsorship of Educational Activities Organizations and societies are encouraged to co-sponsor their educational activities w i t h Capilano College. The College can provide facilities, program design and administrative services and welcomes the opportunity to foster public understanding on social, business, artistic and technological issues. Non-Credit Programs and Courses 251 Career Choices CAREER CHOICES A Canadian Job Strategy Program funded on a year-toyear basis. Please check w i t h contact person. Contact: Terry M . Byrnes, Project Manager, R o o m M 102, Phone: 984-1711 INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY Terry M . B Y R N E S , M . A . (UVic) Ron D A M O N Casey D O R I N , M . S . W . (UBC) Priscilla S T A N B U R Y , B . A . (UBC) General Information The Career Choices Program is a project-based program for adults w i t h learning disabilities. This program w i l l prepare these adults to accept the responsibilities of independent l i v i n g , as well as the demands for competitive employment. The program w i l l also assist trainees to address social, emotional or disability issues w h i c h could act as barriers to employment. Admission Requirements Eligible participants must be: • unemployed • i n d i v i d u a l s w h o have a documented learning disability, or have experienced difficulties i n learning • i n d i v i d u a l s w h o are experiencing serious difficulties obtaining or maintaining employment • legally entitled to w o r k i n Canada • no longer required by law to attend school Entry is b y referral and interview: Class size w i l l be a m a x i m u m of 20 students. Appointments for interviews w i l l begin i n M a y of each year. The course is 38 weeks i n duration and usually begins i n late September, concluding i n June of the following year. Course Descriptions ACTP 010 Life Skills The components of this course w i l l p r o v i d e the student w i t h opportunities to examine, develop and maintain basic life skills w h i c h w i l l i m p r o v e h i s / h e r level of independent l i v i n g and success i n career opportunities. For a number of candidates i n Career Choices, this course w i l l complement the employment skills taught in other A . C . T . courses. Non-Credit Programs and Courses 252 ACTP 011 Employment Readiness Skills The objective of this course is to provide the student w i t h an opportunity to prepare for employment through methods and techniques w h i c h w i l l enhance the job search. The course w i l l focus on appropriate social and behavioural skills for the marketplace and w i l l include an emphasis o n personal growth through self-awareness and group dynamics. ACTP 012 Work Experience Practicum The practicum aims to provide w o r k experience over three practicums. These practicums w i l l be chosen i n career areas arrived at by mutual decision between placement instructor and students. The practicums are designed to complement the objectives of classroom w o r k and provide opportunities for immediate employment or future directives i n training. Electives Students w i l l have the opportunity to participate i n a variety of options designed to expand their opportunities and experiences. These options include: • • • • • Field T r i p C o m p u t e r Training W C B Workshops First A i d Training Presentations b y Apprenticeship Boards and Representatives of Industry • W H M I S Training • Volunteering Achievement Resource Centre ACHIEVEMENT RESOURCE CENTRE WORKSHOPS C o n t a c t : 984-4945 The Achievement Resource Centre ( A R C ) offers free workshops on learning skills for college success. Schedule and details are published separately each term. Workshop topics include: Concentration Mind Mapping Learning from Texts Improving Comprehension M e m o r y Training Notetaking Reading Efficiency Researching a Term Assignment Study Tips Test T a k i n g Strategies Time Management Introduction to Word Processing For further information, call 984-4945 or come to the Achievement Resource Centre i n Library b u i l d i n g . Non-Credit Programs and Courses 253 254 / Governance and Administration Capilano College Board Administration The Board of the College, established in conformity w i t h the College and Institute A c t , consists of 14 members, including 10 appointed by the Minister of Skills, Training and Labour, and four elected from the College community. These members serve as trustees of the College. D a v i d Brewer, R.C.P.P.; Director of Supply & Services Randi D u k e , B . A . , M . A . ; Executive Director of College Relations Stephanie Forsyth, B . A . , M . E d . ; Dean, Career/Vocational Programs Donna Gallagher, Manager of Financial Systems Steve Gallagher, B.A.; Manager, Computer Support Services Franklin C . Gelin, B . A . , M . A . , Ph.D.; Vice-President, Academic Studies W i l l i a m Gibson, B.A., Ph.D., D i p . E d ; Dean, Academic Studies Geoff Holter, B. A . , M . A . ; Director of Employee Relations K e n Hughes, Director of Buildings & Grounds Joseph Iacobellis, B.P.E., M . P . E . ; Manager, Athletics and Recreation Marie Jessup, C . G . A . ; Vice President, Finance, and Bursar; Board Secretariat L y n n Jest, M . E d . ; Director of Resource Development Louise K r o h n , M . A . E d , B.Ed.; Director of Extension Programs & Contract Services Dianna L . Larsen, B.A., M . A . ; Registrar Greg F. Lee, B . S c , M . S c , Ph.D.; President Carol McCandless, B.A., M . A . ; A c t i n g Dean, Academic Studies Marleen M o r r i s , B . A . ; Director, Public Relations A l a n N g , B . S c , C . G . A . ; Comptroller John Potts, B . A . , M . P . A . ; Dean, Career/Vocational Programs Barb Robertson, B.Ed.; Associate Registrar Ian Robertson, A c t i n g Director of Buildings & Grounds C i n d y Rogers, Manager of Personnel Services A l a n P . D . Smith, B.A., M . A . ; Director of Planning & Institutional Research John Waters, B . A . (Hons.), M . A . ; Dean, Academic Studies Frieda Wiebe, B . A . (Hons.), M . L . S . , M . B . A . ; College Librarian Maureen Witney, B.A., M.L.S.; A c t i n g College Librarian The Board is responsible for governing the College, and i n that capacity determines the policy by w h i c h the College operates and reviews the performance of the College and its component parts. Traditionally, the Board meets monthly to fulfill its statutory responsibilities and to conduct its general business. Capilano College Board: Robin W i l s o n , Chair Jack M c K e o w n , Vice-Chair Paddi A r t h u r M a r k Battersby Dominic Brooks Linda Carney Bob C u r r y Laraine H a m i l t o n E m m i e Leung C a l l u m Mackenzie Peter Meredith John Potts A r t h u r Tinker Ernie Tjensvold The Capilano College Board also includes one ex officio member d r a w n from the administrative group at the College. The representative from this constituency is John Potts. Governance and Administration 257 258 A c ACADEMIC POLICIES 29 ACADEMIC SCHEDULE 10 ACADEMIC STUDIES/UNIVERSITY TRANSFER 73 ACCELERATED BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DIPLOMA 189 ACCESS TO INFORMATION (Freedom of Information & Privacy Protection Act) 24 ACCOUNTING ASSISTANT PROGRAM 171 ACCOUNTING SUPPORT PROGRAM 173 ACHIEVEMENT RESOURCE CENTRE (ARC) North Vancouver, Sechelt, Squamish 34 Non-Credit Programs & Courses 62,253 ADDRESSES & PHONE NUMBERS OF CAMPUSES 1 ADMINISTRATION 257 ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANT PROGRAM 171 ADMISSION 12 ADULT BASIC EDUCATION/ FOUNDATIONS 63 ADVANCED BUSINESS DIPLOMA... 187 ADVANCED PLACEMENT 13 ADVISING CENTRE & HOTLINE 34 ALTERNATIVE CAREER TRAINING.. 67 ANTHROPOLOGY 78 APPEAL OF GRADES 29 APPLIED BUSINESS TECHNOLOGY 170 APPLIED INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 180 ART HISTORY 94 ART INSTITUTE 89 ASIA PACIFIC MANAGEMENT CO-OP PROGRAM 245 ASSOCIATE DEGREES 25 ATHLETICS & RECREATION 35 ATTENDANCE 23 AUDIO-VISUAL SERVICES 40 AUDIT STATUS 23 AWARDS - See Financial Aid 44 CAFETERIAS 37 CANADIAN JOB STRATEGIES 251 CANADIAN STUDIES SPECIALTY 75 CANASEAN INTERNATIONAL PROJECT 38 "CAP CORNER" - See Student Store .... 40 CAPILANO COLLEGE FOUNDATION 46 CAPILANO COURIER 42 CAPILANO REVIEW 35 CAREER CHOICES 252 CAREER RESOURCE CENTRE 36 CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS General Information 169 CERTIFICATES AND DIPLOMAS 25 CHANGE OF NAME OR ADDRESS .... 20 CHANGING REGISTRATION STATUS 18 CHEATING & PLAGIARISM POLICY 32 CHEMISTRY 99 CHINESE 101 COLLEGE BOARD & ADMINISTRATION 257 COLLEGE FOUNDATION 46 COMMERCE 102 COMMERCIAL ANIMATION 203 COMMUNICATIONS 205 COMMUNITY MUSIC SCHOOL 251 COMPUTING SCIENCE 104 COPYRIGHT POLICY 32 COUNSELLING 35 CRAFTS INSTRUCTOR TRAINING .... 93 CREDIT FREE COURSES - See Extension Programs & Services 251 CRIMINOLOGY 106 B BACHELOR'S DEGREE BOOKSTORE B.C. STUDENT ASSISTANCE BIOLOGY BURSARIES BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION BUSINESS COMPUTING CO-OP BUSINESS CO-OP EDUCATION PROGRAM BUSINESS FUNDAMENTALS PROGRAM 188 35 44 96 45 185 190 194 172 F FACULTY -See specific programs/courses FEES 21 FINANCIAL AID & AWARDS 44 FIRST AID AND HEALTH 37 FIRST NATIONS PROGRAMS AND SERVICES 37 FISHERIES SCIENCE 212 FITNESS & RECREATION 35,42 FOOD & BEVERAGE SERVICE 37 FREEDOM OF INFORMATION & PRIVACY PROTECTION ACT 24 FRENCH 116 G GEOGRAPHY 117 GEOLOGY 119 GERMAN 120 GRADES 29 GRADE POINT AVERAGE 29 GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS 26 GRAPHIC DESIGN & ILLUSTRATION 79 H D DAYCARE DEAN'S LIST DIPLOMA AND CERTIFICATE REQUIREMENTS DIPLOMA PROGRAM DISABILITY SUPPORT SERVICES DISTANCE EDUCATION Open Learning Agency Knowledge Network DROPPING COURSES ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE 114,248 EQUIVALENCE, EXEMPTION, SUBSTITUTION, TRANSFER CREDIT 24 ETHNIC & CROSS CULTURAL RELATIONS PROGRAM 76 EVENING CERTIFICATE PROGRAM 192 EVENT MANAGEMENT CERTIFICATE 193 EXAMINATION PERIOD 24 EXEMPTION STANDING 169 EXTENSION PROGRAMS AND SERVICES 251 36 47 25 186 36 37 37 18 E EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE & EDUCATION 207 ECONOMICS 107 ELDERCOLLEGE 251 ENGINEERING 108 ENGLISH 110 ENGLISH AS A SECOND LANGUAGE 68 ENGLISH DIAGNOSTIC TEST (EDT).. 74 ENGLISH LANGUAGE REQUIREMENTS 14 HANDICAPPED STUDENT SERVICES See Disability Support Services 36 HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES PROGRAMS 213 HEALTH SERVICES & FIRST AID 37 HIGH SCHOOL EQUIVALENCY - See Adult Basic Education 63 HISTORY 121 HOLIDAYS IN 1995/96 10 HOME SUPPORT ATTENDANT PROGRAM 217 HORTICULTURE 219 HUMAN KINETICS 122 HUMANITIES DIVISION 73 I "I" GRADES IDENTIFICATION CARD INDONESIAN INSTRUCTIONAL SERVICES INTERNATIONAL BACCALAUREATE INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS PROGRAM 29 20 247 34 13 193 Index 261 INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION Application for Admission 38 International Exchanges 39 International Projects 39 CANASEAN Project 38 Asia Pacific Management Co-op. 38,245 INTERNATIONAL OFFICE 38 J JAPANESE JAZZ STUDIES JOB PLACEMENT - See Student Employment 124 124 42 K KINESIOLOGY 137 L LABOUR STUDIES PROGRAM 138 LANDSCAPE HORTICULTURE PROGRAM 219 LEGAL ASSISTANT PROGRAM 221 LEGAL SECRETARIAL PROGRAM ... 175 LIBRARY North Vancouver, Sechelt, ' Squamish 39 LOANS - See Financial Aid 44 LOCAL GOVERNMENT ADMINISTRATION PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATE 193 LOST AND FOUND 40 M MATHEMATICS 143 MATH LEARNING CENTRE 34,75 MEDIA PRODUCTION SERVICES 40 MEDIA RESOURCES PROGRAM 225 MEDICAL OFFICE ASSISTANT PROGRAM 178 MERIT LIST 47 MISSION AND VALUES 9 MUSIC THERAPY, BACHELOR OF... 230 MUSIC TRANSFER, BACHELOR OF . 147 NEWSPAPER, STUDENT NON-CREDIT PROGRAMS NORTH VANCOUVER CAMPUS Address & Phone 42 251 1 0 OFFICE ASSISTANT E.S.L. PROGRAM 172 OFFICE TECHNOLOGY PROGRAM . 170 OUTDOOR RECREATION MANAGEMENT PROGRAM 234 Wilderness Leadership 237 Index 262 P T PARKING 41 PERSONAL ASSISTANT WORKING FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES 215 PHILOSOPHY 152 PHYSICAL EDUCATION - See Human Kinetics 122 PHYSICS 154 PLAGIARISM & CHEATING POLICY. 32 POLICIES & PROCEDURES 23,29 POLITICAL STUDIES 156 POST-GRADUATE PROGRAMS 245 PREPARATORY PROGRAMS 61 PROFESSIONAL ACCOUNTING TRANSFER PACKAGE 191 PSYCHOLOGY 158 PURE & APPLIED SCIENCE DIVISION 73,76 TEXTILE ARTS ; THAI THEATRE TOEFL TOURISM MANAGEMENT PROGRAM TOWING TRANSER TO AND FROM OTHER INSTITUTIONS: Academic Career TUITION - See Fees 90 162 163 14 239 41 73 169 21 u UNIVERSITY TRANSFER/ACADEMIC PROGRAMS 73 V R READMISSION RECORDS, STUDENT RECREATION & FITNESS REFUND OF FEES REGISTRAR, OFFICE OF THE REGISTRATION REPEATING A COURSE RESIDENT CARE ATTENDANT PROGRAM RETAIL MARKETING CO-OP PROGRAM 12 24 35,42 22 40 17 30 213 191 s SCHOLARSHIPS SCHOLASTIC AWARDS SCIENCE: General information SECHELT CAMPUS ADDRESS & P H O N E NUMBER 45 47 76 1 SECURITY 42 SELF STUDY COURSES 75 SENIOR CITIZEN FEE WAIVERS 21 SERVICES 34 SEXUAL HARASSMENT POLICY 32 SOCIAL SCIENCES DIVISION 73 SOCIOLOGY 160 SPANISH 161 SPORTS - See Athletics 35 SPORTSPLEX & FITNESS CENTRE 42 SQUAMISH CAMPUS ADDRESS & PHONE NUMBER 1 STUDENT ASSISTANCE 44 STUDENT EMPLOYMENT CENTRE ... 42 STUDENT IDENTIFICATION CARD... 20 STUDENT LOANS 44 STUDENT NEWSPAPER 42 STUDENT NUMBER 20 STUDENT RECORDS 24 STUDENT SERVICES 34 STUDENT STORE 43 STUDENT UNION 43 STUDIO ART 84 VISITORS VISUAL AND PERFORMING ARTS DIVISION 23 73 w WAIT LISTS 18 WILDERNESS LEADERSHIP PROGRAM 237 WITHDRAWING FROM A COURSE ... 18 WOMEN'S STUDIES 165 WRITING ACROSS THE CURRICULUM 75 WRITING CENTRE 34,74